Title: | Weighted Correlation Network Analysis |
---|---|
Description: | Functions necessary to perform Weighted Correlation Network Analysis on high-dimensional data as originally described in Horvath and Zhang (2005) <doi:10.2202/1544-6115.1128> and Langfelder and Horvath (2008) <doi:10.1186/1471-2105-9-559>. Includes functions for rudimentary data cleaning, construction of correlation networks, module identification, summarization, and relating of variables and modules to sample traits. Also includes a number of utility functions for data manipulation and visualization. |
Authors: | Peter Langfelder [aut, cre], Steve Horvath [aut], Chaochao Cai [aut], Jun Dong [aut], Jeremy Miller [aut], Lin Song [aut], Andy Yip [aut], Bin Zhang [aut] |
Maintainer: | Peter Langfelder <[email protected]> |
License: | GPL (>= 2) |
Version: | 1.73 |
Built: | 2024-11-05 06:16:02 UTC |
Source: | https://github.com/cran/WGCNA |
The function calculates various prediction accuracy statistics for predictions of binary or quantitative (continuous) responses. For binary classification, the function calculates the error rate, accuracy, sensitivity, specificity, positive predictive value, and other accuracy measures. For quantitative prediction, the function calculates correlation, R-squared, error measures, and the C-index.
accuracyMeasures( predicted, observed = NULL, type = c("auto", "binary", "quantitative"), levels = if (isTRUE(all.equal(dim(predicted), c(2,2)))) colnames(predicted) else if (is.factor(predicted)) sort(unique(c(as.character(predicted), as.character(observed)))) else sort(unique(c(observed, predicted))), negativeLevel = levels[2], positiveLevel = levels[1] )
accuracyMeasures( predicted, observed = NULL, type = c("auto", "binary", "quantitative"), levels = if (isTRUE(all.equal(dim(predicted), c(2,2)))) colnames(predicted) else if (is.factor(predicted)) sort(unique(c(as.character(predicted), as.character(observed)))) else sort(unique(c(observed, predicted))), negativeLevel = levels[2], positiveLevel = levels[1] )
predicted |
either a a 2x2 confusion matrix (table) whose entries contain non-negative
integers, or a vector of predicted values. Predicted values can be binary or quantitative (see |
observed |
if |
type |
character string specifying the type of the prediction problem (i.e., values in the
|
levels |
a 2-element vector specifying the two levels of binary variables. Only used if |
negativeLevel |
the binary value (level) that corresponds to the negative outcome. Note that the
default is the second of the sorted levels (for example, if levels are 1,2, the default negative level is
2). Only used if |
positiveLevel |
the binary value (level) that corresponds to the positive outcome. Note that the
default is the second of the sorted levels (for example, if levels are 1,2, the default negative level is
2). Only used if |
The rows of the 2x2 table tab must correspond to a test (or predicted) outcome and the columns to a true outcome ("gold standard"). A table that relates a predicted outcome to a true test outcome is also known as confusion matrix. Warning: To correctly calculate sensitivity and specificity, the positive and negative outcome must be properly specified so they can be matched to the appropriate rows and columns in the confusion table.
Interchanging the negative and positive levels swaps the estimates of the sensitivity and specificity
but has no effect on the error rate or
accuracy. Specifically, denote by pos
the index of the positive level in the confusion table, and by
neg
th eindex of the negative level in the confusion table.
The function then defines number of true positives=TP=tab[pos, pos], no.false positives
=FP=tab[pos, neg], no.false negatives=FN=tab[neg, pos], no.true negatives=TN=tab[neg, neg].
Then Specificity= TN/(FP+TN)
Sensitivity= TP/(TP+FN) NegativePredictiveValue= TN/(FN + TN) PositivePredictiveValue= TP/(TP + FP)
FalsePositiveRate = 1-Specificity FalseNegativeRate = 1-Sensitivity Power = Sensitivity
LikelihoodRatioPositive = Sensitivity / (1-Specificity) LikelihoodRatioNegative =
(1-Sensitivity)/Specificity. The naive error rate is the error rate of a constant (naive) predictor that
assigns the same outcome to all samples. The prediction of the naive predictor equals the most frequenly
observed outcome. Example: Assume you want to predict disease status and 70 percent of the observed samples
have the disease. Then the naive predictor has an error rate of 30 percent (since it only misclassifies 30
percent of the healthy individuals).
Data frame with two columns:
Measure |
this column contais character strings that specify name of the accuracy measure. |
Value |
this column contains the numeric estimates of the corresponding accuracy measures. |
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sensitivity_and_specificity
m=100 trueOutcome=sample( c(1,2),m,replace=TRUE) predictedOutcome=trueOutcome # now we noise half of the entries of the predicted outcome predictedOutcome[ 1:(m/2)] =sample(predictedOutcome[ 1:(m/2)] ) tab=table(predictedOutcome, trueOutcome) accuracyMeasures(tab) # Same result: accuracyMeasures(predictedOutcome, trueOutcome)
m=100 trueOutcome=sample( c(1,2),m,replace=TRUE) predictedOutcome=trueOutcome # now we noise half of the entries of the predicted outcome predictedOutcome[ 1:(m/2)] =sample(predictedOutcome[ 1:(m/2)] ) tab=table(predictedOutcome, trueOutcome) accuracyMeasures(tab) # Same result: accuracyMeasures(predictedOutcome, trueOutcome)
This function adds error bars to an existing barplot.
addErrorBars(means, errors, two.side = FALSE)
addErrorBars(means, errors, two.side = FALSE)
means |
vector of means plotted in the barplot |
errors |
vector of standard errors (signle positive values) to be plotted. |
two.side |
should the error bars be two-sided? |
None.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
This function adds horizontal and/or vertical grid lines to an existing plot. The grid lines are aligned with tick marks.
addGrid( linesPerTick = NULL, linesPerTick.horiz = linesPerTick, linesPerTick.vert = linesPerTick, horiz = TRUE, vert = FALSE, col = "grey30", lty = 3)
addGrid( linesPerTick = NULL, linesPerTick.horiz = linesPerTick, linesPerTick.vert = linesPerTick, horiz = TRUE, vert = FALSE, col = "grey30", lty = 3)
linesPerTick |
Number of lines between successive tick marks (including the line on the tickmarks themselves). |
linesPerTick.horiz |
Number of horizontal lines between successive tick marks (including the line on the tickmarks themselves). |
linesPerTick.vert |
Number of vertical lines between successive tick marks (including the line on the tickmarks themselves). |
horiz |
Draw horizontal grid lines? |
vert |
Draw vertical tick lines? |
col |
Specifies color of the grid lines |
lty |
Specifies line type of grid lines. See |
If linesPerTick
is not specified, it is set to 5 if number of tick s is 5 or less, and it
is set to 2 if number of ticks is greater than 5.
The function does not work whenever logarithmic scales are in use.
Peter Langfelder
plot(c(1:10), c(1:10)) addGrid();
plot(c(1:10), c(1:10)) addGrid();
Adds vertical “guide lines” to a dendrogram plot.
addGuideLines(dendro, all = FALSE, count = 50, positions = NULL, col = "grey30", lty = 3, hang = 0)
addGuideLines(dendro, all = FALSE, count = 50, positions = NULL, col = "grey30", lty = 3, hang = 0)
dendro |
The dendrogram (see |
all |
Add a guide line to every object on the dendrogram? Useful if the number of objects is relatively low. |
count |
Number of guide lines to be plotted. The lines will be equidistantly spaced. |
positions |
Horizontal positions of the added guide lines. If given, overrides |
col |
Color of the guide lines |
lty |
Line type of the guide lines. See |
hang |
Fraction of the figure height that will separate top ends of guide lines and the merge heights of the corresponding objects. |
Peter Langfelder
Adds trait information to multi-set module eigengene structure.
addTraitToMEs(multiME, multiTraits)
addTraitToMEs(multiME, multiTraits)
multiME |
Module eigengenes in multi-set format. A vector of lists, one list per set. Each list
must contain an element named |
multiTraits |
Microarray sample trait(s) in multi-set format. A vector of lists, one list per
set. Each list
must contain an element named |
The function simply cbind
's the module eigengenes and traits for each set. The number of sets
and numbers of samples in each set must be consistent between multiMEs
and multiTraits
.
A multi-set structure analogous to the input: a vector of lists, one list per set. Each list will
contain a component data
with the merged eigengenes and traits for the corresponding set.
Peter Langfelder
Calculates (correlation or distance) network adjacency from given expression data or from a similarity.
adjacency(datExpr, selectCols = NULL, type = "unsigned", power = if (type=="distance") 1 else 6, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = list(use = "p"), weights = NULL, distFnc = "dist", distOptions = "method = 'euclidean'", weightArgNames = c("weights.x", "weights.y")) adjacency.fromSimilarity(similarity, type = "unsigned", power = if (type=="distance") 1 else 6)
adjacency(datExpr, selectCols = NULL, type = "unsigned", power = if (type=="distance") 1 else 6, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = list(use = "p"), weights = NULL, distFnc = "dist", distOptions = "method = 'euclidean'", weightArgNames = c("weights.x", "weights.y")) adjacency.fromSimilarity(similarity, type = "unsigned", power = if (type=="distance") 1 else 6)
datExpr |
data frame containing expression data. Columns correspond to genes and rows to samples. |
similarity |
a (signed) similarity matrix: square, symmetric matrix with entries between -1 and 1. |
selectCols |
for correlation networks only (see below); can be used to select genes whose adjacencies will be calculated. Should be either a numeric vector giving the indices of the genes to be used, or a boolean vector indicating which genes are to be used. |
type |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
power |
soft thresholding power. |
corFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression similarity for correlation networks. Defaults to Pearson correlation. Any function returning values between -1 and 1 can be used. |
corOptions |
character string or a list specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
distFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression
similarity for distance networks. Defaults to the function |
distOptions |
character string or a list specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
weightArgNames |
character vector of length 2 giving the names of the arguments to |
The argument type
determines whether a correlation (type
one of "unsigned"
,
"signed"
, "signed hybrid"
), or a distance network (type
equal "distance"
) will
be calculated. In correlation networks the adajcency is constructed from correlations (values between -1 and
1, with high numbers meaning high similarity). In distance networks, the adjacency is constructed from
distances (non-negative values, high values mean low similarity).
The function calculates the similarity of columns (genes) in datExpr
by calling the function
given in corFnc
(for correlation networks) or distFnc
(for distance networks),
transforms the similarity according to type
and raises it to power
,
resulting in a weighted network adjacency matrix. If selectCols
is given, the corFnc
function
will be given arguments (datExpr, datExpr[selectCols], ...)
; hence the returned adjacency will have
rows corresponding to all genes and columns corresponding to genes selected by selectCols
.
Correlation and distance are transformed as follows: for type = "unsigned"
, adjacency = |cor|^power;
for type = "signed"
, adjacency = (0.5 * (1+cor) )^power; for type = "signed hybrid"
, adjacency
= cor^power if cor>0 and 0 otherwise; and for type = "distance"
, adjacency =
(1-(dist/max(dist))^2)^power.
The function adjacency.fromSimilarity
inputs a similarity matrix, that is it skips the correlation
calculation step but is otherwise identical.
Adjacency matrix of dimensions ncol(datExpr)
times ncol(datExpr)
(or the same dimensions
as similarity
). If selectCols
was
given, the number of columns will be the length (if numeric) or sum (if boolean) of selectCols
.
When calculated from the datExpr
, the network is always calculated among the columns of
datExpr
irrespective of whether a correlation or a distance network is requested.
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis, Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology, Vol. 4 No. 1, Article 17
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
adjacency.polyReg calculates a network adjacency matrix by fitting polynomial regression models to pairs of variables (i.e. pairs of columns from
datExpr
). Each polynomial fit results in a model fitting index R.squared.
Thus, the n columns of datExpr
result in an n x n dimensional matrix whose entries contain R.squared
measures. This matrix is typically non-symmetric. To arrive at a (symmetric) adjacency matrix, one can
specify different symmetrization methods with symmetrizationMethod
.
adjacency.polyReg(datExpr, degree=3, symmetrizationMethod = "mean")
adjacency.polyReg(datExpr, degree=3, symmetrizationMethod = "mean")
datExpr |
data frame containing numeric variables. Example: Columns may correspond to genes and rows to observations (samples). |
degree |
the degree of the polynomial. Must be less than the number of unique points. |
symmetrizationMethod |
character string (eg "none", "min","max","mean") that specifies the method used to symmetrize the pairwise model fitting index matrix (see details). |
A network adjacency matrix is a symmetric matrix whose entries lie between 0 and 1. It is a special case of a similarity matrix.
Each variable (column of datExpr
) is regressed on every other variable, with each model fitting index recorded in a square matrix. Note that the model fitting index of regressing variable x and variable y is usually different from that of regressing y on x. From the polynomial regression model glm(y ~ poly(x,degree)) one can calculate the model fitting index R.squared(y,x).
R.squared(y,x) is a number between 0 and 1. The closer it is to 1, the better the polynomial describes the relationship between x and y and the more significant is the pairwise relationship between the 2 variables. One can also reverse the roles of x and y to arrive at a model fitting index R.squared(x,y). If degree
>1 then R.squared(x,y) is typically different from R.squared(y,x). Assume a set of n variables x1,...,xn (corresponding to the columns of datExpr
then one can define R.squared(xi,xj). The model fitting indices for the elements of an n x n dimensional matrix (R.squared(ij)).
symmetrizationMethod
implements the following symmetrization methods:
A.min(ij)=min(R.squared(ij),R.squared(ji)),
A.ave(ij)=(R.squared(ij)+R.squared(ji))/2,
A.max(ij)=max(R.squared(ij),R.squared(ji)).
An adjacency matrix of dimensions ncol(datExpr) times ncol(datExpr).
Lin Song, Steve Horvath
Song L, Langfelder P, Horvath S Avoiding mutual information based co-expression measures (to appear).
Horvath S (2011) Weighted Network Analysis. Applications in Genomics and Systems Biology. Springer Book. ISBN: 978-1-4419-8818-8
For more information about polynomial regression, please refer to functions
poly
and glm
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.max=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="max") A.max #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.mean=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="mean") A.mean # output the unsymmetrized pairwise model fitting indices R.squared R.squared=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="none") R.squared
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.max=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="max") A.max #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.mean=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="mean") A.mean # output the unsymmetrized pairwise model fitting indices R.squared R.squared=adjacency.polyReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="none") R.squared
adjacency.splineReg calculates a network adjacency matrix by fitting spline regression models to pairs of variables (i.e. pairs of columns from
datExpr
). Each spline regression model results in a fitting index R.squared. Thus, the n columns of
datExpr
result in an n x n dimensional matrix whose entries contain R.squared measures. This matrix
is typically non-symmetric. To arrive at a (symmetric) adjacency matrix, one can specify different
symmetrization methods with symmetrizationMethod
.
adjacency.splineReg( datExpr, df = 6-(nrow(datExpr)<100)-(nrow(datExpr)<30), symmetrizationMethod = "mean", ...)
adjacency.splineReg( datExpr, df = 6-(nrow(datExpr)<100)-(nrow(datExpr)<30), symmetrizationMethod = "mean", ...)
datExpr |
data frame containing numeric variables. Example: Columns may correspond to genes and rows to observations (samples). |
df |
degrees of freedom in generating natural cubic spline. The default is as follows: if nrow(datExpr)>100 use 6, if nrow(datExpr)>30 use 4, otherwise use 5. |
symmetrizationMethod |
character string (eg "none", "min","max","mean") that specifies the method used to symmetrize the pairwise model fitting index matrix (see details). |
... |
other arguments from function |
A network adjacency matrix is a symmetric matrix whose entries lie between 0 and 1. It is a special case of a similarity matrix.
Each variable (column of datExpr
) is regressed on every other variable, with each model fitting index recorded in a square matrix. Note that the model fitting index of regressing variable x and variable y is usually different from that of regressing y on x. From the spline regression model
glm( y ~ ns( x, df)) one can calculate the model fitting index R.squared(y,x).
R.squared(y,x) is a number between 0 and 1. The closer it is to 1, the better the spline regression model
describes the relationship between x and y and the more significant is the pairwise relationship between the
2 variables. One can also reverse the roles of x and y to arrive at a model fitting index R.squared(x,y).
R.squared(x,y) is typically different from R.squared(y,x). Assume a set of n variables x1,...,xn
(corresponding to the columns of datExpr
) then one can define R.squared(xi,xj). The model fitting
indices for the elements of an n x n dimensional matrix (R.squared(ij)).
symmetrizationMethod
implements the following symmetrization methods:
A.min(ij)=min(R.squared(ij),R.squared(ji)),
A.ave(ij)=(R.squared(ij)+R.squared(ji))/2,
A.max(ij)=max(R.squared(ij),R.squared(ji)).
For more information about natural cubic spline regression, please refer to functions "ns" and "glm".
An adjacency matrix of dimensions ncol(datExpr) times ncol(datExpr).
Lin Song, Steve Horvath
Song L, Langfelder P, Horvath S Avoiding mutual information based co-expression measures (to appear).
Horvath S (2011) Weighted Network Analysis. Applications in Genomics and Systems Biology. Springer Book. ISBN: 978-1-4419-8818-8
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.max=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="max") A.max #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.mean=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="mean") A.mean # output the unsymmetrized pairwise model fitting indices R.squared R.squared=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="none") R.squared
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.max=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="max") A.max #calculate adjacency by symmetrizing using max A.mean=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="mean") A.mean # output the unsymmetrized pairwise model fitting indices R.squared R.squared=adjacency.splineReg(datE, symmetrizationMethod="none") R.squared
AFcorMI computes a predicted weighted mutual information adjacency matrix from a given correlation matrix.
AFcorMI(r, m)
AFcorMI(r, m)
r |
a symmetric correlation matrix with values from -1 to 1. |
m |
number of observations from which the correlation was calcuated. |
This function is a one-to-one prediction when we consider correlation as unsigned. The prediction
corresponds to the AdjacencyUniversalVersion2
discussed in the help file for the function
mutualInfoAdjacency
. For more information
about the generation and features of the predicted mutual information adjacency, please refer to the function
mutualInfoAdjacency
.
A matrix with the same size as the input correlation matrix, containing the predicted mutual information of
type AdjacencyUniversalVersion2
.
Steve Horvath, Lin Song, Peter Langfelder
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate predicted AUV2 cor.data=cor(datE, use="p") AUV2=AFcorMI(r=cor.data, m=nrow(datE))
#Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate predicted AUV2 cor.data=cor(datE, use="p") AUV2=AFcorMI(r=cor.data, m=nrow(datE))
Multiplies genes (columns) in given expression data such that their correlation with given reference vector is non-negative.
alignExpr(datExpr, y = NULL)
alignExpr(datExpr, y = NULL)
datExpr |
expression data to be aligned. A data frame with columns corresponding to genes and rows to samples. |
y |
reference vector of length equal the number of samples (rows) in |
The function basically multiplies each column in datExpr
by the sign of its correlation with
y
. If y
is not given, the first column in datExpr
will be used as the reference
vector.
A data frame containing the aligned expression data, of the same dimensions as the input data frame.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
This function calculates an even splitting of a given number of tasks among a given number of workers (threads).
allocateJobs(nTasks, nWorkers)
allocateJobs(nTasks, nWorkers)
nTasks |
number of tasks to be divided |
nWorkers |
number of workers |
Tasks are labeled consecutively 1,2,..., nTasks
. The tasks are split in contiguous blocks as evenly
as possible.
A list with one component per worker giving the task indices to be worked on by each worker. If there are more workers than tasks, the tasks for the extra workers are 0-length numeric vectors.
Peter Langfelder
allocateJobs(10, 3); allocateJobs(2,4);
allocateJobs(10, 3); allocateJobs(2,4);
These functions allow and disable multi-threading for WGCNA calculations that can optionally be
multi-threaded, which includes all functions using cor
or bicor
functions.
allowWGCNAThreads(nThreads = NULL) enableWGCNAThreads(nThreads = NULL) disableWGCNAThreads() WGCNAnThreads()
allowWGCNAThreads(nThreads = NULL) enableWGCNAThreads(nThreads = NULL) disableWGCNAThreads() WGCNAnThreads()
nThreads |
Number of threads to allow. If not given, the number of processors online (as reported by system configuration) will be used. There appear to be some cases where the automatically-determined number is wrong; please check the output to see that the number of threads makes sense. Except for testing and/or torturing your system, the number of threads should be no more than the number of actual processors/cores. |
allowWGCNAThreads
enables parallel calculation within the compiled code in WGCNA, principally for
calculation of correlations in the presence of missing data. This function is now deprecated; use
enableWGCNAThreads
instead.
enableWGCNAThreads
enables parallel calculations within user-level R functions as well as within the
compiled code, and registers an
appropriate parallel calculation back-end for the operating system/platform.
disableWGCNAThreads
disables parallel processing.
WGCNAnThreads
returns the number of threads (parallel processes) that WGCNA is currently configured
to run with.
allowWGCNAThreads
, enableWGCNAThreads
, and disableWGCNAThreads
return the
maximum number of threads WGCNA calculations will be allowed to use.
Multi-threading within compiled code is not available on Windows; R code parallelization works on all platforms.
Peter Langfelder
This function performs gene screening based on a given trait and gene network properties
automaticNetworkScreening( datExpr, y, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(as.matrix(datExpr))/2), datME = NULL, getQValues = TRUE, ...)
automaticNetworkScreening( datExpr, y, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(as.matrix(datExpr))/2), datME = NULL, getQValues = TRUE, ...)
datExpr |
data frame containing the expression data, columns corresponding to genes and rows to samples |
y |
vector containing trait values for all samples in |
power |
soft thresholding power used in network construction |
networkType |
character string specifying network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations
of) |
detectCutHeight |
cut height of the gene hierarchical clustering dendrogram. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size to be used in module detection procedure. |
datME |
optional specification of module eigengenes. A data frame whose columns are the module eigengenes. If given, module analysis will not be performed. |
getQValues |
logical: should q-values (local FDR) be calculated? |
... |
other arguments to the module identification function |
Network screening is a method for identifying genes that have a high gene significance and are members
of important modules at the same time.
If datME
is given, the function calls networkScreening
with the default
parameters. If datME
is not given, module eigengenes are first calculated using network analysis
based on supplied parameters.
A list with the following components:
networkScreening |
a data frame containing results of the network screening procedure. See
|
datME |
calculated module eigengenes (or a copy of the input |
hubGeneSignificance |
hub gene significance for all calculated modules. See
|
Steve Horvath
networkScreening
, hubGeneSignificance
,
networkScreening
, cutreeDynamic
This function performs gene screening based on external gene significance and their network properties.
automaticNetworkScreeningGS( datExpr, GS, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(as.matrix(datExpr))/2), datME = NULL)
automaticNetworkScreeningGS( datExpr, GS, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(as.matrix(datExpr))/2), datME = NULL)
datExpr |
data frame containing the expression data, columns corresponding to genes and rows to samples |
GS |
vector containing gene significance for all genes given in |
power |
soft thresholding power used in network construction |
networkType |
character string specifying network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations
of) |
detectCutHeight |
cut height of the gene hierarchical clustering dendrogram. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size to be used in module detection procedure. |
datME |
optional specification of module eigengenes. A data frame whose columns are the module eigengenes. If given, module analysis will not be performed. |
Network screening is a method for identifying genes that have a high gene significance and are members
of important modules at the same time.
If datME
is given, the function calls networkScreeningGS
with the default
parameters. If datME
is not given, module eigengenes are first calculated using network analysis
based on supplied parameters.
A list with the following components:
networkScreening |
a data frame containing results of the network screening procedure. See
|
datME |
calculated module eigengenes (or a copy of the input |
hubGeneSignificance |
hub gene significance for all calculated modules. See
|
Steve Horvath
networkScreening
, hubGeneSignificance
,
networkScreening
, cutreeDynamic
BlockwiseData
objects.
These functions implement basic operations on BlockwiseData
objects.
Blockwise here means
that the data is too large to be loaded or processed in one piece and is therefore split into blocks that can
be handled one by one in a divide-and-conquer manner.
BD.actualFileNames(bwData) BD.nBlocks(bwData) BD.blockLengths(bwData) BD.getMetaData(bwData, blocks = NULL, simplify = TRUE) BD.getData(bwData, blocks = NULL, simplify = TRUE) BD.checkAndDeleteFiles(bwData)
BD.actualFileNames(bwData) BD.nBlocks(bwData) BD.blockLengths(bwData) BD.getMetaData(bwData, blocks = NULL, simplify = TRUE) BD.getData(bwData, blocks = NULL, simplify = TRUE) BD.checkAndDeleteFiles(bwData)
bwData |
A |
blocks |
Optional vector of integers specifying the blocks on which to execute the operation. |
simplify |
Logical: if the |
Several functions in this package use the concept of blockwise, or "divide-and-conquer", analysis. The BlockwiseData class is meant to hold the blockwise data, or all necessary information about blockwise data that is saved in disk files.
BD.actualFileNames |
returns a vector of character strings giving the file names in which the files are
saved, or |
BD.nBlocks |
returns the number of blocks in the input object. |
BD.blockLengths |
returns the block lengths (results of applying |
BD.getMetaData |
returns a list with one component per block. Each component is in turn a list
containing the stored meta-data for the corresponding block. If |
BD.getData |
returns a list with one component per block. Each component is in turn a list
containing the stored data for the corresponding block. If |
BD.checkAndDeleteFiles |
deletes the files referenced in the input |
The definition of BlockwiseData
and the functions here
should be considered experimental and may change in
the future.
Peter Langfelder
Definition of and other functions on BlockwiseData
:
newBlockwiseData
for creating new BlockwiseData
objects;
mergeBlockwiseData
for merging blockwise data structure;
addBlockToBlockwiseData
for adding a new block to existing blockwise data;
Calculate biweight midcorrelation efficiently for matrices.
bicor(x, y = NULL, robustX = TRUE, robustY = TRUE, use = "all.obs", maxPOutliers = 1, quick = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosine = FALSE, cosineX = cosine, cosineY = cosine, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
bicor(x, y = NULL, robustX = TRUE, robustY = TRUE, use = "all.obs", maxPOutliers = 1, quick = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosine = FALSE, cosineX = cosine, cosineY = cosine, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
x |
a vector or matrix-like numeric object |
y |
a vector or matrix-like numeric object |
robustX |
use robust calculation for |
robustY |
use robust calculation for |
use |
specifies handling of |
maxPOutliers |
specifies the maximum percentile of data that can be considered outliers on either
side of the median separately. For each side of the median, if
higher percentile than |
quick |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation should revert to Pearson when median
absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosine |
logical: calculate cosine biweight midcorrelation? Cosine bicorrelation is similar to standard bicorrelation but the median subtraction is not performed. |
cosineX |
logical: use the cosine calculation for |
cosineY |
logical: use the cosine calculation for |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. Note that this option does not affect what is usually the most expensive part of the calculation, namely the matrix multiplication. The matrix multiplication is carried out by BLAS routines provided by R; these can be sped up by installing a fast BLAS and making R use it. |
verbose |
if non-zero, the underlying C function will print some diagnostics. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function implements biweight midcorrelation calculation (see references). If y
is not
supplied, midcorrelation of columns of x
will be calculated; otherwise, the midcorrelation between
columns of x
and y
will be calculated. Thus, bicor(x)
is equivalent to
bicor(x,x)
but is more efficient.
The options robustX
, robustY
allow the user to revert the calculation to standard
correlation calculation. This is important, for example, if any of the variables is binary
(or, more generally, discrete) as in such cases the robust methods produce meaningless results.
If both robustX
, robustY
are set to FALSE
, the function calculates the
standard Pearson correlation (but is slower than the function cor
).
The argument quick
specifies the precision of handling of missing data in the correlation
calculations. Value quick = 0
will cause all
calculations to be executed accurately, which may be significantly slower than calculations without
missing data. Progressively higher values will speed up the
calculations but introduce progressively larger errors. Without missing data, all column meadians and
median absolute deviations (MADs) can be pre-calculated before the covariances are calculated. When
missing data are present,
exact calculations require the column medians and MADs to be calculated for each covariance. The
approximate calculation uses the pre-calculated median and MAD and simply ignores missing data in the
covariance calculation. If the number of missing data is high, the pre-calculated medians and MADs may
be very different from the actual ones, thus potentially introducing large errors.
The quick
value times the
number of rows specifies the maximum difference in the
number of missing entries for median and MAD calculations on the one hand and covariance on the other
hand that will be tolerated before a recalculation is triggered. The hope is that if only a few missing
data are treated approximately, the error introduced will be small but the potential speedup can be
significant.
The choice "all"
for pearsonFallback
is not fully implemented in the sense that there are
rare but possible cases in which the calculation is equivalent to "individual"
. This may happen if
the use
option is set to "pairwise.complete.obs"
and
the missing data are arranged such that each individual mad is non-zero, but when two columns are analyzed
together, the missing data from both columns may make a mad zero. In such a case, the calculation is treated
as Pearson, but other columns will be treated as bicor.
A matrix of biweight midcorrelations. Dimnames on the result are set appropriately.
Peter Langfelder
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software, 46(11), 1-17. https://www.jstatsoft.org/v46/i11/
"Introduction to Robust Estimation and Hypothesis Testing", Rand Wilcox, Academic Press, 1997.
"Data Analysis and Regression: A Second Course in Statistics", Mosteller and Tukey, Addison-Wesley, 1977, pp. 203-209.
A faster, one-step calculation of Student correlation p-values for multiple biweight midcorrelations, properly taking into account the actual number of observations.
bicorAndPvalue(x, y = NULL, use = "pairwise.complete.obs", alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), ...)
bicorAndPvalue(x, y = NULL, use = "pairwise.complete.obs", alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), ...)
x |
a vector or a matrix |
y |
a vector or a matrix. If |
use |
determines handling of missing data. See |
alternative |
specifies the alternative hypothesis and must be (a unique abbreviation of) one of
|
... |
other arguments to the function |
The function calculates the biweight midcorrelations of a matrix or of two matrices
and the corresponding Student p-values.
The output is not as full-featured as cor.test
, but can work with matrices as input.
A list with the following components, each a marix:
bicor |
the calculated correlations |
p |
the Student p-values corresponding to the calculated correlations |
Z |
Fisher transform of the calculated correlations |
t |
Student t statistics of the calculated correlations |
nObs |
Numbers of observations for the correlation, p-values etc. |
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software, 46(11), 1-17. https://www.jstatsoft.org/v46/i11/
bicor
for calculation of correlations only;
cor.test
for another function for significance test of correlations
# generate random data with non-zero correlation set.seed(1); a = rnorm(100); b = rnorm(100) + a; x = cbind(a, b); # Call the function and display all results bicorAndPvalue(x) # Set some components to NA x[c(1:4), 1] = NA corAndPvalue(x) # Note that changed number of observations.
# generate random data with non-zero correlation set.seed(1); a = rnorm(100); b = rnorm(100) + a; x = cbind(a, b); # Call the function and display all results bicorAndPvalue(x) # Set some components to NA x[c(1:4), 1] = NA corAndPvalue(x) # Note that changed number of observations.
Calculation of weights and the intermediate weight factors used in the calculation of biweight midcovariance and midcorrelation. The weights are designed such that outliers get smaller weights; the weights become zero for data points more than 9 median absolute deviations from the median.
bicovWeights( x, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 1, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.5625, defaultWeight = 0) bicovWeightFactors( x, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 1, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.5625, defaultFactor = NA) bicovWeightsFromFactors( u, defaultWeight = 0)
bicovWeights( x, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 1, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.5625, defaultWeight = 0) bicovWeightFactors( x, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 1, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.5625, defaultFactor = NA) bicovWeightsFromFactors( u, defaultWeight = 0)
x |
A vector or a two-dimensional array (matrix or data frame). If two-dimensional, the weights will be calculated separately on each column. |
u |
A vector or matrix of weight factors, usually calculated by |
pearsonFallback |
Logical: if the median absolute deviation is zero, should standard deviation be substituted? |
maxPOutliers |
Optional specification of the maximum proportion of outliers, i.e., data with weights equal to
|
outlierReferenceWeight |
A number between 0 and 1 specifying what is to be considered an outlier when calculating the proportion of outliers. |
defaultWeight |
Value used for weights that correspond to a finite |
defaultFactor |
Value used for factors that correspond to a finite |
These functions are based on Equations (1) and (3) in Langfelder and Horvath (2012). The weight factor is denoted
u
in that article.
Langfelder and Horvath (2012) also describe the Pearson fallback and maximum proportion of outliers in detail. For a full discussion of the biweight midcovariance and midcorrelation, see Wilcox (2005).
A vector or matrix of the same dimensions as the input x
giving the bisquare weights
(bicovWeights
and bicovWeightsFromFactors
) or the bisquare factors
(bicovWeightFactors
).
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering Journal of Statistical Software 46(11) 1-17 PMID: 23050260 PMCID: PMC3465711 Wilcox RR (2005). Introduction to Robust Estimation and Hypothesis Testing. 2nd edition. Academic Press, Section 9.3.8, page 399 as well as Section 3.12.1, page 83.
x = rnorm(100); x[1] = 10; plot(x, bicovWeights(x));
x = rnorm(100); x[1] = 10; plot(x, bicovWeights(x));
Given a data frame with (some) categorical columns, this function creates a set of indicator variables for the various possible sets of levels.
binarizeCategoricalColumns( data, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, levelOrder = NULL, minCount = 3, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePairwise = FALSE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, dropFirstLevelVsAll = TRUE, dropUninformative = TRUE, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", nameForAll = "all", levelSep = NULL, levelSep.pairwise = if (length(levelSep)==0) ".vs." else levelSep, levelSep.vsAll = if (length(levelSep)==0) (if (nameForAll=="") "" else ".vs.") else levelSep, checkNames = FALSE, includeLevelInformation = FALSE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.pairwise( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", levelSep = ".vs.", checkNames = FALSE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.forRegression( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", checkNames = TRUE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.forPlots( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", checkNames = TRUE)
binarizeCategoricalColumns( data, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, levelOrder = NULL, minCount = 3, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePairwise = FALSE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, dropFirstLevelVsAll = TRUE, dropUninformative = TRUE, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", nameForAll = "all", levelSep = NULL, levelSep.pairwise = if (length(levelSep)==0) ".vs." else levelSep, levelSep.vsAll = if (length(levelSep)==0) (if (nameForAll=="") "" else ".vs.") else levelSep, checkNames = FALSE, includeLevelInformation = FALSE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.pairwise( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", levelSep = ".vs.", checkNames = FALSE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.forRegression( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", checkNames = TRUE) binarizeCategoricalColumns.forPlots( data, maxOrdinalLevels = 3, convertColumns = NULL, considerColumns = NULL, levelOrder = NULL, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePrefix = TRUE, prefixSep = ".", checkNames = TRUE)
data |
A data frame. |
convertColumns |
Optional character vector giving the column names of the columns to be converted. See |
considerColumns |
Optional character vector giving the column names of columns that should be looked at and possibly converted.
If not given, all columns will be considered. See |
maxOrdinalLevels |
When |
levelOrder |
Optional list giving the ordering of levels (unique values) in each of the converted columns. Best used in
conjunction with |
minCount |
Levels of |
val1 |
Value for the lower level in binary comparisons. |
val2 |
Value for the higher level in binary comparisons. |
includePairwise |
Logical: should pairwise binary indicators be included? For each pair of levels, the indicator is |
includeLevelVsAll |
Logical: should binary indicators for each level be included? The indicator is |
dropFirstLevelVsAll |
Logical: should the column representing first level vs. all be dropped? This makes the resulting matrix of indicators usable for regression models. |
dropUninformative |
Logical: should uninformative (constant) columns be dropped? |
includePrefix |
Logical: should the column name of the binarized column be included in column names of the output? See details. |
prefixSep |
Separator of column names and level names in column names of the output. See details. |
nameForAll |
Character string that represents "all others" in the column names of indicators of level vs. all others. |
levelSep |
Separator for levels to be used in column names of the output. If |
levelSep.pairwise |
Separator for levels to be used in column names for pairwise indicators in the output. |
levelSep.vsAll |
Separator for levels to be used in column names for level vs. all indicators in the output. |
checkNames |
Logical: should the names of the output be made into syntactically correct R language names? |
includeLevelInformation |
Logical: should information about which levels are represented by which columns be included in the attributes of the output? |
binarizeCategoricalColumns
is the most general function, the rest are convenience wrappers that set some of the
options to achieve the following:
binarizeCategoricalColumns.pairwise
returns only pairwise (level vs. level) binary indicators.
binarizeCategoricalColumns.forRegression
returns only level vs. all others binary indicators, with the first
(according to levelOrder
) level
vs. all removed. This is essentially the same as would be returned by model.matrix
except for the column
representing intercept.
binarizeCategoricalColumns.forPlots
returns only level vs. all others binary indicators and keeps them all.
The columns to be converted are identified as follows. If considerColumns
is given, columns not
contained in it will not be converted, even if they are included in convertColumns
.
If convertColumns
is given, those columns will
be converted (except any not contained in non-empty considerColumns
). If convertColumns
is NULL
, the function converts columns that are not numeric (as reported by is.numeric
) and those
numeric columns that have at most maxOrdinalValues
unique non-missing values.
The function creates two types of indicators. The first is one level (unique value) of x
vs. all
others, i.e., for a given level, the indicator is val2
(usually 1) for all elements of x
that
equal the level, and val1
(usually 0)
otherwise. Column names for these indicators are the concatenation of namePrefix
, the level,
nameSep
and nameForAll
. The level vs. all indicators are created for all levels that have at
least minCounts
samples, are present in levelOrder
(if it is non-NULL) and are not included in
ignore
.
The second type of indicator encodes binary comparisons. For each pair of levels (both with at least
minCount
samples), the indicator is val2
(usually 1) for the higher level and val1
(usually 0) for the lower level. The level order is given by levelOrder
(which defaults to the sorted
levels of x
), assumed to be sorted in increasing order. All levels with at least minCount
samples that are included in levelOrder
and not included in ignore
are included.
Internally, the function calls binarizeCategoricalVariable
for each column that is converted.
A data frame in which the converted columns have been replaced by sets of binarized indicators. When
includeLevelInformation
is
TRUE
, the attribute includedLevels
is a table with one column per output column and two rows,
giving the two levels (unique values of x) represented by the column.
Peter Langfelder
set.seed(2); x = data.frame(a = sample(c("A", "B", "C"), 15, replace = TRUE), b = sample(c(1:3), 15, replace = TRUE)); out = binarizeCategoricalColumns(x, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, includeLevelInformation = TRUE); data.frame(x, out); attr(out, "includedLevels")
set.seed(2); x = data.frame(a = sample(c("A", "B", "C"), 15, replace = TRUE), b = sample(c(1:3), 15, replace = TRUE)); out = binarizeCategoricalColumns(x, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, includeLevelInformation = TRUE); data.frame(x, out); attr(out, "includedLevels")
Given a categorical variable, this function creates a set of indicator variables for the various possible sets of levels.
binarizeCategoricalVariable( x, levelOrder = NULL, ignore = NULL, minCount = 3, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = FALSE, dropFirstLevelVsAll = FALSE, dropUninformative = TRUE, namePrefix = "", levelSep = NULL, nameForAll = "all", levelSep.pairwise = if (length(levelSep)==0) ".vs." else levelSep, levelSep.vsAll = if (length(levelSep)==0) (if (nameForAll=="") "" else ".vs.") else levelSep, checkNames = FALSE, includeLevelInformation = TRUE)
binarizeCategoricalVariable( x, levelOrder = NULL, ignore = NULL, minCount = 3, val1 = 0, val2 = 1, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = FALSE, dropFirstLevelVsAll = FALSE, dropUninformative = TRUE, namePrefix = "", levelSep = NULL, nameForAll = "all", levelSep.pairwise = if (length(levelSep)==0) ".vs." else levelSep, levelSep.vsAll = if (length(levelSep)==0) (if (nameForAll=="") "" else ".vs.") else levelSep, checkNames = FALSE, includeLevelInformation = TRUE)
x |
A vector with categorical values. |
levelOrder |
Optional specification of the levels (unique values) of |
ignore |
Optional specification of levels of |
minCount |
Levels of |
val1 |
Value for the lower level in binary comparisons. |
val2 |
Value for the higher level in binary comparisons. |
includePairwise |
Logical: should pairwise binary indicators be included? For each pair of levels, the indicator is |
includeLevelVsAll |
Logical: should binary indicators for each level be included? The indicator is |
dropFirstLevelVsAll |
Logical: should the column representing first level vs. all be dropped? This makes the resulting matrix of indicators usable for regression models. |
dropUninformative |
Logical: should uninformative (constant) columns be dropped? |
namePrefix |
Prefix to be used in column names of the output. |
nameForAll |
When naming columns that represent a level vs. all others, |
levelSep |
Separator for levels to be used in column names of the output. If |
levelSep.pairwise |
Separator for levels to be used in column names for pairwise indicators in the output. |
levelSep.vsAll |
Separator for levels to be used in column names for level vs. all indicators in the output. |
checkNames |
Logical: should the names of the output be made into syntactically correct R language names? |
includeLevelInformation |
Logical: should information about which levels are represented by which columns be included in the attributes of the output? |
The function creates two types of indicators. The first is one level (unique value) of x
vs. all
others, i.e., for a given level, the indicator is val2
(usually 1) for all elements of x
that
equal the level, and val1
(usually 0)
otherwise. Column names for these indicators are the concatenation of namePrefix
, the level,
nameSep
and nameForAll
. The level vs. all indicators are created for all levels that have at
least minCounts
samples, are present in levelOrder
(if it is non-NULL) and are not included in
ignore
.
The second type of indicator encodes binary comparisons. For each pair of levels (both with at least
minCount
samples), the indicator is val2
(usually 1) for the higher level and val1
(usually 0) for the lower level. The level order is given by levelOrder
(which defaults to the sorted
levels of x
), assumed to be sorted in increasing order. All levels with at least minCount
samples that are included in levelOrder
and not included in ignore
are included.
A matrix containing the indicators variabels, one in each column. When includeLevelInformation
is
TRUE
, the attribute includedLevels
is a table with one column per output column and two rows,
giving the two levels (unique values of x) represented by the column.
Peter Langfelder
Variations and wrappers for this function:
binarizeCategoricalColumns
for binarizing several columns of a matrix or data frame
set.seed(2); x = sample(c("A", "B", "C"), 15, replace = TRUE); out = binarizeCategoricalVariable(x, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE); data.frame(x, out); attr(out, "includedLevels") # A different naming for level vs. all columns binarizeCategoricalVariable(x, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, nameForAll = "");
set.seed(2); x = sample(c("A", "B", "C"), 15, replace = TRUE); out = binarizeCategoricalVariable(x, includePairwise = TRUE, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE); data.frame(x, out); attr(out, "includedLevels") # A different naming for level vs. all columns binarizeCategoricalVariable(x, includeLevelVsAll = TRUE, nameForAll = "");
The function uses a rather primitive way to estimate available memory and use it to suggest a block size appropriate for the many block-by-block calculations in this package.
blockSize( matrixSize, rectangularBlocks = TRUE, maxMemoryAllocation = NULL, overheadFactor = 3);
blockSize( matrixSize, rectangularBlocks = TRUE, maxMemoryAllocation = NULL, overheadFactor = 3);
matrixSize |
the relevant dimension (usually the number of columns) of the matrix that is to be operated on block-by-block. |
rectangularBlocks |
logical indicating whether the bocks of data are rectangular (of size
|
maxMemoryAllocation |
maximum desired memory allocation, in bytes. Should not exceed 2GB or total installed RAM (whichever is greater) on 32-bit systems, while on 64-bit systems it should not exceed the total installed RAM. If not supplied, the available memory will be estimated internally. |
overheadFactor |
overhead factor for the memory use by R. Recommended values are between 2 (for simple calculations) and 4 or more for complicated calculations where intermediate results (for which R must also allocate memory) take up a lot of space. |
Multiple functions within the WGCNA package use a divide-and-conquer (also known as block-by-block, or block-wise) approach to handling large data sets. This function is meant to assist in choosing a suitable block size, given the size of the data and the available memory.
If the entire expected result fits
into the allowed memory (after taking into account the expected overhead), the returned block size will
equal the input matrixSize
.
The internal estimation of available memory works by returning the size of largest successfully allocated block of memory. It is hoped that this will lead to reasonable results but some operating systems may actually allocate more than is available. It is therefore preferable that the user specifies the available memory by hand.
A single integer giving the suggested block size, or matrixSize
if the entire calculation is
expected to fit into memory in one piece.
Peter Langfelder
# Suitable blocks for handling 30,000 genes within 2GB (=2^31 bytes) of memory blockSize(30000, rectangularBlocks = TRUE, maxMemoryAllocation = 2^31)
# Suitable blocks for handling 30,000 genes within 2GB (=2^31 bytes) of memory blockSize(30000, rectangularBlocks = TRUE, maxMemoryAllocation = 2^31)
Perform network construction and consensus module detection across several datasets.
blockwiseConsensusModules( multiExpr, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # TOM precalculation arguments, if available individualTOMInfo = NULL, useIndivTOMSubset = NULL, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Consensus calculation options: network calibration networkCalibration = c("single quantile", "full quantile", "none"), # Simple quantile calibration options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, getNetworkCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, # Saving the consensus TOM saveConsensusTOMs = FALSE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-block.%b.RData", # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = TRUE, chunkSize = NULL, cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", cacheDir = ".", # Alternative consensus TOM input from a previous calculation consensusTOMInfo = NULL, # Basic tree cut options # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, # Advanced tree cut opyions maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, # Gene reassignment and trimming from a module, and module "significance" criteria reassignThresholdPS = 1e-4, trimmingConsensusQuantile = consensusQuantile, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, #Module merging options equalizeQuantilesForModuleMerging = FALSE, quantileSummaryForModuleMerging = "mean", mergeCutHeight = 0.15, mergeConsensusQuantile = consensusQuantile, # Output options numericLabels = FALSE, # General options nThreads = 0, verbose = 2, indent = 0, ...)
blockwiseConsensusModules( multiExpr, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # TOM precalculation arguments, if available individualTOMInfo = NULL, useIndivTOMSubset = NULL, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Consensus calculation options: network calibration networkCalibration = c("single quantile", "full quantile", "none"), # Simple quantile calibration options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, getNetworkCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, # Saving the consensus TOM saveConsensusTOMs = FALSE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-block.%b.RData", # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = TRUE, chunkSize = NULL, cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", cacheDir = ".", # Alternative consensus TOM input from a previous calculation consensusTOMInfo = NULL, # Basic tree cut options # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, # Advanced tree cut opyions maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, # Gene reassignment and trimming from a module, and module "significance" criteria reassignThresholdPS = 1e-4, trimmingConsensusQuantile = consensusQuantile, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, #Module merging options equalizeQuantilesForModuleMerging = FALSE, quantileSummaryForModuleMerging = "mean", mergeCutHeight = 0.15, mergeConsensusQuantile = consensusQuantile, # Output options numericLabels = FALSE, # General options nThreads = 0, verbose = 2, indent = 0, ...)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
checkMissingData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
number of centers to be used in the preclustering. Defaults to smaller of
|
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
individualTOMInfo |
Optional data for TOM matrices in individual data sets. This object is returned by
the function |
useIndivTOMSubset |
If |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
maxPOutliers |
only used for |
quickCor |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation, if used, should revert to Pearson when
median absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
logical: should the cosine version of the correlation calculation be used? The cosine calculation differs from the standard one in that it does not subtract the mean. |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. Either a single number or a vector of the same length as the number of sets, with one power for each set. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
checkPower |
logical: should basic sanity check be performed on the supplied |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
logical: should missing values in the calculation of adjacency be replaced by 0? |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? Negative TOM values can occur when
|
saveIndividualTOMs |
logical: should individual TOMs be saved to disk for later use? |
individualTOMFileNames |
character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
networkCalibration |
network calibration method. One of "single quantile", "full quantile", "none" (or a unique abbreviation of one of them). |
calibrationQuantile |
if |
sampleForCalibration |
if |
sampleForCalibrationFactor |
determines the number of samples for calibration: the number is
|
getNetworkCalibrationSamples |
logical: should samples used for TOM calibration be saved for future analysis?
This option is only available when |
consensusQuantile |
quantile at which consensus is to be defined. See details. |
useMean |
logical: should the consensus be determined from a (possibly weighted) mean across the data sets rather than a quantile? |
setWeights |
Optional vector (one component per input set) of weights to be used for weighted mean
consensus. Only used when |
saveConsensusTOMs |
logical: should the consensus topological overlap matrices for each block be saved and returned? |
consensusTOMFilePattern |
character string containing the file namefiles containing the
consensus topological overlaps. The tag |
useDiskCache |
should calculated network similarities in individual sets be temporarilly saved to disk? Saving to disk is somewhat slower than keeping all data in memory, but for large blocks and/or many sets the memory footprint may be too big. |
chunkSize |
network similarities are saved in smaller chunks of size |
cacheBase |
character string containing the desired name for the cache files. The actual file
names will consists of |
cacheDir |
character string containing the desired path for the cache files. |
consensusTOMInfo |
optional list summarizing consensus TOM, output of |
deepSplit |
integer value between 0 and 4. Provides a simplified control over how sensitive
module detection should be to module splitting, with 0 least and 4 most sensitive. See
|
detectCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module detection. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size for module detection. See
|
checkMinModuleSize |
logical: should sanity checks be performed on |
maxCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster, given as the fraction
of |
minGap |
minimum cluster gap given as the fraction of the difference between |
maxAbsCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster given as absolute
heights. If given, overrides |
minAbsGap |
minimum cluster gap given as absolute height difference. If given, overrides
|
minSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as the fraction of the difference between
|
minAbsSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as an absolute height.
Branches merging below this height will automatically be merged. If not given (default), will be determined
from |
useBranchEigennodeDissim |
Logical: should branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity be considered when merging branches in Dynamic Tree Cut? |
minBranchEigennodeDissim |
Minimum consensus branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity for
branches to be considerd separate. The branch eigennode dissimilarity in individual sets
is simly 1-correlation of the
eigennodes; the consensus is defined as quantile with probability |
stabilityLabels |
Optional matrix of cluster labels that are to be used for calculating branch
dissimilarity based on split stability. The number of rows must equal the number of genes in
|
minStabilityDissim |
Minimum stability dissimilarity criterion for two branches to be considered
separate. Should be a number between 0 (essentially no dissimilarity required) and 1 (perfect dissimilarity
or distinguishability based on |
pamStage |
logical. If TRUE, the second (PAM-like) stage of module detection will be performed.
See |
pamRespectsDendro |
Logical, only used when |
reassignThresholdPS |
per-set p-value ratio threshold for reassigning genes between modules. See Details. |
trimmingConsensusQuantile |
a number between 0 and 1 specifying the consensus quantile used for kME calculation that determines module trimming according to the arguments below. |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
equalizeQuantilesForModuleMerging |
Logical: equalize quantiles of the module eigengene networks
before module merging? If |
quantileSummaryForModuleMerging |
One of |
mergeCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
mergeConsensusQuantile |
consensus quantile for module merging. See |
numericLabels |
logical: should the returned modules be labeled by colors ( |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
... |
Other arguments. At present these can include |
The function starts by optionally filtering out samples that have too many missing entries and genes
that have either too many missing entries or zero variance in at least one set. Genes that are filtered
out are left unassigned by the module detection. Returned eigengenes will contain NA
in entries
corresponding to filtered-out samples.
If blocks
is not given and
the number of genes exceeds maxBlockSize
, genes are pre-clustered into blocks using the function
consensusProjectiveKMeans
; otherwise all genes are treated in a single block.
For each block of genes, the network is constructed and (if requested) topological overlap is calculated in each set. To minimize memory usage, calculated topological overlaps are optionally saved to disk in chunks until they are needed again for the calculation of the consensus network topological overlap.
Before calculation of the consensus Topological Overlap, individual TOMs are optionally calibrated. Calibration methods include single quantile scaling and full quantile normalization.
Single quantile
scaling raises individual TOM in sets 2,3,... to a power such that the quantiles given by
calibrationQuantile
agree with the quantile in set 1. Since the high TOMs are usually the most important
for module identification, the value of calibrationQuantile
is close to (but not equal) 1. To speed up
quantile calculation, the quantiles can be determined on a randomly-chosen component subset of the TOM matrices.
Full quantile normalization, implemented in normalize.quantiles
, adjusts the
TOM matrices such that all quantiles equal each other (and equal to the quantiles of the component-wise
average of the individual TOM matrices).
Note that network calibration is performed separately in each block, i.e., the normalizing transformation may differ between blocks. This is necessary to avoid manipulating a full TOM in memory.
The consensus TOM is calculated as the component-wise consensusQuantile
quantile of the individual
(set) TOMs; that is, for each gene pair (TOM entry), the consensusQuantile
quantile across all input
sets. Alternatively, one can also use (weighted) component-wise mean across all imput data sets.
If requested, the consensus topological overlaps are saved to disk for later use.
Genes are then clustered using average linkage hierarchical clustering and modules are identified in the
resulting dendrogram by the Dynamic Hybrid tree cut. Found modules are trimmed of genes whose
consensus module membership kME (that is, correlation with module eigengene)
is less than minKMEtoStay
.
Modules in which
fewer than minCoreKMESize
genes have consensus KME higher than minCoreKME
are disbanded, i.e., their constituent genes are pronounced
unassigned.
After all blocks have been processed, the function checks whether there are genes whose KME in the module
they assigned is lower than KME to another module. If p-values of the higher correlations are smaller
than those of the native module by the factor reassignThresholdPS
(in every set),
the gene is re-assigned to the closer module.
In the last step, modules whose eigengenes are highly correlated are merged. This is achieved by
clustering module eigengenes using the dissimilarity given by one minus their correlation,
cutting the dendrogram at the height mergeCutHeight
and merging all modules on each branch. The
process is iterated until no modules are merged. See mergeCloseModules
for more details on
module merging.
The argument quick
specifies the precision of handling of missing data in the correlation
calculations. Zero will cause all
calculations to be executed precisely, which may be significantly slower than calculations without
missing data. Progressively higher values will speed up the
calculations but introduce progressively larger errors. Without missing data, all column means and
variances can be pre-calculated before the covariances are calculated. When missing data are present,
exact calculations require the column means and variances to be calculated for each covariance. The
approximate calculation uses the pre-calculated mean and variance and simply ignores missing data in the
covariance calculation. If the number of missing data is high, the pre-calculated means and variances may
be very different from the actual ones, thus potentially introducing large errors.
The quick
value times the
number of rows specifies the maximum difference in the
number of missing entries for mean and variance calculations on the one hand and covariance on the other
hand that will be tolerated before a recalculation is triggered. The hope is that if only a few missing
data are treated approximately, the error introduced will be small but the potential speedup can be
significant.
A list with the following components:
colors |
module assignment of all input genes. A vector containing either character strings with
module colors (if input |
unmergedColors |
module colors or numeric labels before the module merging step. |
multiMEs |
module eigengenes corresponding to the modules returned in |
goodSamples |
a list, with one component per input set. Each component is a logical vector with one entry per sample from the corresponding set. The entry indicates whether the sample in the set passed basic quality control criteria. |
goodGenes |
a logical vector with one entry per input gene indicating whether the gene passed basic quality control criteria in all sets. |
dendrograms |
a list with one component for each block of genes. Each component is the hierarchical clustering dendrogram obtained by clustering the consensus gene dissimilarity in the corresponding block. |
TOMFiles |
if |
blockGenes |
a list with one component for each block of genes. Each component is a vector giving
the indices (relative to the input |
blocks |
if input |
blockOrder |
a vector giving the order in which blocks were processed and in which
|
originCount |
A vector of length |
networkCalibrationSamples |
if the input |
If the input datasets have large numbers of genes, consider carefully the maxBlockSize
as it
significantly affects the memory footprint (and whether the function will fail with a memory allocation
error). From a theoretical point of view it is advantageous to use blocks as large as possible; on the
other hand, using smaller blocks is substantially faster and often the only way to work with large
numbers of genes. As a rough guide, it is unlikely a standard desktop
computer with 4GB memory or less will be able to work with blocks larger than 7000 genes.
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
goodSamplesGenesMS
for basic quality control and filtering;
adjacency
, TOMsimilarity
for network construction;
hclust
for hierarchical clustering;
cutreeDynamic
for adaptive branch cutting in hierarchical clustering
dendrograms;
mergeCloseModules
for merging of close modules.
Calculates topological overlaps in the given (expression) data. If the number of variables (columns) in the input data is too large, the data is first split using pre-clustering, then topological overlaps are calculated in each block.
blockwiseIndividualTOMs( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? If not, they will be returned in the session. saveTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # General options nThreads = 0, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
blockwiseIndividualTOMs( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? If not, they will be returned in the session. saveTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # General options nThreads = 0, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
checkMissingData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
number of centers for pre-clustering. Larger numbers typically results in better
but slower pre-clustering. The default is |
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
maxPOutliers |
only used for |
quickCor |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation, if used, should revert to Pearson when
median absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
logical: should the cosine version of the correlation calculation be used? The cosine calculation differs from the standard one in that it does not subtract the mean. |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. Either a single number or a vector of the same length as the number of sets, with one power for each set. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
checkPower |
logical: should basic sanity check be performed on the supplied |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
logical: should missing values in calculated adjacency be replaced by 0? |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies |
Logical: should TOM be set to zero for zero adjacencies? |
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? Negative TOM values can occur when
|
saveTOMs |
logical: should calculated TOMs be saved to disk ( |
individualTOMFileNames |
character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
useInternalMatrixAlgebra |
Logical: should WGCNA's own, slow, matrix multiplication be used instead of R-wide BLAS? Only useful for debugging. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The function starts by optionally filtering out samples that have too many missing entries and genes that have either too many missing entries or zero variance in at least one set. Genes that are filtered out are excluded from the TOM calculations.
If blocks
is not given and
the number of genes exceeds maxBlockSize
, genes are pre-clustered into blocks using the function
consensusProjectiveKMeans
; otherwise all genes are treated in a single block.
For each block of genes, the network is constructed and (if requested) topological overlap is calculated in each set. The topological overlaps can be saved to disk as RData files, or returned directly within the return value (see below). Note that the matrices can be big and returning them within the return value can quickly exhaust the system's memory. In particular, if the block-wise calculation is necessary, it is nearly certain that returning all matrices via the return value will be impossible.
A list with the following components:
actualTOMFileNames |
Only returned if input |
TOMSimilarities |
Only returned if input |
blocks |
if input |
blockGenes |
a list with one component for each block of genes. Each component is a vector giving
the indices (relative to the input |
goodSamplesAndGenes |
if input
|
The following components are present mostly to streamline the interaction of this function with
blockwiseConsensusModules
.
nGGenes |
Number of genes that passed missing data filters (if input
|
gBlocks |
the vector |
nThreads |
number of threads used to calculate correlation and TOM matrices. |
saveTOMs |
logical: were calculated matrices saved in files ( |
intNetworkType , intCorType
|
integer codes for network and correlation type. |
nSets |
number of sets in input data. |
setNames |
the |
Peter Langfelder
For a general discussion of the weighted network formalism, see
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
The blockwise approach is briefly described in the article describing this package,
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2008) "WGCNA: an R package for weighted correlation network analysis". BMC Bioinformatics 2008, 9:559
This function performs automatic network construction and module detection on large expression datasets in a block-wise manner.
blockwiseModules( # Input data datExpr, weights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Options for splitting data into blocks blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = as.integer(min(ncol(datExpr)/20, 100*ncol(datExpr)/maxBlockSize)), randomSeed = 54321, # load TOM from previously saved file? loadTOM = FALSE, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "signed", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Saving or returning TOM getTOMs = NULL, saveTOMs = FALSE, saveTOMFileBase = "blockwiseTOM", # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(datExpr)/2 ), # Advanced tree cut options maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, stabilityCriterion = c("Individual fraction", "Common fraction"), minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, # Gene reassignment, module trimming, and module "significance" criteria reassignThreshold = 1e-6, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.3, # Module merging options mergeCutHeight = 0.15, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, # Output options numericLabels = FALSE, # Options controlling behaviour nThreads = 0, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, useCorOptionsThroughout = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0, ...)
blockwiseModules( # Input data datExpr, weights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Options for splitting data into blocks blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = as.integer(min(ncol(datExpr)/20, 100*ncol(datExpr)/maxBlockSize)), randomSeed = 54321, # load TOM from previously saved file? loadTOM = FALSE, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "signed", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Saving or returning TOM getTOMs = NULL, saveTOMs = FALSE, saveTOMFileBase = "blockwiseTOM", # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(datExpr)/2 ), # Advanced tree cut options maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, stabilityCriterion = c("Individual fraction", "Common fraction"), minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, # Gene reassignment, module trimming, and module "significance" criteria reassignThreshold = 1e-6, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.3, # Module merging options mergeCutHeight = 0.15, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, # Output options numericLabels = FALSE, # Options controlling behaviour nThreads = 0, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, useCorOptionsThroughout = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0, ...)
datExpr |
Expression data. A matrix (preferred) or
data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. NAs are
allowed, but not too many. See |
weights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
checkMissingData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per column (gene)
of |
maxBlockSize |
integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
number of centers for pre-clustering. Larger numbers typically results in better but slower pre-clustering. |
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
loadTOM |
logical: should Topological Overlap Matrices be loaded from previously saved files ( |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
maxPOutliers |
only used for |
quickCor |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation, if used, should revert to Pearson when
median absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
logical: should the cosine version of the correlation calculation be used? The cosine calculation differs from the standard one in that it does not subtract the mean. |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
logical: should missing values in the calculation of adjacency be replaced by 0? |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies |
Logical: should TOM be set to zero for zero adjacencies? |
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? Negative TOM values can occur when
|
getTOMs |
deprecated, please use saveTOMs below. |
saveTOMs |
logical: should the consensus topological overlap matrices for each block be saved and returned? |
saveTOMFileBase |
character string containing the file name base for files containing the
consensus topological overlaps. The full file names have |
deepSplit |
integer value between 0 and 4. Provides a simplified control over how sensitive
module detection should be to module splitting, with 0 least and 4 most sensitive. See
|
detectCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module detection. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size for module detection. See
|
maxCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster, given as the fraction
of |
minGap |
minimum cluster gap given as the fraction of the difference between |
maxAbsCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster given as absolute
heights. If given, overrides |
minAbsGap |
minimum cluster gap given as absolute height difference. If given, overrides
|
minSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as the fraction of the difference between
|
minAbsSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as an absolute height.
Branches merging below this height will automatically be merged. If not given (default), will be determined
from |
useBranchEigennodeDissim |
Logical: should branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity be considered when merging branches in Dynamic Tree Cut? |
minBranchEigennodeDissim |
Minimum consensus branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity for
branches to be considerd separate. The branch eigennode dissimilarity in individual sets
is simly 1-correlation of the
eigennodes; the consensus is defined as quantile with probability |
stabilityLabels |
Optional matrix of cluster labels that are to be used for calculating branch
dissimilarity based on split stability. The number of rows must equal the number of genes in
|
stabilityCriterion |
One of |
minStabilityDissim |
Minimum stability dissimilarity criterion for two branches to be considered
separate. Should be a number between 0 (essentially no dissimilarity required) and 1 (perfect dissimilarity
or distinguishability based on |
pamStage |
logical. If TRUE, the second (PAM-like) stage of module detection will be performed.
See |
pamRespectsDendro |
Logical, only used when |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
reassignThreshold |
p-value ratio threshold for reassigning genes between modules. See Details. |
mergeCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
numericLabels |
logical: should the returned modules be labeled by colors ( |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
useInternalMatrixAlgebra |
Logical: should WGCNA's own, slow, matrix multiplication be used instead of R-wide BLAS? Only useful for debugging. |
useCorOptionsThroughout |
Logical: should correlation options passed to network analysis also be used
in calculation of kME? Set to |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
... |
Other arguments. |
Before module detection starts, genes and samples are optionally checked for the presence of NA
s.
Genes and/or samples that have too many NA
s are flagged as bad and removed from the analysis; bad
genes will be automatically labeled as unassigned, while the returned eigengenes will have NA
entries for all bad samples.
If blocks
is not given and
the number of genes exceeds maxBlockSize
, genes are pre-clustered into blocks using the function
projectiveKMeans
; otherwise all genes are treated in a single block.
For each block of genes, the network is constructed and (if requested) topological overlap is calculated.
If requested, the topological overlaps are returned as part of the return value list.
Genes are then clustered using average linkage hierarchical clustering and modules are identified in the
resulting dendrogram by the Dynamic Hybrid tree cut. Found modules are trimmed of genes whose
correlation with module eigengene (KME) is less than minKMEtoStay
. Modules in which
fewer than minCoreKMESize
genes have KME higher than minCoreKME
are disbanded, i.e., their constituent genes are pronounced
unassigned.
After all blocks have been processed, the function checks whether there are genes whose KME in the module
they assigned is lower than KME to another module. If p-values of the higher correlations are smaller
than those of the native module by the factor reassignThresholdPS
,
the gene is re-assigned to the closer module.
In the last step, modules whose eigengenes are highly correlated are merged. This is achieved by
clustering module eigengenes using the dissimilarity given by one minus their correlation,
cutting the dendrogram at the height mergeCutHeight
and merging all modules on each branch. The
process is iterated until no modules are merged. See mergeCloseModules
for more details on
module merging.
The argument quick
specifies the precision of handling of missing data in the correlation
calculations. Zero will cause all
calculations to be executed precisely, which may be significantly slower than calculations without
missing data. Progressively higher values will speed up the
calculations but introduce progressively larger errors. Without missing data, all column means and
variances can be pre-calculated before the covariances are calculated. When missing data are present,
exact calculations require the column means and variances to be calculated for each covariance. The
approximate calculation uses the pre-calculated mean and variance and simply ignores missing data in the
covariance calculation. If the number of missing data is high, the pre-calculated means and variances may
be very different from the actual ones, thus potentially introducing large errors.
The quick
value times the
number of rows specifies the maximum difference in the
number of missing entries for mean and variance calculations on the one hand and covariance on the other
hand that will be tolerated before a recalculation is triggered. The hope is that if only a few missing
data are treated approximately, the error introduced will be small but the potential speedup can be
significant.
A list with the following components:
colors |
a vector of color or numeric module labels for all genes. |
unmergedColors |
a vector of color or numeric module labels for all genes before module merging. |
MEs |
a data frame containing module eigengenes of the found modules (given by |
goodSamples |
numeric vector giving indices of good samples, that is samples that do not have too many missing entries. |
goodGenes |
numeric vector giving indices of good genes, that is genes that do not have too many missing entries. |
dendrograms |
a list whose components conatain hierarchical clustering dendrograms of genes in each block. |
TOMFiles |
if |
blockGenes |
a list whose components give the indices of genes in each block. |
blocks |
if input |
blockOrder |
a vector giving the order in which blocks were processed and in which
|
MEsOK |
logical indicating whether the module eigengenes were calculated without errors. |
significantly affects the memory footprint (and whether the function will fail with a memory allocation error). From a theoretical point of view it is advantageous to use blocks as large as possible; on the other hand, using smaller blocks is substantially faster and often the only way to work with large numbers of genes. As a rough guide, it is unlikely a standard desktop computer with 4GB memory or less will be able to work with blocks larger than 8000 genes.
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
goodSamplesGenes
for basic quality control and filtering;
adjacency
, TOMsimilarity
for network construction;
hclust
for hierarchical clustering;
cutreeDynamic
for adaptive branch cutting in hierarchical clustering
dendrograms;
mergeCloseModules
for merging of close modules.
This matrix gives a predefined set of marker genes for many blood cell types, as reported in several previously-published studies. It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(BloodLists)
data(BloodLists)
A 2048 x 2 matrix of characters containing Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <Blood cell type>__<reference>, where the references can be found at userListEnrichment
. Note that the matrix is sorted first by Category and then by Gene, such that all genes related to the same category are listed sequentially.
For references used in this variable, please see userListEnrichment
data(BloodLists) head(BloodLists)
data(BloodLists) head(BloodLists)
Generate a blue-white-red color sequence of a given length.
blueWhiteRed( n, gamma = 1, endSaturation = 1, blueEnd = c(0.05 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.45 , 0.55 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.25, 1.00), redEnd = c(1.0, 0.2 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.6, 0.6*(1-endSaturation)), middle = c(1,1,1))
blueWhiteRed( n, gamma = 1, endSaturation = 1, blueEnd = c(0.05 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.45 , 0.55 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.25, 1.00), redEnd = c(1.0, 0.2 + (1-endSaturation) * 0.6, 0.6*(1-endSaturation)), middle = c(1,1,1))
n |
number of colors to be returned. |
gamma |
color change power. |
endSaturation |
a number between 0 and 1 giving the saturation of the colors that will represent the ends of the scale. Lower numbers mean less saturation (lighter colors). |
blueEnd |
vector of length 3 giving the RGB relative values (between 0 and 1) for the blue or negative end color. |
redEnd |
vector of length 3 giving the RGB relative values (between 0 and 1) for the red or positive end color. |
middle |
vector of length 3 giving the RGB relative values (between 0 and 1) for the middle of the scale. |
The function returns a color vector that starts with blue, gradually turns into white and then to
red. The power gamma
can be used to control the behaviour of the quarter- and three quarter-values
(between blue and white, and white and red, respectively). Higher powers will make the mid-colors more
white, while lower powers will make the colors more saturated, respectively.
A vector of colors of length n
.
Peter Langfelder
numbers2colors
for a function that produces a color representation for continuous numbers.
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50)); title("gamma = 1") displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50, 3)); title("gamma = 3") displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50, 0.5)); title("gamma = 0.5")
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50)); title("gamma = 1") displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50, 3)); title("gamma = 3") displayColors(blueWhiteRed(50, 0.5)); title("gamma = 0.5")
This matrix gives a predefined set of marker genes for many brain-related categories (ie., cell type, organelle, changes with disease, etc.), as reported in several previously-published studies. It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(BrainLists)
data(BrainLists)
A 48319 x 2 matrix of characters containing Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <Brain descriptor>__<reference>, where the references can be found at userListEnrichment
. Note that the matrix is sorted first by Category and then by Gene, such that all genes related to the same category are listed sequentially.
For references used in this variable, please see userListEnrichment
data(BrainLists) head(BrainLists)
data(BrainLists) head(BrainLists)
This matrix gives a predefined set of marker genes for many regions of the human brain, using data from the Allen Human Brain Atlas (https://human.brain-map.org/) as reported in: Hawrylycz MJ, Lein ES, Guillozet-Bongaarts AL, Shen EH, Ng L, Miller JA, et al. (2012) An Anatomically Comprehensive Atlas of the Adult Human Brain Transcriptome. Nature (in press). It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(BrainRegionMarkers)
data(BrainRegionMarkers)
A 28477 x 2 matrix of characters containing Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <Brain Region>_<Marker Type>__HBA. Note that the matrix is sorted first by Category and then by Gene, such that all genes related to the same category are listed sequentially.
For references used in this variable, or other information, please see userListEnrichment
data(BrainRegionMarkers) head(BrainRegionMarkers)
data(BrainRegionMarkers) head(BrainRegionMarkers)
Calculation of branch dissimilarity based on eigennodes (eigengenes) in single set and multi-data situations. This function is used as a plugin for the dynamicTreeCut package and the user should not call this function directly. This function is experimental and subject to change.
branchEigengeneDissim( expr, branch1, branch2, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = "p"), signed = TRUE, ...) branchEigengeneSimilarity( expr, branch1, branch2, networkOptions, returnDissim = TRUE, ...) mtd.branchEigengeneDissim( multiExpr, branch1, branch2, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), consensusQuantile = 0, signed = TRUE, reproduceQuantileError = FALSE, ...) hierarchicalBranchEigengeneDissim( multiExpr, branch1, branch2, networkOptions, consensusTree, ...)
branchEigengeneDissim( expr, branch1, branch2, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = "p"), signed = TRUE, ...) branchEigengeneSimilarity( expr, branch1, branch2, networkOptions, returnDissim = TRUE, ...) mtd.branchEigengeneDissim( multiExpr, branch1, branch2, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), consensusQuantile = 0, signed = TRUE, reproduceQuantileError = FALSE, ...) hierarchicalBranchEigengeneDissim( multiExpr, branch1, branch2, networkOptions, consensusTree, ...)
expr |
Expression data. |
multiExpr |
Expression data in multi-set format. |
branch1 |
Branch 1. |
branch2 |
Branch 2. |
corFnc |
Correlation function. |
corOptions |
Other arguments to the correlation function. |
consensusQuantile |
Consensus quantile. |
signed |
Should the network be considered signed? |
reproduceQuantileError |
Logical: should an error in the calculation from previous versions, which
caused the true consensus quantile to be |
networkOptions |
An object of class |
returnDissim |
Logical: if |
consensusTree |
A list of class |
... |
Other arguments for compatibility; currently unused. |
These functions calculate the similarity or dissimilarity of two groups of genes (variables) in expr
or
multiExpr
using correlations of the first singular vectors ("eigengenes"). For a single data set
(branchEigengeneDissim
and branchEigengeneSimilarity
), the similarity is the correlation, and
dissimilarity 1-correlation of the first signular vectors.
Functions mtd.branchEigengeneDissim
and
hierarchicalBranchEigengeneDissim
calculate consensus eigengene dissimilarity.
Function mtd.branchEigengeneDissim
calculates a simple ("flat") consensus of branch eigengene
similarities across the given data set, at the given consensus quantile.
Function hierarchicalBranchEigengeneDissim
can calculate a hierarchical consensus in which consensus
calculations are hierarchically nested.
A single number, the dissimilarity for branchEigengeneDissim
, mtd.branchEigengeneDissim
, and
hierarchicalBranchEigengeneDissim
.
branchEigengeneSimilarity
returns similarity or dissimilarity, depending on imput.
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
Calculation of branch split based on expression data. This function is used as a plugin for the dynamicTreeCut package and the user should not call this function directly.
branchSplit( expr, branch1, branch2, discardProp = 0.05, minCentralProp = 0.75, nConsideredPCs = 3, signed = FALSE, getDetails = TRUE, ...)
branchSplit( expr, branch1, branch2, discardProp = 0.05, minCentralProp = 0.75, nConsideredPCs = 3, signed = FALSE, getDetails = TRUE, ...)
expr |
Expression data. |
branch1 |
Branch 1, |
branch2 |
Branch 2. |
discardProp |
Proportion of data to be discarded as outliers. |
minCentralProp |
Minimum central proportion |
nConsideredPCs |
Number of principal components to consider. |
signed |
Should the network be considered signed? |
getDetails |
Should details of the calculation be returned? |
... |
Other arguments. Present for compatibility; currently unusued. |
A single number or a list containing detils of the calculation.
Peter Langfelder
Calculation of branch split based on a dissimilarity matrix. This function is used as a plugin for the dynamicTreeCut package and the user should not call this function directly. This function is experimental and subject to change.
branchSplit.dissim( dissimMat, branch1, branch2, upperP, minNumberInSplit = 5, getDetails = FALSE, ...)
branchSplit.dissim( dissimMat, branch1, branch2, upperP, minNumberInSplit = 5, getDetails = FALSE, ...)
dissimMat |
Dissimilarity matrix. |
branch1 |
Branch 1. |
branch2 |
Branch 2. |
upperP |
Percentile of (closest) objects to be considered. |
minNumberInSplit |
Minimum number of objects to be considered. |
getDetails |
Should details of the calculation be returned? |
... |
Other arguments for compatibility; currently unused. |
A single number or a list containing details of the calculation.
Peter Langfelder
These functions evaluate how different two branches are based on a series of cluster labels that are usually obtained in a stability study but can in principle be arbitrary. The idea is to quantify how well membership on the two tested branches can be predicted from clusters in the given stability labels.
branchSplitFromStabilityLabels( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, ...) branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.prediction( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, ...) branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.individualFraction( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, verbose = 1, indent = 0,...)
branchSplitFromStabilityLabels( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, ...) branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.prediction( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, ...) branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.individualFraction( branch1, branch2, stabilityLabels, ignoreLabels = 0, verbose = 1, indent = 0,...)
branch1 |
A vector of indices giving members of branch 1. |
branch2 |
A vector of indices giving members of branch 1. |
stabilityLabels |
A matrix of cluster labels. Each column corresponds to one clustering and each row to one object (whose
indices |
ignoreLabels |
Label or labels that do not constitute proper clusters in |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
... |
Ignored. |
The idea is to measure how well clusters in stabilityLabels
can distinguish the two given branches.
For example, if a cluster C intersects with branch1 but not branch2, it can distinguish branches 1 and 2
perfectly. On the other hand, if there is a cluster C that contains both branch 1 and branch 2,
the two branches are
indistinguishable (based on the test clustering). The three functions differ in the details of the
similarity calculation.
branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.individualFraction
: Currently the recommended branch split calculation
method, and default for hierarchicalConsensusModules
.
For each branch and all clusters that overlap with the branch (not necessarily with the other
branch), calculate the fraction of the cluster objects (restricted to the two
branches) that belongs to the branch. For each branch, sum these fractions over all clusters.
If this number is relatively low, around 0.5, it means most elements are in
non-discriminative clusters.
branchSplitFromStabilityLabels
: This was the original branch split measure and for backward
compatibility it still is the default method in blockwiseModules
and
blockwiseConsensusModules
. For each cluster C in each clustering in stabilityLabels
,
its contribution to the branch similarity
is min(r1, r2), where r1 = |intersect(C, branch1)|/|branch1| and r2 = |intersect(C, branch2)|/|branch2|.
The statistics for clusters in each clustering are added; the sums are then averaged across the
clusterings.
branchSplitFromStabilityLabels.prediction
: Use only for experiments, not recommended for actual
analyses because it is not stable under small changes in the branch membership.
For each cluster that overlaps with both branches, count the objects in the branch with which the cluster
has a smaller overlap
and add it to the score for that branch. The final counts divided by number of genes on branch give a
"indistinctness" score; take the larger of the two indistinctness scores and call this the similarity.
Since the result of the last two calculations is a similarity statistic, the final dissimilarity is defined as 1-similarity. The dissimilarity ranges between 0 (branch1 and branch2 are indistinguishable) and 1 (branch1 and branch2 are perfectly distinguishable).
These statistics are quite simple and do not correct for similarity that would be expected by chance. On the
other hand, all 3 statistics are fairly (though not perfectly) stable under splitting and joining of clusters
in stabilityLabels
.
Branch dissimilarity (a single number between 0 and 1).
Peter Langfelder
These function are utilized in blockwiseModules
, blockwiseConsensusModules
and
hierarchicalConsensusModules
.
Checks a given matrix for properties that an adjacency matrix must satisfy.
checkAdjMat(adjMat, min = 0, max = 1) checkSimilarity(similarity, min = -1, max = 1)
checkAdjMat(adjMat, min = 0, max = 1) checkSimilarity(similarity, min = -1, max = 1)
adjMat |
matrix to be checked |
similarity |
matrix to be checked |
min |
minimum allowed value for entries of the input |
max |
maximum allowed value for entries of the input |
The function checks whether the given matrix really is a 2-dimensional numeric matrix, whether it is
square, symmetric, and all finite entries are between min
and max
.
If any of the conditions is not met, the
function issues an error.
None. The function returns normally if all conditions are met.
Peter Langfelder
Checks whether given sets have the correct format and retrieves dimensions.
checkSets(data, checkStructure = FALSE, useSets = NULL)
checkSets(data, checkStructure = FALSE, useSets = NULL)
data |
A vector of lists; in each list there must be a component named |
checkStructure |
If |
useSets |
Optional specification of entries of the vector |
For multiset calculations, many quantities (such as expression data, traits, module eigengenes etc) are
presented by a common structure, a vector of lists (one list for each set) where each list has a
component data
that contains the actual (expression, trait, eigengene) data for the corresponding
set in the form of a dataframe. This funtion checks whether data
conforms to this convention and
retrieves some basic dimension information (see output).
A list with components
nSets |
Number of sets (length of the vector |
nGenes |
Number of columns in the |
nSamples |
A vector of length |
structureOK |
Only set if the argument |
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
chooseOneHubInEachModule returns one gene in each module with high connectivity, given a number of randomly selected genes to test.
chooseOneHubInEachModule( datExpr, colorh, numGenes = 100, omitColors = "grey", power = 2, type = "signed", ...)
chooseOneHubInEachModule( datExpr, colorh, numGenes = 100, omitColors = "grey", power = 2, type = "signed", ...)
datExpr |
Gene expression data with rows as samples and columns as genes. |
colorh |
The module assignments (color vectors) corresponding to the columns in datExpr. |
numGenes |
Th number of random genes to select per module. Higher number of genes increases the accuracy of hub selection but slows down the function. |
omitColors |
All colors in this character vector (default is "grey") are ignored by this function. |
power |
Power to use for the adjacency network (default = 2). |
type |
What type of network is being entered. Common choices are "signed" (default) and "unsigned". With "signed" negative correlations count against, whereas with "unsigned" negative correlations are treated identically as positive correlations. |
... |
Any other parameters accepted by the *adjacency* function |
Both functions output a character vector of genes, where the genes are the hub gene picked for each module, and the names correspond to the module in which each gene is a hub.
Jeremy Miller
## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.051,0.05,0.042,0.041,0.3), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 <- tree2 <- fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(dat1$datExpr, colorh) hubs
## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.051,0.05,0.042,0.041,0.3), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 <- tree2 <- fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(dat1$datExpr, colorh) hubs
chooseTopHubInEachModule returns the gene in each module with the highest connectivity, looking at all genes in the expression file.
chooseTopHubInEachModule( datExpr, colorh, omitColors = "grey", power = 2, type = "signed", ...)
chooseTopHubInEachModule( datExpr, colorh, omitColors = "grey", power = 2, type = "signed", ...)
datExpr |
Gene expression data with rows as samples and columns as genes. |
colorh |
The module assignments (color vectors) corresponding to the columns in datExpr. |
omitColors |
All colors in this character vector (default is "grey") are ignored by this function. |
power |
Power to use for the adjacency network (default = 2). |
type |
What type of network is being entered. Common choices are "signed" (default) and "unsigned". With "signed" negative correlations count against, whereas with "unsigned" negative correlations are treated identically as positive correlations. |
... |
Any other parameters accepted by the *adjacency* function |
Both functions output a character vector of genes, where the genes are the hub gene picked for each module, and the names correspond to the module in which each gene is a hub.
Jeremy Miller
## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.051,0.05,0.042,0.041,0.3), signed=TRUE) colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) hubs = chooseTopHubInEachModule(dat1$datExpr, colorh) hubs
## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.051,0.05,0.042,0.041,0.3), signed=TRUE) colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) hubs = chooseTopHubInEachModule(dat1$datExpr, colorh) hubs
This function calculates the clustering coefficients for all nodes in the network given by the input adjacency matrix.
clusterCoef(adjMat)
clusterCoef(adjMat)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix |
A vector of clustering coefficients for each node.
Steve Horvath
The function calculates the co-clustering statistics for each module in the reference clustering.
coClustering(clusters.ref, clusters.test, tupletSize = 2, unassignedLabel = 0)
coClustering(clusters.ref, clusters.test, tupletSize = 2, unassignedLabel = 0)
clusters.ref |
Reference input clustering. A vector in which each element gives the cluster label of an object. |
clusters.test |
Test input clustering. Must be a vector of the same size as |
tupletSize |
Co-clutering tuplet size. |
unassignedLabel |
Optional specification of a clustering label that denotes unassigned objects. Objects with this label are excluded from the calculation. |
Co-clustering of cluster q in the reference clustering and cluster q' in the test clustering measures the overlap of clusters q and q' by the number of tuplets that can be chosen from the overlap of clusters q and q' relative to the number of tuplets in cluster q. To arrive at a co-clustering measure for cluster q, we sum the co-clustering of q and q' over all clusters q' in the test clustering. A value close to 1 indicates high preservation of the reference cluster in the test clustering, while a value close to zero indicates a low preservation.
A vector in which each component corresponds to a cluster in the reference clustering. Entries give the co-clustering measure of cluster preservation.
Peter Langfelder
For example, see Langfelder P, Luo R, Oldham MC, Horvath S (2011) Is My Network Module Preserved and Reproducible? PLoS Comput Biol 7(1): e1001057. Co-clustering is discussed in the Methods Supplement (Supplementary text 1) of that article.
modulePreservation
for a large suite of module preservation statistics
coClustering.permutationTest
for a permutation test for co-clustering significance
# An example with random (unrelated) clusters: set.seed(1); nModules = 10; nGenes = 1000; cl1 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl2 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); coClustering(cl1, cl2) # For the same reference and test clustering: coClustering(cl1, cl1)
# An example with random (unrelated) clusters: set.seed(1); nModules = 10; nGenes = 1000; cl1 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl2 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); coClustering(cl1, cl2) # For the same reference and test clustering: coClustering(cl1, cl1)
This function calculates permutation Z statistics that measure how different the co-clustering of modules in a reference and test clusterings is from random.
coClustering.permutationTest( clusters.ref, clusters.test, tupletSize = 2, nPermutations = 100, unassignedLabel = 0, randomSeed = 12345, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
coClustering.permutationTest( clusters.ref, clusters.test, tupletSize = 2, nPermutations = 100, unassignedLabel = 0, randomSeed = 12345, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
clusters.ref |
Reference input clustering. A vector in which each element gives the cluster label of an object. |
clusters.test |
Test input clustering. Must be a vector of the same size as |
tupletSize |
Co-clutering tuplet size. |
nPermutations |
Number of permutations to execute. Since the function calculates parametric p-values, a relatively small number of permutations (at least 50) should be sufficient. |
unassignedLabel |
Optional specification of a clustering label that denotes unassigned objects. Objects with this label are excluded from the calculation. |
randomSeed |
Random seed for initializing the random number generator. If |
verbose |
If non-zero, function will print out progress messages. |
indent |
Indentation for progress messages. Each unit adds two spaces. |
This function performs a permutation test to determine whether observed co-clustering statistics are
significantly different from those expected by chance. It returns the observed co-clustering as well as the
permutation Z statistic, calculated as (observed - mean)/sd
, where mean
and sd
are the
mean and standard deviation of the co-clustering when the test clustering is repeatedly randomly permuted.
observed |
the observed co-clustering measures for clusters in |
Z |
permutation Z statics |
permuted.mean |
means of the co-clustering measures when the test clustering is permuted |
permuted.sd |
standard deviations of the co-clustering measures when the test clustering is permuted |
permuted.cc |
values of the co-clustering measure for each permutation of the test clustering. A matrix of dimensions (number of permutations)x(number of clusters in reference clustering). |
Peter Langfelder
For example, see Langfelder P, Luo R, Oldham MC, Horvath S (2011) Is My Network Module Preserved and Reproducible? PLoS Comput Biol 7(1): e1001057. Co-clustering is discussed in the Methods Supplement (Supplementary text 1) of that article.
coClustering
for calculation of the "observed" co-clustering measure
modulePreservation
for a large suite of module preservation statistics
set.seed(1); nModules = 5; nGenes = 100; cl1 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl2 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cc = coClustering(cl1, cl2) # Choose a low number of permutations to make the example fast ccPerm = coClustering.permutationTest(cl1, cl2, nPermutations = 20, verbose = 1); ccPerm$observed ccPerm$Z # Combine cl1 and cl2 to obtain clustering that is somewhat similar to cl1: cl3 = cl2; from1 = sample(c(TRUE, FALSE), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl3[from1] = cl1[from1]; ccPerm = coClustering.permutationTest(cl1, cl3, nPermutations = 20, verbose = 1); # observed co-clustering is higher than before: ccPerm$observed # Note the high preservation Z statistics: ccPerm$Z
set.seed(1); nModules = 5; nGenes = 100; cl1 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl2 = sample(c(1:nModules), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cc = coClustering(cl1, cl2) # Choose a low number of permutations to make the example fast ccPerm = coClustering.permutationTest(cl1, cl2, nPermutations = 20, verbose = 1); ccPerm$observed ccPerm$Z # Combine cl1 and cl2 to obtain clustering that is somewhat similar to cl1: cl3 = cl2; from1 = sample(c(TRUE, FALSE), nGenes, replace = TRUE); cl3[from1] = cl1[from1]; ccPerm = coClustering.permutationTest(cl1, cl3, nPermutations = 20, verbose = 1); # observed co-clustering is higher than before: ccPerm$observed # Note the high preservation Z statistics: ccPerm$Z
Abstractly speaking, the function allows one to collapse the rows of a numeric matrix,
e.g. by forming an average or selecting one representative row for each group of rows specified by a
grouping variable (referred to as rowGroup
). The word "collapse" reflects the fact that the
method yields a new matrix whose rows correspond to other rows of the original input data. The function
implements several network-based and biostatistical methods for finding a representative row for each
group specified in rowGroup
.
Optionally, the function identifies the representative row according to the least number of missing data,
the highest sample mean, the highest sample variance, the highest connectivity. One of the advantages of
this function is that it implements default settings which have worked well in numerous applications.
Below, we describe these default settings in more detail.
collapseRows(datET, rowGroup, rowID, method="MaxMean", connectivityBasedCollapsing=FALSE, methodFunction=NULL, connectivityPower=1, selectFewestMissing=TRUE, thresholdCombine=NA)
collapseRows(datET, rowGroup, rowID, method="MaxMean", connectivityBasedCollapsing=FALSE, methodFunction=NULL, connectivityPower=1, selectFewestMissing=TRUE, thresholdCombine=NA)
datET |
matrix or data frame containing numeric values where rows correspond to variables (e.g.
microarray probes) and columns correspond to observations (e.g. microarrays). Each row of |
rowGroup |
character vector whose components contain the group label (e.g. a character string) for
each row of |
rowID |
character vector of row identifiers. This should include all the rows from
rownames( |
method |
character string for determining which method is used to choose a probe among
exactly 2 corresponding rows or when connectivityBasedCollapsing=FALSE. These are the options:
"MaxMean" (default) or "MinMean" = choose the row with the highest or lowest mean value, respectively.
"maxRowVariance" = choose the row with the highest variance (across the columns of |
connectivityBasedCollapsing |
logical value.
If TRUE, groups with 3 or more corresponding rows will be represented by the row with the highest
connectivity according to a signed weighted correlation network adjacency matrix among the corresponding
rows. Recall that the connectivity is defined as the rows sum of the adjacency matrix. The signed weighted
adjacency matrix is defined as A=(0.5+0.5*COR)^power where power is determined by the argument
|
methodFunction |
character string. It only needs to be specified if method="function" otherwise its input is ignored. Must be a function that takes a Nr x Nc matrix of numbers as input and outputs a vector with the length Nc (e.g., colMeans). This will then be the method used for collapsing values for multiple rows into a single value for the row. |
connectivityPower |
Positive number (typically integer) for specifying the threshold (power) used
to construct the signed weighted adjacency matrix, see the description of |
selectFewestMissing |
logical values. If TRUE (default), the input expression matrix is trimmed such that for each group only the rows with the fewest number of missing values are retained. In situations where an equal number of values are missing (or where there is no missing data), all rows for a given group are retained. Whether this value is set to TRUE or FALSE, all rows with >90% missing data are omitted from the analysis. |
thresholdCombine |
Number between -1 and 1, or NA. If NA (default), this input is ignored. If a number between -1 and 1 is input, this value is taken as a threshold value, and collapseRows proceeds following the "maxMean" method, but ONLY for ids with correlations of R>thresholdCombine. Specifically: ...1) If there is one id/group, keep the id ...2) If there are 2 ids/group, take the maximum mean expression if their correlation is > thresholdCombine ...3) If there are 3+ ids/group, iteratively repeat (2) for the 2 ids with the highest correlation until all ids remaining have correlation < thresholdCombine for each group Note that this option usually results in more than one id per group; therefore, one must use care when implementing this option for use in comparisons between multiple matrices / data frames. |
The function is robust to missing data. Also, if rowIDs are missing, they are inferred according to the
rownames of datET when possible.
When a group corresponds to only 1 row then it is represented by this row since there is no other choice.
Having said this, the row may be removed if it contains an excessive amount of missing data (90 percent or
more missing values), see the description of the argument selectFewestMissing
for more details.
A group is represented by a corresponding row with the fewest number of missing data if
selectFewestMissing
has been set to TRUE.
Often several rows have the same minimum number of missing values (or no missing values) and a representative
must be chosen among those rows. In this case we distinguish 2 situations:
(1) If a group corresponds to exactly 2 rows then the corresponding row with the highest average is selected
if method="maxMean"
. Alternative methods can be chosen as described in method
.
(2) If a group corresponds to more than 2 rows, then the function calculates a signed weighted correlation
network (with power specified in connectivityPower
) among the corresponding rows if
connectivityBasedCollapsing=TRUE
. Next the function calculates the network connectivity of each row
(closely related to the sum or correlations with the other matching rows). Next it chooses the most highly
connected row as representative. If connectivityBasedCollapsing=FALSE, then method
is used.
For both situations, if more than one row has the same value, the first such row is chosen.
Setting thresholdCombine
is a special case of this function, as not all ids for a single group are
necessarily collapsed–only those with similar expression patterns are collapsed. We suggest
using this option when the goal is to decrease the number of ids for computational reasons, but when
ALL ids for a single group should not be combined (for example, if two probes could represent different
splice variants for the same gene for many genes on a microarray).
Example application: when dealing with microarray gene expression data then the rows of datET
may
correspond to unique probe identifiers and rowGroup
may contain corresponding gene symbols. Recall
that multiple probes (specified using rowID
=ProbeID) may correspond to the same gene symbol
(specified using rowGroup
=GeneSymbol). In this case, datET
contains the input expression data
with rows as rowIDs and output expression data with rows as gene symbols, collapsing all probes for a given
gene symbol into one representative.
The output is a list with the following components.
datETcollapsed |
is a numeric matrix with the same columns as the input matrix |
group2row |
is a matrix whose rows correspond to the unique group labels and whose 2 columns report
which group label (first column called |
.
selectedRow |
is a logical vector whose components are TRUE for probes selected as representatives and FALSE otherwise. It has the same length as the vector probeID. Set to NULL if method="ME" or "function". |
Jeremy A. Miller, Steve Horvath, Peter Langfelder, Chaochao Cai
Miller JA, Langfelder P, Cai C, Horvath S (2010) Strategies for optimally aggregating gene expression data: The collapseRows R function. Technical Report.
######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 1: # The code simulates a data frame (called dat1) of correlated rows. # You can skip this part and start at the line called Typical Input Data # The first column of the data frame will contain row identifiers # number of columns (e.g. observations or microarrays) m=60 # number of rows (e.g. variables or probes on a microarray) n=500 # seed module eigenvector for the simulateModule function MEtrue=rnorm(m) # numeric data frame of n rows and m columns datNumeric=data.frame(t(simulateModule(MEtrue,n))) RowIdentifier=paste("Probe", 1:n, sep="") ColumnName=paste("Sample",1:m, sep="") dimnames(datNumeric)[[2]]=ColumnName # Let us now generate a data frame whose first column contains the rowID dat1=data.frame(RowIdentifier, datNumeric) #we simulate a vector with n/5 group labels, i.e. each row group corresponds to 5 rows rowGroup=rep( paste("Group",1:(n/5), sep=""), 5 ) # Typical Input Data # Since the first column of dat1 contains the RowIdentifier, we use the following code datET=dat1[,-1] rowID=dat1[,1] # assign row names according to the RowIdentifier dimnames(datET)[[1]]=rowID # run the function and save it in an object collapse.object=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID) # this creates the collapsed data where # the first column contains the group name # the second column reports the corresponding selected row name (the representative) # and the remaining columns report the values of the representative row dat1Collapsed=data.frame( collapse.object$group2row, collapse.object$datETcollapsed) dat1Collapsed[1:5,1:5] ######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 2: # Using the same data frame as above, run collapseRows with a user-inputted function. # In this case we will use the mean. Note that since we are choosing some combination # of the probe values for each gene, the group2row and selectedRow output # parameters are not meaningful. collapse.object.mean=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="function", methodFunction=colMeans)[[1]] # Note that in this situation, running the following code produces the identical results: collapse.object.mean.2=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="Average")[[1]] ######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 3: # Using collapseRows to calculate the module eigengene. # First we create some sample data as in example 1 (or use your own!) m=60 n=500 MEtrue=rnorm(m) datNumeric=data.frame(t(simulateModule(MEtrue,n))) # In this example, rows are genes, and groups are modules. RowIdentifier=paste("Gene", 1:n, sep="") ColumnName=paste("Sample",1:m, sep="") dimnames(datNumeric)[[2]]=ColumnName dat1=data.frame(RowIdentifier, datNumeric) # We simulate a vector with n/100 modules, i.e. each row group corresponds to 100 rows rowGroup=rep( paste("Module",1:(n/100), sep=""), 100 ) datET=dat1[,-1] rowID=dat1[,1] dimnames(datET)[[1]]=rowID # run the function and save it in an object collapse.object.ME=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="ME")[[1]] # Note that in this situation, running the following code produces the identical results: collapse.object.ME.2 = t(moduleEigengenes(expr=t(datET),colors=rowGroup)$eigengene) colnames(collapse.object.ME.2) = ColumnName rownames(collapse.object.ME.2) = sort(unique(rowGroup))
######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 1: # The code simulates a data frame (called dat1) of correlated rows. # You can skip this part and start at the line called Typical Input Data # The first column of the data frame will contain row identifiers # number of columns (e.g. observations or microarrays) m=60 # number of rows (e.g. variables or probes on a microarray) n=500 # seed module eigenvector for the simulateModule function MEtrue=rnorm(m) # numeric data frame of n rows and m columns datNumeric=data.frame(t(simulateModule(MEtrue,n))) RowIdentifier=paste("Probe", 1:n, sep="") ColumnName=paste("Sample",1:m, sep="") dimnames(datNumeric)[[2]]=ColumnName # Let us now generate a data frame whose first column contains the rowID dat1=data.frame(RowIdentifier, datNumeric) #we simulate a vector with n/5 group labels, i.e. each row group corresponds to 5 rows rowGroup=rep( paste("Group",1:(n/5), sep=""), 5 ) # Typical Input Data # Since the first column of dat1 contains the RowIdentifier, we use the following code datET=dat1[,-1] rowID=dat1[,1] # assign row names according to the RowIdentifier dimnames(datET)[[1]]=rowID # run the function and save it in an object collapse.object=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID) # this creates the collapsed data where # the first column contains the group name # the second column reports the corresponding selected row name (the representative) # and the remaining columns report the values of the representative row dat1Collapsed=data.frame( collapse.object$group2row, collapse.object$datETcollapsed) dat1Collapsed[1:5,1:5] ######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 2: # Using the same data frame as above, run collapseRows with a user-inputted function. # In this case we will use the mean. Note that since we are choosing some combination # of the probe values for each gene, the group2row and selectedRow output # parameters are not meaningful. collapse.object.mean=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="function", methodFunction=colMeans)[[1]] # Note that in this situation, running the following code produces the identical results: collapse.object.mean.2=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="Average")[[1]] ######################################################################## # EXAMPLE 3: # Using collapseRows to calculate the module eigengene. # First we create some sample data as in example 1 (or use your own!) m=60 n=500 MEtrue=rnorm(m) datNumeric=data.frame(t(simulateModule(MEtrue,n))) # In this example, rows are genes, and groups are modules. RowIdentifier=paste("Gene", 1:n, sep="") ColumnName=paste("Sample",1:m, sep="") dimnames(datNumeric)[[2]]=ColumnName dat1=data.frame(RowIdentifier, datNumeric) # We simulate a vector with n/100 modules, i.e. each row group corresponds to 100 rows rowGroup=rep( paste("Module",1:(n/100), sep=""), 100 ) datET=dat1[,-1] rowID=dat1[,1] dimnames(datET)[[1]]=rowID # run the function and save it in an object collapse.object.ME=collapseRows(datET=datET, rowGroup=rowGroup, rowID=rowID, method="ME")[[1]] # Note that in this situation, running the following code produces the identical results: collapse.object.ME.2 = t(moduleEigengenes(expr=t(datET),colors=rowGroup)$eigengene) colnames(collapse.object.ME.2) = ColumnName rownames(collapse.object.ME.2) = sort(unique(rowGroup))
This function selects only the most informative probe for each gene in a kME table, only keeping the probe which has the highest kME with respect to any module in the module membership matrix. This function is a special case of the function collapseRows.
collapseRowsUsingKME(MM, Gin, Pin = NULL, kMEcols = 1:dim(MM)[2])
collapseRowsUsingKME(MM, Gin, Pin = NULL, kMEcols = 1:dim(MM)[2])
MM |
A module membership (kME) table with at least a subset of the columns corresponding to kME values. |
Gin |
Genes labels in a 1 to 1 correspondence with the rows of MM. |
Pin |
If NULL (default), rownames of MM are assumed to be probe IDs. If entered, Pin must be the same length as Gin and correspond to probe IDs for MM. |
kMEcols |
A numeric vector showing which columns in MM correspond to kME values. The default is all of them. |
datETcollapsed |
A numeric matrix with the same columns as the input matrix MM, but with rows corresponding to the genes rather than the probes. |
group2row |
A matrix whose rows correspond to the unique gene labels and whose 2 columns report which gene label (first column called group) is represented by what probe (second column called selectedRowID) |
selectedRow |
A logical vector whose components are TRUE for probes selected as representatives and FALSE otherwise. It has the same length as the vector Pin. |
Jeremy Miller
# Example: first simulate some data set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D) simDatA = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) simDatB = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) Gin = c(colnames(simDatA$datExpr),colnames(simDatB$datExpr)) Pin = paste("Probe",1:length(Gin),sep=".") datExpr = cbind(simDatA$datExpr, simDatB$datExpr) MM = corAndPvalue(datExpr,ME1)$cor # Now run the function and see some example output results = collapseRowsUsingKME(MM, Gin, Pin) head(results$MMcollapsed) head(results$group2Row) head(results$selectedRow)
# Example: first simulate some data set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D) simDatA = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) simDatB = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) Gin = c(colnames(simDatA$datExpr),colnames(simDatB$datExpr)) Pin = paste("Probe",1:length(Gin),sep=".") datExpr = cbind(simDatA$datExpr, simDatB$datExpr) MM = corAndPvalue(datExpr,ME1)$cor # Now run the function and see some example output results = collapseRowsUsingKME(MM, Gin, Pin) head(results$MMcollapsed) head(results$group2Row) head(results$selectedRow)
Performs garbage collection until free memory idicators show no change.
collectGarbage()
collectGarbage()
None.
Steve Horvath
Fast calculation of column- and row-wise quantiles of a matrix at a single probability. Implemented via compiled
code, it is much faster than the equivalent apply(data, 2, quantile, prob = p)
.
colQuantileC(data, p) rowQuantileC(data, p)
colQuantileC(data, p) rowQuantileC(data, p)
data |
a numerical matrix column-wise quantiles are desired. Missing values are removed. |
p |
a single probability at which the quantile is to be calculated. |
At present, only one quantile type is implemented, namely the default type 7 used by R.
A vector of length equal the number of columns (for colQuantileC
) or rows (for rowQuantileC
)
in data
containing the column- or row-wise quantiles.
Peter Langfelder
quantile
;
pquantile
for another way of calculating quantiles across structured data.
This function computes 3 types of network concepts (also known as network indices or statistics) based on an adjacency matrix and optionally a node significance measure.
conformityBasedNetworkConcepts(adj, GS = NULL)
conformityBasedNetworkConcepts(adj, GS = NULL)
adj |
adjacency matrix. A symmetric matrix with components between 0 and 1. |
GS |
optional node significance measure. A vector with length equal the dimension of |
This function computes 3 types of network concepts (also known as network indices or statistics) based on an adjacency matrix and optionally a node significance measure. Specifically, it computes I) fundamental network concepts, II) conformity based network concepts, and III) approximate conformity based network concepts. These network concepts are defined for any symmetric adjacency matrix (weighted and unweighted). The network concepts are described in Dong and Horvath (2007) and Horvath and Dong (2008). In the following, we use the term gene and node interchangeably since these methods were originally developed for gene networks. In the following, we briefly describe the 3 types of network concepts:
Type I: fundamental network concepts are defined as a function of the off-diagonal elements of an adjacency matrix A and/or a node significance measure GS. Type II: conformity-based network concepts are functions of the off-diagonal elements of the conformity based adjacency matrix A.CF=CF*t(CF) and/or the node significance measure. These network concepts are defined for any network for which a conformity vector can be defined. Details: For any adjacency matrix A, the conformity vector CF is calculated by requiring that A[i,j] is approximately equal to CF[i]*CF[j]. Using the conformity one can define the matrix A.CF=CF*t(CF) which is the outer product of the conformity vector with itself. In general, A.CF is not an adjacency matrix since its diagonal elements are different from 1. If the off-diagonal elements of A.CF are similar to those of A according to the Frobenius matrix norm, then A is approximately factorizable. To measure the factorizability of a network, one can calculate the Factorizability, which is a number between 0 and 1 (Dong and Horvath 2007). The conformity is defined using a monotonic, iterative algorithm that maximizes the factorizability measure. Type III: approximate conformity based network concepts are functions of all elements of the conformity based adjacency matrix A.CF (including the diagonal) and/or the node significance measure GS. These network concepts are very useful for deriving relationships between network concepts in networks that are approximately factorizable.
A list with the following components:
Factorizability |
number between 0 and 1 giving the factorizability of the matrix. The closer to 1 the higher the evidence of factorizability, that is, A-I is close to outer(CF,CF)-diag(CF^2). |
fundamentalNCs |
fundamental network concepts, that is network concepts calculated directly from
the given adjacency matrix |
conformityBasedNCs |
network concepts based on an approximate adjacency matrix given by the
outer product of the conformity vector but with unit diagonal. A list with components |
approximateConformityBasedNCs |
network concepts based on an approximate adjacency matrix given by
the outer product of the conformity vector. A list with components |
Steve Horvath
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24 Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
networkConcepts
for calculation of eigennode based network concepts for a
correlation network;
fundamentalNetworkConcepts
for calculation of fundamental network concepts only.
The function calculates the conformity based approximation A.CF
of an adjacency matrix and a factorizability
measure Factorizability
. If a module assignment Cl
is provided, it also estimates a corresponding intermodular adjacency matrix. In this case, function automatically carries out the module- and conformity based decomposition of the adjacency matrix described in chapter 2 of (Horvath 2011).
conformityDecomposition(adj, Cl = NULL)
conformityDecomposition(adj, Cl = NULL)
adj |
a symmetric numeric matrix (or data frame) whose entries lie between 0 and 1. |
Cl |
a vector (or factor variable) of length equal to the number of rows of |
We distinguish two situation depending on whether or not Cl
equals NULL
.
1) Let us start out assuming that Cl = NULL
. In this case,
the function calculates the conformity vector for a general, possibly non-factorizable network adj
by minimizing a quadratic (sums of squares) loss function. The conformity and factorizability for an adjacency matrix is defined in (Dong and Horvath 2007, Horvath and Dong 2008) but we briefly describe it in the following. A network is called exactly factorizable if the pairwise connection strength (adjacency) between 2 network nodes can be factored into node specific contributions, named node 'conformity', i.e. if adj[i,j]=Conformity[i]*Conformity[j]
. The conformity turns out to be highly related to the network connectivity (aka degree). If adj
is not exactly factorizable, then the function conformityDecomposition
calculates a conformity vector of the exactly factorizable network that best approximates adj
. The factorizability measure Factorizability
is a number between 0 and 1. The higher Factorizability
, the more factorizable is adj
. Warning: the algorithm may only converge to a local optimum and it may not converge at all. Also see the notes below.
2) Let us now assume that Cl
is not NULL, i.e. it specifies the module assignment of each node.
Then the function calculates a module- and CF-based approximation of adj
(explained in chapter 2 in Horvath 2011). In this case, the function calculates a conformity vector Conformity
and a matrix IntermodularAdjacency
such that adj[i,j]
is approximately equal to
Conformity[i]*Conformity[j]*IntermodularAdjacency[module.index[i],module.index[j]]
where module.index[i]
is the row of the matrix IntermodularAdjacency
that corresponds to the module assigned to node i.
To estimate Conformity
and a matrix IntermodularAdjacency
, the function attempts to minimize a quadratic loss function (sums of squares).
Currently, the function only implements a heuristic algorithm for optimizing the objective function (chapter 2 of Horvath 2011). Another, more accurate Majorization Minorization (MM) algorithm for the decomposition is implemented in the function propensityDecomposition
by Ranola et al (2011).
A.CF |
a symmetric matrix that approximates the input matrix |
Conformity |
a numeric vector whose entries correspond to the rows of |
IntermodularAdjacency |
a symmetric matrix (data frame) whose rows and columns correspond to the number of modules specified in |
Factorizability |
is a number between 0 and 1. If |
Cl.level |
is a vector of character strings which correspond to the factor levels of the module assignment |
IntramodularFactorizability |
is a numeric vector of length equal to the number of modules specified by |
listConformity |
Regarding the situation when Cl=NULL
.
One can easily show that the conformity vector is not unique if adj
contains only 2 nodes. However, for more than 2 nodes the conformity is uniquely defined when dealing with an exactly factorizable weighted network whose entries adj[i,j]
are larger than 0. In this case, one can get explicit formulas for the conformity (Dong and Horvath 2007).
Steve Horvath
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, June 1:24 Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis. PloS Computational Biology. 4(8): e1000117. PMID: 18704157 Horvath S (2011) Weighted Network Analysis. Applications in Genomics and Systems Biology. Springer Book. ISBN: 978-1-4419-8818-8 Ranola JMO, Langfelder P, Song L, Horvath S, Lange K (2011) An MM algorithm for the module- and propensity based decomposition of a network. Currently a draft.
conformityBasedNetworkConcepts
# assume the number of nodes can be divided by 2 and by 3 n=6 # here is a perfectly factorizable matrix A=matrix(1,nrow=n,ncol=n) # this provides the conformity vector and factorizability measure conformityDecomposition(adj=A) # now assume we have a class assignment Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/2,n/2)) conformityDecomposition(adj=A,Cl=Cl) # here is a block diagonal matrix blockdiag.A=A blockdiag.A[1:(n/3),(n/3+1):n]=0 blockdiag.A[(n/3+1):n , 1:(n/3)]=0 block.Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/3,2*n/3)) conformityDecomposition(adj= blockdiag.A,Cl=block.Cl) # another block diagonal matrix blockdiag.A=A blockdiag.A[1:(n/3),(n/3+1):n]=0.3 blockdiag.A[(n/3+1):n , 1:(n/3)]=0.3 block.Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/3,2*n/3)) conformityDecomposition(adj= blockdiag.A,Cl=block.Cl)
# assume the number of nodes can be divided by 2 and by 3 n=6 # here is a perfectly factorizable matrix A=matrix(1,nrow=n,ncol=n) # this provides the conformity vector and factorizability measure conformityDecomposition(adj=A) # now assume we have a class assignment Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/2,n/2)) conformityDecomposition(adj=A,Cl=Cl) # here is a block diagonal matrix blockdiag.A=A blockdiag.A[1:(n/3),(n/3+1):n]=0 blockdiag.A[(n/3+1):n , 1:(n/3)]=0 block.Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/3,2*n/3)) conformityDecomposition(adj= blockdiag.A,Cl=block.Cl) # another block diagonal matrix blockdiag.A=A blockdiag.A[1:(n/3),(n/3+1):n]=0.3 blockdiag.A[(n/3+1):n , 1:(n/3)]=0.3 block.Cl=rep(c(1,2),c(n/3,2*n/3)) conformityDecomposition(adj= blockdiag.A,Cl=block.Cl)
This function calculates a single consensus from given individual data, optionally first calibrating the individual data to make them comparable.
consensusCalculation( individualData, consensusOptions, useBlocks = NULL, randomSeed = NULL, saveCalibratedIndividualData = FALSE, calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualData-%a-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options: the data can be either saved or returned but not both. saveConsensusData = NULL, consensusDataFileNames = "consensusData-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples= FALSE, # Internal handling of data useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behaviour collectGarbage = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
consensusCalculation( individualData, consensusOptions, useBlocks = NULL, randomSeed = NULL, saveCalibratedIndividualData = FALSE, calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualData-%a-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options: the data can be either saved or returned but not both. saveConsensusData = NULL, consensusDataFileNames = "consensusData-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples= FALSE, # Internal handling of data useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behaviour collectGarbage = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
individualData |
Individual data from which the consensus is to be calculated. It can be either a list or a
|
consensusOptions |
A list of class |
useBlocks |
When |
randomSeed |
If non- |
saveCalibratedIndividualData |
Logical: should calibrated individual data be saved? |
calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern |
Pattern from which file names for saving calibrated individual data are determined. The conversions
|
saveConsensusData |
Logical: should final consensus be saved ( |
consensusDataFileNames |
Pattern from which file names for saving the final consensus are determined. The conversions
|
getCalibrationSamples |
When calibration method in the |
useDiskCache |
Logical: should disk cache be used for consensus calculations? The disk cache can be used to sture chunks of
calibrated data that are small enough to fit one chunk from each set into memory (blocks may be small enough
to fit one block of one set into memory, but not small enogh to fit one block from all sets in a consensus
calculation into memory at the same time). Using disk cache is slower but lessens the memry footprint of
the calculation.
As a general guide, if individual data are split into blocks, we
recommend setting this argument to |
chunkSize |
Integer giving the chunk size. If left |
cacheDir |
Directory in which to save cache files. The files are deleted on normal exit but persist if the function terminates abnormally. |
cacheBase |
Base for the file names of cache files. |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage collection be forced after each major calculation? |
verbose |
Integer level of verbosity of diagnostic messages. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
Indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Consensus is defined as the element-wise (also known as "parallel") quantile of the individual data at
probability given by the consensusQuantile
element of consensusOptions
. Depending on the value
of component calibration
of consensusOptions
, the individual data are first calibrated. For
consensusOptions$calibration="full quantile"
, the individual data are quantile normalized using
normalize.quantiles
. For
consensusOptions$calibration="single quantile"
, the individual data are raised to a power such that
the quantiles at probability consensusOptions$calibrationQuantile
are the same.
For consensusOptions$calibration="none"
, the individual data are not calibrated.
A list with the following components:
consensusData |
A |
nSets |
Number of input data sets. |
saveCalibratedIndividualData |
Copy of the input |
calibratedIndividualData |
If input |
calibrationSamples |
If |
originCount |
A vector of length |
Peter Langfelder
Consensus network analysis was originally described in Langfelder P, Horvath S. Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54 https://bmcsystbiol.biomedcentral.com/articles/10.1186/1752-0509-1-54
normalize.quantiles
for quantile normalization.
This function makes a consensus network using all of the default values in the WGCNA library. Details regarding how consensus modules are formed can be found here: http://horvath.genetics.ucla.edu/html/CoexpressionNetwork/Rpackages/WGCNA/Tutorials/Consensus-NetworkConstruction-man.pdf
consensusDissTOMandTree(multiExpr, softPower, TOM = NULL)
consensusDissTOMandTree(multiExpr, softPower, TOM = NULL)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see checkSets). A vector of lists, one per set. Each set must contain a component data that contains the expression data. Rows correspond to samples and columns to genes or probes. Two or more sets of data must be included and adjacencies cannot be used. |
softPower |
Soft thresholding power used to make each of the networks in multiExpr. |
TOM |
A LIST of matrices holding the topological overlap corresponding to the sets in multiExpr, if they have already been calculated. Otherwise, keep TOM set as NULL (default), and TOM similarities will be calculated using the WGCNA defaults. If inputted, this variable must be a list with each entree a TOM corresponding to the same entries in multiExpr. |
consensusTOM |
The TOM difference matrix (1-TOM similarity) corresponding to the consensus network. |
consTree |
Returned value is the same as that of hclust: An object of class hclust which describes the tree produced by the clustering process. This tree corresponds to the dissimilarity matrix consensusTOM. |
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath, Jeremy Miller
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
# Example consensus network using two simulated data sets set.seed = 100 MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = sample(1:100,50) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen) system.time({ dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.2), signed=TRUE)}) system.time({ dat2 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.18, 0.11, 0.11, 0.09, 0.11, 0.23),signed=TRUE)}) multiExpr = list(S1=list(data=dat1$datExpr),S2=list(data=dat2$datExpr)) softPower=8 system.time( { consensusNetwork = consensusDissTOMandTree(multiExpr, softPower)}) system.time({ plotDendroAndColors(consensusNetwork$consTree, cbind(labels2colors(dat1$allLabels), labels2colors(dat2$allLabels)),c("S1","S2"), dendroLabels=FALSE)})
# Example consensus network using two simulated data sets set.seed = 100 MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = sample(1:100,50) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen) system.time({ dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.2, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.2), signed=TRUE)}) system.time({ dat2 = simulateDatExpr(ME,300,c(0.18, 0.11, 0.11, 0.09, 0.11, 0.23),signed=TRUE)}) multiExpr = list(S1=list(data=dat1$datExpr),S2=list(data=dat2$datExpr)) softPower=8 system.time( { consensusNetwork = consensusDissTOMandTree(multiExpr, softPower)}) system.time({ plotDendroAndColors(consensusNetwork$consTree, cbind(labels2colors(dat1$allLabels), labels2colors(dat2$allLabels)),c("S1","S2"), dendroLabels=FALSE)})
Calculate consensus kME (eigengene-based connectivities) across multiple data sets, typically following a consensus module analysis.
consensusKME( multiExpr, moduleLabels, multiEigengenes = NULL, consensusQuantile = 0, signed = TRUE, useModules = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getQvalues = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(calculateQvalue = getQvalues, pValueMethod = "scale"), setNames = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = if (is.numeric(moduleLabels)) 0 else "grey")
consensusKME( multiExpr, moduleLabels, multiEigengenes = NULL, consensusQuantile = 0, signed = TRUE, useModules = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getQvalues = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(calculateQvalue = getQvalues, pValueMethod = "scale"), setNames = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = if (is.numeric(moduleLabels)) 0 else "grey")
multiExpr |
Expression (or other numeric) data in a multi-set format. A vector of lists; in each list there must be a component named ‘data’ whose content is a matrix or dataframe or array of dimension 2. |
moduleLabels |
Module labels: one label for each gene in |
multiEigengenes |
Optional eigengenes of modules specified in |
signed |
logical: should the network be considered signed? In signed networks ( |
useModules |
Optional specification of module labels to which the analysis should be restricted. This could be useful
if there are many modules, most of which are not interesting. Note that the "grey" module cannot be used
with |
consensusQuantile |
Quantile for the consensus calculation. Should be a number between 0 (minimum) and 1. |
metaAnalysisWeights |
Optional specification of meta-analysis weights for each input set. If given, must be a numeric vector
of length equal the number of input data sets (i.e., |
corAndPvalueFnc |
Function that calculates associations between expression profiles and eigengenes. See details. |
corOptions |
List giving additional arguments to function |
corComponent |
Name of the component of output of |
getQvalues |
logical: should q-values (estimates of FDR) be calculated? |
useRankPvalue |
Logical: should the |
rankPvalueOptions |
Additional options for function |
setNames |
names for the input sets. If not given, will be taken from |
excludeGrey |
logical: should the grey module be excluded from the kME tables? Since the grey module is typically not a real module, it makes little sense to report kME values for it. |
greyLabel |
label that labels the grey module. |
The function corAndPvalueFnc
is currently
is expected to accept arguments x
(gene expression profiles), y
(eigengene expression
profiles), and alternative
with possibilities at least "greater", "two.sided"
.
Any additional arguments can be passed via corOptions
.
The function corAndPvalueFnc
should return a list which at the least contains (1) a matrix
of associations of genes and eigengenes (this component should have the name given by corComponent
),
and (2) a matrix of the corresponding p-values, named "p" or "p.value". Other components are optional but
for full functionality should include
(3) nObs
giving the number of observations for each association (which is the number of samples less
number of missing data - this can in principle vary from association to association), and (4) Z
giving a Z static for each observation. If these are missing, nObs
is calculated in the main
function, and calculations using the Z statistic are skipped.
Data frame with the following components (for easier readability the order here is not the same as in the actual output):
ID |
Gene ID, taken from the column names of the first input data set |
consensus.kME.1 , consensus.kME.2 , ...
|
Consensus kME (that is, the requested quantile of the kMEs in the
individual data sets)in each module for each gene across the input data
sets. The module labels (here 1, 2, etc.) correspond to those in |
weightedAverage.equalWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. |
weightedAverage.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Weighted average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. The weight of each data set is proportional to the square root of the number of samples in the set. |
weightedAverage.DoFWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Weighted average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. The weight of each data set is proportional to number of samples in the set. |
weightedAverage.userWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
(Only present if input |
meta.Z.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set equally. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by the square root of the number of
samples. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by the number of
samples. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.userWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by |
meta.p.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.p.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the equal-weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.p.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the meta-analysis Z statistics with weights proportional to the square root of the
number of samples. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.p.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the degree-of-freedom weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.userWeights.kME1 , meta.p.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the user-supplied weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if
|
meta.q.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.q.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the equal-weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
meta.q.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.q.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the meta-analysis p-values with weights proportional to the square root of the
number of samples. Only present if
|
meta.q.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.q.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the degree-of-freedom weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
meta.q.userWeights.kME1 , meta.q.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the user-specified weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
The next set of columns contain the results of function rankPvalue
and are only present if
input useRankPvalue
is TRUE
. Some columns may be missing depending on the options specified in
rankPvalueOptions
. We explicitly list columns that are based on weighing each set equally; names of
these columns carry the suffix .equalWeights
pValueExtremeRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueExtremeRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
This is the minimum between pValueLowRank and pValueHighRank, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueLowRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueHighRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueHighRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueExtremeScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueExtremeScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
This is the minimum between pValueLowScale and pValueHighScale, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueLowScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
pValueHighScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueHighScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
qValueExtremeRank.ME1.equalWeights , qValueExtremeRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeRank |
qValueLowRank.ME1.equalWeights , qValueLowRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowRank |
qValueHighRank.ME1.equalWeights , lueHighRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighRank |
qValueExtremeScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueExtremeScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeScale |
qValueLowScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueLowScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowScale |
qValueHighScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueHighScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighScale |
... |
Analogous columns corresponding to weighing individual sets by the square root of the number of
samples, by number of samples, and by user weights (if given). The corresponding column name suffixes are
|
The following set of columns summarize kME in individual input data sets.
kME1.Set_1 , kME1.Set_2 , ... , kME2.Set_1 , kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. |
p.kME1.Set_1 , p.kME1.Set_2 , ... , p.kME2.Set_1 , p.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
p-values corresponding to kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. |
q.kME1.Set_1 , q.kME1.Set_2 , ... , q.kME2.Set_1 , q.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
q-values corresponding to
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. Only returned if |
Z.kME1.Set_1 , Z.kME1.Set_2 , ... , Z.kME2.Set_1 , Z.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
Z statistics corresponding to
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. Only present if the function
|
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S., WGCNA: an R package for weighted correlation network analysis. BMC Bioinformatics. 2008 Dec 29; 9:559.
signedKME for eigengene based connectivity in a single data set. corAndPvalue, bicorAndPvalue for two alternatives for calculating correlations and the corresponding p-values and Z scores. Both can be used with this function.
Calculates consensus dissimilarity (1-cor)
of given module eigengenes realized in several sets.
consensusMEDissimilarity(MEs, useAbs = FALSE, useSets = NULL, method = "consensus")
consensusMEDissimilarity(MEs, useAbs = FALSE, useSets = NULL, method = "consensus")
MEs |
Module eigengenes of the same modules in several sets. |
useAbs |
Controls whether absolute value of correlation should be used instead of correlation in the calculation of dissimilarity. |
useSets |
If the consensus is to include only a selection of the given sets, this vector (or
scalar in the case of a single set) can be used to specify the selection. If |
method |
A character string giving the method to use. Allowed values are (abbreviations of)
|
This function calculates the
individual set dissimilarities of the given eigengenes in each set, then takes the (parallel) maximum or
average over all sets. For details on the structure of imput data, see checkSets
.
A dataframe containing the matrix of dissimilarities, with names
and rownames
set
appropriately.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
Reorder given (eigen-)vectors such that similar ones (as measured by correlation) are next to each
other. This is a multi-set version of orderMEs
; the dissimilarity used can be of consensus
type (for each pair of eigenvectors the consensus dissimilarity is the maximum of individual set
dissimilarities over all sets) or of majority type (for each pair of eigenvectors the consensus
dissimilarity is the average of individual set dissimilarities over all sets).
consensusOrderMEs(MEs, useAbs = FALSE, useSets = NULL, greyLast = TRUE, greyName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""), method = "consensus")
consensusOrderMEs(MEs, useAbs = FALSE, useSets = NULL, greyLast = TRUE, greyName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""), method = "consensus")
MEs |
Module eigengenes of several sets in a multi-set format (see |
useAbs |
Controls whether vector similarity should be given by absolute value of correlation or plain correlation. |
useSets |
Allows the user to specify for which sets the eigengene ordering is to be performed. |
greyLast |
Normally the color grey is reserved for unassigned genes; hence the grey module is not
a proper module and it is conventional to put it last. If this is not desired, set the parameter to
|
greyName |
Name of the grey module eigengene. |
method |
A character string giving the method to be used calculating the consensus
dissimilarity. Allowed values are (abbreviations of)
|
Ordering module eigengenes is useful for plotting purposes. This function calculates the consensus
or majority
dissimilarity of given eigengenes over the sets specified by useSets
(defaults to all sets).
A hierarchical dendrogram is calculated using the dissimilarity and the order given by the dendrogram is
used for the eigengenes in all other sets.
A vector of lists of the same type as MEs
containing the re-ordered eigengenes.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
moduleEigengenes
, multiSetMEs
, orderMEs
Implementation of a consensus variant of K-means clustering for expression data across multiple data sets.
consensusProjectiveKMeans( multiExpr, preferredSize = 5000, nCenters = NULL, sizePenaltyPower = 4, networkType = "unsigned", randomSeed = 54321, checkData = TRUE, imputeMissing = TRUE, useMean = (length(multiExpr) > 3), maxIterations = 1000, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
consensusProjectiveKMeans( multiExpr, preferredSize = 5000, nCenters = NULL, sizePenaltyPower = 4, networkType = "unsigned", randomSeed = 54321, checkData = TRUE, imputeMissing = TRUE, useMean = (length(multiExpr) > 3), maxIterations = 1000, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
preferredSize |
preferred maximum size of clusters. |
nCenters |
number of initial clusters. Empirical evidence suggests that more centers will give a
better preclustering; the default is |
sizePenaltyPower |
parameter specifying how severe is the penalty for clusters that exceed
|
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. |
checkData |
logical: should data be checked for genes with zero variance and
genes and samples with excessive numbers of missing samples? Bad samples are ignored; returned cluster
assignment for bad genes will be |
imputeMissing |
logical: should missing values in |
useMean |
logical: should mean distance across sets be used instead of maximum? See details. |
maxIterations |
maximum iterations to be attempted. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The principal aim of this function within WGCNA is to pre-cluster a large number of genes into smaller blocks that can be handled using standard WGCNA techniques.
This function implements a variant of K-means clustering that is suitable for co-expression analysis.
Cluster centers are defined by the first principal component, and distances by correlation. Consensus
distance across several sets is defined as the maximum of the corresponding distances in individual
sets; however, if useMean
is set, the mean distance will be used instead of the maximum.
The distance between a gene and a center of a cluster is multiplied by a factor of
, thus penalizing clusters whose size exceeds
preferredSize
. The function starts with randomly generated cluster assignment (hence the need to
set the random seed for repeatability) and executes interations of calculating new centers and
reassigning genes to nearest (in the consensus sense) center until the clustering becomes stable.
Before returning, nearby
clusters are iteratively combined if their combined size is below preferredSize
.
Consensus distance defined as maximum of distances in all sets is consistent with the approach taken in
blockwiseConsensusModules
, but the procedure may not converge. Hence it is advisable to use
the mean as consensus in cases where there are multiple data sets (4 or more, say) and/or if the input
data sets are very different.
The standard principal component calculation via the function svd
fails from time to time
(likely a convergence problem of the underlying lapack functions). Such errors are trapped and the
principal component is approximated by a weighted average of expression profiles in the cluster. If
verbose
is set above 2, an informational message is printed whenever this approximation is used.
A list with the following components:
clusters |
a numerical vector with one component per input gene, giving the cluster number in which the gene is assigned. |
centers |
a vector of lists, one list per set. Each list contains a component |
unmergedClusters |
a numerical vector with one component per input gene, giving the cluster number in which the gene was assigned before the final merging step. |
unmergedCenters |
a vector of lists, one list per set. Each list contains a component
|
Peter Langfelder
Given multiple data sets corresponding to the same variables and a grouping of variables into groups, the function selects a representative variable for each group using a variety of possible selection approaches. Typical uses include selecting a representative probe for each gene in microarray data.
consensusRepresentatives( mdx, group, colID, consensusQuantile = 0, method = "MaxMean", useGroupHubs = TRUE, calibration = c("none", "full quantile"), selectionStatisticFnc = NULL, connectivityPower = 1, minProportionPresent = 1, getRepresentativeData = TRUE, statisticFncArguments = list(), adjacencyArguments = list(), verbose = 2, indent = 0)
consensusRepresentatives( mdx, group, colID, consensusQuantile = 0, method = "MaxMean", useGroupHubs = TRUE, calibration = c("none", "full quantile"), selectionStatisticFnc = NULL, connectivityPower = 1, minProportionPresent = 1, getRepresentativeData = TRUE, statisticFncArguments = list(), adjacencyArguments = list(), verbose = 2, indent = 0)
mdx |
A |
group |
Character vector whose components contain the group label (e.g. a character string) for
each entry of |
colID |
Character vector of column identifiers. This must include all the column names from
|
consensusQuantile |
A number between 0 and 1 giving the quantile probability for consensus calculation. 0 means the minimum value (true consensus) will be used. |
method |
character string for determining which method is used to choose the representative
(when |
useGroupHubs |
Logical: if |
calibration |
Character string describing the method of calibration of the selection statistic among
the data sets. Recognized values are |
selectionStatisticFnc |
User-supplied function used to calculate the selection statistic when
|
connectivityPower |
Positive number (typically integer) for specifying the soft-thresholding power used
to construct the signed weighted adjacency matrix, see the description of |
minProportionPresent |
A number between 0 and 1 specifying a filter of candidate probes. Specifically, for each group, the variable
with the maximum consensus proportion of present data is found. Only variables whose consensus proportion of
present data is at least |
getRepresentativeData |
Logical: should the representative data, i.e., |
statisticFncArguments |
A list giving further arguments to the selection statistic function. Can be
used to supply additional arguments to the user-specified |
adjacencyArguments |
Further arguments to the function |
verbose |
Level of verbosity; 0 means silent, larger values will cause progress messages to be printed. |
indent |
Indent for the diagnostic messages; each unit equals two spaces. |
This function was inspired by collapseRows
, but there are also important differences. This function
focuses on selecting representatives; when summarization is more important, collapseRows
provides more
flexibility since it does not require that a single representative be selected.
This function and collapseRows
use different input and ouput conventions; user-specified functions need
to be tailored differently for collapseRows
than for consensusRepresentatives
.
Missing data are allowed and are treated as missing at random. If rowID
is NULL
, it is replaced
by the variable names in mdx
.
All groups with a single variable are represented by that variable, unless the consensus proportion of present
data in the variable is lower than minProportionPresent
, in which case the variable and the group are
excluded from the output.
For all variables belonging to groups with 2 variables (when useGroupHubs=TRUE
) or with at least 2 variables
(when useGroupHubs=FALSE
), selection statistics are calculated in each set (e.g., the selection
statistic may be the mean, variance, etc). This results in a matrix of selection statistics (one entry per
variable per data set). The selection statistics are next optionally calibrated (normalized) between sets to
make them comparable; currently the only implemented calibration method is quantile normalization.
For
each variable, the consensus selection statistic is defined as the
consensus of the (calibrated) selection statistics across the data sets is calculated. The
'consensus' of a vector (say 'x') is simply defined as the quantile with probability
consensusQuantile
of the vector x. Important exception: for the "MinMean"
and
"absMinMean"
methods, the consensus is the quantile with probability 1-consensusQuantile
, since
the idea of the consensus is to select the worst (or close to worst) value across the data sets.
For each group, the representative is selected as the variable with the best (typically highest, but for
"MinMean"
and
"absMinMean"
methods the lowest) consensus selection statistic.
If useGroupHubs=TRUE
, the intra-group connectivity is calculated for all variables in each set. The
intra-group connectivities are optionally calibrated (normalized) between sets, and consensus intra-group
connectivity is calculated similarly to the consensus selection statistic above. In each group, the variable
with the highest consensus intra-group connectivity is chosen as the representative.
representatives |
A named vector giving, for each group, the selected representative (input |
varSelected |
A logical vector with one entry per variable (column) in input |
representativeData |
Only present if |
Peter Langfelder, based on code by Jeremy Miller
multiData
for a description of the multiData
structures;
collapseRows
that solves a related but different problem. Please note the differences in input
and output!
Calculation of a consensus network (topological overlap).
consensusTOM( # Supply either ... # ... information needed to calculate individual TOMs multiExpr, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # ... or individual TOM information individualTOMInfo = NULL, useIndivTOMSubset = NULL, ##### Consensus calculation options useBlocks = NULL, networkCalibration = c("single quantile", "full quantile", "none"), # Save calibrated TOMs? saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs = FALSE, calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Simple quantile calibration options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, getNetworkCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, # Return options saveConsensusTOMs = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-Block%b.RData", returnTOMs = FALSE, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", nThreads = 1, # Diagnostic messages verbose = 1, indent = 0)
consensusTOM( # Supply either ... # ... information needed to calculate individual TOMs multiExpr, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction arguments: correlation options corType = "pearson", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, # Adjacency function options power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", checkPower = TRUE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # ... or individual TOM information individualTOMInfo = NULL, useIndivTOMSubset = NULL, ##### Consensus calculation options useBlocks = NULL, networkCalibration = c("single quantile", "full quantile", "none"), # Save calibrated TOMs? saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs = FALSE, calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Simple quantile calibration options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, getNetworkCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, # Return options saveConsensusTOMs = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-Block%b.RData", returnTOMs = FALSE, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", nThreads = 1, # Diagnostic messages verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
checkMissingData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
number of centers for pre-clustering. Larger numbers typically results in better
but slower pre-clustering. The default is |
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
maxPOutliers |
only used for |
quickCor |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation, if used, should revert to Pearson when
median absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
logical: should the cosine version of the correlation calculation be used? The cosine calculation differs from the standard one in that it does not subtract the mean. |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
checkPower |
logical: should basic sanity check be performed on the supplied |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
logical: should missing values in the calculation of adjacency be replaced by 0? |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? Negative TOM values can occur when
|
saveIndividualTOMs |
logical: should individual TOMs be saved to disk for later use? |
individualTOMFileNames |
character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
individualTOMInfo |
Optional data for TOM matrices in individual data sets. This object is returned by
the function |
useIndivTOMSubset |
If |
useBlocks |
optional specification of blocks that should be used for the calcualtions. The default is to use all blocks. |
networkCalibration |
network calibration method. One of "single quantile", "full quantile", "none" (or a unique abbreviation of one of them). |
saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs |
logical: should the calibrated individual TOMs be saved? |
calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern |
pattern of file names for saving calibrated individual TOMs. |
calibrationQuantile |
if |
sampleForCalibration |
if |
sampleForCalibrationFactor |
determines the number of samples for calibration: the number is
|
getNetworkCalibrationSamples |
logical: should the sampled values used for network calibration be returned? |
consensusQuantile |
quantile at which consensus is to be defined. See details. |
useMean |
logical: should the consensus be determined from a (possibly weighted) mean across the data sets rather than a quantile? |
setWeights |
Optional vector (one component per input set) of weights to be used for weighted mean
consensus. Only used when |
saveConsensusTOMs |
logical: should the consensus topological overlap matrices for each block be saved and returned? |
consensusTOMFilePattern |
character string containing the file namefiles containing the
consensus topological overlaps. The tag |
returnTOMs |
logical: should calculated consensus TOM(s) be returned? |
useDiskCache |
should calculated network similarities in individual sets be temporarilly saved
to disk? Saving to disk is somewhat slower than keeping all data in memory, but for large blocks and/or
many sets the memory footprint may be too big. If not given (the default), the function will determine
the need of caching based on the size of the data. See |
chunkSize |
network similarities are saved in smaller chunks of size |
cacheDir |
character string containing the directory into which cache files should be written. The user should make sure that the filesystem has enough free space to hold the cache files which can get quite large. |
cacheBase |
character string containing the desired name for the cache files. The actual file
names will consists of |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The function starts by optionally filtering out samples that have too many missing entries and genes
that have either too many missing entries or zero variance in at least one set. Genes that are filtered
out are left unassigned by the module detection. Returned eigengenes will contain NA
in entries
corresponding to filtered-out samples.
If blocks
is not given and
the number of genes exceeds maxBlockSize
, genes are pre-clustered into blocks using the function
consensusProjectiveKMeans
; otherwise all genes are treated in a single block.
For each block of genes, the network is constructed and (if requested) topological overlap is calculated in each set. To minimize memory usage, calculated topological overlaps are optionally saved to disk in chunks until they are needed again for the calculation of the consensus network topological overlap.
Before calculation of the consensus Topological Overlap, individual TOMs are optionally calibrated. Calibration methods include single quantile scaling and full quantile normalization.
Single quantile
scaling raises individual TOM in sets 2,3,... to a power such that the quantiles given by
calibrationQuantile
agree with the quantile in set 1. Since the high TOMs are usually the most
important
for module identification, the value of calibrationQuantile
is close to (but not equal) 1. To speed up
quantile calculation, the quantiles can be determined on a randomly-chosen component subset of the TOM
matrices.
Full quantile normalization, implemented in normalize.quantiles
, adjusts the
TOM matrices such that all quantiles equal each other (and equal to the quantiles of the component-wise
average of the individual TOM matrices).
Note that network calibration is performed separately in each block, i.e., the normalizing transformation may differ between blocks. This is necessary to avoid manipulating a full TOM in memory.
The consensus TOM is calculated as the component-wise consensusQuantile
quantile of the individual
(set) TOMs; that is, for each gene pair (TOM entry), the consensusQuantile
quantile across all input
sets. Alternatively, one can also use (weighted) component-wise mean across all imput data sets.
If requested, the consensus topological overlaps are saved to disk for later use.
List with the following components:
consensusTOM |
only present if input |
TOMFiles |
only present if input |
saveConsensusTOMs |
a copy of the input |
individualTOMInfo |
information about individual set TOMs. A copy of the input |
Further components are retained for debugging and/or convenience.
useIndivTOMSubset |
a copy of the input |
goodSamplesAndGenes |
a list containing information about which samples and genes are "good" in the sense
that they do not contain more than a certain fraction of missing data and (for genes) have non-zero variance.
See |
nGGenes |
number of "good" genes in |
nSets |
number of input sets. |
saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs |
a copy of the input |
calibratedIndividualTOMFileNames |
if input |
networkCalibrationSamples |
if input |
consensusQuantile |
a copy of the input |
originCount |
A vector of length |
Peter Langfelder
WGCNA methodology has been described in
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17 PMID: 16646834
The original reference for the WGCNA package is
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2008) WGCNA: an R package for weighted correlation network analysis. BMC Bioinformatics 2008, 9:559 PMID: 19114008
For consensus modules, see
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) "Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules", BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
This function uses quantile normalization described, for example, in
Bolstad BM1, Irizarry RA, Astrand M, Speed TP (2003) "A comparison of normalization methods for high density oligonucleotide array data based on variance and bias", Bioinformatics. 2003 Jan 22;19(2):1
blockwiseIndividualTOMs
for calculation of topological overlaps across multiple sets.
This function returns a flat vector or a structured list of elementary inputs to a given consensus tree, that is, inputs that are not consensus trees themselves.
consensusTreeInputs(consensusTree, flatten = TRUE)
consensusTreeInputs(consensusTree, flatten = TRUE)
consensusTree |
A consensus tree of class |
flatten |
Logical; if |
A character vector of inputs or a list of inputs whose structure reflects
the structure of consensusTree
.
Peter Langfelder
newConsensusTree
for creating consensus trees.
This function converts to numeric those character columns in the input that can be converted to numeric without generating missing values except for the allowed NA representations.
convertNumericColumnsToNumeric( data, naStrings = c("NA", "NULL", "NO DATA"), unFactor = TRUE)
convertNumericColumnsToNumeric( data, naStrings = c("NA", "NULL", "NO DATA"), unFactor = TRUE)
data |
A data frame. |
naStrings |
Character vector of values that are allowd to convert to |
unFactor |
Logical: should the function first convert all factor columns to character? |
A data frame with convertible columns converted to numeric.
Peter Langfelder
These functions implements a faster calculation of (weighted) Pearson correlation.
The speedup against the R's standard cor
function will be substantial particularly
if the input matrix only contains a small number of missing data. If there are no missing data, or the
missing data are numerous, the speedup will be smaller.
cor(x, y = NULL, use = "all.obs", method = c("pearson", "kendall", "spearman"), weights.x = NULL, weights.y = NULL, quick = 0, cosine = FALSE, cosineX = cosine, cosineY = cosine, drop = FALSE, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0) corFast(x, y = NULL, use = "all.obs", quick = 0, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0) cor1(x, use = "all.obs", verbose = 0, indent = 0)
cor(x, y = NULL, use = "all.obs", method = c("pearson", "kendall", "spearman"), weights.x = NULL, weights.y = NULL, quick = 0, cosine = FALSE, cosineX = cosine, cosineY = cosine, drop = FALSE, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0) corFast(x, y = NULL, use = "all.obs", quick = 0, nThreads = 0, verbose = 0, indent = 0) cor1(x, use = "all.obs", verbose = 0, indent = 0)
x |
a numeric vector or a matrix. If |
y |
a numeric vector or a matrix. If not given, correlations of columns of |
use |
a character string specifying the handling of missing data. The fast calculations currently
support |
method |
a character string specifying the method to be used. Fast calculations are currently
available only for |
weights.x |
optional observation weights for |
weights.y |
optional observation weights for |
quick |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the precision of handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
cosine |
logical: calculate cosine correlation? Only valid for |
cosineX |
logical: use the cosine calculation for |
cosineY |
logical: use the cosine calculation for |
drop |
logical: should the result be turned into a vector if it is effectively one-dimensional? |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. Note that this option does not affect what is usually the most expensive part of the calculation, namely the matrix multiplication. The matrix multiplication is carried out by BLAS routines provided by R; these can be sped up by installing a fast BLAS and making R use it. |
verbose |
Controls the level of verbosity. Values above zero will cause a small amount of diagnostic messages to be printed. |
indent |
Indentation of printed diagnostic messages. Each unit above zero adds two spaces. |
The fast calculations are currently implemented only for method="pearson"
and use
either
"all.obs"
or "pairwise.complete.obs"
.
The corFast
function is a wrapper that calls the function cor
. If the combination of
method
and use
is implemented by the fast calculations, the fast code is executed;
otherwise, R's own correlation cor
is executed.
The argument quick
specifies the precision of handling of missing data. Zero will cause all
calculations to be executed precisely, which may be significantly slower than calculations without
missing data. Progressively higher values will speed up the
calculations but introduce progressively larger errors. Without missing data, all column means and
variances can be pre-calculated before the covariances are calculated. When missing data are present,
exact calculations require the column means and variances to be calculated for each covariance. The
approximate calculation uses the pre-calculated mean and variance and simply ignores missing data in the
covariance calculation. If the number of missing data is high, the pre-calculated means and variances may
be very different from the actual ones, thus potentially introducing large errors.
The quick
value times the
number of rows specifies the maximum difference in the
number of missing entries for mean and variance calculations on the one hand and covariance on the other
hand that will be tolerated before a recalculation is triggered. The hope is that if only a few missing
data are treated approximately, the error introduced will be small but the potential speedup can be
significant.
The matrix of the Pearson correlations of the columns of x
with columns of y
if y
is given, and the correlations of the columns of x
if y
is not given.
The implementation uses the BLAS library matrix multiplication function for the most expensive step of the calculation. Using a tuned, architecture-specific BLAS may significantly improve the performance of this function.
The values returned by the corFast function may differ from the values returned by R's function
cor
by rounding errors on the order of 1e-15.
Peter Langfelder
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software, 46(11), 1-17. https://www.jstatsoft.org/v46/i11/
R's standard Pearson correlation function cor
.
## Test the speedup compared to standard function cor # Generate a random matrix with 200 rows and 1000 columns set.seed(10) nrow = 100; ncol = 500; data = matrix(rnorm(nrow*ncol), nrow, ncol); ## First test: no missing data system.time( {corStd = stats::cor(data)} ); system.time( {corFast = cor(data)} ); all.equal(corStd, corFast) # Here R's standard correlation performs very well. # We now add a few missing entries. data[sample(nrow, 10), 1] = NA; # And test the correlations again... system.time( {corStd = stats::cor(data, use ='p')} ); system.time( {corFast = cor(data, use = 'p')} ); all.equal(corStd, corFast) # Here the R's standard correlation slows down considerably # while corFast still retains it speed. Choosing # higher ncol above will make the difference more pronounced.
## Test the speedup compared to standard function cor # Generate a random matrix with 200 rows and 1000 columns set.seed(10) nrow = 100; ncol = 500; data = matrix(rnorm(nrow*ncol), nrow, ncol); ## First test: no missing data system.time( {corStd = stats::cor(data)} ); system.time( {corFast = cor(data)} ); all.equal(corStd, corFast) # Here R's standard correlation performs very well. # We now add a few missing entries. data[sample(nrow, 10), 1] = NA; # And test the correlations again... system.time( {corStd = stats::cor(data, use ='p')} ); system.time( {corFast = cor(data, use = 'p')} ); all.equal(corStd, corFast) # Here the R's standard correlation slows down considerably # while corFast still retains it speed. Choosing # higher ncol above will make the difference more pronounced.
A faster, one-step calculation of Student correlation p-values for multiple correlations, properly taking into account the actual number of observations.
corAndPvalue(x, y = NULL, use = "pairwise.complete.obs", alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), ...)
corAndPvalue(x, y = NULL, use = "pairwise.complete.obs", alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), ...)
x |
a vector or a matrix |
y |
a vector or a matrix. If |
use |
determines handling of missing data. See |
alternative |
specifies the alternative hypothesis and must be (a unique abbreviation of) one of
|
... |
other arguments to the function |
The function calculates correlations of a matrix or of two matrices and the corresponding Student p-values.
The output is not as full-featured as cor.test
, but can work with matrices as input.
A list with the following components, each a matrix:
cor |
the calculated correlations |
p |
the Student p-values corresponding to the calculated correlations |
Z |
Fisher transforms of the calculated correlations |
t |
Student t statistics of the calculated correlations |
nObs |
Numbers of observations for the correlation, p-values etc. |
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software, 46(11), 1-17. https://www.jstatsoft.org/v46/i11/
cor
for calculation of correlations only;
cor.test
for another function for significance test of correlations
# generate random data with non-zero correlation set.seed(1); a = rnorm(100); b = rnorm(100) + a; x = cbind(a, b); # Call the function and display all results corAndPvalue(x) # Set some components to NA x[c(1:4), 1] = NA corAndPvalue(x) # Note that changed number of observations.
# generate random data with non-zero correlation set.seed(1); a = rnorm(100); b = rnorm(100) + a; x = cbind(a, b); # Call the function and display all results corAndPvalue(x) # Set some components to NA x[c(1:4), 1] = NA corAndPvalue(x) # Note that changed number of observations.
This function calculates the success of gene screening.
corPredictionSuccess(corPrediction, corTestSet, topNumber = 100)
corPredictionSuccess(corPrediction, corTestSet, topNumber = 100)
corPrediction |
a vector or a matrix of prediction statistics |
corTestSet |
correlation or other statistics on test set |
topNumber |
a vector of the number of top genes to consider |
For each column in corPrediction
, the function evaluates the mean corTestSet
for the number
of top genes (ranked by the column in corPrediction
) given in topNumber
. The higher the mean
corTestSet
(for positive corPrediction
) or negative (for negative corPrediction
), the
more successful the prediction.
meancorTestSetOverall |
difference of |
meancorTestSetPositive |
mean |
meancorTestSetNegative |
mean |
...
Steve Horvath
Calculates Fisher's asymptotic p-value for given correlations.
corPvalueFisher(cor, nSamples, twoSided = TRUE)
corPvalueFisher(cor, nSamples, twoSided = TRUE)
cor |
A vector of correlation values whose corresponding p-values are to be calculated |
nSamples |
Number of samples from which the correlations were calculated |
twoSided |
logical: should the calculated p-values be two sided? |
A vector of p-values of the same length as the input correlations.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
Calculates Student asymptotic p-value for given correlations.
corPvalueStudent(cor, nSamples)
corPvalueStudent(cor, nSamples)
cor |
A vector of correlation values whose corresponding p-values are to be calculated |
nSamples |
Number of samples from which the correlations were calculated |
A vector of p-values of the same length as the input correlations.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
Calculates a summary measure of preservation of eigengene correlations across data sets
correlationPreservation(multiME, setLabels, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey")
correlationPreservation(multiME, setLabels, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey")
multiME |
consensus module eigengenes in a multi-set format. A vector of lists with one list
corresponding to each set. Each list must contain a component |
setLabels |
names to be used for the sets represented in |
excludeGrey |
logical: exclude the 'grey' eigengene from preservation measure? |
greyLabel |
module label corresponding to the 'grey' module. Usually this will be the
character string |
The function calculates the preservation of correlation of each eigengene with all other eigengenes (optionally except the 'grey' eigengene) in all pairs of sets.
A data frame whose rows correspond to consensus module eigengenes given in the input
multiME
, and columns correspond to all possible set comparisons. The two sets compared in
each column are indicated in the column name.
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
multiSetMEs
and modulecheckSets
in package moduleColor for
more on eigengenes and the multi-set format
The function inputs a censored time variable which is specified by two input variables time
and event
.
It outputs i) the martingale residual and ii) deviance residual corresponding to a Cox regression model.
By default, the Cox regression model is an intercept only Cox regression model. But optionally, the user can input covariates using the argument datCovariates
.
The function makes use of the coxph function in the survival library.
See help(residuals.coxph)
to learn more.
coxRegressionResiduals(time, event, datCovariates = NULL)
coxRegressionResiduals(time, event, datCovariates = NULL)
time |
is a numeric variable that contains follow up time or time to event. |
event |
is a binary variable that takes on values 1 and 0. 1 means that the event took place (e.g. person died, or tumor recurred). 0 means censored, i.e. event has not yet been observed or loss to follow up. |
datCovariates |
a data frame whose columns correspond to covariates that should be used in the Cox regression model. By default, the only covariate the intercept term 1. |
Residuals are often used to investigate the lack of fit of a model. For Cox regression, there is no easy
analog to the usual "observed minus predicted" residual of linear regression. Instead, several specialized residuals have been proposed for Cox regression analysis. The function calculates residuals that are well defined for an intercept only Cox regression model: the martingale and deviance residuals (Therneau et al 1990). The martingale residual of a subject (person) specifies excess failures beyond the expected baseline hazard.
For example, a subject who was censored at 3 years, and whose predicted cumulative hazard at 3 years was 30
Another subject who had an event at 10 years, and whose predicted cumulative hazard at 10 years was 60
Since martingale residuals are not symmetrically distributed, even when the fitted model is correct, it is often advantageous to transform them into more symmetrically distributed residuals: deviance residuals.
Thus, deviance residuals are defined as transformations of the martingale residual and the event variable. Deviance residuals are often symmetrically distributed around zero
Deviance Residuals are similar to residuals from ordinary linear regression in that they are symmetrically distributed around 0 and have standard deviation of 1.0. . A subjects with a large deviance residual is poorly predicted by the model, i.e. is different from the baseline cumulative hazard.
A negative value indicates a longer than expected survival time.
When covariates are specified in datCovariates
, then one can plot deviance (or martingale) residuals against the covariates. Unusual patterns may indicate poor fit of the Cox model.
Cryptic comments: Deviance (or martingale) residuals can sometimes be used as (uncensored) quantitative variables instead of the original time censored variable.
For example, they could be used as outcome in a regression tree or regression forest predictor.
It outputs a data frame with 2 columns. The first and second column correspond to martingale and deviance residuals respectively.
This function can be considered a wrapper of the coxph function.
Steve Horvath
Thereneau TM, Grambsch PM, Fleming TR (1990) Martingale-based residuals for survival models. Biometrika (1990), 77, 1, pp. 147-60
library(survival) # simulate time and event data time1=sample(1:100) event1=sample(c(1,0), 100,replace=TRUE) event1[1:5]=NA time1[1:5]=NA # no covariates datResiduals= coxRegressionResiduals(time=time1,event=event1) # now we simulate a covariate z= rnorm(100) cor(datResiduals,use="p") datResiduals=coxRegressionResiduals(time=time1,event=event1,datCovariates=data.frame(z)) cor(datResiduals,use="p")
library(survival) # simulate time and event data time1=sample(1:100) event1=sample(c(1,0), 100,replace=TRUE) event1[1:5]=NA time1[1:5]=NA # no covariates datResiduals= coxRegressionResiduals(time=time1,event=event1) # now we simulate a covariate z= rnorm(100) cor(datResiduals,use="p") datResiduals=coxRegressionResiduals(time=time1,event=event1,datCovariates=data.frame(z)) cor(datResiduals,use="p")
Module detection in hierarchical dendrograms using a constant-height tree cut. Only branches whose size
is at least minSize
are retained.
cutreeStatic(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
cutreeStatic(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
dendro |
a hierarchical clustering dendrogram such as returned by |
cutHeight |
height at which branches are to be cut. |
minSize |
minimum number of object on a branch to be considered a cluster. |
This function performs a straightforward constant-height cut as implemented by cutree
,
then calculates the number of objects on each branch and only keeps branches that have at least
minSize
objects on them.
A numeric vector giving labels of objects, with 0 meaning unassigned. The largest cluster is conventionally labeled 1, the next largest 2, etc.
Peter Langfelder
hclust
for hierarchical clustering, cutree
and
cutreeStatic
for other constant-height branch cuts, standardColors
to convert
the retuned numerical lables into colors for easier visualization.
Cluster detection by a constant height cut of a hierarchical clustering dendrogram.
cutreeStaticColor(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
cutreeStaticColor(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
dendro |
a hierarchical clustering dendrogram such as returned by |
cutHeight |
height at which branches are to be cut. |
minSize |
minimum number of object on a branch to be considered a cluster. |
This function performs a straightforward constant-height cut as implemented by cutree
,
then calculates the number of objects on each branch and only keeps branches that have at least
minSize
objects on them.
A character vector giving color labels of objects, with "grey" meaning unassigned. The largest cluster
is conventionally labeled "turquoise", next "blue" etc. Run standardColors()
to see the sequence
of standard color labels.
Peter Langfelder
hclust
for hierarchical clustering, cutree
and
cutreeStatic
for other constant-height branch cuts, standardColors
to see
the sequence of color labels that can be assigned.
The function plots a barplot using colors that label modules.
displayColors(colors = NULL)
displayColors(colors = NULL)
colors |
colors to be displayed. Defaults to all colors available for module labeling. |
To see the first n
colors, use argument colors = standardColors(n)
.
None.
Peter Langfelder
displayColors(standardColors(10))
displayColors(standardColors(10))
Calculate a suitable threshold for module merging based on the number of samples and a desired Z quantile.
dynamicMergeCut(n, mergeCor = 0.9, Zquantile = 2.35)
dynamicMergeCut(n, mergeCor = 0.9, Zquantile = 2.35)
n |
number of samples |
mergeCor |
theoretical correlation threshold for module merging |
Zquantile |
Z quantile for module merging |
This function calculates the threshold for module merging. The threshold is calculated as the lower
boundary of the interval around the theoretical correlation mergeCor
whose width is given by the
Z value Zquantile
.
The correlation threshold for module merging; a single number.
Steve Horvath
moduleEigengenes
, mergeCloseModules
dynamicMergeCut(20) dynamicMergeCut(50) dynamicMergeCut(100)
dynamicMergeCut(20) dynamicMergeCut(50) dynamicMergeCut(100)
This functions removes variation in high-dimensional data due to unwanted covariates while preserving variation due to retained covariates. To prevent numerical instability, it uses Empirical bayes-moderated linear regression, optionally in a robust (outlier-resistant) form.
empiricalBayesLM( data, removedCovariates, retainedCovariates = NULL, initialFitFunction = NULL, initialFitOptions = NULL, initialFitRequiresFormula = NULL, initialFit.returnWeightName = NULL, fitToSamples = NULL, weights = NULL, automaticWeights = c("none", "bicov"), aw.maxPOutliers = 0.1, weightType = c("apriori", "empirical"), stopOnSmallWeights = TRUE, minDesignDeviation = 1e-10, robustPriors = FALSE, tol = 1e-4, maxIterations = 1000, garbageCollectInterval = 50000, scaleMeanToSamples = fitToSamples, scaleMeanOfSamples = NULL, getOLSAdjustedData = TRUE, getResiduals = TRUE, getFittedValues = TRUE, getWeights = TRUE, getEBadjustedData = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
empiricalBayesLM( data, removedCovariates, retainedCovariates = NULL, initialFitFunction = NULL, initialFitOptions = NULL, initialFitRequiresFormula = NULL, initialFit.returnWeightName = NULL, fitToSamples = NULL, weights = NULL, automaticWeights = c("none", "bicov"), aw.maxPOutliers = 0.1, weightType = c("apriori", "empirical"), stopOnSmallWeights = TRUE, minDesignDeviation = 1e-10, robustPriors = FALSE, tol = 1e-4, maxIterations = 1000, garbageCollectInterval = 50000, scaleMeanToSamples = fitToSamples, scaleMeanOfSamples = NULL, getOLSAdjustedData = TRUE, getResiduals = TRUE, getFittedValues = TRUE, getWeights = TRUE, getEBadjustedData = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
data |
A 2-dimensional matrix or data frame of numeric data to be adjusted. Variables (for example, genes or methylation profiles) should be in columns and observations (samples) should be in rows. |
removedCovariates |
A vector or two-dimensional object (matrix or data frame) giving the covariates whose effect on the data is to be removed. At least one such covariate must be given. |
retainedCovariates |
A vector or two-dimensional object (matrix or data frame) giving the covariates whose effect on the data is
to be retained. May be |
initialFitFunction |
Function name to perform the initial fit. The default is to use the internal implementation of linear model
fitting. The function must take arguments |
initialFitOptions |
Optional specifications of extra arguments for |
initialFitRequiresFormula |
Logical: does the initial fit function need |
initialFit.returnWeightName |
Name of the component of the return value of |
fitToSamples |
Optional index of samples from which the linear model fits should be calculated. Defaults to all samples. If given, the models will be only fit to the specified samples but all samples will be transformed using the calculated coefficients. |
weights |
Optional 2-dimensional matrix or data frame of the same dimensions as |
automaticWeights |
One of (unique abrreviations of) |
aw.maxPOutliers |
If |
weightType |
One of (unique abbreviations of) |
stopOnSmallWeights |
Logical: should presence of small |
minDesignDeviation |
Minimum standard deviation for columns of the design matrix to be retained. Columns with standard deviations below this number will be removed (effectively removing the corresponding terms from the design). |
robustPriors |
Logical: should robust priors be used? This essentially means replacing mean by median and covariance by biweight mid-covariance. |
tol |
Convergence criterion used in the numerical equation solver. When the relative change in coefficients falls below this threshold, the system will be considered to have converged. |
maxIterations |
Maximum number of iterations to use. |
garbageCollectInterval |
Number of variables after which to call garbage collection. |
scaleMeanToSamples |
Optional specification of samples (given as a vector of indices) to whose means the resulting adjusted data should be scaled (more precisely, shifted). |
scaleMeanOfSamples |
Optional specification of samples (given as a vector of indices) that will be used in calculating the shift. Specifically,
the shift is such that the mean of samples given in |
getOLSAdjustedData |
Logical: should data adjusted by ordinary least squares or by
|
getResiduals |
Logical: should the residuals (adjusted values without the means) be returned? |
getFittedValues |
Logical: should fitted values be returned? |
getWeights |
Logical: should the final weights be returned? |
getEBadjustedData |
Logical: should the EB step be performed and the adjusted data returned? If this
is |
verbose |
Level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values result in more diagnostic messages being printed. |
indent |
Indentation of diagnostic messages. Each unit adds two spaces. |
This function uses Empirical Bayes-moderated (EB) linear regression to remove variation in data
due to the
variables in removedCovariates
while retaining variation due to variables in retainedCovariates
,
if any are given. The EB step uses simple normal priors on the regression coefficients and inverse gamma
priors on the
variances. The procedure starts with multivariate ordinary linear regression of individual columns in
data
on retainedCovariates
and removedCovariates
. Alternatively, the user may specify an
intial fit function (e.g., robust linear regression). To make the coefficients comparable,
columns of data
are scaled to (weighted if weights are given) mean 0 and variance 1.
The resulting regression coefficients are used to
determine the parameters of the normal prior (mean, covariance, and inverse gamma or median and biweight
mid-covariance if robust priors are used), and the variances are used to determine the parameters of the
inverse gamma prior. The EB step then essentially shrinks the coefficients toward their means, with the amount
of shrinkage determined by the prior covariance.
Using appropriate weights can make the data adjustment robust to outliers. This can be achieved automatically
by using the argument automaticWeights = "bicov"
. When bicov weights are used, we also recommend
setting the argument maxPOutliers
to a maximum proportion of samples that could be outliers. This is
especially important if some of the design variables are binary and can be expected to have a strong effect on
some of the columns in data
, since standard biweight midcorrelation (and its weights) do not work well
on bimodal data.
The automatic bicov weights are determined from data
only. It is implicitly assumed that there are no
outliers in the retained and removed covariates. Outliers in the covariates are more difficult to work with
since, even if the regression is made robust to them, they can influence the adjusted values for the sample in
which they appear. Unless the the covariate outliers can be attributed to a relevant variation in experimental
conditions, samples with covariate outliers are best removed entirely before calling this function.
A list with the following components (some of which may be missing depending on input options):
adjustedData |
A matrix of the same dimensions as the input |
residuals |
A matrix of the same dimensions as the input |
coefficients |
A matrix of regression coefficients. Rows correspond to the design matrix variables
(mean, retained and removed covariates) and columns correspond to the variables (columns) in |
coefficiens.scaled |
A matrix of regression coefficients corresponding to columns in |
sigmaSq |
Estimated error variances (one for each column of input |
sigmaSq.scaled |
Estimated error variances corresponding to columns in |
fittedValues |
Fitted values calculated from the means and coefficients corresponding to the removed covariates, i.e., roughly the values that are subtracted out of the data. |
adjustedData.OLS |
A matrix of the same dimensions as the input |
residuals.OLS |
A matrix of the same dimensions as the input |
coefficients.OLS |
A matrix of ordinary least squares regression coefficients.
Rows correspond to the design matrix variables
(mean, retained and removed covariates) and columns correspond to the variables (columns) in |
coefficiens.OLS.scaled |
A matrix of ordinary least squares regression coefficients corresponding to columns
in |
sigmaSq.OLS |
Estimated OLS error variances (one for each column of input |
sigmaSq.OLS.scaled |
Estimated OLS error variances corresponding to columns in |
fittedValues.OLS |
OLS fitted values calculated from the means and coefficients corresponding to the removed covariates. |
weights |
A matrix of weights used in the regression models. The matrix has the same dimension as the
input |
dataColumnValid |
Logical vector with one element per column of input |
dataColumnWithZeroVariance |
Logical vector with one element per column of input |
coefficientValid |
Logical matrix of the dimension (number of covariates +1) times (number of
variables in |
Peter Langfelder
bicovWeights
for suitable weights that make the adjustment robust to outliers.
This function exports a network in edge and node list files in a format suitable for importing to Cytoscape.
exportNetworkToCytoscape( adjMat, edgeFile = NULL, nodeFile = NULL, weighted = TRUE, threshold = 0.5, nodeNames = NULL, altNodeNames = NULL, nodeAttr = NULL, includeColNames = TRUE)
exportNetworkToCytoscape( adjMat, edgeFile = NULL, nodeFile = NULL, weighted = TRUE, threshold = 0.5, nodeNames = NULL, altNodeNames = NULL, nodeAttr = NULL, includeColNames = TRUE)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix giving connection strengths among the nodes in the network. |
edgeFile |
file name of the file to contain the edge information. |
nodeFile |
file name of the file to contain the node information. |
weighted |
logical: should the exported network be weighted? |
threshold |
adjacency threshold for including edges in the output. |
nodeNames |
names of the nodes. If not given, |
altNodeNames |
optional alternate names for the nodes, for example gene names if nodes are labeled by probe IDs. |
nodeAttr |
optional node attribute, for example module color. Can be a vector or a data frame. |
includeColNames |
logical: should column names be included in the output files? Note that Cytoscape can read files both with and without column names. |
If the corresponding file names are supplied, the edge and node data is written to the appropriate files. The edge and node data is also returned as return value (see below).
A list with the following componens:
egdeData |
a data frame containing the edge data, with one row per edge |
nodeData |
a data frame containing the node data, with one row per node |
Peter Langfelder
Exports network data in a format readable and displayable by the VisANT software.
exportNetworkToVisANT( adjMat, file = NULL, weighted = TRUE, threshold = 0.5, maxNConnections = NULL, probeToGene = NULL)
exportNetworkToVisANT( adjMat, file = NULL, weighted = TRUE, threshold = 0.5, maxNConnections = NULL, probeToGene = NULL)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix of the network to be exported. |
file |
character string specifying the file name of the file in which the data should be written. If not given, no file will be created. The file is in a plain text format. |
weighted |
logical: should the exported network by weighted? |
threshold |
adjacency threshold for including edges in the output. |
maxNConnections |
maximum number of exported adjacency edges. This can be used as another filter on the exported edges. |
probeToGene |
optional specification of a conversion between probe names (that label columns and
rows of |
The adjacency matrix is checked for validity. The entries can be negative, however. The adjacency
matrix is expected to also have valid names
or dimnames[[2]]
that represent the probe names
of the corresponding edges.
Whether the output is a weighted network or not, only edges whose (absolute value of) adjacency are
above threshold
will be included in the output. If maxNConnections
is given, at most
maxNConnections
will be included in the output.
If probeToGene
is given, it is expected to have two columns, the first one corresponding to the
probe names, the second to their corresponding gene names that will be used in the output.
A data frame containing the network information suitable as input to VisANT. The same data frame is
also written into a file specified by file
, if given.
Peter Langfelder
VisANT software is available from http://www.visantnet.org/visantnet.html/.
Given a data frame, this function turns non-numeric columns into factors.
factorizeNonNumericColumns(data)
factorizeNonNumericColumns(data)
data |
A data frame. Non-data frame inputs (e.g., a matrix) are coerced to a data frame. |
A column is considered numeric if its storage mode is numeric or if it is a character vector, it only contains character representations of numbers and possibly missing values encoded as "NA", "NULL", "NO DATA".
The input data frame with non-numeric columns turned into factors.
Peter Langfelder
Encapsulates single-set data in a wrapper that makes the data suitable for functions working on multiset data collections.
fixDataStructure(data, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
fixDataStructure(data, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
data |
A dataframe, matrix or array with two dimensions to be encapsulated. |
verbose |
Controls verbosity. 0 is silent. |
indent |
Controls indentation of printed progress messages. 0 means no indentation, every unit adds two spaces. |
For multiset calculations, many quantities (such as expression data, traits, module eigengenes etc) are
presented by a common structure, a vector of lists (one list for each set) where each list has a
component data
that contains the actual (expression, trait, eigengene) data for the corresponding
set in the form of a dataframe. This funtion creates a vector of lists of length 1 and fills the
component data
with the content of parameter data
.
As described above, input data in a format suitable for functions operating on multiset data collections.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
singleSetData = matrix(rnorm(100), 10,10); encapsData = fixDataStructure(singleSetData); length(encapsData) names(encapsData[[1]]) dim(encapsData[[1]]$data) all.equal(encapsData[[1]]$data, singleSetData);
singleSetData = matrix(rnorm(100), 10,10); encapsData = fixDataStructure(singleSetData); length(encapsData) names(encapsData[[1]]) dim(encapsData[[1]]$data) all.equal(encapsData[[1]]$data, singleSetData);
This function attempts to break lomg character strings into multiple lines by replacing a given pattern by a newline character.
formatLabels( labels, maxCharPerLine = 14, maxWidth = NULL, maxLines = Inf, cex = 1, font = 1, split = " ", fixed = TRUE, newsplit = split, keepSplitAtEOL = TRUE, capitalMultiplier = 1.4, eol = "\n", ellipsis = "...")
formatLabels( labels, maxCharPerLine = 14, maxWidth = NULL, maxLines = Inf, cex = 1, font = 1, split = " ", fixed = TRUE, newsplit = split, keepSplitAtEOL = TRUE, capitalMultiplier = 1.4, eol = "\n", ellipsis = "...")
labels |
Character strings to be formatted. |
maxCharPerLine |
Integer giving the maximum number of characters per line. |
maxWidth |
Maximum width in user coordinates. If given, overrides |
maxLines |
Maximum lines to retain. If a label extends past the maximum number of lines,
|
cex |
Character expansion factor that the user intends to use when adding |
font |
Integer specifying the font. See |
split |
Pattern to be replaced by newline ('\n') characters. |
fixed |
Logical: Should the pattern be interpreted literally ( |
newsplit |
Character string to replace the occurrences of |
keepSplitAtEOL |
When replacing an occurrence of |
capitalMultiplier |
A multiplier for capital letters which typically occupy more space than lowercase letters. |
eol |
Character string to separate lines in the output. |
ellipsis |
Chararcter string to add to the last line if the input label is longer than fits on
|
Each given element of labels
is processed independently. The character string is split using
strsplit
, with split
as the splitting pattern. The resulting shorter character strings are
then concatenated together with newsplit
as the separator. Whenever the length (adjusted using the
capital letter multiplier) of the combined
result from the start or the previous newline character exceeds maxCharPerLine
, or
strwidth
exceeds maxWidth
, the character specified by eol
is inserted (at the previous split).
Note that individual segements (i.e., sections of the input between occurrences of split
) whose
number of characters exceeds maxCharPerLine
will not be split.
A character vector of the same length as input labels
.
Peter Langfelder
s = "A quick hare jumps over the brown fox"; formatLabels(s);
s = "A quick hare jumps over the brown fox"; formatLabels(s);
This function computes fundamental network concepts (also known as network indices or statistics) based
on an adjacency matrix and optionally a node significance measure. These network concepts are defined for
any symmetric adjacency matrix (weighted and unweighted). The network concepts are described in Dong and
Horvath (2007) and Horvath and Dong (2008).
Fundamental network concepts are defined as a function of the off-diagonal elements of an adjacency
matrix adj
and/or a node significance measure GS
.
fundamentalNetworkConcepts(adj, GS = NULL)
fundamentalNetworkConcepts(adj, GS = NULL)
adj |
an adjacency matrix, that is a square, symmetric matrix with entries between 0 and 1 |
GS |
a node significance measure: a vector of the same length as the number of rows (and columns) of the adjacency matrix. |
A list with the following components:
Connectivity |
a numerical vector that reports the connectivity (also known as degree) of each
node. This fundamental network concept is also known as whole network connectivity. One can also define
the scaled connectivity |
ScaledConnectivity |
the |
ClusterCoef |
a numerical vector that reports the cluster coefficient for each node. This fundamental network concept measures the cliquishness of each node. |
MAR |
a numerical vector that reports the maximum adjacency ratio for each node. |
Density |
the density of the network. |
Centralization |
the centralization of the network. |
Heterogeneity |
the heterogeneity of the network. |
Steve Horvath
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
conformityBasedNetworkConcepts
for calculation of conformity based network concepts
for a network adjacency matrix;
networkConcepts
, for calculation of conformity based and eigennode based network concepts
for a correlation network.
NOTE: GOenrichmentAnalysis is deprecated. Please use function enrichmentAnalysis from R package anRichment, available from https://labs.genetics.ucla.edu/horvath/htdocs/CoexpressionNetwork/GeneAnnotation/
WARNING: This function should be considered experimental. The arguments and resulting values (in particular, the enrichment p-values) are not yet finalized and may change in the future. The function should only be used to get a quick and rough overview of GO enrichment in the modules in a data set; for a publication-quality analysis, please use an established tool.
Using Bioconductor's annotation packages, this function calculates enrichments and returns terms with best enrichment values.
GOenrichmentAnalysis(labels, entrezCodes, yeastORFs = NULL, organism = "human", ontologies = c("BP", "CC", "MF"), evidence = "all", includeOffspring = TRUE, backgroundType = "givenInGO", removeDuplicates = TRUE, leaveOutLabel = NULL, nBestP = 10, pCut = NULL, nBiggest = 0, getTermDetails = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
GOenrichmentAnalysis(labels, entrezCodes, yeastORFs = NULL, organism = "human", ontologies = c("BP", "CC", "MF"), evidence = "all", includeOffspring = TRUE, backgroundType = "givenInGO", removeDuplicates = TRUE, leaveOutLabel = NULL, nBestP = 10, pCut = NULL, nBiggest = 0, getTermDetails = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
labels |
cluster (module, group) labels of genes to be analyzed. Either a single vector, or a
matrix. In the matrix case, each column will be analyzed separately; analyzing a collection of module
assignments in one function call will be faster than calling the function several tinmes. For each row,
the labels in all columns must correspond to the same gene specified in |
entrezCodes |
Entrez (a.k.a. LocusLink) codes of the genes whose labels are given in
|
yeastORFs |
if |
organism |
character string specifying the organism for which to perform the analysis. Recognized
values are (unique abbreviations of) |
ontologies |
vector of character strings specifying GO ontologies to be included in the analysis.
Can be any subset of |
evidence |
vector of character strings specifying admissible evidence for each gene in its specific term, or "all" for all evidence codes. See Details or http://www.geneontology.org/GO.evidence.shtml for available evidence codes and their meaning. |
includeOffspring |
logical: should genes belonging to the offspring of each term be included in the term? As a default, only genes belonging directly to each term are associated with the term. Note that the calculation of enrichments with offspring included can be quite slow for large data sets. |
backgroundType |
specification of the background to use. Recognized values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
removeDuplicates |
logical: should duplicate entries in |
leaveOutLabel |
optional specifications of module labels for which enrichment calculation is not desired. Can be a single label or a vector of labels to be ignored. However, if in any of the sets no labels are left to calculate enrichment of, the function will stop with an error. |
nBestP |
specifies the number of terms with highest enrichment whose detailed information will be returned. |
pCut |
alternative specification of terms to be returned: all terms whose enrichment p-value is
more significant than |
nBiggest |
in addition to returning terms with highest enrichment, terms that contain most of the genes in each cluster can be returned by specifying the number of biggest terms per cluster to be returned. This may be useful for development and testing purposes. |
getTermDetails |
logical indicating whether detailed information on the most enriched terms should be returned. |
verbose |
integer specifying the verbosity of the function. Zero means silent, positive values will cause the function to print progress reports. |
indent |
integer specifying indentation of the diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function is basically a wrapper for the annotation packages available from Bioconductor. It requires the packages GO.db, AnnotationDbi, and org.xx.eg.db, where xx is the code corresponding to the organism that the user wishes to analyze (e.g., Hs for human Homo Sapiens, Mm for mouse Mus Musculus etc). For each cluster specified in the input, the function calculates all enrichments in the specified ontologies, and collects information about the terms with highest enrichment. The enrichment p-value is calculated using Fisher exact test. As background we use all of the supplied genes that are present in at least one term in GO (in any of the ontologies).
For best results, the newest annotation libraries should be used. Because of the way Bioconductor is set up, to get the newest annotation libraries you may have to use the current version of R.
According to http://www.geneontology.org/GO.evidence.shtml, the following codes are used by GO:
Experimental Evidence Codes EXP: Inferred from Experiment IDA: Inferred from Direct Assay IPI: Inferred from Physical Interaction IMP: Inferred from Mutant Phenotype IGI: Inferred from Genetic Interaction IEP: Inferred from Expression Pattern Computational Analysis Evidence Codes ISS: Inferred from Sequence or Structural Similarity ISO: Inferred from Sequence Orthology ISA: Inferred from Sequence Alignment ISM: Inferred from Sequence Model IGC: Inferred from Genomic Context IBA: Inferred from Biological aspect of Ancestor IBD: Inferred from Biological aspect of Descendant IKR: Inferred from Key Residues IRD: Inferred from Rapid Divergence RCA: inferred from Reviewed Computational Analysis Author Statement Evidence Codes TAS: Traceable Author Statement NAS: Non-traceable Author Statement Curator Statement Evidence Codes IC: Inferred by Curator ND: No biological Data available Automatically-assigned Evidence Codes IEA: Inferred from Electronic Annotation Obsolete Evidence Codes NR: Not Recorded
A list with the following components:
keptForAnalysis |
logical vector with one entry per given gene. |
inGO |
logical vector with one entry per given gene. |
If input labels
contained only one vector of labels, the following components:
countsInTerms |
a matrix whose rows correspond to given cluster, and whose columns correspond to GO terms, contaning number of genes in the intersection of the corresponding module and GO term. Row and column names are set appropriately. |
enrichmentP |
a matrix whose rows correspond to given cluster, and whose columns correspond to GO terms, contaning enrichment p-values of each term in each cluster. Row and column names are set appropriately. |
bestPTerms |
a list of lists with each inner list corresponding to an ontology given in
|
biggestTerms |
a list of the same format as |
If input labels
contained more than one vector, instead of the above components the return value
contains a list named setResults
that has one component per given set; each component is a list
containing the above components for the corresponding set.
Peter Langfelder
Bioconductor's annotation packages such as GO.db and organism-specific annotation packages such as org.Hs.eg.db.
This function checks data for missing entries and returns a list of genes that have non-zero variance and pass two criteria on maximum number of missing values and values whose weight is below a threshold: the fraction of missing values must be below a given threshold and the total number of present samples must be at least equal to a given threshold. If weights are given, entries whose relative weight is below a threshold will be considered missing.
goodGenes( datExpr, weights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
goodGenes( datExpr, weights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. |
weights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
useSamples |
optional specifications of which samples to use for the check. Should be a logical
vector; samples whose entries are |
useGenes |
optional specifications of genes for which to perform the check. Should be a logical
vector; genes whose entries are |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of good genes for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good genes falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
tol |
an optional 'small' number to compare the variance against. Defaults to the square of
|
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose relative weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. Here relative weight is weight divided by the maximum weight in the column (gene). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
If weights are given, entries whose relative weight (i.e., weight divided by maximum weight in the column or gene) will be considered missing.
For most data sets, the fraction of missing samples criterion will be much more stringent than the absolute number of missing samples criterion.
A logical vector with one entry per gene that is TRUE
if the gene is considered good and
FALSE
otherwise. Note that all genes excluded by useGenes
are automatically assigned
FALSE
.
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
This function checks data for missing entries and returns a list of genes that have non-zero variance in all sets and pass two criteria on maximum number of missing values in each given set: the fraction of missing values must be below a given threshold and the total number of missing samples must be below a given threshold. If weights are given, entries whose relative weight is below a threshold will be considered missing.
goodGenesMS( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
goodGenesMS( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
useSamples |
optional specifications of which samples to use for the check. Should be a logical
vector; samples whose entries are |
useGenes |
optional specifications of genes for which to perform the check. Should be a logical
vector; genes whose entries are |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of good genes for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good genes falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
tol |
an optional 'small' number to compare the variance against. For each set in |
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose relative weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. Here relative weight is weight divided by the maximum weight in the column (gene). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
If weights are given, entries whose relative weight (i.e., weight divided by maximum weight in the column or gene) will be considered missing.
For most data sets, the fraction of missing samples criterion will be much more stringent than the absolute number of missing samples criterion.
A logical vector with one entry per gene that is TRUE
if the gene is considered good and
FALSE
otherwise. Note that all genes excluded by useGenes
are automatically assigned
FALSE
.
Peter Langfelder
goodGenes
, goodSamples
, goodSamplesGenes
for cleaning
individual sets separately;
goodSamplesMS
, goodSamplesGenesMS
for additional cleaning of multiple data
sets together.
This function checks data for missing entries and returns a list of samples that pass two criteria on maximum number of missing values: the fraction of missing values must be below a given threshold and the total number of missing genes must be below a given threshold.
goodSamples( datExpr, weights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
goodSamples( datExpr, weights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. |
weights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
useSamples |
optional specifications of which samples to use for the check. Should be a logical
vector; samples whose entries are |
useGenes |
optional specifications of genes for which to perform the check. Should be a logical
vector; genes whose entries are |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of good samples for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good samples falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a sample to be considered good. |
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose weight divided by the maximum weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
For most data sets, the fraction of missing samples criterion will be much more stringent than the
absolute number of missing samples criterion.
A logical vector with one entry per sample that is TRUE
if the sample is considered good and
FALSE
otherwise. Note that all samples excluded by useSamples
are automatically assigned
FALSE
.
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
This function checks data for missing entries, entries with weights below a threshold, and zero-variance genes, and returns a list of samples and genes that pass criteria on maximum number of missing or low weight values. If necessary, the filtering is iterated.
goodSamplesGenes( datExpr, weights = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
goodSamplesGenes( datExpr, weights = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
expression data. A matrix or data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. |
weights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of good genes for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good genes falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
tol |
an optional 'small' number to compare the variance against. Defaults to the square of
|
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose relative weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. Here relative weight is weight divided by the maximum weight in the column (gene). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function iteratively identifies samples and genes with too many missing entries and genes with
zero variance. If weights are given, entries with relative weight (weight divided by maximum weight in the
column) below minRelativeWeight
will be considered missing. The process is
repeated until the lists of good samples and genes are stable.
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
A list with the foolowing components:
goodSamples |
A logical vector with one entry per sample that is |
goodGenes |
A logical vector with one entry per gene that is |
Peter Langfelder
This function checks data for missing entries and zero variance across multiple data sets and returns a list of samples and genes that pass criteria maximum number of missing values. If weights are given, entries whose relative weight is below a threshold will be considered missing. The filtering is iterated until convergence.
goodSamplesGenesMS( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
goodSamplesGenesMS( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, tol = NULL, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of good genes for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good genes falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
tol |
an optional 'small' number to compare the variance against. For each set in |
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose relative weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. Here relative weight is weight divided by the maximum weight in the column (gene). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function iteratively identifies samples and genes with too many missing entries, and genes with
zero variance; iterations are necessary
since excluding samples effectively changes criteria on genes and vice versa. The process is
repeated until the lists of good samples and genes are stable. If weights are given, entries whose relative
weight (i.e., weight divided by maximum weight in the column or gene)
is below a threshold will be considered missing.
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
A list with the foolowing components:
goodSamples |
A list with one component per given set. Each component is a logical vector with
one entry per sample in the corresponding set that is |
goodGenes |
A logical vector with one entry per gene that is |
Peter Langfelder
goodGenes
, goodSamples
, goodSamplesGenes
for cleaning
individual sets separately;
goodSamplesMS
, goodGenesMS
for additional cleaning of multiple data
sets together.
This function checks data for missing entries and returns a list of samples that pass two criteria on maximum number of missing values: the fraction of missing values must be below a given threshold and the total number of missing genes must be below a given threshold.
goodSamplesMS(multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
goodSamplesMS(multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, useSamples = NULL, useGenes = NULL, minFraction = 1/2, minNSamples = ..minNSamples, minNGenes = ..minNGenes, minRelativeWeight = 0.1, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
useSamples |
optional specifications of which samples to use for the check. Should be a logical
vector; samples whose entries are |
useGenes |
optional specifications of genes for which to perform the check. Should be a logical
vector; genes whose entries are |
minFraction |
minimum fraction of non-missing samples for a gene to be considered good. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of good samples for the data set to be considered fit for analysis. If the actual number of good samples falls below this threshold, an error will be issued. |
minNGenes |
minimum number of non-missing samples for a sample to be considered good. |
minRelativeWeight |
observations whose relative weight is below this threshold will be considered missing. Here relative weight is weight divided by the maximum weight in the column (gene). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The constants ..minNSamples
and ..minNGenes
are both set to the value 4.
If weights are given, entries whose relative weight (i.e., weight divided by maximum weight in the column or gene) will be considered missing.
For most data sets, the fraction of missing samples criterion will be much more stringent than the absolute number of missing samples criterion.
A list with one component per input set. Each component is a logical vector with one entry per sample in the corresponding set, indicating whether the sample passed the missing value criteria.
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
goodGenes
, goodSamples
, goodSamplesGenes
for cleaning
individual sets separately;
goodGenesMS
, goodSamplesGenesMS
for additional cleaning of multiple data
sets together.
Generate a green-black-red color sequence of a given length.
greenBlackRed(n, gamma = 1)
greenBlackRed(n, gamma = 1)
n |
number of colors to be returned |
gamma |
color correction power |
The function returns a color vector that starts with pure green, gradually turns into black and then to
red. The power gamma
can be used to control the behaviour of the quarter- and three quarter-values
(between green and black, and black and red, respectively). Higher powers will make the mid-colors more
green and red, respectively.
A vector of colors of length n
.
Peter Langfelder
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(greenBlackRed(50)); displayColors(greenBlackRed(50, 2)); displayColors(greenBlackRed(50, 0.5));
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(greenBlackRed(50)); displayColors(greenBlackRed(50, 2)); displayColors(greenBlackRed(50, 0.5));
Generate a green-white-red color sequence of a given length.
greenWhiteRed(n, gamma = 1, warn = TRUE)
greenWhiteRed(n, gamma = 1, warn = TRUE)
n |
number of colors to be returned |
gamma |
color change power |
warn |
logical: should the user be warned that this function produces a palette unsuitable for people with most common color blindness? |
The function returns a color vector that starts with green, gradually turns into white and then to
red. The power gamma
can be used to control the behaviour of the quarter- and three quarter-values
(between green and white, and white and red, respectively). Higher powers will make the mid-colors more
white, while lower powers will make the colors more saturated, respectively.
Typical use of this function is to produce (via function numbers2colors
)
a color representation of numbers within a symmetric interval
around 0, for example, the interval [-1, 1]. Note though that since green and red are not distinguishable by
people with the most common type of color blindness, we recommend using the analogous palette returned by
the function blueWhiteRed
.
A vector of colors of length n
.
Peter Langfelder
blueWhiteRed
for a color sequence more friendly to people with the most common type of color
blindness;
numbers2colors
for a function that produces a color representation for continuous numbers.
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50)); title("gamma = 1") displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50, 3)); title("gamma = 3") displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50, 0.5)); title("gamma = 0.5")
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50)); title("gamma = 1") displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50, 3)); title("gamma = 3") displayColors(greenWhiteRed(50, 0.5)); title("gamma = 0.5")
Generalized Topological Overlap Measure, taking into account interactions of higher degree.
GTOMdist(adjMat, degree = 1)
GTOMdist(adjMat, degree = 1)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix. See details below. |
degree |
integer specifying the maximum degree to be calculated. |
Matrix of the same dimension as the input adjMat
.
Steve Horvath and Andy Yip
Yip A, Horvath S (2007) Gene network interconnectedness and the generalized topological overlap measure. BMC Bioinformatics 2007, 8:22
Hierarchical consensus calculation with optional data calibration.
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation( individualData, consensusTree, level = 1, useBlocks = NULL, randomSeed = NULL, saveCalibratedIndividualData = FALSE, calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualData-%a-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options: the data can be either saved or returned but not both. saveConsensusData = TRUE, consensusDataFileNames = "consensusData-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples= FALSE, # Return the intermediate results as well? keepIntermediateResults = FALSE, # Internal handling of data useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behaviour collectGarbage = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation( individualData, consensusTree, level = 1, useBlocks = NULL, randomSeed = NULL, saveCalibratedIndividualData = FALSE, calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualData-%a-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options: the data can be either saved or returned but not both. saveConsensusData = TRUE, consensusDataFileNames = "consensusData-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples= FALSE, # Return the intermediate results as well? keepIntermediateResults = FALSE, # Internal handling of data useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behaviour collectGarbage = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
individualData |
Individual data from which the consensus is to be calculated. It can be either a list or a
|
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
level |
Integer which the user should leave at 1. This serves to keep default set names unique. |
useBlocks |
When |
randomSeed |
If non- |
saveCalibratedIndividualData |
Logical: should calibrated individual data be saved? |
calibratedIndividualDataFilePattern |
Pattern from which file names for saving calibrated individual data are determined. The conversions
|
saveConsensusData |
Logical: should final consensus be saved ( |
consensusDataFileNames |
Pattern from which file names for saving the final consensus are determined. The conversions
|
getCalibrationSamples |
When calibration method in the |
keepIntermediateResults |
Logical: should results of intermediate consensus calculations (if any) be kept? These are always returned
as |
useDiskCache |
Logical: should disk cache be used for consensus calculations? The disk cache can be used to store chunks of
calibrated data that are small enough to fit one chunk from each set into memory (blocks may be small enough
to fit one block of one set into memory, but not small enough to fit one block from all sets in a consensus
calculation into memory at the same time). Using disk cache is slower but lessens the memory footprint of
the calculation.
As a general guide, if individual data are split into blocks, we
recommend setting this argument to |
chunkSize |
Integer giving the chunk size. If left |
cacheDir |
Directory in which to save cache files. The files are deleted on normal exit but persist if the function terminates abnormally. |
cacheBase |
Base for the file names of cache files. |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage collection be forced after each major calculation? |
verbose |
Integer level of verbosity of diagnostic messages. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
Indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function calculates consensus in a hierarchical manner, using a separate (and possibly different) set of
consensus options at each step. The "recipe" for the consensus calculation is supplied in the argument
consensusTree
.
The argument consensusTree
should have the following components: (1) inputs
must be either a
character vector whose components match names(inputData)
, or consensus trees in the own right.
(2) consensusOptions
must be a list of class "ConsensusOptions"
that specifies options for
calculating the consensus. A suitable set of options can be obtained by calling
newConsensusOptions
. (3) Optionally, the component analysisName
can be a single
character string giving the name for the analysis. When intermediate results are returned, they are returned
in a list whose names will be set from analysisName
components, if they exist.
The actual consensus calculation at each level of the consensus tree
is carried out in function consensusCalculation
. The consensus options for each individual
consensus calculation are independent from one another, i.e., the consensus options for different steps can
be different.
A list containing the output of the top level call to consensusCalculation
; if
keepIntermediateResults
is TRUE
, component inputs
contains a (possibly recursive) list
of the results of intermediate consensus calculations. Names of the inputs
list are taken from the
corresponding analysisName
components if they exist, otherwise from names of the corresponding
inputs
components of the supplied consensusTree
. See example below for an example of a
relatively simple consensus tree.
Peter Langfelder
newConsensusOptions
for obtaining a suitable list of consensus options;
consensusCalculation
for the actual calculation of a consensus that underpins this function.
# We generate 3 simple matrices set.seed(5) data = replicate(3, matrix(rnorm(10*100), 10, 100)) names(data) = c("Set1", "Set2", "Set3"); # Put together a consensus tree. In this example the final consensus uses # as input set 1 and a consensus of sets 2 and 3. # First define the consensus of sets 2 and 3: consTree.23 = newConsensusTree( inputs = c("Set2", "Set3"), consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(calibration = "none", consensusQuantile = 0.25), analysisName = "Consensus of sets 1 and 2"); # Now define the final consensus consTree.final = newConsensusTree( inputs = list("Set1", consTree.23), consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(calibration = "full quantile", consensusQuantile = 0), analysisName = "Final consensus"); consensus = hierarchicalConsensusCalculation( individualData = data, consensusTree = consTree.final, saveConsensusData = FALSE, keepIntermediateResults = FALSE) names(consensus)
# We generate 3 simple matrices set.seed(5) data = replicate(3, matrix(rnorm(10*100), 10, 100)) names(data) = c("Set1", "Set2", "Set3"); # Put together a consensus tree. In this example the final consensus uses # as input set 1 and a consensus of sets 2 and 3. # First define the consensus of sets 2 and 3: consTree.23 = newConsensusTree( inputs = c("Set2", "Set3"), consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(calibration = "none", consensusQuantile = 0.25), analysisName = "Consensus of sets 1 and 2"); # Now define the final consensus consTree.final = newConsensusTree( inputs = list("Set1", consTree.23), consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(calibration = "full quantile", consensusQuantile = 0), analysisName = "Final consensus"); consensus = hierarchicalConsensusCalculation( individualData = data, consensusTree = consTree.final, saveConsensusData = FALSE, keepIntermediateResults = FALSE) names(consensus)
This function calculates several measures of fuzzy module membership in hiearchical consensus modules.
hierarchicalConsensusKME( multiExpr, moduleLabels, multiWeights = NULL, multiEigengenes = NULL, consensusTree, signed = TRUE, useModules = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getFDR = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(calculateQvalue = getFDR, pValueMethod = "scale"), setNames = names(multiExpr), excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = if (is.numeric(moduleLabels)) 0 else "grey", reportWeightType = NULL, getOwnModuleZ = TRUE, getBestModuleZ = TRUE, getOwnConsensusKME = TRUE, getBestConsensusKME = TRUE, getAverageKME = FALSE, getConsensusKME = TRUE, getMetaColsFor1Set = FALSE, getMetaP = FALSE, getMetaFDR = getMetaP && getFDR, getSetKME = TRUE, getSetZ = FALSE, getSetP = FALSE, getSetFDR = getSetP && getFDR, includeID = TRUE, additionalGeneInfo = NULL, includeWeightTypeInColnames = TRUE)
hierarchicalConsensusKME( multiExpr, moduleLabels, multiWeights = NULL, multiEigengenes = NULL, consensusTree, signed = TRUE, useModules = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getFDR = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(calculateQvalue = getFDR, pValueMethod = "scale"), setNames = names(multiExpr), excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = if (is.numeric(moduleLabels)) 0 else "grey", reportWeightType = NULL, getOwnModuleZ = TRUE, getBestModuleZ = TRUE, getOwnConsensusKME = TRUE, getBestConsensusKME = TRUE, getAverageKME = FALSE, getConsensusKME = TRUE, getMetaColsFor1Set = FALSE, getMetaP = FALSE, getMetaFDR = getMetaP && getFDR, getSetKME = TRUE, getSetZ = FALSE, getSetP = FALSE, getSetFDR = getSetP && getFDR, includeID = TRUE, additionalGeneInfo = NULL, includeWeightTypeInColnames = TRUE)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
moduleLabels |
A vector with one entry per column (gene or probe) in |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights for data in |
multiEigengenes |
Optional specification of module eigengenes of the modules ( |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
signed |
Logical: should module membership be considered singed? Signed membership should be used for signed (including signed hybrid) networks and means that negative module membership means the gene is not a member of the module. In other words, in signed networks negative kME values are not considered significant and the corresponding p-values will be one-sided. In unsigned networks, negative kME values are considered significant and the corresponding p-values will be two-sided. |
useModules |
Optional vector specifying which modules should be used. Defaults to all modules except the unassigned module. |
metaAnalysisWeights |
Optional specification of meta-analysis weights for each input set. If given, must be a numeric vector
of length equal the number of input data sets (i.e., |
corAndPvalueFnc |
Function that calculates associations between expression profiles and eigengenes. See details. |
corOptions |
List giving additional arguments to function |
corComponent |
Name of the component of output of |
getFDR |
Logical: should FDR be calculated? |
useRankPvalue |
Logical: should the |
rankPvalueOptions |
Additional options for function |
setNames |
Names for the input sets. If not given, will be taken from |
excludeGrey |
logical: should the grey module be excluded from the kME tables? Since the grey module is typically not a real module, it makes little sense to report kME values for it. |
greyLabel |
label that labels the grey module. |
reportWeightType |
One of |
getOwnModuleZ |
Logical: should meta-analysis Z statistic in own module be returned as a column of the output? |
getBestModuleZ |
Logical: should highest meta-analysis Z statistic across all modules and the corresponding module be returned as columns of the output? |
getOwnConsensusKME |
Logical: should consensus KME (eigengene-based connectivity) statistic in own module be returned as a column of the output? |
getBestConsensusKME |
Logical: should highest consensus KME across all modules and the corresponding module be returned as columns of the output? |
getAverageKME |
Logical: Should average KME be calculated? |
getConsensusKME |
Logical: should consensus KME be calculated? |
getMetaColsFor1Set |
Logical: should the meta-statistics be returned if the input data only have 1 set? For 1 set, meta- and individual kME values are the same, so meta-columns essentially duplicate individual columns. |
getMetaP |
Logical: should meta-analysis p-values corresponding to the KME meta-analysis Z statistics be calculated? |
getMetaFDR |
Logical: should FDR estimates for the meta-analysis p-values corresponding to the KME meta-analysis Z statistics be calculated? |
getSetKME |
Logical: should KME values for individual sets be returned? |
getSetZ |
Logical: should Z statistics corresponding to KME for individual sets be returned? |
getSetP |
Logical: should p values corresponding to KME for individual sets be returned? |
getSetFDR |
Logical: should FDR estimates corresponding to KME for individual sets be returned? |
includeID |
Logical: should gene ID (taken from column names of |
additionalGeneInfo |
Optional data frame with rows corresponding to genes in |
includeWeightTypeInColnames |
Logical: should weight type ( |
This function calculates several measures of (hierarchical) consensus KME (eigengene-based intramodular connectivity or fuzzy module membership) for all genes in all modules.
First, it calculates the meta-analysis Z statistics for correlations between genes and module eigengenes; this is known as the consensus module membership Z statistic. The meta-analysis weights can be specified by the user either explicitly or implicitly ("equal", "RootDoF" or "DoF").
Second, it can calculate the consensus KME, i.e., the hierarchical consensus of the KMEs (correlations with
eigengenes) across the individual sets. The consensus calculation is specified in the argument
consensusTree
;
typically, the consensusTree
used here will be the same as the one used for the actual consensus
network construction and module identification.
See newConsensusTree
for details on how to specify consensus trees.
Third, the function can also calculate the (weighted) average KME using the meta-analysis weights; the average KME can be interpreted as the meta-analysis of the KMEs in the individual sets. This is related to but somewhat distinct from the meta-analysis Z statistics.
In addition to these, optional output also includes, for each gene, KME values in the module to which the gene is assigned as well as the maximum KME values and modules for which the maxima are attained. For most genes, the assigned module will be the one with highest KME values, but for some genes the assigned module and module of maximum KME may be different.
The function corAndPvalueFnc
is currently
is expected to accept arguments x
(gene expression profiles), y
(eigengene expression
profiles), and alternative
with possibilities at least "greater", "two.sided"
. If weights are
given, these are passed to corAndPvalueFnc
as argument weights.x
.
Any additional arguments can be passed via corOptions
.
The function corAndPvalueFnc
should return a list which at the least contains (1) a matrix
of associations of genes and eigengenes (this component should have the name given by corComponent
),
and (2) a matrix of the corresponding p-values, named "p" or "p.value". Other components are optional but
for full functionality should include
(3) nObs
giving the number of observations for each association (which is the number of samples less
number of missing data - this can in principle vary from association to association), and (4) Z
giving a Z static for each observation. If these are missing, nObs
is calculated in the main
function, and calculations using the Z statistic are skipped.
Data frame with the following components, some of which may be missing depending on input options (for easier readability the order here is not the same as in the actual output):
ID |
Gene ID, taken from the column names of the first input data set |
If given, a copy of additionalGeneInfo
.
Z.kME.inOwnModule |
Meta-analysis Z statistic for membership in assigned module. |
maxZ.kME |
Maximum meta-analysis Z statistic for membership across all modules. |
moduleOfMaxZ.kME |
Module in which the maximum meta-analysis Z statistic is attained. |
consKME.inOwnModule |
Consensus KME in assigned module. |
maxConsKME |
Maximum consensus KME across all modules. |
moduleOfMaxConsKME |
Module in which the maximum consensus KME is attained. |
consensus.kME.1 , consensus.kME.2 , ...
|
Consensus kME (that is, the requested quantile of the kMEs in the
individual data sets)in each module for each gene across the input data
sets. The module labels (here 1, 2, etc.) correspond to those in |
weightedAverage.equalWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. |
weightedAverage.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Weighted average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. The weight of each data set is proportional to the square root of the number of samples in the set. |
weightedAverage.DoFWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Weighted average kME in each module for each gene across the input data sets. The weight of each data set is proportional to number of samples in the set. |
weightedAverage.userWeights.kME1 , weightedAverage.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
(Only present if input |
meta.Z.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set equally. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by the square root of the number of
samples. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by the number of
samples. Only returned if the function |
meta.Z.userWeights.kME1 , meta.Z.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
Meta-analysis Z statistic for kME in each module,
obtained by weighing the Z scores in each set by |
meta.p.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.p.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the equal-weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.p.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the meta-analysis Z statistics with weights proportional to the square root of the
number of samples. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.p.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the degree-of-freedom weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if the function
|
meta.p.userWeights.kME1 , meta.p.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
p-values obtained from the user-supplied weight meta-analysis Z statistics. Only returned if
|
meta.q.equalWeights.kME1 , meta.q.equalWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the equal-weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
meta.q.RootDoFWeights.kME1 , meta.q.RootDoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the meta-analysis p-values with weights proportional to the square root of the
number of samples. Only present if
|
meta.q.DoFWeights.kME1 , meta.q.DoFWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the degree-of-freedom weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
meta.q.userWeights.kME1 , meta.q.userWeights.kME2 , ...
|
q-values obtained from the user-specified weight meta-analysis p-values. Only present if
|
The next set of columns contain the results of function rankPvalue
and are only present if
input useRankPvalue
is TRUE
. Some columns may be missing depending on the options specified in
rankPvalueOptions
. We explicitly list columns that are based on weighing each set equally; names of
these columns carry the suffix .equalWeights
pValueExtremeRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueExtremeRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
This is the minimum between pValueLowRank and pValueHighRank, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueLowRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value based on the rank method. |
pValueHighRank.ME1.equalWeights , pValueHighRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueExtremeScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueExtremeScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
This is the minimum between pValueLowScale and pValueHighScale, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueLowScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
pValueHighScale.ME1.equalWeights , pValueHighScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
qValueExtremeRank.ME1.equalWeights , qValueExtremeRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeRank |
qValueLowRank.ME1.equalWeights , qValueLowRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowRank |
qValueHighRank.ME1.equalWeights , lueHighRank.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighRank |
qValueExtremeScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueExtremeScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeScale |
qValueLowScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueLowScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowScale |
qValueHighScale.ME1.equalWeights , qValueHighScale.ME2.equalWeights , ...
|
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighScale |
... |
Analogous columns corresponding to weighing individual sets by the square root of the number of
samples, by number of samples, and by user weights (if given). The corresponding column name suffixes are
|
The following set of columns summarize kME in individual input data sets.
kME1.Set_1 , kME1.Set_2 , ... , kME2.Set_1 , kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. |
p.kME1.Set_1 , p.kME1.Set_2 , ... , p.kME2.Set_1 , p.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
p-values corresponding to kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. |
q.kME1.Set_1 , q.kME1.Set_2 , ... , q.kME2.Set_1 , q.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
q-values corresponding to
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. Only returned if |
Z.kME1.Set_1 , Z.kME1.Set_2 , ... , Z.kME2.Set_1 , Z.kME2.Set_2 , ...
|
Z statistics corresponding to
kME values for each gene in each module in each given data set. Only present if the function
|
Peter Langfelder
signedKME
for eigengene based connectivity in a single data set.
corAndPvalue
, bicorAndPvalue
for two alternatives for calculating correlations and the
corresponding p-values and Z scores. Both can be used with this function.
newConsensusTree
for more details on hierarchical consensus trees and calculations.
Hierarchical consensus calculation of module eigengene dissimilarities, or more generally, correlation-based dissimilarities of sets of vectors.
hierarchicalConsensusMEDissimilarity( MEs, networkOptions, consensusTree, greyName = "ME0", calibrate = FALSE)
hierarchicalConsensusMEDissimilarity( MEs, networkOptions, consensusTree, greyName = "ME0", calibrate = FALSE)
MEs |
A |
networkOptions |
A |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
greyName |
Name of the "grey" module eigengene. Currently not used. |
calibrate |
Logical: should the dissimilarities be calibrated using the calibration method specified in
|
This function first calculates the similarities of the ME vectors from their correlations, using the appropriate
options in networkOptions
(correlation type and options, signed or unsigned dissimilarity etc). This
results in a similarity matrix in each of the input data sets.
Next, a hierarchical consensus of the similarities is calculated via a call to
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
, using the consensus specification and
options in consensusTree
. In typical use, consensusTree
contains the same consensus
specification as the consensus network calculation that gave rise to the consensus modules whose eigengenes
are contained in MEs
but this is not mandatory.
The argument consensusTree
should have the following components: (1) inputs
must be either a
character vector whose components match names(inputData)
, or consensus trees in the own right.
(2) consensusOptions
must be a list of class "ConsensusOptions"
that specifies options for
calculating the consensus. A suitable set of options can be obtained by calling
newConsensusOptions
. (3) Optionally, the component analysisName
can be a single
character string giving the name for the analysis. When intermediate results are returned, they are returned
in a list whose names will be set from analysisName
components, if they exist.
In the final step, the consensus similarity is turned into a dissimilarity by subtracting it from 1.
A matrix with rows and columns corresponding to the variables (modules) in MEs, containing the consensus dissimilarities.
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
for the actual consensus calculation.
Hierarchical consensus network construction and module identification across multiple data sets.
hierarchicalConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 12345, # Network construction options. networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", keepIndividualTOMs = FALSE, # Consensus calculation options consensusTree = NULL, # Return options saveConsensusTOM = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-%a-Block%b.RData", # Keep the consensus? keepConsensusTOM = saveConsensusTOM, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", cacheDir = ".", # Alternative consensus TOM input from a previous calculation consensusTOMInfo = NULL, # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, # Advanced tree cut opyions maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, stabilityCriterion = c("Individual fraction", "Common fraction"), minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, iteratePruningAndMerging = FALSE, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, excludeGrey = FALSE, # Module merging options calibrateMergingSimilarities = FALSE, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, # General options collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0, ...)
hierarchicalConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 12345, # Network construction options. networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? saveIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", keepIndividualTOMs = FALSE, # Consensus calculation options consensusTree = NULL, # Return options saveConsensusTOM = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-%a-Block%b.RData", # Keep the consensus? keepConsensusTOM = saveConsensusTOM, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", cacheDir = ".", # Alternative consensus TOM input from a previous calculation consensusTOMInfo = NULL, # Basic tree cut options deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, # Advanced tree cut opyions maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, stabilityLabels = NULL, stabilityCriterion = c("Individual fraction", "Common fraction"), minStabilityDissim = NULL, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, iteratePruningAndMerging = FALSE, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, excludeGrey = FALSE, # Module merging options calibrateMergingSimilarities = FALSE, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, # General options collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0, ...)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
multiExpr.imputed |
If |
checkMissingData |
Logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
Optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
Integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
Number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
Number of centers to be used in the preclustering. Defaults to smaller of
|
randomSeed |
Integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
saveIndividualTOMs |
Logical: should individual TOMs be saved to disk ( |
individualTOMFileNames |
Character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
keepIndividualTOMs |
Logical: should individual TOMs be retained after the calculation is finished? |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
saveConsensusTOM |
Logical: should the consensus TOM be saved to disk? |
consensusTOMFilePattern |
Character string giving the file names to save consensus TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
keepConsensusTOM |
Logical: should consensus TOM be retained after the calculation ends? Depending on |
useDiskCache |
Logical: should disk cache be used for consensus calculations? The disk cache can be used to store chunks of
calibrated data that are small enough to fit one chunk from each set into memory (blocks may be small enough
to fit one block of one set into memory, but not small enough to fit one block from all sets in a consensus
calculation into memory at the same time). Using disk cache is slower but lessens the memory footprint of
the calculation.
As a general guide, if individual data are split into blocks, we
recommend setting this argument to |
chunkSize |
Integer giving the chunk size. If left |
cacheDir |
Directory in which to save cache files. The files are deleted on normal exit but persist if the function terminates abnormally. |
cacheBase |
Base for the file names of cache files. |
consensusTOMInfo |
If the consensus TOM has been pre-calculated using function |
deepSplit |
Numeric value between 0 and 4. Provides a simplified control over how sensitive
module detection should be to module splitting, with 0 least and 4 most sensitive. See
|
detectCutHeight |
Dendrogram cut height for module detection. See
|
minModuleSize |
Minimum module size for module detection. See
|
checkMinModuleSize |
logical: should sanity checks be performed on |
maxCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster, given as the fraction
of |
minGap |
minimum cluster gap given as the fraction of the difference between |
maxAbsCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster given as absolute
heights. If given, overrides |
minAbsGap |
minimum cluster gap given as absolute height difference. If given, overrides
|
minSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as the fraction of the difference between
|
minAbsSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as an absolute height.
Branches merging below this height will automatically be merged. If not given (default), will be determined
from |
useBranchEigennodeDissim |
Logical: should branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity be considered when merging branches in Dynamic Tree Cut? |
minBranchEigennodeDissim |
Minimum consensus branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity for
branches to be considerd separate. The branch eigennode dissimilarity in individual sets
is simly 1-correlation of the
eigennodes; the consensus is defined as quantile with probability |
stabilityLabels |
Optional matrix of cluster labels that are to be used for calculating branch
dissimilarity based on split stability. The number of rows must equal the number of genes in
|
stabilityCriterion |
One of |
minStabilityDissim |
Minimum stability dissimilarity criterion for two branches to be considered
separate. Should be a number between 0 (essentially no dissimilarity required) and 1 (perfect dissimilarity
or distinguishability based on |
pamStage |
logical. If TRUE, the second (PAM-like) stage of module detection will be performed.
See |
pamRespectsDendro |
Logical, only used when |
iteratePruningAndMerging |
Logical: should pruning of low-KME genes and module merging be iterated?
For backward compatibility, the default is |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
excludeGrey |
logical: should the returned module eigengenes exclude the eigengene of the "module" that contains unassigned genes? |
calibrateMergingSimilarities |
Logical: should module eigengene similarities be calibrataed before calculating the consensus? Although calibration is in principle desirable, the calibration methods currently available assume large data and do not work very well on eigengene similarities. |
mergeCutHeight |
Dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage be collected after some of the memory-intensive steps? |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
... |
Other arguments. Currently ignored. |
This function calculates a consensus network with a flexible, possibly hierarchical consensus specification, identifies (consensus) modules in the network, and calculates their eigengenes. "Blockwise" calculation is available for large data sets for which a full network (TOM or adjacency matrix) would not fit into avilable RAM.
The input can be either several numerical data sets (expression etc) in the argument multiExpr
together with all necessary network construction options, or a pre-calculated network, typically the result
of a call to hierarchicalConsensusTOM
.
Steps in the network construction include the following: (1) optional filtering of variables (genes) and observations (samples) that contain too many missing values or have zero variance; (2) optional pre-clustering to split data into blocks of manageable size; (3) calculation of adjacencies and optionally of TOMs in each individual data set; (4) calculation of consensus network from the individual networks; (5) hierarchical clustering and module identification; (6) trimming of modules by removing genes with low correlation with the eigengene of the module; and (7) merging of modules whose eigengenes are strongly correlated.
Steps 1-4 (up to and including the calculation of consensus network from the individual networks) are
handled by the function hierarchicalConsensusTOM
.
Variables (genes) are clustered using average-linkage hierarchical clustering and modules are identified in the resulting dendrogram by the Dynamic Hybrid tree cut.
Found modules are trimmed of genes whose
consensus module membership kME (that is, correlation with module eigengene)
is less than minKMEtoStay
.
Modules in which
fewer than minCoreKMESize
genes have consensus KME higher than minCoreKME
are disbanded, i.e., their constituent genes are pronounced
unassigned.
After all blocks have been processed, the function checks whether there are genes whose KME in the module
they assigned is lower than KME to another module. If p-values of the higher correlations are smaller
than those of the native module by the factor reassignThresholdPS
(in every set),
the gene is re-assigned to the closer module.
In the last step, modules whose eigengenes are highly correlated are merged. This is achieved by
clustering module eigengenes using the dissimilarity given by one minus their correlation,
cutting the dendrogram at the height mergeCutHeight
and merging all modules on each branch. The
process is iterated until no modules are merged. See mergeCloseModules
for more details on
module merging.
The module trimming and merging process is optionally iterated. Iterations are recommended but are (for now) not the default for backward compatibility.
List with the following components:
labels |
A numeric vector with one component per variable (gene), giving the module label of each variable (gene). Label 0 is reserved for unassigned variables; module labels are sequential and smaller numbers are used for larger modules. |
unmergedLabels |
A numeric vector with one component per variable (gene), giving the unmerged module label of each variable (gene), i.e., module labels before the call to module merging. |
colors |
A character vector with one component per variable (gene),
giving the module colors. The labels are mapped to colors using |
unmergedColors |
A character vector with one component per variable (gene), giving the unmerged module colors. |
multiMEs |
Module eigengenes corresponding to the modules returned in |
dendrograms |
A list with one component for each block of genes. Each component is the hierarchical clustering dendrogram obtained by clustering the consensus gene dissimilarity in the corresponding block. |
consensusTOMInfo |
A list detailing various aspects of the consensus TOM. See
|
blockInfo |
A list with information about blocks as well as the vriables and observations (genes and samples) retained after filtering out those with zero variance and too many missing values. |
moduleIdentificationArguments |
A list with the module identification arguments supplied to this
function. Contains
|
If the input datasets have large numbers of genes, consider carefully the maxBlockSize
as it
significantly affects the memory footprint (and whether the function will fail with a memory allocation
error). From a theoretical point of view it is advantageous to use blocks as large as possible; on the
other hand, using smaller blocks is substantially faster and often the only way to work with large
numbers of genes. As a rough guide, when 4GB of memory are available, blocks should be no larger than 8,000
genes; with 8GB one can handle some 13,000 genes; with 16GB around 20,000; and with 32GB around 30,000.
Depending on the operating system and its setup, these numbers may vary substantially.
Peter Langfelder
Non-hierarchical consensus networks are described in Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007), Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54.
More in-depth discussion of selected topics can be found at http://www.peterlangfelder.com/ , and an FAQ at https://labs.genetics.ucla.edu/horvath/CoexpressionNetwork/Rpackages/WGCNA/faq.html .
hierarchicalConsensusTOM
for calculation of hierarchical consensus networks (adjacency and
TOM), and a more detailed description of the calculation;
hclust
and cutreeHybrid
for hierarchical clustering
and the Dynamic Tree Cut branch cutting method;
mergeCloseModules
for module merging;
blockwiseModules
for an analogous analysis on a single data set.
This function calculates consensus topological overlap in a hierarchical manner.
hierarchicalConsensusTOM( # ... information needed to calculate individual TOMs multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 20000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 12345, # Network construction options networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? keepIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # ... or information about individual (more precisely, input) TOMs individualTOMInfo = NULL, # Consensus calculation options consensusTree, useBlocks = NULL, # Save calibrated TOMs? saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs = FALSE, calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options saveConsensusTOM = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Return the intermediate results as well? keepIntermediateResults = saveConsensusTOM, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behavior collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
hierarchicalConsensusTOM( # ... information needed to calculate individual TOMs multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 20000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 12345, # Network construction options networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? keepIndividualTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # ... or information about individual (more precisely, input) TOMs individualTOMInfo = NULL, # Consensus calculation options consensusTree, useBlocks = NULL, # Save calibrated TOMs? saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs = FALSE, calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern = "calibratedIndividualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Return options saveConsensusTOM = TRUE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-%a-Block%b.RData", getCalibrationSamples = FALSE, # Return the intermediate results as well? keepIntermediateResults = saveConsensusTOM, # Internal handling of TOMs useDiskCache = NULL, chunkSize = NULL, cacheDir = ".", cacheBase = ".blockConsModsCache", # Behavior collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
checkMissingData |
Logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
Optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
Integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
Number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
Number of centers to be used in the preclustering. Defaults to smaller of
|
randomSeed |
Integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
keepIndividualTOMs |
Logical: should individual TOMs be retained after the calculation is finished? |
individualTOMFileNames |
Character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
individualTOMInfo |
A list, typically returned by |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
useBlocks |
Optional vector giving the blocks that should be used for the calcualtions. If |
saveCalibratedIndividualTOMs |
Logical: should the calibrated individual TOMs be saved? |
calibratedIndividualTOMFilePattern |
Specification of file names in which calibrated individual TOMs should be saved. |
saveConsensusTOM |
Logical: should the consensus TOM be saved to disk? |
consensusTOMFilePattern |
Character string giving the file names to save consensus TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
getCalibrationSamples |
Logical: should the sampled values used for network calibration be returned? |
keepIntermediateResults |
Logical: should intermediate consensus TOMs be saved as well? |
useDiskCache |
Logical: should disk cache be used for consensus calculations? The disk cache can be used to store chunks of
calibrated data that are small enough to fit one chunk from each set into memory (blocks may be small enough
to fit one block of one set into memory, but not small enough to fit one block from all sets in a consensus
calculation into memory at the same time). Using disk cache is slower but lessens the memory footprint of
the calculation.
As a general guide, if individual data are split into blocks, we
recommend setting this argument to |
chunkSize |
network similarities are saved in smaller chunks of size |
cacheDir |
character string containing the directory into which cache files should be written. The user should make sure that the filesystem has enough free space to hold the cache files which can get quite large. |
cacheBase |
character string containing the desired name for the cache files. The actual file
names will consists of |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage be collected after memory-intensive operations? |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function is essentially a wrapper for hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
, with a few
additional operations specific to calculations of topological overlaps.
A list that contains the output of hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
and two extra components:
individualTOMInfo |
A copy of the input |
consensusTree |
A copy of the input |
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
for the actual hierarchical consensus calculation;
individualTOMs
for the calculation of individual TOMs in a format suitable for consensus
calculation.
Merges hierarchical consensus modules that are too close as measured by the correlation of their eigengenes.
hierarchicalMergeCloseModules( # input data multiExpr, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, labels, # Optional starting eigengenes MEs = NULL, unassdColor = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", # If missing data are present, impute them? impute = TRUE, # Options for eigengene network construction networkOptions, # Options for constructing the consensus consensusTree, calibrateMESimilarities = FALSE, # Merging options cutHeight = 0.2, iterate = TRUE, # Output options relabel = FALSE, colorSeq = NULL, getNewMEs = TRUE, getNewUnassdME = TRUE, # Options controlling behaviour of the function trapErrors = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
hierarchicalMergeCloseModules( # input data multiExpr, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, labels, # Optional starting eigengenes MEs = NULL, unassdColor = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", # If missing data are present, impute them? impute = TRUE, # Options for eigengene network construction networkOptions, # Options for constructing the consensus consensusTree, calibrateMESimilarities = FALSE, # Merging options cutHeight = 0.2, iterate = TRUE, # Output options relabel = FALSE, colorSeq = NULL, getNewMEs = TRUE, getNewUnassdME = TRUE, # Options controlling behaviour of the function trapErrors = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiExpr.imputed |
If |
labels |
A vector (numeric, character or a factor) giving module labels for genes (variables) in |
MEs |
If module eigengenes have been calculated before, the user can save some computational time
by inputting them. |
unassdColor |
The label (value in |
impute |
Should missing values be imputed in eigengene calculation? If imputation is disabled, the
presence of |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See |
calibrateMESimilarities |
Logical: should module eigengene similarities be calibrated? This setting overrides the calibration options
in |
cutHeight |
Maximum dissimilarity (i.e., 1-correlation) that qualifies modules for merging. |
iterate |
Controls whether the merging procedure should be repeated until there is no change. If FALSE, only one iteration will be executed. |
relabel |
Controls whether, after merging, color labels should be ordered by module size. |
colorSeq |
Color labels to be used for relabeling. Defaults to the standard color order used
in this package if |
getNewMEs |
Controls whether module eigengenes of merged modules should be calculated and returned. |
getNewUnassdME |
When doing module eigengene manipulations, the function does not normally
calculate the eigengene of the 'module' of unassigned ('grey') genes. Setting this option to
|
trapErrors |
Controls whether computational errors in calculating module eigengenes, their
dissimilarity, and merging trees should be trapped. If |
verbose |
Controls verbosity of printed progress messages. 0 means silent, up to (about) 5 the verbosity gradually increases. |
indent |
A single non-negative integer controlling indentation of printed messages. 0 means no indentation, each unit above that adds two spaces. |
This function merges input modules
that are closely related. The similarities are quantified by correlations of module eigengenes; a
“consensus” similarity is calculated using hierarchicalConsensusMEDissimilarity
according to the recipe in consensusTree
. Once the
(dis-)similarities are calculated, average linkage hierarchical clustering of the module eigengenes is
performed, the dendrogram is cut at the height cutHeight
and modules on each branch are merged.
The process is (optionally) repeated until no more modules are merged.
If, for a particular module, the module eigengene calculation fails, a hubgene approximation will be used.
The user should be aware that if a computational error occurs and trapErrors==TRUE
,
the returned list (see below) will not contain all of the components returned upon normal execution.
If no errors occurred, a list with components
labels |
Labels for the genes corresponding to merged modules. The function attempts to
mimic the mode of the input |
dendro |
Hierarchical clustering dendrogram (average linkage) of the eigengenes of the most
recently computed tree. If |
oldDendro |
Hierarchical clustering dendrogram (average linkage) of the eigengenes of the original modules. |
cutHeight |
The input cutHeight. |
oldMEs |
Module eigengenes of the original modules in the sets given by |
newMEs |
Module eigengenes of the merged modules in the sets given by |
allOK |
A logical set to |
If an error occurred and trapErrors==TRUE
, the list only contains these components:
colors |
A copy of the input colors. |
allOK |
a logical set to |
Peter Langfelder
multiSetMEs
for calculation of (consensus) module eigengenes across multiple data sets;
newConsensusTree
for information about consensus trees;
hierarchicalConsensusMEDissimilarity
for calculation of hierarchical consensus eigengene
dissimilarity.
Calculate approximate hub gene significance for all modules in network.
hubGeneSignificance(datKME, GS)
hubGeneSignificance(datKME, GS)
datKME |
a data frame (or a matrix-like object) containing eigengene-based connectivities of all genes in the network. |
GS |
a vector with one entry for every gene containing its gene significance. |
In datKME
rows correspond to genes and columns to modules.
A vector whose entries are the hub gene significances for each module.
Steve Horvath
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
This matrix gives a predefined set of marker genes for many immune response pathways, as assembled by Brian Modena (a member of Daniel R Salomon's lab at Scripps Research Institute), and colleagues. It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(ImmunePathwayLists)
data(ImmunePathwayLists)
A 3597 x 2 matrix of characters containing Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <Immune Pathway>__ImmunePathway. Note that the matrix is sorted first by Category and then by Gene, such that all genes related to the same category are listed sequentially.
For more information about this list, please see userListEnrichment
data(ImmunePathwayLists) head(ImmunePathwayLists)
data(ImmunePathwayLists) head(ImmunePathwayLists)
Use impute.knn
to ipmpute missing data, separately in each module.
imputeByModule( data, labels, excludeUnassigned = FALSE, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", scale = TRUE, ...)
imputeByModule( data, labels, excludeUnassigned = FALSE, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", scale = TRUE, ...)
data |
Data to be imputed, with variables (genes) in columns and observations (samples) in rows. |
labels |
Module labels. A vector with one entry for each column in |
excludeUnassigned |
Logical: should unassigned variables (genes) be excluded from the imputation? |
unassignedLabel |
The value in |
scale |
Logical: should |
... |
Other arguments to |
The input data
with missing values imputed.
This function is potentially faster but could give different imputed values than applying impute.knn
directly to (scaled) data
.
Peter Langfelder
impute.knn
that does the actual imputation.
This function calculates correlation network matrices (adjacencies or topological overlaps), after optionally first pre-clustering input data into blocks.
individualTOMs( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction options networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? saveTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Behaviour options collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
individualTOMs( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, # Data checking options checkMissingData = TRUE, # Blocking options blocks = NULL, maxBlockSize = 5000, blockSizePenaltyPower = 5, nPreclusteringCenters = NULL, randomSeed = 54321, # Network construction options networkOptions, # Save individual TOMs? saveTOMs = TRUE, individualTOMFileNames = "individualTOM-Set%s-Block%b.RData", # Behaviour options collectGarbage = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
multiExpr.imputed |
Optional version of |
checkMissingData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive numbers of missing entries in genes and samples, and for genes with zero variance? See details. |
blocks |
optional specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. If given, must be a numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
maxBlockSize |
integer giving maximum block size for module detection. Ignored if |
blockSizePenaltyPower |
number specifying how strongly blocks should be penalized for exceeding the
maximum size. Set to a lrge number or |
nPreclusteringCenters |
number of centers to be used in the preclustering. Defaults to smaller of
|
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function
starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. If |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
saveTOMs |
logical: should individual TOMs be saved to disk ( |
individualTOMFileNames |
character string giving the file names to save individual TOMs into. The
following tags should be used to make the file names unique for each set and block: |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage collection be called after each block calculation? This can be useful when the data are large, but could unnecessarily slow down calculation with small data. |
verbose |
Integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
Indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The function starts by optionally filtering out samples that have too many missing entries and genes that have either too many missing entries or zero variance in at least one set. Genes that are filtered out are excluded from the network calculations.
If blocks
is not given and
the number of genes (columns) in multiExpr
exceeds maxBlockSize
, genes are pre-clustered into blocks using the function
consensusProjectiveKMeans
; otherwise all genes are treated in a single block. Any missing data
in multiExpr
will be imputed; if imputed data are already available, they can be supplied separately.
For each block of genes, the network adjacency is constructed and (if requested) topological overlap is calculated in each set. The topological overlaps can be saved to disk as RData files, or returned directly within the return value (see below). Note that the matrices can be big and returning them within the return value can quickly exhaust the system's memory. In particular, if the block-wise calculation is necessary, it is usually impossible to return all matrices in the return value.
A list with the following components:
blockwiseAdjacencies |
A |
setNames |
A copy of |
nSets |
Number of sets in |
blockInfo |
A list of class |
networkOptions |
The input |
Peter Langfelder
Input arguments and output components of this function use multiData
,
NetworkOptions
, BlockwiseData
, and BlockInformation
.
Underlying functions of interest include consensusProjectiveKMeans
,
TOMsimilarityFromExpr
.
These functions provide an inline display of pregress.
initProgInd(leadStr = "..", trailStr = "", quiet = !interactive()) updateProgInd(newFrac, progInd, quiet = !interactive())
initProgInd(leadStr = "..", trailStr = "", quiet = !interactive()) updateProgInd(newFrac, progInd, quiet = !interactive())
leadStr |
character string that will be printed before the actual progress number. |
trailStr |
character string that will be printed after the actual progress number. |
quiet |
can be used to silence the indicator for non-interactive sessions whose output is typically redirected to a file. |
newFrac |
new fraction of progress to be displayed. |
progInd |
an object of class |
A progress indicator is a simple inline display of progress intended to satisfy impatient users during
lengthy operations. The function initProgInd
initializes a progress indicator (at zero);
updateProgInd
updates it to a specified fraction.
Note that excessive use of updateProgInd
may lead to a performance penalty (see examples).
Both functions return an object of class progressIndicator
that holds information on the last
printed value and should be used for subsequent updates of the indicator.
Peter Langfelder
max = 10; prog = initProgInd("Counting: ", "done"); for (c in 1:max) { Sys.sleep(0.10); prog = updateProgInd(c/max, prog); } printFlush(""); printFlush("Example 2:"); prog = initProgInd(); for (c in 1:max) { Sys.sleep(0.10); prog = updateProgInd(c/max, prog); } printFlush(""); ## Example of a significant slowdown: ## Without progress indicator: system.time( {a = 0; for (i in 1:10000) a = a+i; } ) ## With progress indicator, some 50 times slower: system.time( { prog = initProgInd("Counting: ", "done"); a = 0; for (i in 1:10000) { a = a+i; prog = updateProgInd(i/10000, prog); } } )
max = 10; prog = initProgInd("Counting: ", "done"); for (c in 1:max) { Sys.sleep(0.10); prog = updateProgInd(c/max, prog); } printFlush(""); printFlush("Example 2:"); prog = initProgInd(); for (c in 1:max) { Sys.sleep(0.10); prog = updateProgInd(c/max, prog); } printFlush(""); ## Example of a significant slowdown: ## Without progress indicator: system.time( {a = 0; for (i in 1:10000) a = a+i; } ) ## With progress indicator, some 50 times slower: system.time( { prog = initProgInd("Counting: ", "done"); a = 0; for (i in 1:10000) { a = a+i; prog = updateProgInd(i/10000, prog); } } )
Calculates intramodular connectivity, i.e., connectivity of nodes to other nodes within the same module.
intramodularConnectivity(adjMat, colors, scaleByMax = FALSE) intramodularConnectivity.fromExpr(datExpr, colors, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, distFnc = "dist", distOptions = "method = 'euclidean'", networkType = "unsigned", power = if (networkType=="distance") 1 else 6, scaleByMax = FALSE, ignoreColors = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", getWholeNetworkConnectivity = TRUE)
intramodularConnectivity(adjMat, colors, scaleByMax = FALSE) intramodularConnectivity.fromExpr(datExpr, colors, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, distFnc = "dist", distOptions = "method = 'euclidean'", networkType = "unsigned", power = if (networkType=="distance") 1 else 6, scaleByMax = FALSE, ignoreColors = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", getWholeNetworkConnectivity = TRUE)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix, a square, symmetric matrix with entries between 0 and 1. |
colors |
module labels. A vector of length |
scaleByMax |
logical: should intramodular connectivities be scaled by the maximum IM connectivity in each module? |
datExpr |
data frame or matrix containing expression data. Columns correspond to genes and rows to samples. |
corFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression similarity for correlation networks. Defaults to Pearson correlation. Any function returning values between -1 and 1 can be used. |
corOptions |
character string specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
weights |
optional matrix of the same dimensions as |
distFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression
similarity for distance networks. Defaults to the function |
distOptions |
character string specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
power |
soft thresholding power. |
ignoreColors |
level(s) of |
getWholeNetworkConnectivity |
logical: should whole-network connectivity be computed as well? For large networks, this can be quite time-consuming. |
The module labels can be numeric or character. For each node (gene), the function sums adjacency entries (excluding the diagonal) to other nodes within the same module. Optionally, the connectivities can be scaled by the maximum connectivy in each module.
If input getWholeNetworkConnectivity
is TRUE
, a data frame with 4 columns giving the total connectivity, intramodular connectivity, extra-modular
connectivity, and the difference of the intra- and extra-modular connectivities for all genes; otherwise a
vector of intramodular connectivities,
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
Attempts to determine whether the supplied object is a valid multiData structure (see Details).
isMultiData(x, strict = TRUE)
isMultiData(x, strict = TRUE)
x |
An object. |
strict |
Logical: should the structure of multiData be checked for "strict" compliance? |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
This function checks whether the supplied x
is a multiData structure in the "strict" (when
strict = TRUE
or "loose" strict = FALSE
sense.
Logical: TRUE
if the input x
is a multiData structure, FALSE
otherwise.
Peter Langfelder
Other multiData handling functions whose names start with mtd.
This function strips out probes that are not shared by all given data sets, and orders the remaining common probes using the same order in all sets.
keepCommonProbes(multiExpr, orderBy = 1)
keepCommonProbes(multiExpr, orderBy = 1)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
orderBy |
index of the set by which probes are to be ordered. |
Expression data in the same format as the input data, containing only common probes.
Peter Langfelder
Plots the kME values of genes in two groups of expression data for each module in an inputted color vector.
kMEcomparisonScatterplot( datExpr1, datExpr2, colorh, inA = NULL, inB = NULL, MEsA = NULL, MEsB = NULL, nameA = "A", nameB = "B", plotAll = FALSE, noGrey = TRUE, maxPlot = 1000, pch = 19, fileName = if (plotAll) paste("kME_correlations_between_",nameA,"_and_", nameB,"_all.pdf",sep="") else paste("kME_correlations_between_",nameA,"_and_", nameB,"_inMod.pdf",sep=""), ...)
kMEcomparisonScatterplot( datExpr1, datExpr2, colorh, inA = NULL, inB = NULL, MEsA = NULL, MEsB = NULL, nameA = "A", nameB = "B", plotAll = FALSE, noGrey = TRUE, maxPlot = 1000, pch = 19, fileName = if (plotAll) paste("kME_correlations_between_",nameA,"_and_", nameB,"_all.pdf",sep="") else paste("kME_correlations_between_",nameA,"_and_", nameB,"_inMod.pdf",sep=""), ...)
datExpr1 |
The first expression matrix (samples=rows, genes=columns). This can either include only the data for group A (in which case dataExpr2 must be entered), or can contain all of the data for groups A and B (in which case inA and inB must be entered). |
datExpr2 |
The second expression matrix, or set to NULL if all data is from same expression matrix. If entered, datExpr2 must contain the same genes as datExpr1 in the same order. |
colorh |
The common color vector (module labels) corresponding to both sets of expression data. |
inA , inB
|
Vectors of TRUE/FALSE indicating whether a sample is in group A/B, or a vector of numeric indices indicating which samples are in group A/B. If datExpr2 is entered, these inputs are ignored (thus default = NULL). For these and all other A/B inputs, "A" corresponds to datExpr1 and "B" corresponds to datExpr2 if datExpr2 is entered; otherwise "A" corresponds to datExpr1[inA,] while "B" corresponds to datExpr1[inB,]. |
MEsA , MEsB
|
Either the module eigengenes or NULL (default) in which case the module eigengenes will be calculated. In inputted, MEs MUST be calculated using "moduleEigengenes(<parameters>)$eigengenes" for function to work properly. |
nameA , nameB
|
The names of these groups (defaults = "A" and "B"). The resulting file name (see below) and x and y axis labels for each scatter plot depend on these names. |
plotAll |
If TRUE, plot gene-ME correlations for all genes. If FALSE, plot correlations for only genes in the plotted module (default). Note that the output file name will be different depending on this parameter, so both can be run without overwriting results. |
noGrey |
If TRUE (default), the grey module genes are ignored. This parameter is only used if MEsA and MEsB are calculated. |
maxPlot |
The maximum number of random genes to include (default=1000). Smaller values lead to smaller and less cluttered plots, usually without significantly affecting the resulting correlations. This parameter is only used if plotAll=TRUE. |
pch |
See help file for "points". Setting pch=19 (default) produces solid circles. |
fileName |
Name of the file to hold the plots. Since the output format is pdf, the extension should be .pdf . |
... |
Other plotting parameters that are allowable inputs to verboseScatterplot. |
The default output is a file called "kME_correlations_between_[nameA]_and_[nameB]_[all/inMod].pdf", where [nameA] and [nameB] correspond to the nameA and nameB input parameters, and [all/inMod] depends on whether plotAll=TRUE or FALSE. This output file contains all of the plots as separate pdf images, and will be located in the current working directory.
The function "pdf", which can be found in the grDevices library, is required to run this function.
Jeremy Miller
# Example output file ("kME_correlations_between_A_and_B_inMod.pdf") using simulated data. ## Not run: set.seed = 100 ME=matrix(0,50,5) for (i in 1:5) ME[,i]=sample(1:100,50) simData1 = simulateDatExpr5Modules(MEturquoise=ME[,1],MEblue=ME[,2], MEbrown=ME[,3],MEyellow=ME[,4], MEgreen=ME[,5]) simData2 = simulateDatExpr5Modules(MEturquoise=ME[,1],MEblue=ME[,2], MEbrown=ME[,3],MEyellow=ME[,4], MEgreen=ME[,5]) kMEcomparisonScatterplot(simData1$datExpr,simData2$datExpr,simData1$truemodule) ## End(Not run)
# Example output file ("kME_correlations_between_A_and_B_inMod.pdf") using simulated data. ## Not run: set.seed = 100 ME=matrix(0,50,5) for (i in 1:5) ME[,i]=sample(1:100,50) simData1 = simulateDatExpr5Modules(MEturquoise=ME[,1],MEblue=ME[,2], MEbrown=ME[,3],MEyellow=ME[,4], MEgreen=ME[,5]) simData2 = simulateDatExpr5Modules(MEturquoise=ME[,1],MEblue=ME[,2], MEbrown=ME[,3],MEyellow=ME[,4], MEgreen=ME[,5]) kMEcomparisonScatterplot(simData1$datExpr,simData2$datExpr,simData1$truemodule) ## End(Not run)
Produce a barplot with extra annotation.
labeledBarplot( Matrix, labels, colorLabels = FALSE, colored = TRUE, setStdMargins = TRUE, stdErrors = NULL, cex.lab = NULL, xLabelsAngle = 45, ...)
labeledBarplot( Matrix, labels, colorLabels = FALSE, colored = TRUE, setStdMargins = TRUE, stdErrors = NULL, cex.lab = NULL, xLabelsAngle = 45, ...)
Matrix |
vector or a matrix to be plotted. |
labels |
labels to annotate the bars underneath the barplot. |
colorLabels |
logical: should the labels be interpreted as colors? If |
colored |
logical: should the bars be divided into segments and colored? If |
setStdMargins |
if |
stdErrors |
if given, error bars corresponding to |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for axis labels, including the text labels underneath the barplot. |
xLabelsAngle |
angle at which text labels under the barplot will be printed. |
... |
other parameters for the function |
Individual bars in the barplot can be identified either by printing the text of the corresponding entry
in labels
underneath the bar at the angle specified by xLabelsAngle
,
or by interpreting the labels
entry as a
color (see below) and drawing a correspondingly colored square underneath the bar.
For reasons of compatibility with other functions, labels
are interpreted as colors after
stripping the first two characters from each label. For example, the label "MEturquoise"
is
interpreted as the color turquoise.
If colored
is set, the code assumes that labels
can be interpreted as colors, and the input
Matrix
is square and the rows have the same labels as the columns. Each bar in the barplot is then
sectioned into contributions from each row entry in Matrix
and is colored by the color given by the
entry in labels
that corresponds to the row.
None.
Peter Langfelder
Plots a heatmap plot with color legend, row and column annotation, and optional text within th heatmap.
labeledHeatmap( Matrix, xLabels, yLabels = NULL, xSymbols = NULL, ySymbols = NULL, colorLabels = NULL, xColorLabels = FALSE, yColorLabels = FALSE, checkColorsValid = TRUE, invertColors = FALSE, setStdMargins = TRUE, xLabelsPosition = "bottom", xLabelsAngle = 45, xLabelsAdj = 1, yLabelsPosition = "left", xColorWidth = 2 * strheight("M"), yColorWidth = 2 * strwidth("M"), xColorOffset = strheight("M")/3, yColorOffset = strwidth("M")/3, colorMatrix = NULL, colors = NULL, naColor = "grey", textMatrix = NULL, cex.text = NULL, textAdj = c(0.5, 0.5), cex.lab = NULL, cex.lab.x = cex.lab, cex.lab.y = cex.lab, colors.lab.x = 1, colors.lab.y = 1, font.lab.x = 1, font.lab.y = 1, bg.lab.x = NULL, bg.lab.y = NULL, x.adj.lab.y = 1, plotLegend = TRUE, keepLegendSpace = plotLegend, legendLabel = "", cex.legendLabel = 1, # Separator line specification verticalSeparator.x = NULL, verticalSeparator.col = 1, verticalSeparator.lty = 1, verticalSeparator.lwd = 1, verticalSeparator.ext = 0, verticalSeparator.interval = 0, horizontalSeparator.y = NULL, horizontalSeparator.col = 1, horizontalSeparator.lty = 1, horizontalSeparator.lwd = 1, horizontalSeparator.ext = 0, horizontalSeparator.interval = 0, # optional restrictions on which rows and columns to actually show showRows = NULL, showCols = NULL, ...)
labeledHeatmap( Matrix, xLabels, yLabels = NULL, xSymbols = NULL, ySymbols = NULL, colorLabels = NULL, xColorLabels = FALSE, yColorLabels = FALSE, checkColorsValid = TRUE, invertColors = FALSE, setStdMargins = TRUE, xLabelsPosition = "bottom", xLabelsAngle = 45, xLabelsAdj = 1, yLabelsPosition = "left", xColorWidth = 2 * strheight("M"), yColorWidth = 2 * strwidth("M"), xColorOffset = strheight("M")/3, yColorOffset = strwidth("M")/3, colorMatrix = NULL, colors = NULL, naColor = "grey", textMatrix = NULL, cex.text = NULL, textAdj = c(0.5, 0.5), cex.lab = NULL, cex.lab.x = cex.lab, cex.lab.y = cex.lab, colors.lab.x = 1, colors.lab.y = 1, font.lab.x = 1, font.lab.y = 1, bg.lab.x = NULL, bg.lab.y = NULL, x.adj.lab.y = 1, plotLegend = TRUE, keepLegendSpace = plotLegend, legendLabel = "", cex.legendLabel = 1, # Separator line specification verticalSeparator.x = NULL, verticalSeparator.col = 1, verticalSeparator.lty = 1, verticalSeparator.lwd = 1, verticalSeparator.ext = 0, verticalSeparator.interval = 0, horizontalSeparator.y = NULL, horizontalSeparator.col = 1, horizontalSeparator.lty = 1, horizontalSeparator.lwd = 1, horizontalSeparator.ext = 0, horizontalSeparator.interval = 0, # optional restrictions on which rows and columns to actually show showRows = NULL, showCols = NULL, ...)
Matrix |
numerical matrix to be plotted in the heatmap. |
xLabels |
labels for the columns. See Details. |
yLabels |
labels for the rows. See Details. |
xSymbols |
additional labels used when |
ySymbols |
additional labels used when |
colorLabels |
logical: should |
xColorLabels |
logical: should |
yColorLabels |
logical: should |
checkColorsValid |
logical: should given colors be checked for validity
against the output of |
invertColors |
logical: should the color order be inverted? |
setStdMargins |
logical: should standard margins be set before calling the plot function?
Standard margins depend on |
xLabelsPosition |
a character string specifying the position of labels for the columns.
Recognized values are (unique abbreviations of) |
xLabelsAngle |
angle by which the column labels should be rotated. |
xLabelsAdj |
justification parameter for column labels. See |
yLabelsPosition |
a character string specifying the position of labels for the columns.
Recognized values are (unique abbreviations of) |
xColorWidth |
width of the color labels for the x axis expressed in user corrdinates. |
yColorWidth |
width of the color labels for the y axis expressed in user coordinates. |
xColorOffset |
gap between the y axis and color labels, in user coordinates. |
yColorOffset |
gap between the x axis and color labels, in user coordinates. |
colorMatrix |
optional explicit specification for the color of the heatmap cells. If given, overrides values
specified in |
colors |
color pallette to be used in the heatmap. Defaults to |
naColor |
color to be used for encoding missing data. Only used if |
textMatrix |
optional text entries for each cell. Either a matrix of the same dimensions as
|
cex.text |
character expansion factor for |
textAdj |
Adjustment for the entries in the text matrix. See the |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for text labels labeling the axes. |
cex.lab.x |
character expansion factor for text labels labeling the x axis. Overrides |
cex.lab.y |
character expansion factor for text labels labeling the y axis. Overrides |
colors.lab.x |
colors for character labels or symbols along x axis. |
colors.lab.y |
colors for character labels or symbols along y axis. |
font.lab.x |
integer specifying font for labels or symbols along x axis. See |
font.lab.y |
integer specifying font for labels or symbols along y axis. See |
bg.lab.x |
background color for the margin along the x axis. |
bg.lab.y |
background color for the margin along the y axs. |
x.adj.lab.y |
Justification of labels for the y axis along the x direction. A value of 0 produces left-justified text, 0.5 (the default) centered text and 1 right-justified text. |
plotLegend |
logical: should a color legend be plotted? |
keepLegendSpace |
logical: if the color legend is not drawn, should the space be left empty
( |
legendLabel |
character string to be shown next to the label analogous to an axis label. |
cex.legendLabel |
character expansion factor for the legend label. |
verticalSeparator.x |
indices of columns in input |
verticalSeparator.col |
color(s) of the vertical separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
verticalSeparator.lty |
line type of the vertical separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
verticalSeparator.lwd |
line width of the vertical separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
verticalSeparator.ext |
number giving the extension of the separator line into the margin as a fraction of the margin width. 0 means no extension, 1 means extend all the way through the margin. |
verticalSeparator.interval |
number giving the interval for vertical separators. If larger than zero, vertical
separators will be drawn after every |
horizontalSeparator.y |
indices of columns in input |
horizontalSeparator.col |
color(s) of the horizontal separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
horizontalSeparator.lty |
line type of the horizontal separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
horizontalSeparator.lwd |
line width of the horizontal separator lines. Recycled if need be. |
horizontalSeparator.ext |
number giving the extension of the separator line into the margin as a fraction of the margin width. 0 means no extension, 1 means extend all the way through the margin. |
horizontalSeparator.interval |
number giving the interval for horizontal separators. If larger than zero, horizontal
separators will be drawn after every |
showRows |
A numeric vector giving the indices of rows that are actually to be shown. Defaults to all rows. |
showCols |
A numeric vector giving the indices of columns that are actually to be shown. Defaults to all columns. |
... |
other arguments to function |
The function basically plots a standard heatmap plot of the given Matrix
and embellishes it with
row and column labels and/or with text within the heatmap entries. Row and column labels can be either
character strings or color squares, or both.
To get simple text labels, use colorLabels=FALSE
and pass the desired row and column labels in
yLabels
and xLabels
, respectively.
To label rows and columns by color squares, use
colorLabels=TRUE
; yLabels
and xLabels
are then expected to represent valid colors.
For reasons of compatibility with other functions, each entry in yLabels
and xLabels
is
expected to consist of a color designation preceded by 2 characters: an example would be
MEturquoise
. The first two characters can be arbitrary, they are stripped.
Any labels that do not represent valid colors will be considered text labels and printed in full,
allowing the user to mix text and color labels.
It is also possible to label rows and columns by both color squares and additional text annotation. To
achieve this, use the above technique to get color labels and, additionally, pass the desired text
annotation in the xSymbols
and ySymbols
arguments.
None.
Peter Langfelder
# This example illustrates 4 main ways of annotating columns and rows of a heatmap. # Copy and paste the whole example into an R session with an interactive plot window; # alternatively, you may replace the command sizeGrWindow below by opening # another graphical device such as pdf. # Generate a matrix to be plotted nCol = 8; nRow = 7; mat = matrix(runif(nCol*nRow, min = -1, max = 1), nRow, nCol); rowColors = standardColors(nRow); colColors = standardColors(nRow + nCol)[(nRow+1):(nRow + nCol)]; rowColors; colColors; sizeGrWindow(9,7) par(mfrow = c(2,2)) par(mar = c(4, 5, 4, 6)); # Label rows and columns by text: labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colColors, yLabels = rowColors, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Text-labeled heatmap"); # Label rows and columns by colors: rowLabels = paste("ME", rowColors, sep=""); colLabels = paste("ME", colColors, sep=""); labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Color-labeled heatmap"); # Mix text and color labels: rowLabels[3] = "Row 3"; colLabels[1] = "Column 1"; labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Mix-labeled heatmap"); # Color labels and additional text labels rowLabels = paste("ME", rowColors, sep=""); colLabels = paste("ME", colColors, sep=""); extraRowLabels = paste("Row", c(1:nRow)); extraColLabels = paste("Column", c(1:nCol)); # Extend margins to fit all labels par(mar = c(6, 6, 4, 6)); labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, xSymbols = extraColLabels, ySymbols = extraRowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Text- + color-labeled heatmap");
# This example illustrates 4 main ways of annotating columns and rows of a heatmap. # Copy and paste the whole example into an R session with an interactive plot window; # alternatively, you may replace the command sizeGrWindow below by opening # another graphical device such as pdf. # Generate a matrix to be plotted nCol = 8; nRow = 7; mat = matrix(runif(nCol*nRow, min = -1, max = 1), nRow, nCol); rowColors = standardColors(nRow); colColors = standardColors(nRow + nCol)[(nRow+1):(nRow + nCol)]; rowColors; colColors; sizeGrWindow(9,7) par(mfrow = c(2,2)) par(mar = c(4, 5, 4, 6)); # Label rows and columns by text: labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colColors, yLabels = rowColors, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Text-labeled heatmap"); # Label rows and columns by colors: rowLabels = paste("ME", rowColors, sep=""); colLabels = paste("ME", colColors, sep=""); labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Color-labeled heatmap"); # Mix text and color labels: rowLabels[3] = "Row 3"; colLabels[1] = "Column 1"; labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Mix-labeled heatmap"); # Color labels and additional text labels rowLabels = paste("ME", rowColors, sep=""); colLabels = paste("ME", colColors, sep=""); extraRowLabels = paste("Row", c(1:nRow)); extraColLabels = paste("Column", c(1:nCol)); # Extend margins to fit all labels par(mar = c(6, 6, 4, 6)); labeledHeatmap(mat, xLabels = colLabels, yLabels = rowLabels, xSymbols = extraColLabels, ySymbols = extraRowLabels, colorLabels = TRUE, colors = greenWhiteRed(50), setStdMargins = FALSE, textMatrix = signif(mat, 2), main = "Text- + color-labeled heatmap");
This function produces labaled heatmaps divided into several plots. This is useful for large heatmaps where labels on individual columns and rows may become unreadably small (or overlap).
labeledHeatmap.multiPage( # Input data and ornaments Matrix, xLabels, yLabels = NULL, xSymbols = NULL, ySymbols = NULL, textMatrix = NULL, # Paging options rowsPerPage = NULL, maxRowsPerPage = 20, colsPerPage = NULL, maxColsPerPage = 10, addPageNumberToMain = TRUE, # Further arguments to labeledHeatmap zlim = NULL, signed = TRUE, main = "", ...)
labeledHeatmap.multiPage( # Input data and ornaments Matrix, xLabels, yLabels = NULL, xSymbols = NULL, ySymbols = NULL, textMatrix = NULL, # Paging options rowsPerPage = NULL, maxRowsPerPage = 20, colsPerPage = NULL, maxColsPerPage = 10, addPageNumberToMain = TRUE, # Further arguments to labeledHeatmap zlim = NULL, signed = TRUE, main = "", ...)
Matrix |
numerical matrix to be plotted in the heatmap. |
xLabels |
labels for the columns. See Details. |
yLabels |
labels for the rows. See Details. |
xSymbols |
additional labels used when |
ySymbols |
additional labels used when |
textMatrix |
optional text entries for each cell. Either a matrix of the same dimensions as
|
rowsPerPage |
optional list in which each component is a vector specifying which rows should appear
together in each plot. If not given, will be generated automatically based on |
maxRowsPerPage |
integer giving maximum number of rows appearing on each plot (page). |
colsPerPage |
optional list in which each component is a vector specifying which columns should appear
together in each plot. If not given, will be generated automatically based on |
maxColsPerPage |
integer giving maximum number of columns appearing on each plot (page). |
addPageNumberToMain |
logical: should plot/page number be added to the |
zlim |
Optional specification of the extreme values for the color scale. If not given, will be determined from the
input |
signed |
logical: should the input |
main |
Main title for each plot/page, optionally with the plot/page number added. |
... |
other arguments to function |
The function labeledHeatmap
is used to produce each plot/page; most arguments are described
in more detail in the help file for that function.
In each plot/page labeledHeatmap
plots a standard heatmap plot of an appropriate
sub-rectangle of Matrix
and embellishes it with
row and column labels and/or with text within the heatmap entries. Row and column labels can be either
character strings or color squares, or both.
To get simple text labels, use colorLabels=FALSE
and pass the desired row and column labels in
yLabels
and xLabels
, respectively.
To label rows and columns by color squares, use
colorLabels=TRUE
; yLabels
and xLabels
are then expected to represent valid colors.
For reasons of compatibility with other functions, each entry in yLabels
and xLabels
is
expected to consist of a color designation preceded by 2 characters: an example would be
MEturquoise
. The first two characters can be arbitrary, they are stripped.
Any labels that do not represent valid colors will be considered text labels and printed in full,
allowing the user to mix text and color labels.
It is also possible to label rows and columns by both color squares and additional text annotation. To
achieve this, use the above technique to get color labels and, additionally, pass the desired text
annotation in the xSymbols
and ySymbols
arguments.
If rowsPerPage
(colsPerPage
) is not given, rows (columns) are allocated automatically as
uniformly as possible, in contiguous blocks of size at most maxRowsPerPage
(maxColsPerPage
).
The allocation is performed by the function allocateJobs
.
None.
Peter Langfelder
The workhorse function labeledHeatmap
for the actual heatmap plot;
function allocateJobs
for the allocation of rows/columns to each plot.
Given scatterplot point coordinates, the function tries to place labels near the points such that the labels overlap as little as possible. User beware: the algorithm implemented here is quite primitive and while it will help in many cases, it is by no means perfect. Consider this function experimental. We hope to improve the algorithm in the future to make it useful in a broader range of situations.
labelPoints( x, y, labels, cex = 0.7, offs = 0.01, xpd = TRUE, jiggle = 0, protectEdges = TRUE, doPlot = TRUE, ...)
labelPoints( x, y, labels, cex = 0.7, offs = 0.01, xpd = TRUE, jiggle = 0, protectEdges = TRUE, doPlot = TRUE, ...)
x |
a vector of x coordinates of the points |
y |
a vector of y coordinates of the points |
labels |
labels to be placed next to the points |
cex |
character expansion factor for the labels |
offs |
offset of the labels from the plotted coordinates in inches |
xpd |
logical: controls truncating labels to fit within the plotting region. See |
jiggle |
amount of random noise to be added to the coordinates. This may be useful if the scatterplot is too regular (such as all points on one straight line). |
protectEdges |
logical: should labels be shifted inside the (actual or virtual) frame of the plot? |
doPlot |
logical: should the labels be actually added to the plot? Value |
... |
other arguments to function |
The algorithm basically works by finding the direction of most surrounding points, and attempting to place the label in the opposite direction. There are (not uncommon) situations in which this placement is suboptimal; the author promises to further develop the function sometime in the future.
Note that this function does not plot the actual scatterplot; only the labels are plotted. Plotting the scatterplot is the responsibility of the user.
The argument offs
needs to be carefully tuned to the size of the plotted symbols. Sorry, no automation
here yet.
The argument protectEdges
can be used to shift labels that would otherwise extend beyond the plot to
within the plot. Sometimes this may cause some overlapping with other points or labels; use with care.
Invisibly, a data frame with 3 columns, giving the x and y positions of the labels, and the labels themselves.
Peter Langfelder
# generate some random points set.seed(11); n = 20; x = runif(n); y = runif(n); # Create a basic scatterplot col = standardColors(n); plot(x,y, pch = 21, col =1, bg = col, cex = 2.6, xlim = c(-0.1, 1.1), ylim = c(-0.1, 1.0)); labelPoints(x, y, paste("Pt", c(1:n), sep=""), offs = 0.10, cex = 1); # label points using longer text labels. Note the positioning is not perfect, but close enough. plot(x,y, pch = 21, col =1, bg = col, cex = 2.6, xlim = c(-0.1, 1.1), ylim = c(-0.1, 1.0)); labelPoints(x, y, col, offs = 0.10, cex = 0.8);
# generate some random points set.seed(11); n = 20; x = runif(n); y = runif(n); # Create a basic scatterplot col = standardColors(n); plot(x,y, pch = 21, col =1, bg = col, cex = 2.6, xlim = c(-0.1, 1.1), ylim = c(-0.1, 1.0)); labelPoints(x, y, paste("Pt", c(1:n), sep=""), offs = 0.10, cex = 1); # label points using longer text labels. Note the positioning is not perfect, but close enough. plot(x,y, pch = 21, col =1, bg = col, cex = 2.6, xlim = c(-0.1, 1.1), ylim = c(-0.1, 1.0)); labelPoints(x, y, col, offs = 0.10, cex = 0.8);
Converts a vector or array of numerical labels into a corresponding vector or array of colors corresponding to the labels.
labels2colors(labels, zeroIsGrey = TRUE, colorSeq = NULL, naColor = "grey", commonColorCode = TRUE)
labels2colors(labels, zeroIsGrey = TRUE, colorSeq = NULL, naColor = "grey", commonColorCode = TRUE)
labels |
Vector or matrix of non-negative integer or other (such as character) labels. See details. |
zeroIsGrey |
If TRUE, labels 0 will be assigned color grey. Otherwise, labels below 1 will trigger an error. |
colorSeq |
Color sequence corresponding to labels. If not given, a standard sequence will be used. |
naColor |
Color that will encode missing values. |
commonColorCode |
logical: if |
If labels
is numeric, it is used directly as index to the standard color sequence. If 0 is present
among the labels and zeroIsGrey=TRUE
, labels 0 are given grey color.
If labels
is not numeric, its columns are turned into factors and the numeric representation of each
factor is used to assign the corresponding colors. In this case commonColorCode
governs whether each
column gets its own color code, or whether the color code will be universal.
The standard sequence start with well-distinguishable colors, and after about 40 turns into a quasi-random sampling of all colors available in R with the exception of all shades of grey (and gray).
If the input labels
have a dimension attribute, it is copied into the output, meaning the
dimensions of the returned value are the same as those of the input labels
.
A vector or array of character strings of the same length or dimensions as labels
.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
labels = c(0:20); labels2colors(labels); labels = matrix(letters[1:9], 3,3); labels2colors(labels) # Note the difference when commonColorCode = FALSE labels2colors(labels, commonColorCode = FALSE)
labels = c(0:20); labels2colors(labels); labels = matrix(letters[1:9], 3,3); labels2colors(labels) # Note the difference when commonColorCode = FALSE labels2colors(labels, commonColorCode = FALSE)
list2multiData
converts a list to a multiData structure; multiData2list
does the inverse.
list2multiData(data) multiData2list(multiData)
list2multiData(data) multiData2list(multiData)
data |
A list to be converted to a multiData structure. |
multiData |
A multiData structure to be converted to a list. |
A multiData structure is a vector of lists (one list for each set) where each list has a
component data
containing some useful information.
For list2multiData
, a multiData structure; for multiData2list
, the corresponding list.
Peter Langfelder
Assuming the input vector contains a vectorized form of the distance representation of a symmetric matrix, this function creates the corresponding matrix. This is useful when re-forming symmetric matrices that have been vectorized to save storage space.
lowerTri2matrix(x, diag = 1)
lowerTri2matrix(x, diag = 1)
x |
a numeric vector |
diag |
value to be put on the diagonal. Recycled if necessary. |
The function assumes that x
contains the vectorized form of the distance representation of a
symmetric matrix. In particular, x
must have a length that can be expressed as n*(n-1)/2, with n an
integer. The result of the function is then an n times n matrix.
A symmetric matrix whose lower triangle is given by x
.
Peter Langfelder
# Create a symmetric matrix m = matrix(c(1:16), 4,4) mat = (m + t(m)); diag(mat) = 0; # Print the matrix mat # Take the lower triangle and vectorize it (in two ways) x1 = mat[lower.tri(mat)] x2 = as.vector(as.dist(mat)) all.equal(x1, x2) # The vectors are equal # Turn the vectors back into matrices new.mat = lowerTri2matrix(x1, diag = 0); # Did we get back the same matrix? all.equal(mat, new.mat)
# Create a symmetric matrix m = matrix(c(1:16), 4,4) mat = (m + t(m)); diag(mat) = 0; # Print the matrix mat # Take the lower triangle and vectorize it (in two ways) x1 = mat[lower.tri(mat)] x2 = as.vector(as.dist(mat)) all.equal(x1, x2) # The vectors are equal # Turn the vectors back into matrices new.mat = lowerTri2matrix(x1, diag = 0); # Did we get back the same matrix? all.equal(mat, new.mat)
Given a source
and reference
vectors of module labels, the function produces a module
labeling that is equivalent to source
, but individual modules are re-labeled so that modules with
significant overlap in source
and reference
have the same labels.
matchLabels(source, reference, pThreshold = 5e-2, na.rm = TRUE, ignoreLabels = if (is.numeric(reference)) 0 else "grey", extraLabels = if (is.numeric(reference)) c(1:1000) else standardColors() )
matchLabels(source, reference, pThreshold = 5e-2, na.rm = TRUE, ignoreLabels = if (is.numeric(reference)) 0 else "grey", extraLabels = if (is.numeric(reference)) c(1:1000) else standardColors() )
source |
a vector or a matrix of reference labels. The labels may be numeric or character. |
reference |
a vector of reference labels. |
pThreshold |
threshold of Fisher's exact test for considering modules to have a significant overlap. |
na.rm |
logical: should missing values in either |
ignoreLabels |
labels in |
extraLabels |
a vector of labels for modules in |
Each column of source
is treated separately. Unlike in previous version of this function, source
and reference labels can be any labels, not necessarily of the same type.
The function calculates the overlap of the source
and reference
modules using Fisher's
exact test. It then attempts to relabel source
modules such that each source
module gets the
label of the reference
module that it overlaps most with, subject to not renaming two source
modules to the same reference
module. (If two source
modules point to the same
reference
module, the one with the more significant overlap is chosen.)
Those source
modules that cannot be matched to a reference
module are labeled using
those labels from extraLabels
that do not occur in either of source
, reference
or
ignoreLabels
.
A vector (if the input source
labels are a vector) or a matrix (if the input source
labels are a matrix) of the new labels.
Peter Langfelder
overlapTable
for calculation of overlap counts and p-values;
standardColors
for standard non-numeric WGCNA labels.
Constructs a network
matrixToNetwork( mat, symmetrizeMethod = c("average", "min", "max"), signed = TRUE, min = NULL, max = NULL, power = 12, diagEntry = 1)
matrixToNetwork( mat, symmetrizeMethod = c("average", "min", "max"), signed = TRUE, min = NULL, max = NULL, power = 12, diagEntry = 1)
mat |
matrix to be turned into a network. Must be square. |
symmetrizeMethod |
method for symmetrizing the matrix. The method will be applied to each component of mat and its transpose. |
signed |
logical: should the resulting network be signed? Unsigned networks are constructed from |
min |
minimum allowed value for |
max |
maximum allowed value for |
power |
the soft-thresholding power. |
diagEntry |
the value of the entries on the diagonal in the result. This is usally 1 but some applications may require a zero (or even NA) diagonal. |
If signed
is FALSE
, the matrix mat
is first converted to its absolute value.
This function then symmetrizes the matrix using the symmetrizeMethod
component-wise on mat
and t(mat)
(i.e., the transpose of mat
).
In the next step, the symmetrized matrix is linearly scaled to the interval [0,1] using either min
and max
(each either supplied or determined from the matrix). Values outside of the [min, max] range
are truncated to min
or max
.
Lastly, the adjacency is calculated by rasing the matrix to power
.
The diagonal of the result is set to
diagEntry
. Note that most WGCNA functions expect the diagonal of an adjacency matrix to be 1.
The adjacency matrix that encodes the network.
Peter Langfelder
adjacency
for calculation of a correlation network (adjacency) from a numeric matrix such as
expression data
adjacency.fromSimilarity
for simpler calculation of a network from a symmetric similarity matrix.
Merges modules in gene expression networks that are too close as measured by the correlation of their eigengenes.
mergeCloseModules( # input data exprData, colors, # Optional starting eigengenes MEs = NULL, # Optional restriction to a subset of all sets useSets = NULL, # If missing data are present, impute them? impute = TRUE, # Input handling options checkDataFormat = TRUE, unassdColor = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", # Options for eigengene network construction corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), useAbs = FALSE, # Options for constructing the consensus equalizeQuantiles = FALSE, quantileSummary = "mean", consensusQuantile = 0, # Merging options cutHeight = 0.2, iterate = TRUE, # Output options relabel = FALSE, colorSeq = NULL, getNewMEs = TRUE, getNewUnassdME = TRUE, # Options controlling behaviour of the function trapErrors = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
mergeCloseModules( # input data exprData, colors, # Optional starting eigengenes MEs = NULL, # Optional restriction to a subset of all sets useSets = NULL, # If missing data are present, impute them? impute = TRUE, # Input handling options checkDataFormat = TRUE, unassdColor = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", # Options for eigengene network construction corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), useAbs = FALSE, # Options for constructing the consensus equalizeQuantiles = FALSE, quantileSummary = "mean", consensusQuantile = 0, # Merging options cutHeight = 0.2, iterate = TRUE, # Output options relabel = FALSE, colorSeq = NULL, getNewMEs = TRUE, getNewUnassdME = TRUE, # Options controlling behaviour of the function trapErrors = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
exprData |
Expression data, either a single data frame with rows corresponding to samples and
columns to genes, or in a multi-set format (see |
colors |
A vector (numeric, character or a factor) giving module colors for genes. The method only makes sense when genes have the same color label in all sets, hence a single vector. |
MEs |
If module eigengenes have been calculated before, the user can save some computational time
by inputting them. |
useSets |
A vector of scalar allowing the user to specify which sets will be used to calculate the consensus dissimilarity of module eigengenes. Defaults to all given sets. |
impute |
Should missing values be imputed in eigengene calculation? If imputation is disabled, the
presence of |
checkDataFormat |
If TRUE, the function will check |
unassdColor |
Specifies the string that labels unassigned genes. Module of this color will not enter the module eigengene clustering and will not be merged with other modules. |
corFnc |
Correlation function to be used to calculate correlation of module eigengenes. |
corOptions |
Can be used to specify options to the correlation function, in addition to argument
|
useAbs |
Specifies whether absolute value of correlation or plain correlation (of module eigengenes) should be used in calculating module dissimilarity. |
equalizeQuantiles |
Logical: should quantiles of the eigengene dissimilarity matrix be equalized
("quantile normalized")? The default is |
quantileSummary |
One of |
consensusQuantile |
A number giving the desired quantile to use in the consensus similarity calculation (see details). |
cutHeight |
Maximum dissimilarity (i.e., 1-correlation) that qualifies modules for merging. |
iterate |
Controls whether the merging procedure should be repeated until there is no change. If FALSE, only one iteration will be executed. |
relabel |
Controls whether, after merging, color labels should be ordered by module size. |
colorSeq |
Color labels to be used for relabeling. Defaults to the standard color order used
in this package if |
getNewMEs |
Controls whether module eigengenes of merged modules should be calculated and returned. |
getNewUnassdME |
When doing module eigengene manipulations, the function does not normally
calculate the eigengene of the 'module' of unassigned ('grey') genes. Setting this option to
|
trapErrors |
Controls whether computational errors in calculating module eigengenes, their
dissimilarity, and merging trees should be trapped. If |
verbose |
Controls verbosity of printed progress messages. 0 means silent, up to (about) 5 the verbosity gradually increases. |
indent |
A single non-negative integer controlling indentation of printed messages. 0 means no indentation, each unit above that adds two spaces. |
This function merges input modules
that are closely related. The similarities are measured by correlations of module eigengenes; a
“consensus” measure is defined as the “consensus quantile”
over the corresponding relationship in each set. Once the
(dis-)similarity is calculated, average linkage hierarchical clustering of the module eigengenes is
performed, the dendrogram is cut at the height cutHeight
and modules on each branch are merged.
The process is (optionally) repeated until no more modules are merged.
If, for a particular module, the module eigengene calculation fails, a hubgene approximation will be used.
The user should be aware that if a computational error occurs and trapErrors==TRUE
,
the returned list (see below) will not contain all of the components returned upon normal execution.
If no errors occurred, a list with components
colors |
Color labels for the genes corresponding to merged modules. The function attempts to
mimic the mode of the input |
dendro |
Hierarchical clustering dendrogram (average linkage) of the eigengenes of the most
recently computed tree. If |
oldDendro |
Hierarchical clustering dendrogram (average linkage) of the eigengenes of the original modules. |
cutHeight |
The input cutHeight. |
oldMEs |
Module eigengenes of the original modules in the sets given by |
newMEs |
Module eigengenes of the merged modules in the sets given by |
allOK |
A boolean set to |
If an error occurred and trapErrors==TRUE
, the list only contains these components:
colors |
A copy of the input colors. |
allOK |
a boolean set to |
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
This is a meta-analysis complement to functions standardScreeningBinaryTrait
and
standardScreeningNumericTrait
. Given expression (or other) data from multiple independent
data sets, and the corresponding clinical traits or outcomes, the function calculates multiple screening
statistics in each data set, then calculates meta-analysis Z scores, p-values, and optionally q-values
(False Discovery Rates). Three different ways of calculating the meta-analysis Z scores are provided: the
Stouffer method, weighted Stouffer method, and using user-specified weights.
metaAnalysis(multiExpr, multiTrait, binary = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = "p"), getQvalues = FALSE, getAreaUnderROC = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(), setNames = NULL, kruskalTest = FALSE, var.equal = FALSE, metaKruskal = kruskalTest, na.action = "na.exclude")
metaAnalysis(multiExpr, multiTrait, binary = NULL, metaAnalysisWeights = NULL, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = "p"), getQvalues = FALSE, getAreaUnderROC = FALSE, useRankPvalue = TRUE, rankPvalueOptions = list(), setNames = NULL, kruskalTest = FALSE, var.equal = FALSE, metaKruskal = kruskalTest, na.action = "na.exclude")
multiExpr |
Expression data (or other data) in multi-set format (see |
multiTrait |
Trait or ourcome data in multi-set format. Only one trait is allowed; consequesntly, the |
binary |
Logical: is the trait binary ( |
metaAnalysisWeights |
Optional specification of set weights for meta-analysis. If given, must be a vector of non-negative
weights, one entry for each set contained in |
corFnc |
Correlation function to be used for screening. Should be either the default |
corOptions |
A named list giving extra arguments to be passed to the correlation function. |
getQvalues |
Logical: should q-values (FDRs) be calculated? |
getAreaUnderROC |
Logical: should area under the ROC be calculated? Caution, enabling the calculation will slow the function down considerably for large data sets. |
useRankPvalue |
Logical: should the |
rankPvalueOptions |
Additional options for function |
setNames |
Optional specification of set names (labels). These are used to label the corresponding components of the
output. If not given, will be taken from the |
kruskalTest |
Logical: should the Kruskal test be performed in addition to t-test? Only applies to binary traits. |
var.equal |
Logical: should the t-test assume equal variance in both groups? If |
metaKruskal |
Logical: should the meta-analysis be based on the results of Kruskal test ( |
na.action |
Specification of what should happen to missing values in |
The Stouffer method of combines Z statistics by simply taking a mean of input Z statistics and multiplying
it by sqrt(n)
, where n
is the number of input data sets. We refer to this method as
Stouffer.equalWeights
. In general, a better (i.e., more powerful) method of combining Z statistics is
to weigh them by the number of degrees of freedom (which approximately equals n
). We refer to this
method as weightedStouffer
. Finally, the user can also specify custom weights, for example if a data
set needs to be downweighted due to technical concerns; however, specifying own weights by hand should be
done carefully to avoid possible selection biases.
Data frame with the following components:
ID |
Identifier of the input genes (or other variables) |
Z.equalWeights |
Meta-analysis Z statistics obtained using Stouffer's method with equal weights |
p.equalWeights |
p-values corresponding to |
q.equalWeights |
q-values corresponding to |
Z.RootDoFWeights |
Meta-analysis Z statistics obtained using Stouffer's method with weights given by the square root of the number of (non-missing) samples in each data set |
p.RootDoFWeights |
p-values corresponding to |
q.RootDoFWeights |
q-values corresponding to |
Z.DoFWeights |
Meta-analysis Z statistics obtained using Stouffer's method with weights given by the number of (non-missing) samples in each data set |
p.DoFWeights |
p-values corresponding to |
q.DoFWeights |
q-values corresponding to |
Z.userWeights |
Meta-analysis Z statistics
obtained using Stouffer's method with user-defined weights. Only present if input |
p.userWeights |
p-values corresponding to |
q.userWeights |
q-values corresponding to |
The next set of columns is present only if input useRankPvalue
is TRUE
and contain the output
of the function rankPvalue
with the same column weights as the above meta-analysis. Depending
on the input options calculateQvalue
and pValueMethod
in rankPvalueOptions
, some
columns may be missing. The following columns are calculated using equal weights for each data set.
pValueExtremeRank.equalWeights |
This is the minimum between pValueLowRank and pValueHighRank, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowRank.equalWeights |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueHighRank.equalWeights |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueExtremeScale.equalWeights |
This is the minimum between pValueLowScale and pValueHighScale, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowScale.equalWeights |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
pValueHighScale.equalWeights |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
qValueExtremeRank.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeRank |
qValueLowRank.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowRank |
qValueHighRank.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighRank |
qValueExtremeScale.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeScale |
qValueLowScale.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowScale |
qValueHighScale.equalWeights |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighScale |
... |
Analogous columns calculated by weighting each input set using the square root of the number of
samples, number of samples, and user weights (if given). The corresponding column names carry the suffixes
|
The following columns contain results returned by standardScreeningBinaryTrait
or
standardScreeningNumericTrait
(depending on whether the input trait is binary or continuous).
For binary traits, the following information is returned for each set:
corPearson.Set_1 , corPearson.Set_2 , ...
|
Pearson correlation with a binary numeric version of the input variable. The numeric variable equals 1 for level 1 and 2 for level 2. The levels are given by levels(factor(y)). |
t.Student.Set_1 , t.Student.Set_2 , ...
|
Student t-test statistic |
pvalueStudent.Set_1 , pvalueStudent.Set_2 , ...
|
two-sided Student t-test p-value. |
qvalueStudent.Set_1 , qvalueStudent.Set_2 , ...
|
(if input |
foldChange.Set_1 , foldChange.Set_2 , ...
|
a (signed) ratio of mean values. If the mean in the first group (corresponding to level 1) is larger than that of the second group, it equals meanFirstGroup/meanSecondGroup. But if the mean of the second group is larger than that of the first group it equals -meanSecondGroup/meanFirstGroup (notice the minus sign). |
meanFirstGroup.Set_1 , meanSecondGroup.Set_2 , ...
|
means of columns in input |
SE.FirstGroup.Set_1 , SE.FirstGroup.Set_2 , ...
|
standard errors of columns in input |
SE.SecondGroup.Set_1 , SE.SecondGroup.Set_2 , ...
|
standard errors of columns in input |
areaUnderROC.Set_1 , areaUnderROC.Set_2 , ...
|
the area under the ROC, also known as the concordance
index or C.index. This is a measure of discriminatory power. The measure lies between 0 and 1 where 0.5
indicates no discriminatory power. 0 indicates that the "opposite" predictor has perfect discriminatory
power. To compute it we use the function rcorr.cens with |
nPresentSamples.Set_1 , nPresentSamples.Set_2 , ...
|
number of samples with finite measurements for each gene. |
If input kruskalTest
is TRUE
, the following columns further summarize results of
Kruskal-Wallis test:
stat.Kruskal.Set_1 , stat.Kruskal.Set_2 , ...
|
Kruskal-Wallis test statistic. |
stat.Kruskal.signed.Set_1 , stat.Kruskal.signed.Set_2 , ...
|
(Warning: experimental) Kruskal-Wallis test statistic including a sign that indicates whether the average rank is higher in second group (positive) or first group (negative). |
pvaluekruskal.Set_1 , pvaluekruskal.Set_2 , ...
|
Kruskal-Wallis test p-value. |
qkruskal.Set_1 , qkruskal.Set_2 , ...
|
q-values corresponding to the Kruskal-Wallis test p-value (if
input |
Z.Set1 , Z.Set2 , ...
|
Z statistics obtained from |
For numeric traits, the following columns are returned:
cor.Set_1 , cor.Set_2 , ...
|
correlations of all genes with the trait |
Z.Set1 , Z.Set2 , ...
|
Fisher Z statistics corresponding to the correlations |
pvalueStudent.Set_1 , pvalueStudent.Set_2 , ...
|
Student p-values of the correlations |
qvalueStudent.Set_1 , qvalueStudent.Set_1 , ...
|
(if input |
AreaUnderROC.Set_1 , AreaUnderROC.Set_2 , ...
|
area under the ROC |
nPresentSamples.Set_1 , nPresentSamples.Set_2 , ...
|
number of samples present for the calculation of each association. |
Peter Langfelder
For Stouffer's method, see
Stouffer, S.A., Suchman, E.A., DeVinney, L.C., Star, S.A. & Williams, R.M. Jr. 1949. The American Soldier, Vol. 1: Adjustment during Army Life. Princeton University Press, Princeton.
A discussion of weighted Stouffer's method can be found in
Whitlock, M. C., Combining probability from independent tests: the weighted Z-method is superior to Fisher's approach, Journal of Evolutionary Biology 18:5 1368 (2005)
standardScreeningBinaryTrait
, standardScreeningNumericTrait
for screening
functions for individual data sets
The function calculates a meta analysis Z statistic based on an input data frame of Z statistics.
metaZfunction(datZ, columnweights = NULL)
metaZfunction(datZ, columnweights = NULL)
datZ |
Matrix or data frame of Z statistics (assuming standard normal distribution under the null hypothesis). Rows correspond to genes, columns to independent data sets. |
columnweights |
optional vector of non-negative numbers for weighing the columns of datZ. |
For example, if datZ has 3 columns whose columns are labelled Z1,Z2,Z3 then ZMeta= (Z1+Z2+Z3)/sqrt(3). Under the null hypothesis (where all Z statistics follow a standard normal distribution and the Z statistics are independent), ZMeta also follows a standard normal distribution. To calculate a 2 sided p-value, one an use the following code pvalue=2*pnorm(-abs(ZMeta) )
Vector of meta analysis Z statistic. Under the null hypothesis this should follow a standard normal distribution.
Steve Horvath
Fast joint calculation of row- or column-wise minima and indices of minimum elements. Missing data are removed.
minWhichMin(x, byRow = FALSE, dims = 1)
minWhichMin(x, byRow = FALSE, dims = 1)
x |
A numeric matrix or array. |
byRow |
Logical: should the minima and indices be found for columns ( |
dims |
Specifies dimensions for which to find the minima and indices. For |
A list with two components, min
and which
; each is a vector or array with dimensions
dim(x)[(dims+1):n]
(with n=length(dim(x))
) if byRow = FALSE
, and
dim(x)[1:dims]
if byRow = TRUE
.
Peter Langfelder
Calculation of bisquare weights and the intermediate weight factors similar to those used in the calculation of biweight midcovariance and midcorrelation. The weights are designed such that outliers get smaller weights; the weights become zero for data points more than 9 median absolute deviations from the median.
modifiedBisquareWeights( x, removedCovariates = NULL, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 0.05, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.1, groupsForMinWeightRestriction = NULL, minWeightInGroups = 0, maxPropUnderMinWeight = 1, defaultWeight = 1, getFactors = FALSE)
modifiedBisquareWeights( x, removedCovariates = NULL, pearsonFallback = TRUE, maxPOutliers = 0.05, outlierReferenceWeight = 0.1, groupsForMinWeightRestriction = NULL, minWeightInGroups = 0, maxPropUnderMinWeight = 1, defaultWeight = 1, getFactors = FALSE)
x |
A matrix of numeric observations with variables (features) in columns and observations (samples) in rows. Weights will be calculated separately for each column. |
removedCovariates |
Optional matrix or data frame of variables that are to be regressed out of each column
of |
pearsonFallback |
Logical: for columns of |
maxPOutliers |
Optional numeric scalar between 0 and 1. Specifies the maximum proportion of outliers in each column,
i.e., data with weights equal to
|
outlierReferenceWeight |
A number between 0 and 1 specifying what is to be considered an outlier when calculating the proportion of outliers. |
groupsForMinWeightRestriction |
An optional vector with length equal to the number of samples (rows) in |
minWeightInGroups |
A threshold weight, see |
maxPropUnderMinWeight |
A proportion (number between 0 and 1). See |
defaultWeight |
Value used for weights that would be undefined or not finite, for example, when a
column in |
getFactors |
Logical: should the intermediate weight factors be returned as well? |
Weights are calculated independently for each column of x
. Denoting a column of x
as y
, the weights
are calculated as where
u
is defined as
. Here
m
is the median
of the column y
and MMAD
is the modified median absolute deviation. We call the expression
the weight factors. Note that outliers are observations with high (>1) weight factors for outliers but low (zero) weights.
The calculation of MMAD
starts
with calculating the (unscaled) median absolute deviation of the column x
. If the median absolute deviation is
zero and pearsonFallback
is TRUE, it is replaced by the standard deviation
(multiplied by qnorm(0.75)
to make it asymptotically consistent with
MAD). The following two conditions are then
checked: (1) The proportion of weights below outlierReferenceWeight
is at most maxPOutliers
and (2) if groupsForMinWeightRestriction
has non-zero length, then for each individual level in
groupsForMinWeightRestriction
, the proportion of samples with weights less than minWeightInGroups
is at
most maxPropUnderMinWeight
. (If groupsForMinWeightRestriction
is zero-length, the second condition is
considered trivially satisfied.) If both conditions are met, MMAD
equals the median absolute deviation, MAD. If
either condition is not met, MMAD equals the lowest number for which both conditions are met.
When the input getFactors
is TRUE
, a list with two components:
weights |
A matrix of the same dimensions and |
factors |
A matrix of the same form as |
When the input getFactors
is FALSE
, the function returns the matrix of weights.
Peter Langfelder
A full description of the weight calculation can be found, e.g., in Methods section of
Wang N, Langfelder P, et al (2022) Mapping brain gene coexpression in daytime transcriptomes unveils diurnal molecular networks and deciphers perturbation gene signatures. Neuron. 2022 Oct 19;110(20):3318-3338.e9. PMID: 36265442; PMCID: PMC9665885. doi:10.1016/j.neuron.2022.09.028
Other references include, in reverse chronological order,
Peter Langfelder, Steve Horvath (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software, 46(11), 1-17. https://www.jstatsoft.org/v46/i11/
"Introduction to Robust Estimation and Hypothesis Testing", Rand Wilcox, Academic Press, 1997.
"Data Analysis and Regression: A Second Course in Statistics", Mosteller and Tukey, Addison-Wesley, 1977, pp. 203-209.
bicovWeights
for a simpler, less flexible calculation.
Returns the currently used prefix used to label module eigengenes. When returning module eigengenes in a dataframe, names of the corresponding columns will start with the given prefix.
moduleColor.getMEprefix()
moduleColor.getMEprefix()
Returns the prefix used to label module eigengenes. When returning module eigengenes in a dataframe, names of the corresponding columns will consist of the corresponfing color label preceded by the given prefix. For example, if the prefix is "PC" and the module is turquoise, the corresponding module eigengene will be labeled "PCturquoise". Most of old code assumes "PC", but "ME" is more instructive and used in some newer analyses.
A character string.
Currently the standard prefix is "ME"
and there is no way to change it.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
Calculates module eigengenes (1st principal component) of modules in a given single dataset.
moduleEigengenes(expr, colors, impute = TRUE, nPC = 1, align = "along average", excludeGrey = FALSE, grey = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", subHubs = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, returnValidOnly = trapErrors, softPower = 6, scale = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
moduleEigengenes(expr, colors, impute = TRUE, nPC = 1, align = "along average", excludeGrey = FALSE, grey = if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey", subHubs = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, returnValidOnly = trapErrors, softPower = 6, scale = TRUE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
expr |
Expression data for a single set in the form of a data frame where rows are samples and columns are genes (probes). |
colors |
A vector of the same length as the number of probes in |
impute |
If |
nPC |
Number of principal components and variance explained entries to be calculated. Note
that only the first principal component is returned; the rest are used only for the calculation of
proportion of variance explained. The number of returned variance explained entries is
currently |
align |
Controls whether eigengenes, whose orientation is undetermined, should be aligned with
average expression ( |
excludeGrey |
Should the improper module consisting of 'grey' genes be excluded from the eigengenes? |
grey |
Value of |
subHubs |
Controls whether hub genes should be substituted for missing eigengenes. If
|
trapErrors |
Controls handling of errors from that may arise when there are too many
|
returnValidOnly |
logical; controls whether the returned data frame of module eigengenes
contains columns
corresponding only to modules whose eigengenes or hub genes could be calculated correctly
( |
softPower |
The power used in soft-thresholding the adjacency matrix. Only used when the hubgene approximation is necessary because the principal component calculation failed. It must be non-negative. The default value should only be changed if there is a clear indication that it leads to incorrect results. |
scale |
logical; can be used to turn off scaling of the expression data before calculating the singular value decomposition. The scaling should only be turned off if the data has been scaled previously, in which case the function can run a bit faster. Note however that the function first imputes, then scales the expression data in each module. If the expression contain missing data, scaling outside of the function and letting the function impute missing data may lead to slightly different results than if the data is scaled within the function. |
verbose |
Controls verbosity of printed progress messages. 0 means silent, up to (about) 5 the verbosity gradually increases. |
indent |
A single non-negative integer controlling indentation of printed messages. 0 means no indentation, each unit above that adds two spaces. |
Module eigengene is defined as the first principal component of the expression matrix of the
corresponding module. The calculation may fail if the expression data has too many missing entries.
Handling of such errors is controlled by the arguments subHubs
and
trapErrors
.
If subHubs==TRUE
, errors in principal component calculation will be trapped and a substitute
calculation of hubgenes will be attempted. If this fails as well, behaviour depends on
trapErrors
: if TRUE
, the offending
module will be ignored and the return value will allow the user to remove the module from further
analysis; if FALSE
, the function will stop.
From the user's point of view, setting trapErrors=FALSE
ensures that if the function returns
normally, there will be a valid eigengene (principal component or hubgene) for each of the input
colors. If the user sets trapErrors=TRUE
, all calculational (but not input) errors will be
trapped, but the user should check the output (see below) to make sure all modules have a valid
returned eigengene.
While the principal component calculation can fail even on relatively sound data
(it does not take all that many "well-placed" NA
to torpedo the
calculation),
it takes many more irregularities in the data for the hubgene calculation to
fail. In fact such a failure signals there likely is something seriously wrong with the data.
A list with the following components:
eigengenes |
Module eigengenes in a dataframe, with each column corresponding to one eigengene.
The columns are named by the corresponding color with an |
averageExpr |
If |
varExplained |
A dataframe in which each column corresponds to a module, with the component
|
nPC |
A copy of the input |
validMEs |
A boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
validColors |
A copy of the input colors with entries corresponding to invalid modules set to
|
allOK |
Boolean flag signalling whether all eigengenes have been calculated correctly, either as principal components or as the hubgene average approximation. |
allPC |
Boolean flag signalling whether all returned eigengenes are principal components. |
isPC |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
isHub |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
validAEs |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
allAEOK |
Boolean flag signalling whether all returned module average expressions contain
valid data. Note that |
Steve Horvath [email protected], Peter Langfelder [email protected]
Zhang, B. and Horvath, S. (2005), "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
svd
, impute.knn
This function takes an expression data matrix (and other user-defined parameters), calculates the module membership (kME) values, and adjusts the module assignments, merging modules that are not sufficiently distinct and reassigning modules that were originally assigned suboptimally.
moduleMergeUsingKME( datExpr, colorh, ME = NULL, threshPercent = 50, mergePercent = 25, reassignModules = TRUE, convertGrey = TRUE, omitColors = "grey", reassignScale = 1, threshNumber = NULL)
moduleMergeUsingKME( datExpr, colorh, ME = NULL, threshPercent = 50, mergePercent = 25, reassignModules = TRUE, convertGrey = TRUE, omitColors = "grey", reassignScale = 1, threshNumber = NULL)
datExpr |
An expression data matrix, with samples as rows, genes (or probes) as column. |
colorh |
The color vector (module assignments) corresponding to the columns of datExpr. |
ME |
Either NULL (default), at which point the module eigengenes will be calculated, or pre-calculated module eigengenes for each of the modules, with samples as rows (corresponding to datExpr), and modules corresponding to columns (column names MUST be module colors or module colors prefixed by "ME" or "PC"). |
threshPercent |
Threshold percent of the number of genes in the module that should be included for the various analyses. For example, in a module with 200 genes, if threshPercent=50 (default), then 50 genes will be checked for reassignment and used to test whether two modules should be merged. See also threshNumber. |
mergePercent |
If greater than this percent of the assigned genes are above the threshold are in a module other than the assigned module, then these two modules will be merged. For example, if mergePercent=25 (default), and the 70 out of 200 genes in the blue module were more highly correlated with the black module eigengene, then all genes in the blue module would be reassigned to the black module. |
reassignModules |
If TRUE (default), genes are resassigned to the module with which they have the highest module membership (kME), but only if their kME is above the threshPercent (or threshNumber) threshold of that module. |
convertGrey |
If TRUE (default), unassigned (grey) genes are assigned as in "reassignModules" |
omitColors |
These are all of the module assignments which indicate genes that are not assigned to modules (default="grey"). These genes will all be assigned as "grey" by this function. |
reassignScale |
A value between 0 and 1 (default) which determines how the threshPercent gets scaled for reassigning genes. Smaller values reassign more genes, but does not affect the merging process. |
threshNumber |
Either NULL (default) or, if entered, every module is counted as having exactly threshNumber genes, and threshPercent it ignored. This parameter should have the effect of |
moduleColors |
The NEW color vector (module assignments) corresponding to the columns of datExpr, after module merging and reassignments. |
mergeLog |
A log of the order in which modules were merged, for reference. |
Note that this function should be considered "experimental" as it has only been beta tested. Please e-mail [email protected] if you have any issues with the function.
Jeremy Miller
## First simulate some data and the resulting network dendrogram set.seed(100) MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) #MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred)#, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME, 300, c(0.15,0.13,0.12,0.10,0.09,0.09,0.1), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed", nThreads = 1) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") ## Here is an example using different mergePercentages, # setting an inclusive threshPercent (91) colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1, threshPercent=91, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Here is an example using a lower reassignScale (so that more genes get reassigned) colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1,threshPercent=91, reassignScale=0.7, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Here is an example using a less-inclusive threshPercent (75), # little if anything is merged. colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1, threshPercent=75, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) # (Note that with real data, the default threshPercent=50 usually results # in some modules being merged)
## First simulate some data and the resulting network dendrogram set.seed(100) MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = sample(1:100,50) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) #MEblack = c(MEblue [1:25], sample(1:100,25)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred)#, MEblack) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME, 300, c(0.15,0.13,0.12,0.10,0.09,0.09,0.1), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed", nThreads = 1) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") ## Here is an example using different mergePercentages, # setting an inclusive threshPercent (91) colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1, threshPercent=91, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Here is an example using a lower reassignScale (so that more genes get reassigned) colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1,threshPercent=91, reassignScale=0.7, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Here is an example using a less-inclusive threshPercent (75), # little if anything is merged. colorh1 <- colorPlot <- labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) merges = c(65,40,20,5) for (m in merges) colorPlot = cbind(colorPlot, moduleMergeUsingKME(dat1$datExpr,colorh1, threshPercent=75, mergePercent=m)$moduleColors) plotDendroAndColors(tree1, colorPlot, c("ORIG",merges), dendroLabels=FALSE) # (Note that with real data, the default threshPercent=50 usually results # in some modules being merged)
Detects branches of on the input dendrogram by performing a fixed-height cut.
moduleNumber(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
moduleNumber(dendro, cutHeight = 0.9, minSize = 50)
dendro |
a hierarchical clustering dendorgram such as one returned by |
cutHeight |
Maximum joining heights that will be considered. |
minSize |
Minimum cluster size. |
All contiguous branches below the height cutHeight
that contain at least minSize
objects
are assigned unique positive numerical labels; all unassigned objects are assigned label 0.
A vector of numerical labels giving the assigment of each object.
The numerical labels may not be sequential. See normalizeLabels
for a way to put the
labels into a standard order.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
hclust
, cutree
, normalizeLabels
Calculations of module preservation statistics between independent data sets.
modulePreservation( multiData, multiColor, multiWeights = NULL, dataIsExpr = TRUE, networkType = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", referenceNetworks = 1, testNetworks = NULL, nPermutations = 100, includekMEallInSummary = FALSE, restrictSummaryForGeneralNetworks = TRUE, calculateQvalue = FALSE, randomSeed = 12345, maxGoldModuleSize = 1000, maxModuleSize = 1000, quickCor = 1, ccTupletSize = 2, calculateCor.kIMall = FALSE, calculateClusterCoeff = FALSE, useInterpolation = FALSE, checkData = TRUE, greyName = NULL, goldName = NULL, savePermutedStatistics = TRUE, loadPermutedStatistics = FALSE, permutedStatisticsFile = if (useInterpolation) "permutedStats-intrModules.RData" else "permutedStats-actualModules.RData", plotInterpolation = TRUE, interpolationPlotFile = "modulePreservationInterpolationPlots.pdf", discardInvalidOutput = TRUE, parallelCalculation = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
modulePreservation( multiData, multiColor, multiWeights = NULL, dataIsExpr = TRUE, networkType = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", referenceNetworks = 1, testNetworks = NULL, nPermutations = 100, includekMEallInSummary = FALSE, restrictSummaryForGeneralNetworks = TRUE, calculateQvalue = FALSE, randomSeed = 12345, maxGoldModuleSize = 1000, maxModuleSize = 1000, quickCor = 1, ccTupletSize = 2, calculateCor.kIMall = FALSE, calculateClusterCoeff = FALSE, useInterpolation = FALSE, checkData = TRUE, greyName = NULL, goldName = NULL, savePermutedStatistics = TRUE, loadPermutedStatistics = FALSE, permutedStatisticsFile = if (useInterpolation) "permutedStats-intrModules.RData" else "permutedStats-actualModules.RData", plotInterpolation = TRUE, interpolationPlotFile = "modulePreservationInterpolationPlots.pdf", discardInvalidOutput = TRUE, parallelCalculation = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiData |
expression data or adjacency data
in multi-set format (see |
multiColor |
a list in which every component is a vector giving the module labels of genes in
|
multiWeights |
optional weights, only when |
dataIsExpr |
logical: if |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
corFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression
similarity. Defaults to Pearson correlation. Another useful choice is |
corOptions |
character string specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
referenceNetworks |
a vector giving the indices of expression data to be used as reference networks.
Reference networks must have their module labels given in |
testNetworks |
a list with one component per each entry in |
nPermutations |
specifies the number of permutations that will be calculated in the permutation test. |
includekMEallInSummary |
logical: should cor.kMEall be included in the calculated summary statistics?
Because kMEall takes into account all genes in the network, this statistic measures preservation of the full
network with respect to the eigengene of the module. This may be undesirable, hence the default is
|
restrictSummaryForGeneralNetworks |
logical: should the summary statistics for general (not
correlation) networks be restricted (density to meanAdj, connectivity to cor.kIM and cor.Adj)? The default
|
calculateQvalue |
logical: should q-values (local FDR estimates) be calculated? Package qvalue must be installed for this calculation. Note that q-values may not be meaningful when the number of modules is small and/or most modules are preserved. |
randomSeed |
seed for the random number generator. If |
maxGoldModuleSize |
maximum size of the "gold" module, i.e., the random sample of all network genes. |
maxModuleSize |
maximum module size used for calculations. Modules larger than |
quickCor |
number between 0 and 1 specifying the handling of missing data in calculation of
correlation. Zero means exact but potentially slower calculations; one means potentially faster
calculations, but with potentially inaccurate results if the proportion of missing data is large. See
|
ccTupletSize |
tuplet size for co-clustering calculations. |
calculateCor.kIMall |
logical: should cor.kMEall be calculated? This option is only valid for
adjacency input. If |
calculateClusterCoeff |
logical: should statistics based on the clustering coefficient be calculated? While these statistics may be interesting, the calculations are also computationally expensive. |
checkData |
logical: should data be checked for excessive number of missing entries? See
|
greyName |
label used for unassigned genes. Traditionally such genes are labeled by grey color or
numeric label 0. These values are the default when |
goldName |
label used for the "module" representing a random sample of the whole network.
Traditionally such genes are labeled by gold color or
numeric label 0.1. These values are the default when |
savePermutedStatistics |
logical: should calculated permutation statistics be saved? Saved statistics may be re-used if the calculation needs to be repeated. |
permutedStatisticsFile |
file name to save the permutation statistics into. |
loadPermutedStatistics |
logical: should permutation statistics be loaded? If a previously executed calculation needs to be repeated, loading permutation study results can cut the calculation time many-fold. |
useInterpolation |
logical: should permutation statistics be calculated by interpolating an artificial set of evenly spaced modules? This option may potentially speed up the calculations, but it restricts calculations to density measures. |
plotInterpolation |
logical: should interpolation plots be saved? If interpolation is used (see
|
interpolationPlotFile |
file name to save the interpolation plots into. |
discardInvalidOutput |
logical: should output columns containing no valid data be discarded? This
option may be useful when input |
parallelCalculation |
logical: should calculations be done in parallel? Note that parallel
calculations are turned off by default and will lead to somewhat DIFFERENT results than serial calculations
because the random seed is set differently. For the calculation to actually run in parallel mode, a call to
|
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function calculates module preservation statistics pair-wise between given reference sets and all
other sets in multiExpr
. Reference sets must have their corresponding module assignment specified in
multiColor
; module assignment is optional for test sets. Individual expression sets and their module
labels are matched using names
of the corresponding components in multiExpr
and
multiColor
.
For each reference-test pair, the function calculates module preservation statistics that
measure how well the modules of the reference set are preserved in the test set.
If the multiColor
also contains module assignment for the test set, the calculated statistics also
include cross-tabulation statistics that make use of the test module assignment.
For each reference-test pair, the function only uses genes (columns of the data
component of each
component of multiExpr
) that are in common between the reference and test set. Columns are matched by
column names, so column names must be valid.
In addition to preservation statistics, the function also calculates several statistics of module quality, that is measures of how well-defined modules are in the reference set. The quality statistics are calculated with respect to genes in common with with a test set; thus the function calculates a set of quality statistics for each reference-test pair. This may be somewhat counter-intuitive, but it allows a direct comparison of corresponding quality and preservation statistics.
The calculated p-values are determined from the Z scores of individual measures under assumption of normality. No p-value is calculated for the Zsummary measures. Bonferoni correction to the number of tested modules. Because the p-values for strongly preserved modules are often extremely low, the function reports natural logarithms (base e) of the p-values. However, q-values are reported untransformed since they are calculated that way in package qvalue.
Missing data are removed (but see quickCor
above).
The function returns a nested list of preservation statistics. At the top level, the list components are:
quality |
observed values, Z scores, log p-values, Bonferoni-corrected log p-values, and (optionally) q-values of quality statistics. All logarithms are in base 10. |
preservation |
observed values, Z scores, log p-values, Bonferoni-corrected log p-values, and (optionally) q-values of density and connectivity preservation statistics. All logarithms are in base 10. |
accuracy |
observed values, Z scores, log p-values, Bonferoni-corrected log p-values, and (optionally) q-values of cross-tabulation statistics. All logarithms are in base 10. |
referenceSeparability |
observed values, Z scores, log p-values, Bonferoni-corrected log p-values, and (optionally) q-values of module separability in the reference network. All logarithms are in base 10. |
testSeparability |
observed values, Z scores, p-values, Bonferoni-corrected p-values, and (optionally) q-values of module separability in the test network. All logarithms are in base 10. |
permutationDetails |
results of individual permutations, useful for diagnostics |
All of the above are lists. The lists quality
, preservation
, referenceSeparability
,
and testSeparability
each contain 4 or 5 components: observed
contains observed values,
Z
contains the corresponding Z scores, log.p
contains base 10 logarithms of the p-values,
log.pBonf
contains base 10 logarithms of the Bonferoni corrected p-values, and optionally q
contains the associated q-values. The list accuracy
contains observed
, Z
, log.p
,
log.pBonf
, optionally q
,
and additional components observedOverlapCounts
and observedFisherPvalues
that contain the
observed matrices of overlap counts and Fisher test p-values.
Each of the lists observed
, Z
, log.p
,
log.pBonf
, optionally q
, observedOverlapCounts
and observedFisherPvalues
is structured as a 2-level list where the outer components correspond to reference sets and the inner
components to tests sets. As an example, preservation$observed[[1]][[2]]
contains the density and
connectivity preservation statistics for the preservation of set 1 modules in set 2, that is set 1 is the
reference set and set 2 is the test set. preservation$observed[[1]][[2]]
is a data frame in which
each row corresponds to a module in the reference network 1 plus one row for the unassigned objects, and
one row for a "module" that contains randomly sampled objects and that represents a whole-network average.
Each column corresponds to a statistic as indicated by the column name.
For large data sets, the permutation study may take a while (typically on the order of several hours). Use
verbose = 3
to get detailed progress report as the calculations advance.
Rui Luo and Peter Langfelder
Peter Langfelder, Rui Luo, Michael C. Oldham, and Steve Horvath, to appear
Network construction and module detection functions in the WGCNA package such as
adjacency
, blockwiseModules
; rudimentary cleaning in
goodSamplesGenesMS
; the WGCNA implementation of correlation in cor
.
Inspired by lapply
, these functions apply a given function to each data
component in
the input multiData
structure, and optionally simplify the result to an array if possible.
mtd.apply( # What to do multiData, FUN, ..., # Pre-existing results and update options mdaExistingResults = NULL, mdaUpdateIndex = NULL, mdaCopyNonData = FALSE, # Output formatting options mdaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Internal behaviour options mdaVerbose = 0, mdaIndent = 0) mtd.applyToSubset( # What to do multiData, FUN, ..., # Which rows and cols to keep mdaRowIndex = NULL, mdaColIndex = NULL, # Pre-existing results and update options mdaExistingResults = NULL, mdaUpdateIndex = NULL, mdaCopyNonData = FALSE, # Output formatting options mdaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Internal behaviour options mdaVerbose = 0, mdaIndent = 0)
mtd.apply( # What to do multiData, FUN, ..., # Pre-existing results and update options mdaExistingResults = NULL, mdaUpdateIndex = NULL, mdaCopyNonData = FALSE, # Output formatting options mdaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Internal behaviour options mdaVerbose = 0, mdaIndent = 0) mtd.applyToSubset( # What to do multiData, FUN, ..., # Which rows and cols to keep mdaRowIndex = NULL, mdaColIndex = NULL, # Pre-existing results and update options mdaExistingResults = NULL, mdaUpdateIndex = NULL, mdaCopyNonData = FALSE, # Output formatting options mdaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Internal behaviour options mdaVerbose = 0, mdaIndent = 0)
multiData |
A multiData structure to apply the function over |
FUN |
Function to be applied. |
... |
Other arguments to the function |
mdaRowIndex |
If given, must be a list of the same length as |
mdaColIndex |
A logical or numeric vector that specifies columns in each |
mdaExistingResults |
Optional list that contains previously calculated results. This can be useful
if only a few sets in |
mdaUpdateIndex |
Optional specification of which sets in |
mdaCopyNonData |
Logical: should non-data components of |
mdaSimplify |
Logical: should the result be simplified to an array, if possible? Note that this may lead to errors; if so, disable simplification. |
returnList |
Logical: should the result be turned into a list (rather than a multiData structure)?
Note that this is incompatible with simplification: if |
mdaVerbose |
Integer specifying whether progress diagnistics should be printed out. Zero means silent, increasing values will lead to more diagnostic messages. |
mdaIndent |
Integer specifying the indentation of the printed progress messages. Each unit equals two spaces. |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
mtd.apply
works on any "loose" multiData structure; mtd.applyToSubset
assumes (and checks
for) a "strict" multiData structure.
A multiData structure containing the results of the supplied function on each data
component in the
input multiData structure. Other components are simply copied.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure;
mtd.applyToSubset
for applying a function to a subset of a multiData structure;
mtd.mapply
for vectorizing over several arguments.
Inspired by mapply
, this function applies a given function to each data
component in
the input multiData arguments, and optionally simplify the result to an array if possible.
mtd.mapply( # What to do FUN, ..., MoreArgs = NULL, # How to interpret the input mdma.argIsMultiData = NULL, # Copy previously known results? mdmaExistingResults = NULL, mdmaUpdateIndex = NULL, # How to format output mdmaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Options controlling internal behaviour mdma.doCollectGarbage = FALSE, mdmaVerbose = 0, mdmaIndent = 0)
mtd.mapply( # What to do FUN, ..., MoreArgs = NULL, # How to interpret the input mdma.argIsMultiData = NULL, # Copy previously known results? mdmaExistingResults = NULL, mdmaUpdateIndex = NULL, # How to format output mdmaSimplify = FALSE, returnList = FALSE, # Options controlling internal behaviour mdma.doCollectGarbage = FALSE, mdmaVerbose = 0, mdmaIndent = 0)
FUN |
Function to be applied. |
... |
Arguments to be vectorized over. These can be multiData structures or simple vectors (e.g., lists). |
MoreArgs |
A named list that specifies the scalar arguments (if any) to |
mdma.argIsMultiData |
Optional specification whether arguments are multiData structures. A logical vector where each component
corresponds to one entry of |
mdmaExistingResults |
Optional list that contains previously calculated results. This can be useful
if only a few sets in |
mdmaUpdateIndex |
Optional specification of which sets in |
mdmaSimplify |
Logical: should simplification of the result to an array be attempted? The simplification is fragile and
can produce unexpected errors; use the default |
returnList |
Logical: should the result be turned into a list (rather than a multiData structure)?
Note that this is incompatible with simplification: if |
mdma.doCollectGarbage |
Should garbage collection be forced after each application of |
mdmaVerbose |
Integer specifying whether progress diagnistics should be printed out. Zero means silent, increasing values will lead to more diagnostic messages. |
mdmaIndent |
Integer specifying the indentation of the printed progress messages. Each unit equals two spaces. |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
This function applies the function FUN
to each data
component of those arguments in
...
that are multiData structures in the "loose" sense,
and to each component of those arguments in ...
that are
not multiData structures.
A multiData structure containing (as the data
components) the results of FUN
. If
simplification is successful, an array instead.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure;
multiData.apply
for application of a function to a single multiData structure.
This function "rbinds" the data
components of all sets in the input into a single matrix or data
frame.
mtd.rbindSelf(multiData)
mtd.rbindSelf(multiData)
multiData |
A multiData structure. |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
This function requires a "strict" multiData structure.
A single matrix or data frame containing the "rbinded" result.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure;
rbind
for various subtleties of the row binding operation.
Set attributes on each data
component of a multiData structure
mtd.setAttr(multiData, attribute, valueList)
mtd.setAttr(multiData, attribute, valueList)
multiData |
A multiData structure. |
attribute |
Name for the attribute to be set |
valueList |
List that gives the attribute value for each set in the multiData structure. |
The input multiData with the attribute set on each data
component.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure;
isMultiData
for a description of the multiData structure.
Get and set column names on each data
component in a multiData structure.
mtd.colnames(multiData) mtd.setColnames(multiData, colnames)
mtd.colnames(multiData) mtd.setColnames(multiData, colnames)
multiData |
A multiData structure |
colnames |
A vector (coercible to character) of column names. |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
The mtd.colnames
and mtd.setColnames
assume (and checks for) a "strict" multiData structure.
mtd.colnames
returns the vector of column names of the data
component. The function assumes
the column names in all sets are the same.
mtd.setColnames
returns the multiData structure with the column names set in all data
components.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure.
This function attempts to put all data
components into a 3-dimensional array, with the last
dimension corresponding to the sets. This is only possible if all data
components are matrices or
data frames with the same dimensiosn.
mtd.simplify(multiData)
mtd.simplify(multiData)
multiData |
A multiData structure in the "strict" sense (see below). |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
This function assumes a "strict" multiData structure.
A 3-dimensional array collecting all data
components.
The function is relatively fragile and may fail. Use at your own risk.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure;
multiData2list
for converting multiData structures to plain lists.
The function restricts each data
component to the given columns and rows.
mtd.subset( # Input multiData, # Rows and columns to keep rowIndex = NULL, colIndex = NULL, invert = FALSE, # Strict or permissive checking of structure? permissive = FALSE, # Output formatting options drop = FALSE)
mtd.subset( # Input multiData, # Rows and columns to keep rowIndex = NULL, colIndex = NULL, invert = FALSE, # Strict or permissive checking of structure? permissive = FALSE, # Output formatting options drop = FALSE)
multiData |
A multiData structure. |
rowIndex |
A list in which each component corresponds to a set and is a vector giving the rows to be retained in that
set. All indexing methods recognized by R can be used (numeric,
logical, negative indexing, etc). If |
colIndex |
A vector giving the columns to be retained. All indexing methods recognized by R can be used (numeric,
logical, negative indexing, etc). In addition, column names of the retained columns may be given; if a given
name cannot be matched to a column, an error will be thrown. If |
invert |
Logical: should the selection be inverted? |
permissive |
Logical: should the function tolerate "loose" |
drop |
Logical: should dimensions with extent 1 be dropped? |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
This function assumes a "strict" multiData structure unless permissive
is TRUE
.
A multiData structure containing the selected rows and columns. Attributes (except possibly dimensions and the corresponding dimnames) are retained.
Peter Langfelder
multiData
to create a multiData structure.
This function creates a multiData structure by storing its input arguments as the 'data' components.
multiData(...)
multiData(...)
... |
Arguments to be stored in the multiData structure. |
A multiData structure is intended to store (the same type of) data for multiple, possibly independent,
realizations
(for example, expression data for several independent experiments). It is a list where
each component corresponds to an (independent) data set. Each component is in turn a list that can hold
various types of information but must have a data
component. In a "strict" multiData structure, the
data
components are required to each be a matrix or a data frame and have the same number of
columns. In a "loose" multiData structure, the data
components can be anything (but for most
purposes should be of comparable type and content).
The resulting multiData structure.
Peter Langfelder
multiData2list
for converting a multiData structure to a list;
list2multiData
for an alternative way of creating a multiData structure;
mtd.apply, mtd.applyToSubset, mtd.mapply
for ways of applying a function to
each component of a multiData structure.
data1 = matrix(rnorm(100), 20, 5); data2 = matrix(rnorm(50), 10, 5); md = multiData(Set1 = data1, Set2 = data2); checkSets(md)
data1 = matrix(rnorm(100), 20, 5); data2 = matrix(rnorm(50), 10, 5); md = multiData(Set1 = data1, Set2 = data2); checkSets(md)
This function calculates eigengene significance and the associated significance statistics (p-values, q-values etc) across several data sets.
multiData.eigengeneSignificance( multiData, multiTrait, moduleLabels, multiEigengenes = NULL, useModules = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getQvalues = FALSE, setNames = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = ifelse(is.numeric(moduleLabels), 0, "grey"))
multiData.eigengeneSignificance( multiData, multiTrait, moduleLabels, multiEigengenes = NULL, useModules = NULL, corAndPvalueFnc = corAndPvalue, corOptions = list(), corComponent = "cor", getQvalues = FALSE, setNames = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = ifelse(is.numeric(moduleLabels), 0, "grey"))
multiData |
Expression data (or other data) in multi-set format (see |
multiTrait |
Trait or ourcome data in multi-set format. Only one trait is allowed; consequesntly, the |
moduleLabels |
Module labels: one label for each gene in |
multiEigengenes |
Optional eigengenes of modules specified in |
useModules |
Optional specification of module labels to which the analysis should be restricted. This could be useful
if there are many modules, most of which are not interesting. Note that the "grey" module cannot be used
with |
corAndPvalueFnc |
Function that calculates associations between expression profiles and eigengenes. See details. |
corOptions |
List giving additional arguments to function |
corComponent |
Name of the component of output of |
getQvalues |
logical: should q-values (estimates of FDR) be calculated? |
setNames |
names for the input sets. If not given, will be taken from |
excludeGrey |
logical: should the grey module be excluded from the kME tables? Since the grey module is typically not a real module, it makes little sense to report kME values for it. |
greyLabel |
label that labels the grey module. |
This is a convenience function that calculates module eigengene significances (i.e., correlations of module eigengenes with a given trait) across all sets in a multi-set analysis. Also returned are p-values, Z scores, numbers of present (i.e., non-missing) observations for each significance, and optionally the q-values (false discovery rates) corresponding to the p-values.
The function corAndPvalueFnc
is currently
is expected to accept arguments x
(gene expression profiles) and y
(eigengene expression
profiles). Any additional arguments can be passed via corOptions
.
The function corAndPvalueFnc
should return a list which at the least contains (1) a matrix
of associations of genes and eigengenes (this component should have the name given by corComponent
),
and (2) a matrix of the corresponding p-values, named "p" or "p.value". Other components are optional but
for full functionality should include
(3) nObs
giving the number of observations for each association (which is the number of samples less
number of missing data - this can in principle vary from association to association), and (4) Z
giving a Z static for each observation. If these are missing, nObs
is calculated in the main
function, and calculations using the Z statistic are skipped.
A list containing the following components. Each component is a matrix in which the rows correspond to module eigengenes and columns to data sets. Row and column names are set appropriately.
eigengeneSignificance |
Module eigengene significance. |
p.value |
p-values (returned by |
q.value |
q-values corresponding to the p-values above. Only returned in input |
Z |
Z statistics (if returned by |
nObservations |
Number of non-missing observations in each correlation/p-value. |
Peter Langfelder
These functions provide convenient pattern finding and substitution for multiple patterns.
multiGSub(patterns, replacements, x, ...) multiSub(patterns, replacements, x, ...) multiGrep(patterns, x, ..., sort = TRUE, value = FALSE, invert = FALSE) multiGrepl(patterns, x, ...)
multiGSub(patterns, replacements, x, ...) multiSub(patterns, replacements, x, ...) multiGrep(patterns, x, ..., sort = TRUE, value = FALSE, invert = FALSE) multiGrepl(patterns, x, ...)
patterns |
A character vector of patterns. |
replacements |
A character vector of replacements; must be of the same length as |
x |
Character vector of strings in which the pattern finding and replacements should be carried out. |
sort |
Logical: should the output indices be sorted in increasing order? |
value |
Logical: should value rather than the index of the value be returned? |
invert |
Logical: should the search be inverted and only indices of elements of |
... |
For each element of x
, patterns are sequentiall searched for and (for multiSub
and
multiGSub
substituted with the corresponding replacement.
multiSub
and multiGSub
return a character vector of the same length as x
, with all
patterns replaces by their replacements in each element of x
. multiSub
replaces each pattern in
each element of x
only once, multiGSub
as many times as the pattern is found.
multiGrep
returns the indices of those elements in x
in which at least one of patterns
was found, or, if invert
is TRUE, the indices of elements in which none of the patterns were found. If value
is TRUE, values rather than indices are returned.
multiGrepl
returns a logical vector of the same length as x
, with TRUE
is any of the
patterns matched the element of x
, and FALSE
otherwise.
Peter Langfelder
The workhorse functions sub
, gsub
, grep
and grepl
.
Calculates module eigengenes for several sets.
multiSetMEs(exprData, colors, universalColors = NULL, useSets = NULL, useGenes = NULL, impute = TRUE, nPC = 1, align = "along average", excludeGrey = FALSE, grey = if (is.null(universalColors)) { if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey" } else if (is.numeric(universalColors)) 0 else "grey", subHubs = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, returnValidOnly = trapErrors, softPower = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiSetMEs(exprData, colors, universalColors = NULL, useSets = NULL, useGenes = NULL, impute = TRUE, nPC = 1, align = "along average", excludeGrey = FALSE, grey = if (is.null(universalColors)) { if (is.numeric(colors)) 0 else "grey" } else if (is.numeric(universalColors)) 0 else "grey", subHubs = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, returnValidOnly = trapErrors, softPower = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
exprData |
Expression data in a multi-set format (see |
colors |
A matrix of dimensions (number of probes, number of sets) giving the module assignment of each gene in each set. The color "grey" is interpreted as unassigned. |
universalColors |
Alternative specification of module assignment. A single vector of length
(number of probes) giving the module assignment of each gene in all sets (that is the modules are common
to all sets). If given, takes precedence over |
useSets |
If calculations are requested in (a) selected set(s) only, the set(s) can be specified here. Defaults to all sets. |
useGenes |
Can be used to restrict calculation to a subset of genes (the same subset in all
sets). If given, |
impute |
Logical. If |
nPC |
Number of principal components to be calculated. If only eigengenes are needed, it is best
to set it to 1 (default). If variance explained is needed as well, use value |
align |
Controls whether eigengenes, whose orientation is undetermined, should be aligned with
average expression ( |
excludeGrey |
Should the improper module consisting of 'grey' genes be excluded from the eigengenes? |
grey |
Value of |
subHubs |
Controls whether hub genes should be substituted for missing eigengenes. If
|
trapErrors |
Controls handling of errors from that may arise when there are too many
|
returnValidOnly |
Boolean. Controls whether the returned data frames of module eigengenes
contain columns
corresponding only to modules whose eigengenes or hub genes could be calculated correctly in every
set ( |
softPower |
The power used in soft-thresholding the adjacency matrix. Only used when the hubgene approximation is necessary because the principal component calculation failed. It must be non-negative. The default value should only be changed if there is a clear indication that it leads to incorrect results. |
verbose |
Controls verbosity of printed progress messages. 0 means silent, up to (about) 5 the verbosity gradually increases. |
indent |
A single non-negative integer controlling indentation of printed messages. 0 means no indentation, each unit above that adds two spaces. |
This function calls moduleEigengenes
for each set in exprData
.
Module eigengene is defined as the first principal component of the expression matrix of the
corresponding module. The calculation may fail if the expression data has too many missing entries.
Handling of such errors is controlled by the arguments subHubs
and
trapErrors
.
If subHubs==TRUE
, errors in principal component calculation will be trapped and a substitute
calculation of hubgenes will be attempted. If this fails as well, behaviour depends on
trapErrors
: if TRUE
, the offending
module will be ignored and the return value will allow the user to remove the module from further
analysis; if FALSE
, the function will stop.
If universalColors
is given, any offending
module will be removed from all sets (see validMEs
in return value below).
From the user's point of view, setting trapErrors=FALSE
ensures that if the function returns
normally, there will be a valid eigengene (principal component or hubgene) for each of the input
colors. If the user sets trapErrors=TRUE
, all calculational (but not input) errors will be
trapped, but the user should check the output (see below) to make sure all modules have a valid
returned eigengene.
While the principal component calculation can fail even on relatively sound data
(it does not take all that many "well-placed" NA
to torpedo the
calculation),
it takes many more irregularities in the data for the hubgene calculation to
fail. In fact such a failure signals there likely is something seriously wrong with the data.
A vector of lists similar in spirit to the input exprData
. For each set there is a list with the
following components:
data |
Module eigengenes in a data frame, with each column corresponding to one eigengene.
The columns are named by the corresponding color with an |
averageExpr |
If |
varExplained |
A dataframe in which each column corresponds to a module, with the component
|
nPC |
A copy of the input |
validMEs |
A boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
validColors |
A copy of the input colors ( |
allOK |
Boolean flag signalling whether all eigengenes have been calculated correctly, either
as principal components or as the hubgene approximation. If |
allPC |
Boolean flag signalling whether all returned eigengenes are principal components. This flag (as well as the subsequent ones) is set independently for each set. |
isPC |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
isHub |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
validAEs |
Boolean vector. Each component (corresponding to the columns in |
allAEOK |
Boolean flag signalling whether all returned module average expressions contain
valid data. Note that |
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
Union and intersection of multiple sets. These function generalize the standard functions
union
and intersect
.
multiUnion(setList) multiIntersect(setList)
multiUnion(setList) multiIntersect(setList)
setList |
A list containing the sets to be performed upon. |
The union or intersection of the given sets.
Peter Langfelder
The "standard" functions union
and intersect
.
The function calculates different types of weighted adjacency matrices based on the mutual information between vectors (corresponding to the columns of the input data frame datE). The mutual information between pairs of vectors is divided by an upper bound so that the resulting normalized measure lies between 0 and 1.
mutualInfoAdjacency( datE, discretizeColumns = TRUE, entropyEstimationMethod = "MM", numberBins = NULL)
mutualInfoAdjacency( datE, discretizeColumns = TRUE, entropyEstimationMethod = "MM", numberBins = NULL)
datE |
|
discretizeColumns |
is a logical variable. If it is set to TRUE then the columns of |
entropyEstimationMethod |
takes a text string for specifying the entropy and mutual information estimation method. If |
numberBins |
is an integer larger than 0 which specifies how many bins are used for the discretization step. This argument is only relevant if |
The function inputs a data frame datE
and outputs a list whose components correspond to different weighted network adjacency measures defined beteween the columns of datE
. Make sure to install the following R packages entropy
, minet
, infotheo
since
the function mutualInfoAdjacency
makes use of the entropy
function from the R package entropy
(Hausser and Strimmer 2008) and functions from the minet
and infotheo
package (Meyer et al 2008).
A weighted network adjacency matrix is a symmetric matrix whose entries take on values between 0 and 1. Each weighted adjacency matrix contains scaled versions of the mutual information between the columns of the input data frame datE
.
We assume that datE contains numeric values which will be discretized unless the user chooses the option discretizeColumns=FALSE
.
The raw (unscaled) mutual information and entropy measures have units "nat", i.e. natural logarithms are used in their definition (base e=2.71..).
Several mutual information estimation methods have been proposed in the literature (reviewed in Hausser and Strimmer 2008, Meyer et al 2008).
While mutual information networks allows one to detect non-linear relationships between the columns of datE
, they may overfit the data if relatively few observations are available. Thus, if the number of rows of datE
is smaller than say 200, it may be better to fit a correlation using the function adjacency
.
The function outputs a list with the following components:
Entropy |
is a vector whose components report entropy estimates of each column of |
MutualInformation |
is a symmetric matrix whose entries contain the pairwise mutual information
measures between the columns of |
AdjacencySymmetricUncertainty |
is a weighted adjacency matrix whose entries are based on the mutual
information. Using the notation from the Wikipedia entry, this matrix contains the mutual information
estimates |
AdjacencyUniversalVersion1 |
is a weighted adjacency matrix that is a simple function of the
|
AdjacencyUniversalVersion2 |
is a weighted adjacency matrix for which dissUAversion2=1- |
Steve Horvath, Lin Song, Peter Langfelder
Hausser J, Strimmer K (2008) Entropy inference and the James-Stein estimator, with application to nonlinear gene association networks. See http://arxiv.org/abs/0811.3579
Patrick E. Meyer, Frederic Lafitte, and Gianluca Bontempi. minet: A R/Bioconductor Package for Inferring Large Transcriptional Networks Using Mutual Information. BMC Bioinformatics, Vol 9, 2008
Kraskov A, Stoegbauer H, Andrzejak RG, Grassberger P (2003) Hierarchical Clustering Based on Mutual Information. ArXiv q-bio/0311039
# Load requisite packages. These packages are considered "optional", # so WGCNA does not load them automatically. if (require(infotheo, quietly = TRUE) && require(minet, quietly = TRUE) && require(entropy, quietly = TRUE)) { # Example can be executed. #Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate entropy, mutual information matrix and weighted adjacency # matrices based on mutual information. MIadj=mutualInfoAdjacency(datE=datE) } else printFlush(paste("Please install packages infotheo, minet and entropy", "before running this example."));
# Load requisite packages. These packages are considered "optional", # so WGCNA does not load them automatically. if (require(infotheo, quietly = TRUE) && require(minet, quietly = TRUE) && require(entropy, quietly = TRUE)) { # Example can be executed. #Simulate a data frame datE which contains 5 columns and 50 observations m=50 x1=rnorm(m) r=.5; x2=r*x1+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) r=.3; x3=r*(x1-.5)^2+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) x4=rnorm(m) r=.3; x5=r*x4+sqrt(1-r^2)*rnorm(m) datE=data.frame(x1,x2,x3,x4,x5) #calculate entropy, mutual information matrix and weighted adjacency # matrices based on mutual information. MIadj=mutualInfoAdjacency(datE=datE) } else printFlush(paste("Please install packages infotheo, minet and entropy", "before running this example."));
Nearest centroid predictor for binary (i.e., two-outcome) data. Implements a whole host of options and improvements such as accounting for within-class heterogeneity using sample networks, various ways of feature selection and weighing etc.
nearestCentroidPredictor( # Input training and test data x, y, xtest = NULL, # Feature weights and selection criteria featureSignificance = NULL, assocFnc = "cor", assocOptions = "use = 'p'", assocCut.hi = NULL, assocCut.lo = NULL, nFeatures.hi = 10, nFeatures.lo = 10, weighFeaturesByAssociation = 0, scaleFeatureMean = TRUE, scaleFeatureVar = TRUE, # Predictor options centroidMethod = c("mean", "eigensample"), simFnc = "cor", simOptions = "use = 'p'", useQuantile = NULL, sampleWeights = NULL, weighSimByPrediction = 0, # What should be returned CVfold = 0, returnFactor = FALSE, # General options randomSeed = 12345, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
nearestCentroidPredictor( # Input training and test data x, y, xtest = NULL, # Feature weights and selection criteria featureSignificance = NULL, assocFnc = "cor", assocOptions = "use = 'p'", assocCut.hi = NULL, assocCut.lo = NULL, nFeatures.hi = 10, nFeatures.lo = 10, weighFeaturesByAssociation = 0, scaleFeatureMean = TRUE, scaleFeatureVar = TRUE, # Predictor options centroidMethod = c("mean", "eigensample"), simFnc = "cor", simOptions = "use = 'p'", useQuantile = NULL, sampleWeights = NULL, weighSimByPrediction = 0, # What should be returned CVfold = 0, returnFactor = FALSE, # General options randomSeed = 12345, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
x |
Training features (predictive variables). Each column corresponds to a feature and each row to an observation. |
y |
The response variable. Can be a single vector or a matrix with arbitrary many columns. Number of rows (observations) must equal to the number of rows (observations) in x. |
xtest |
Optional test set data. A matrix of the same number of columns (i.e., features) as |
featureSignificance |
Optional vector of feature significance for the response variable. If given, it is used for feature selection (see details). Should preferably be signed, that is features can have high negative significance. |
assocFnc |
Character string specifying the association function. The association function should behave roughly as
|
assocOptions |
Character string specifying options to the association function. |
assocCut.hi |
Association (or featureSignificance) threshold for including features in the predictor. Features with
associtation higher than |
assocCut.lo |
Association (or featureSignificance) threshold for including features in the predictor. Features with
associtation lower than |
nFeatures.hi |
Number of highest-associated features (or features with highest |
nFeatures.lo |
Number of lowest-associated features (or features with highest |
weighFeaturesByAssociation |
(Optional) power to downweigh features that are less associated with the response. See details. |
scaleFeatureMean |
Logical: should the training features be scaled to mean zero? Unless there are good reasons not to scale, the features should be scaled. |
scaleFeatureVar |
Logical: should the training features be scaled to unit variance? Again, unless there are good reasons not to scale, the features should be scaled. |
centroidMethod |
One of |
simFnc |
Character string giving the similarity function for measuring the similarity between test samples and
centroids. This function should
behave roughly like the function |
simOptions |
Character string specifying the options to the similarity function. |
useQuantile |
If non-NULL, the "nearest quantiloid" will be used instead of the nearest centroid. See details. |
sampleWeights |
Optional specification of sample weights. Useful for example if one wants to explore boosting. |
weighSimByPrediction |
(Optional) power to downweigh features that are not well predicted between training and test sets. See details. |
CVfold |
Non-negative integer specifying cross-validation. Zero means no cross-validation will be performed. values above zero specify the number of samples to be considered test data for each step of cross-validation. |
returnFactor |
Logical: should a factor be returned? |
randomSeed |
Integere specifying the seed for the random number generator. If |
verbose |
Integer controling how verbose the diagnostic messages should be. Zero means silent. |
indent |
Indentation for the diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Nearest centroid predictor works by forming a representative profile (centroid)
across features for each class from
the training data, then assigning each test sample to the class of the nearest representative profile. The
representative profile can be formed either as mean or as athe first principal component ("eigensample";
this choice is governed by the option centroidMethod
).
When the number of features is large and only a small fraction is likely to be associated with the outcome,
feature selection can be used to restrict the features that actually enter the centroid. Feature selection
can be based either on their association with the outcome
calculated from the training data using assocFnc
, or on user-supplied feature significance (e.g.,
derived from literature, argument
featureSignificance
). In either case, features can be selected by high and low association tresholds
or by taking a fixed number of highest- and lowest-associated features.
As an alternative to centroids, the predictor can also assign test samples based on a given quantile of the
distances from the training samples in each class (argument useQuantile
). This may be advantageous if
the samples in each class form irregular clusters. Note that setting useQuantile=0
(i.e., using
minimum distance in each class) essentially gives a nearest neighbor predictor: each test sample will be
assigned to the class of its nearest training neighbor.
If features exhibit non-trivial correlations among themselves (such as, for example, in gene expression
data), one can attempt to down-weigh features that do not exhibit the same correlation in the test set.
This is done by using essentially the same predictor to predict _features_ from all other features in the
test data (using the training data to train the feature predictor). Because test features are known, the
prediction accuracy can be evaluated. If a feature is predicted badly (meaning the error in the test set is
much larger than the error in the cross-validation prediction in training data),
it may mean that its quality in the
training or test data is low (for example, due to excessive noise or outliers).
Such features can be downweighed using the argument weighByPrediction
. The extra factor is
min(1, (root mean square prediction error in test set)/(root mean square cross-validation prediction error
in
the trainig data)^weighByPrediction), that is it is never bigger than 1.
Unless the features' mean and variance can be ascribed clear meaning, the (training) features should be scaled to mean 0 and variance 1 before the centroids are formed.
The function implements a basic option for removal of spurious effects in the training and test data, by removng a fixed number of leading principal components from the features. This sometimes leads to better prediction accuracy but should be used with caution.
If samples within each class are heterogenous, a single centroid may not represent each class well. This
function can deal with within-class heterogeneity by clustering samples (separately in each class), then
using a one representative (mean, eigensample) or quantile for each cluster in each class to assign test
samples. Various similarity measures, specified by adjFnc
, can be used to construct the sample network
adjacency. Similarly, the user can specify a clustering function using clusteringFnc
. The
requirements on the clustering function are described in a separate section below.
A list with the following components:
predicted |
The back-substitution prediction in the training set. |
predictedTest |
Prediction in the test set. |
featureSignificance |
A vector of feature significance calculated by |
selectedFeatures |
A vector giving the indices of the features that were selected for the predictor. |
centroidProfile |
The representative profiles of each class (or cluster). Only returned in
|
testSample2centroidSimilarities |
A matrix of calculated similarities between the test samples and class/cluster centroids. |
featureValidationWeights |
A vector of validation weights (see Details) for the selected features. If
|
CVpredicted |
Cross-validation prediction on the training data. Present only if |
sampleClusterLabels |
A list with two components (one per class). Each component is a vector of sample cluster labels for samples in the class. |
Peter Langfelder
Given expression data and basic network parameters, the function calculates connectivity of each gene to a given number of nearest neighbors.
nearestNeighborConnectivity(datExpr, nNeighbors = 50, power = 6, type = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", blockSize = 1000, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, setSeed = 38457, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
nearestNeighborConnectivity(datExpr, nNeighbors = 50, power = 6, type = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", blockSize = 1000, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, setSeed = 38457, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
a data frame containing expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. Missing values are allowed and will be ignored. |
nNeighbors |
number of nearest neighbors to use. |
power |
soft thresholding power for network construction. Should be a number greater than 1. |
type |
a character string encoding network type. Recognized values are (unique abbreviations of)
|
corFnc |
character string containing the name of the function to calculate correlation. Suggested
functions include |
corOptions |
further argument to the correlation function. |
blockSize |
correlation calculations will be split into square blocks of this size, to prevent running out of memory for large gene sets. |
sampleLinks |
logical: should network connections be sampled ( |
nLinks |
number of links to be sampled. Should be set such that |
setSeed |
seed to be used for sampling, for repeatability. If a seed already exists, it is saved before the sampling starts and restored upon exit. |
verbose |
integer controlling the level of verbosity. 0 means silent. |
indent |
integer controlling indentation of output. Each unit above 0 adds two spaces. |
Connectivity of gene i
is the sum of adjacency strengths between gene i
and other genes; in
this case we take the nNeighbors
nodes with the highest connection strength to gene i
. The
adjacency strengths are calculated by correlating the given expression data using the function supplied
in corFNC
and transforming them into adjacency according to the given network type
and
power
.
A vector with one component for each gene containing the nearest neighbor connectivity.
Peter Langfelder
Given expression data from several sets and basic network parameters, the function calculates connectivity of each gene to a given number of nearest neighbors in each set.
nearestNeighborConnectivityMS(multiExpr, nNeighbors = 50, power = 6, type = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", blockSize = 1000, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, setSeed = 36492, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
nearestNeighborConnectivityMS(multiExpr, nNeighbors = 50, power = 6, type = "unsigned", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", blockSize = 1000, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, setSeed = 36492, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in multi-set format. A vector of lists, one list per set. In each list
there must be a component named |
nNeighbors |
number of nearest neighbors to use. |
power |
soft thresholding power for network construction. Should be a number greater than 1. |
type |
a character string encoding network type. Recognized values are (unique abbreviations of)
|
corFnc |
character string containing the name of the function to calculate correlation. Suggested
functions include |
corOptions |
further argument to the correlation function. |
blockSize |
correlation calculations will be split into square blocks of this size, to prevent running out of memory for large gene sets. |
sampleLinks |
logical: should network connections be sampled ( |
nLinks |
number of links to be sampled. Should be set such that |
setSeed |
seed to be used for sampling, for repeatability. If a seed already exists, it is saved before the sampling starts and restored after. |
verbose |
integer controlling the level of verbosity. 0 means silent. |
indent |
integer controlling indentation of output. Each unit above 0 adds two spaces. |
Connectivity of gene i
is the sum of adjacency strengths between gene i
and other genes; in
this case we take the nNeighbors
nodes with the highest connection strength to gene i
. The
adjacency strengths are calculated by correlating the given expression data using the function supplied
in corFNC
and transforming them into adjacency according to the given network type
and
power
.
A matrix in which columns correspond to sets and rows to genes; each entry contains the nearest neighbor connectivity of the corresponding gene.
Peter Langfelder
adjacency
, softConnectivity
,
nearestNeighborConnectivity
This functions calculates various network concepts (topological properties, network indices) of a network calculated from expression data. See details for a detailed description.
networkConcepts(datExpr, power = 1, trait = NULL, networkType = "unsigned")
networkConcepts(datExpr, power = 1, trait = NULL, networkType = "unsigned")
datExpr |
a data frame containg the expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes (nodes). |
power |
soft thresholding power. |
trait |
optional specification of a sample trait. A vector of length equal the number of samples
in |
networkType |
network type. Recognized values are (unique abbreviations of) |
This function computes various network concepts (also known as network statistics, topological
properties, or network indices) for a weighted correlation network. The nodes of the weighted correlation
network will be constructed between the columns (interpreted as nodes) of the input datExpr
.
If the option
networkType="unsigned"
then the adjacency between nodes i and j is defined as
A[i,j]=abs(cor(datExpr[,i],datExpr[,j]))^power
.
In the following, we use the term gene and node interchangeably since these methods were originally
developed for gene networks. The function computes the following
4 types of network concepts (introduced in Horvath and Dong 2008):
Type I: fundamental network concepts are defined as a function of the off-diagonal elements of an
adjacency matrix A and/or a node significance measure GS. These network concepts can be defined for any
network (not just correlation networks).
The adjacency matrix of an unsigned weighted correlation network is given by
A=abs(cor(datExpr,use="p"))^power
and the trait based gene significance measure is given by
GS= abs(cor(datExpr,trait, use="p"))^power
where datExpr
, trait
, power
are input parameters.
Type II: conformity-based network concepts are functions of the off-diagonal elements of the conformity
based adjacency matrix A.CF=CF*t(CF)
and/or the node significance measure. These network concepts
are
defined for any network for which a conformity vector can be defined. Details: For any adjacency matrix
A
, the conformity vector CF
is calculated by requiring that A[i,j]
is
approximately equal to CF[i]*CF[j]
.
Using the conformity one can define the matrix A.CF=CF*t(CF)
which is the outer product of
the conformity
vector with itself. In general, A.CF
is not an adjacency matrix since its diagonal elements
are different
from 1. If the off-diagonal elements of A.CF
are similar to those of A
according to the Frobenius matrix
norm, then A
is approximately factorizable. To measure the factorizability of a network, one can
calculate the Factorizability
, which is a number between 0 and 1 (Dong and Horvath 2007). T
he conformity
is defined using a monotonic, iterative algorithm that maximizes the factorizability measure.
Type III: approximate conformity based network concepts are functions of all elements of the conformity
based adjacency matrix A.CF
(including the diagonal) and/or the node significance measure
GS
. These
network concepts are very useful for deriving relationships between network concepts in networks that are
approximately factorizable.
Type IV: eigengene-based (also known as eigennode-based) network concepts are functions of the
eigengene-based adjacency matrix A.E=ConformityE*t(ConformityE)
(diagonal included) and/or the
corresponding eigengene-based gene significance measure GSE
. These network concepts can only be
defined
for correlation networks. Details: The columns (nodes) of datExpr
can be summarized with the
first principal
component, which is referred to as Eigengene in coexpression network analysis. In general correlation
networks, it is called eigennode. The eigengene-based conformity ConformityE[i]
is defined as
abs(cor(datE[,i], Eigengene))^power
where the power corresponds to the power used for defining the
weighted adjacency matrix A
. The eigengene-based conformity can also be used to define an
eigengene-based
adjacency matrix A.E=ConformityE*t(ConformityE)
.
The eigengene based factorizability EF(datE)
is a number between 0 and 1 that measures how well
A.E
approximates A
when the power parameter equals 1. EF(datE)
is defined with respect to the
singular values
of datExpr
. For a trait based node significance measure GS=abs(cor(datE,trait))^power
,
one can also define
an eigengene-based node significance measure GSE[i]=ConformityE[i]*EigengeneSignificance
where the
eigengene significance abs(cor(Eigengene,trait))^power
is defined as power of the absolute value
of the
correlation between eigengene and trait.
Eigengene-based network concepts are very useful for providing a geometric interpretation of network
concepts and for deriving relationships between network concepts. For example, the hub gene significance
measure and its eigengene-based analog have been used to characterize networks where highly connected hub
genes are important with regard to a trait based gene significance measure (Horvath and Dong 2008).
A list with the following components:
Summary |
a data frame whose rows report network concepts that only depend on the adjacency matrix. Density (mean adjacency), Centralization , Heterogeneity (coefficient of variation of the connectivity), Mean ClusterCoef, Mean Connectivity. The columns of the data frame report the 4 types of network concepts mentioned in the description: Fundamental concepts, eigengene-based concepts, conformity-based concepts, and approximate conformity-based concepts. |
Size |
reports the network size, i.e. the number of nodes, which equals the number of columns of
the input data frame |
Factorizability |
a number between 0 and 1. The closer it is to 1, the better the off-diagonal
elements of the conformity based network |
Eigengene |
the first principal component of the standardized columns of |
VarExplained |
the proportion of variance explained by the first principal component (the
|
Conformity |
numerical vector giving the conformity.
The number of components of the conformity vector equals the number of columns in
|
ClusterCoef |
a numerical vector that reports the cluster coefficient for each node. This fundamental network concept measures the cliquishness of each node. |
Connectivity |
a numerical vector that reports the connectivity (also known as degree) of each
node. This fundamental network concept is also known as whole network connectivity. One can also define
the scaled connectivity |
MAR |
a numerical vector that reports the maximum adjacency ratio for each node. |
ConformityE |
a numerical vector that reports the eigengene based (aka eigenenode based)
conformity for the correlation network. The number of components equals the number of columns of
|
GS |
a numerical vector that encodes the node (gene) significance. The i-th component equals the
node significance of the i-th column of |
GSE |
a numerical vector that reports the eigengene based gene significance measure. Its i-th
component is given by |
Significance |
a data frame whose rows report network concepts that also depend on the trait based
node significance measure. The rows correspond to network concepts and the columns correspond to the type
of network concept (fundamental versus eigengene based). The first row of the data frame reports the
network significance. The fundamental version of this network concepts is the average gene
significance=mean(GS). The eigengene based analog of this concept is defined as mean(GSE). The second row
reports the hub gene significance which is defined as slope of the intercept only regression model that
regresses the gene significance on the scaled network connectivity K. The third row reports the eigengene
significance |
Jun Dong, Steve Horvath, Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
conformityBasedNetworkConcepts
for approximate conformity-based network concepts
fundamentalNetworkConcepts
for calculation of fundamental network concepts only.
This function blends standard and network approaches to selecting genes (or variables in general) highly related to a given trait.
networkScreening(y, datME, datExpr, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", oddPower = 3, blockSize = 1000, minimumSampleSize = ..minNSamples, addMEy = TRUE, removeDiag = FALSE, weightESy = 0.5, getQValues = TRUE)
networkScreening(y, datME, datExpr, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", oddPower = 3, blockSize = 1000, minimumSampleSize = ..minNSamples, addMEy = TRUE, removeDiag = FALSE, weightESy = 0.5, getQValues = TRUE)
y |
clinical trait given as a numeric vector (one value per sample) |
datME |
data frame of module eigengenes |
datExpr |
data frame of expression data |
corFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression similarity. Defaults to Pearson correlation. Any function returning values between -1 and 1 can be used. |
corOptions |
character string specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
oddPower |
odd integer used as a power to raise module memberships and significances |
blockSize |
block size to use for calculations with large data sets |
minimumSampleSize |
minimum acceptable number of samples. Defaults to the default minimum number of samples used throughout the WGCNA package, currently 4. |
addMEy |
logical: should the trait be used as an additional "module eigengene"? |
removeDiag |
logical: remove the diagonal? |
weightESy |
weight to use for the trait as an additional eigengene; should be between 0 and 1 |
getQValues |
logical: should q-values be calculated? |
This function should be considered experimental. It takes into account both the "standard" and the network measures of gene importance for the trait.
datout = data.frame(p.Weighted, q.Weighted, Cor.Weighted, Z.Weighted, p.Standard, q.Standard, Cor.Standard, Z.Standard) Data frame reporting the following quantities for each given gene:
p.Weighted |
weighted p-value of association with the trait |
q.Weighted |
q-value (local FDR) calculated from |
cor.Weighted |
correlation of trait with gene expression weighted by a network term |
Z.Weighted |
Fisher Z score of the weighted correlation |
p.Standard |
standard Student p-value of association of the gene with the trait |
q.Standard |
q-value (local FDR) calculated from |
cor.Standard |
correlation of gene with the trait |
Z.Standard |
Fisher Z score of the standard correlation |
Steve Horvath
This function blends standard and network approaches to selecting genes (or variables in general) with high gene significance
networkScreeningGS( datExpr, datME, GS, oddPower = 3, blockSize = 1000, minimumSampleSize = ..minNSamples, addGS = TRUE)
networkScreeningGS( datExpr, datME, GS, oddPower = 3, blockSize = 1000, minimumSampleSize = ..minNSamples, addGS = TRUE)
datExpr |
data frame of expression data |
datME |
data frame of module eigengenes |
GS |
numeric vector of gene significances |
oddPower |
odd integer used as a power to raise module memberships and significances |
blockSize |
block size to use for calculations with large data sets |
minimumSampleSize |
minimum acceptable number of samples. Defaults to the default minimum number of samples used throughout the WGCNA package, currently 4. |
addGS |
logical: should gene significances be added to the screening statistics? |
This function should be considered experimental. It takes into account both the "standard" and the network measures of gene importance for the trait.
GS.Weighted |
weighted gene significance |
GS |
copy of the input gene significances (only if |
Steve Horvath
networkScreening
, automaticNetworkScreeningGS
This function creates a list storing information about dividing data into blocks, as well as about possibly excluding genes or samples with excessive numbers of missing data.
newBlockInformation(blocks, goodSamplesAndGenes)
newBlockInformation(blocks, goodSamplesAndGenes)
blocks |
A vector giving block labels. It is assumed to be a numeric vector with block labels consecutive integers starting at 1. |
goodSamplesAndGenes |
A list returned by |
A list with class
attribute set to BlockInformation
, with the following componens:
blocks |
A copy of the input |
blockGenes |
A list with one component per block, giving the indices of elements in |
goodSamplesAndGenes |
A copy of input |
nGGenes |
Number of ‘good’ genes in |
gBlocks |
The input |
Peter Langfelder
goodSamplesGenes
, goodSamplesGenesMS
.
These functions create, merge and expand BlockwiseData objects for holding in-memory or disk-backed blockwise data. Blockwise here means that the data is too large to be loaded or processed in one piece and is therefore split into blocks that can be handled one by one in a divide-and-conquer manner.
newBlockwiseData( data, external = FALSE, fileNames = NULL, doSave = external, recordAttributes = TRUE, metaData = list()) mergeBlockwiseData(...) addBlockToBlockwiseData( bwData, blockData, external = bwData$external, blockFile = NULL, doSave = external, recordAttributes = !is.null(bwData$attributes), metaData = NULL)
newBlockwiseData( data, external = FALSE, fileNames = NULL, doSave = external, recordAttributes = TRUE, metaData = list()) mergeBlockwiseData(...) addBlockToBlockwiseData( bwData, blockData, external = bwData$external, blockFile = NULL, doSave = external, recordAttributes = !is.null(bwData$attributes), metaData = NULL)
data |
A list in which each component carries the data of a single block. |
external |
Logical: should the data be disk-backed ( |
fileNames |
When |
doSave |
Logical: should data be saved? If this is |
recordAttributes |
Logical: should |
metaData |
A list giving any additional meta-data for |
bwData |
An existing |
blockData |
A vector, matrix or array carrying the data of a single block. |
blockFile |
File name where data contained in |
... |
One or more objects of class |
Several functions in this package use the concept of blockwise, or "divide-and-conquer", analysis. The BlockwiseData class is meant to hold the blockwise data, or all necessary information about blockwise data that is saved in disk files.
The data can be stored in disk files (one file per block) or in-memory. In memory storage is provided so that same code can be used for both smaller (single-block) data where disk storage could slow down operations as well as larger data sets where disk storage and block by block analysis are necessary.
All three functions return a list with the class set to "BlockwiseData"
, containing the following components:
external |
Copy of the input argument |
data |
If |
fileNames |
Copy of the input argument |
lengths |
A vector of lengths (results of |
attributes |
If input |
metaData |
A copy of the input |
The definition of BlockwiseData
should be considered experimental and may change in
the future.
Peter Langfelder
Other functions on BlockwiseData
:
BD.getData
for retrieving data
BD.actualFileNames
for retrieving file names of files containing data;
BD.nBlocks
for retrieving the number of blocks;
BD.blockLengths
for retrieving block lengths;
BD.getMetaData
for retrieving metadata;
BD.checkAndDeleteFiles
for deleting files of an unneeded object.
This function creates a list of class ConsensusOptions
that holds options for consensus calculations.
This list holds options for a single-level analysis.
newConsensusOptions( calibration = c("full quantile", "single quantile", "none"), # Simple quantile scaling options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, suppressNegativeResults = FALSE, # Name to prevent files clashes analysisName = "")
newConsensusOptions( calibration = c("full quantile", "single quantile", "none"), # Simple quantile scaling options calibrationQuantile = 0.95, sampleForCalibration = TRUE, sampleForCalibrationFactor = 1000, # Consensus definition consensusQuantile = 0, useMean = FALSE, setWeights = NULL, suppressNegativeResults = FALSE, # Name to prevent files clashes analysisName = "")
calibration |
Calibration method. One of |
calibrationQuantile |
if |
sampleForCalibration |
if |
sampleForCalibrationFactor |
Determines the number of samples for calibration: the number is
|
consensusQuantile |
Quantile at which consensus is to be defined. See details. |
useMean |
Logical: should the consensus be calculated using (weighted) mean rather than a quantile? |
setWeights |
Optional specification of weights when |
suppressNegativeResults |
Logical: should negative consensus results be replaced by 0? In a typical network
connstruction, negative topological overlap values may results with |
analysisName |
Optional character string naming the consensus analysis. Useful for identifying partial consensus calculation in hierarchical consensus analysis. |
A list of type ConsensusOptions
that holds copies of the input arguments.
Peter Langfelder
This function creates a new consensus tree, a class for representing "recipes" for hierarchical consensus calculations.
newConsensusTree( consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(), inputs, analysisName = NULL)
newConsensusTree( consensusOptions = newConsensusOptions(), inputs, analysisName = NULL)
consensusOptions |
An object of class |
inputs |
A vector (or list) of inputs. Each component can be either a character string giving a names of a data set,
or another |
analysisName |
Optional specification of a name for this consensus analysis. While this has no effect on the actual consensus calculation, some functions use this character string to make certain file names unique. |
Consensus trees specify a "recipe" for the calculation of hierarchical consensus in
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
and other functions.
A list with class set to "ConsensusTree"
with these components:
consensusOptions |
A copy of the input |
inputs |
A copy of the input |
analysisName |
A copy of the input |
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
for hierarchical consensus calculation for which a
ConsensusTree
object specifies the recipe
Convenience function to create a re-usable list of correlation options.
newCorrelationOptions( corType = c("pearson", "bicor"), maxPOutliers = 0.05, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, nThreads = 0, corFnc = if (corType=="bicor") "bicor" else "cor", corOptions = c( list(use = 'p', cosine = cosineCorrelation, quick = quickCor, nThreads = nThreads), if (corType=="bicor") list(maxPOutliers = maxPOutliers, pearsonFallback = pearsonFallback) else NULL))
newCorrelationOptions( corType = c("pearson", "bicor"), maxPOutliers = 0.05, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, nThreads = 0, corFnc = if (corType=="bicor") "bicor" else "cor", corOptions = c( list(use = 'p', cosine = cosineCorrelation, quick = quickCor, nThreads = nThreads), if (corType=="bicor") list(maxPOutliers = maxPOutliers, pearsonFallback = pearsonFallback) else NULL))
corType |
Character specifying the type of correlation function. Currently supported options are |
maxPOutliers |
Maximum proportion of outliers for biweight mid-correlation. See |
quickCor |
Real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the
calculation of correlations. See |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation should revert to Pearson when median
absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
Logical: calculate cosine biweight midcorrelation? Cosine bicorrelation is similar to standard bicorrelation but the median subtraction is not performed. |
nThreads |
A non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
corFnc |
Correlation function to be called in R code. Should correspoind to the value of |
corOptions |
A list of options to be supplied to the correlation function (in addition to appropriate arguments |
A list containing a copy of the input arguments. The output has class CorrelationOptions
.
Peter Langfelder
This function creates a reusable list of network calculation arguments/options.
newNetworkOptions( correlationOptions = newCorrelationOptions(), # Adjacency options replaceMissingAdjacencies = TRUE, power = 6, networkType = c("signed hybrid", "signed", "unsigned"), checkPower = TRUE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = c("signed", "signed Nowick", "unsigned", "none", "signed 2", "signed Nowick 2", "unsigned 2"), TOMDenom = c("mean", "min"), suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Internal behavior options useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE)
newNetworkOptions( correlationOptions = newCorrelationOptions(), # Adjacency options replaceMissingAdjacencies = TRUE, power = 6, networkType = c("signed hybrid", "signed", "unsigned"), checkPower = TRUE, # Topological overlap options TOMType = c("signed", "signed Nowick", "unsigned", "none", "signed 2", "signed Nowick 2", "unsigned 2"), TOMDenom = c("mean", "min"), suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, # Internal behavior options useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE)
correlationOptions |
A list of correlation options. See |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
Logical: should missing adjacencies be replaced by zero? |
power |
Soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
checkPower |
Logicel: should the power be checked for sanity? |
TOMType |
One of |
TOMDenom |
Character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies |
logical: for those components that have zero adjacency, should TOM be set to zero as well? |
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? Negative TOM values can occur when
|
newNetworkOptions
useInternalMatrixAlgebra |
logical: should internal implementation of matrix multiplication be used instead of R-provided BLAS? The internal implementation is slow and this option should only be used if one suspects a bug in R-provided BLAS. |
A list of class NetworkOptions
.
Peter Langfelder
Transforms numerical labels into normal order, that is the largest group will be labeled 1, next largest 2 etc. Label 0 is optionally preserved.
normalizeLabels(labels, keepZero = TRUE)
normalizeLabels(labels, keepZero = TRUE)
labels |
Numerical labels. |
keepZero |
If |
A vector of the same length as input, containing the normalized labels.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
A simple sum of present entries in the argument.
nPresent(x)
nPresent(x)
x |
data in which to count number of present entries. |
A single number giving the number of present entries in x
.
Steve Horvath
A convenience function that returns the number of sets in a multi-set variable.
nSets(multiData, ...)
nSets(multiData, ...)
multiData |
vector of lists; in each list there must be a component named |
... |
Other arguments to function |
A single integer that equals the number of sets given in the input multiData
.
Peter Langfelder
The function creates a color represenation for the given numeric input.
numbers2colors( x, signed = NULL, centered = signed, lim = NULL, commonLim = FALSE, colors = if (signed) blueWhiteRed(100) else blueWhiteRed(100)[51:100], naColor = "grey")
numbers2colors( x, signed = NULL, centered = signed, lim = NULL, commonLim = FALSE, colors = if (signed) blueWhiteRed(100) else blueWhiteRed(100)[51:100], naColor = "grey")
x |
a vector or matrix of numbers. Missing values are allowed and will be assigned the color
given in |
signed |
logical: should |
centered |
logical. If |
lim |
optional specification of limits, that is numeric values that should correspond to the
first and last entry of |
commonLim |
logical: should limits be calculated separately for each column of x, or should the
limits be the same for all columns? Only applies if |
colors |
color palette to represent the given numbers. |
naColor |
color to represent missing values in |
Each column of x
is processed individually, meaning that the color palette is adjusted
individually for each column of x
.
A vector or matrix (of the same dimensions as x
) of colors.
Peter Langfelder
labels2colors
for color coding of ordinal labels.
This function takes as input the hierarchical clustering tree as well as a subset of genes in the network (generally corresponding to branches in the tree), then returns a semi-optimally ordered tree. The idea is to maximize the correlations between adjacent branches in the dendrogram, in as much as that is possible by adjusting the arbitrary positionings of the branches by swapping and reflecting branches.
orderBranchesUsingHubGenes( hierTOM, datExpr = NULL, colorh = NULL, type = "signed", adj = NULL, iter = NULL, useReflections = FALSE, allowNonoptimalSwaps = FALSE)
orderBranchesUsingHubGenes( hierTOM, datExpr = NULL, colorh = NULL, type = "signed", adj = NULL, iter = NULL, useReflections = FALSE, allowNonoptimalSwaps = FALSE)
hierTOM |
A hierarchical clustering object (or gene tree) that is used to plot the dendrogram. For example, the output object from the function hclust or fastcluster::hclust. Note that elements of hierTOM$order MUST be named (for example, with the corresponding gene name). |
datExpr |
Gene expression data with rows as samples and columns as genes, or NULL if a pre-made adjacency is entered. Column names of datExpr must be a subset of gene names of hierTOM$order. |
colorh |
The module assignments (color vectors) corresponding to the rows in datExpr, or NULL if a pre-made adjacency is entered. |
type |
What type of network is being entered. Common choices are "signed" (default) and "unsigned". With "signed" negative correlations count against, whereas with "unsigned" negative correlations are treated identically as positive correlations. |
adj |
Either NULL (default) or an adjacency (or any other square) matrix with rows and columns corresponding to a subset of the genes in hierTOM$order. If entered, datExpr, colorh, and type are all ignored. Typically, this would be left blank but could include correlations between module eigengenes, with rows and columns renamed as genes in the corresponding modules, for example. |
iter |
The number of iterations to run the function in search of optimal branch ordering. The default is the square of the number of modules (or the quare of the number of genes in the adjacency matrix). |
useReflections |
If TRUE, both reflections and branch swapping will be used to optimize dendrogram. If FALSE (default) only branch swapping will be used. |
allowNonoptimalSwaps |
If TRUE, there is chance (that decreases with each iteration) of swapping / reflecting branches whether or not the new correlation between expression of genes in adjacent branches is better or worse. The idea (which has not been sufficiently tested), is that this would prevent the function from getting stuck at a local maxima of correlation. If FALSE (default), the swapping / reflection of branches only occurs if it results in a higher correlation between adjacent branches. |
hierTOM |
A hierarchical clustering object with the hierTOM$order variable properly adjusted, but all other variables identical as the heirTOM input. |
changeLog |
A log of all of the changes that were made to the dendrogram, including what change was made, on what iteration, and the Old and New scores based on correlation. These scores have arbitrary units, but higher is better. |
This function is very slow and is still in an *experimental* function. We have not had problems with ~10 modules across ~5000 genes, although theoretically it should work for many more genes and modules, depending upon the speed of the computer running R. Please address any problems or suggestions to [email protected].
Jeremy Miller
## Not run: ## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = c(MEturquoise[1:25], sample(1:100,25)) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,400,c(0.16,0.12,0.11,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.1), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh,dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Reassign modules using the selectBranch and chooseOneHubInEachModule functions datExpr = dat1$datExpr hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(datExpr, colorh) colorh2 = rep("grey", length(colorh)) colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["turquoise"])] = "blue" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["turquoise"],hubs["blue"])] = "turquoise" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["green"],hubs["yellow"])] = "green" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["yellow"],hubs["green"])] = "yellow" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["brown"])] = "red" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["brown"],hubs["red"])] = "brown" plotDendroAndColors(tree1,cbind(colorh,colorh2),c("Old","New"),dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Now swap and reflect some branches, then optimize the order of the branches # and output pdf with resulting images pdf("DENDROGRAM_PLOTS.pdf",width=10,height=5) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Starting Dendrogram") tree1 = swapTwoBranches(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["turquoise"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Swap blue/turquoise and red/brown") tree1 = reflectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["green"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Reflect turquoise/blue") # (This function will take a few minutes) out = orderBranchesUsingHubGenes(tree1,datExpr,colorh2,useReflections=TRUE,iter=100) tree1 = out$geneTree plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Semi-optimal branch order") out$changeLog dev.off() ## End(Not run)
## Not run: ## Example: first simulate some data. MEturquoise = sample(1:100,50) MEblue = c(MEturquoise[1:25], sample(1:100,25)) MEbrown = sample(1:100,50) MEyellow = sample(1:100,50) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:30], sample(1:100,20)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:20], sample(1:100,30)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,400,c(0.16,0.12,0.11,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.1), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh,dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Reassign modules using the selectBranch and chooseOneHubInEachModule functions datExpr = dat1$datExpr hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(datExpr, colorh) colorh2 = rep("grey", length(colorh)) colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["turquoise"])] = "blue" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["turquoise"],hubs["blue"])] = "turquoise" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["green"],hubs["yellow"])] = "green" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["yellow"],hubs["green"])] = "yellow" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["brown"])] = "red" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["brown"],hubs["red"])] = "brown" plotDendroAndColors(tree1,cbind(colorh,colorh2),c("Old","New"),dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Now swap and reflect some branches, then optimize the order of the branches # and output pdf with resulting images pdf("DENDROGRAM_PLOTS.pdf",width=10,height=5) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Starting Dendrogram") tree1 = swapTwoBranches(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["turquoise"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Swap blue/turquoise and red/brown") tree1 = reflectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["green"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Reflect turquoise/blue") # (This function will take a few minutes) out = orderBranchesUsingHubGenes(tree1,datExpr,colorh2,useReflections=TRUE,iter=100) tree1 = out$geneTree plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Semi-optimal branch order") out$changeLog dev.off() ## End(Not run)
Reorder given (eigen-)vectors such that similar ones (as measured by correlation) are next to each other.
orderMEs(MEs, greyLast = TRUE, greyName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""), orderBy = 1, order = NULL, useSets = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
orderMEs(MEs, greyLast = TRUE, greyName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""), orderBy = 1, order = NULL, useSets = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
MEs |
Module eigengenes in a multi-set format (see |
greyLast |
Normally the color grey is reserved for unassigned genes; hence the grey module is not
a proper module and it is conventional to put it last. If this is not desired, set the parameter to
|
greyName |
Name of the grey module eigengene. |
orderBy |
Specifies the set by which the eigengenes are to be ordered (in all other sets as well).
Defaults to the first set in |
order |
Allows the user to specify a custom ordering. |
useSets |
Allows the user to specify for which sets the eigengene ordering is to be performed. |
verbose |
Controls verbostity of printed progress messages. 0 means silent, nonzero verbose. |
indent |
A single non-negative integer controling indentation of printed messages. 0 means no indentation, each unit above zero adds two spaces. |
Ordering module eigengenes is useful for plotting purposes. For this function the order can be specified explicitly, or a set can be given in which the correlations of the eigengenes will determine the order. For the latter, a hierarchical dendrogram is calculated and the order given by the dendrogram is used for the eigengenes in all other sets.
A vector of lists of the same type as MEs
containing the re-ordered eigengenes.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
moduleEigengenes
, multiSetMEs
, consensusOrderMEs
This function calculates a hiearchical consensus similarity of the input eigengenes, clusters the eigengenes according to the similarity and returns the input module eigengenes ordered by the order of resulting dendrogram.
orderMEsByHierarchicalConsensus( MEs, networkOptions, consensusTree, greyName = "ME0", calibrate = FALSE)
orderMEsByHierarchicalConsensus( MEs, networkOptions, consensusTree, greyName = "ME0", calibrate = FALSE)
MEs |
Module eigengenes, or more generally, vectors, to be ordered, in a |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See |
greyName |
Specifies the column name of eigengene of the "module" that contains unassigned genes. This eigengene (column) will be excluded from the clustering and will be put last in the order. |
calibrate |
Logical: should module eigengene similarities be calibrated? This setting overrides the calibration options
in |
A multiData
structure of the same format as the input MEs
, with columns ordered
by the calculated dendrogram.
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusMEDissimilarity
for calculating the consensus ME dissimilarity
The function calculates overlap counts and Fisher exact test p-values for the given two sets of module assignments.
overlapTable( labels1, labels2, na.rm = TRUE, ignore = NULL, levels1 = NULL, levels2 = NULL, log.p = FALSE)
overlapTable( labels1, labels2, na.rm = TRUE, ignore = NULL, levels1 = NULL, levels2 = NULL, log.p = FALSE)
labels1 |
a vector containing module labels. |
labels2 |
a vector containing module labels to be compared to |
na.rm |
logical: should entries missing in either |
ignore |
an optional vector giving label levels that are to be ignored. |
levels1 |
optional vector giving levels for |
levels2 |
optional vector giving levels for |
log.p |
logical: should (natural) logarithms of the p-values be returned instead of the p-values? |
A list with the following components:
countTable |
a matrix whose rows correspond to modules (unique labels) in |
pTable |
a matrix whose rows correspond to modules (unique labels) in |
Peter Langfelder
Takes two sets of expression data (or kME tables) as input and returns a table listing the significant overlap between each module in each data set, as well as the actual genes in common for every module pair. Modules can be defined in several ways (generally involving kME) based on user input.
overlapTableUsingKME( dat1, dat2, colorh1, colorh2, MEs1 = NULL, MEs2 = NULL, name1 = "MM1", name2 = "MM2", cutoffMethod = "assigned", cutoff = 0.5, omitGrey = TRUE, datIsExpression = TRUE)
overlapTableUsingKME( dat1, dat2, colorh1, colorh2, MEs1 = NULL, MEs2 = NULL, name1 = "MM1", name2 = "MM2", cutoffMethod = "assigned", cutoff = 0.5, omitGrey = TRUE, datIsExpression = TRUE)
dat1 , dat2
|
Either expression data sets (with samples as rows and genes as columns) or module membership (kME) tables (with genes as rows and modules as columns). Function reads these inputs based on whether datIsExpression=TRUE or FALSE. ***Be sure that these inputs include relevant row and column names, or else the function will not work properly.*** |
colorh1 , colorh2
|
Color vector (module assignments) corresponding to the genes from dat1/2. This vector must be the same length as the Gene dimension from dat1/2. |
MEs1 , MEs2
|
If entered (default=NULL), these are the module eigengenes that will be used to form the kME tables. Rows are samples and columns are module assignments. Note that if datIsExpression=FALSE, these inputs are ignored. |
name1 , name2
|
The names of the two data sets being compared. These names affect the output parameters. |
cutoffMethod |
This variable is used to determine how modules are defined in each data set. Must be one of four options: (1) "assigned" -> use the module assignments in colorh (default); (2) "kME" -> any gene with kME > cutoff is in the module; (3) "numGenes" -> the top cutoff number of genes based on kME is in the module; and (4) "pvalue" -> any gene with correlation pvalue < cutoff is in the module (this includes both positively and negatively-correlated genes). |
cutoff |
For all cutoffMethods other than "assigned", this parameter is used as the described cutoff value. |
omitGrey |
If TRUE the grey modules (non-module genes) for both networks are not returned. |
datIsExpression |
If TRUE (default), dat1/2 is assumed to be expression data. If FALSE, dat1/2 is assumed to be a table of kME values. |
PvaluesHypergeo |
A table of p-values showing significance of module overlap based on the hypergeometric test. Note that these p-values are not corrected for multiple comparisons. |
AllCommonGenes |
A character vector of all genes in common between the two data sets. |
Genes<name1/2> |
A list of character vectors of all genes in each module in both data sets. All genes in the MOD module in data set MM1 could be found using "<outputVariableName>$GenesMM1$MM1_MOD" |
OverlappingGenes |
A list of character vectors of all genes for each between-set comparison from PvaluesHypergeo. All genes in MOD.A from MM1 that are also in MOD.B from MM2 could be found using "<outputVariableName>$OverlappingGenes$MM1_MOD.A_MM2_MOD.B" |
Jeremy Miller
# Example: first generate simulated data. set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME.E = sample(1:100,50); ME.F = sample(1:100,50) ME.G = sample(1:100,50); ME.H = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D, ME.E) ME2 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.C, ME.D, ME.E, ME.F, ME.G, ME.H) simDat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.04,0.3), signed=TRUE) simDat2 = simulateDatExpr(ME2,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.04,0.03,0.02,0.3), signed=TRUE) # Now run the function using assigned genes results = overlapTableUsingKME(simDat1$datExpr, simDat2$datExpr, labels2colors(simDat1$allLabels), labels2colors(simDat2$allLabels), cutoffMethod="assigned") results$PvaluesHypergeo # Now run the function using a p-value cutoff, and inputting the original MEs colnames(ME1) = standardColors(5); colnames(ME2) = standardColors(7) results = overlapTableUsingKME(simDat1$datExpr, simDat2$datExpr, labels2colors(simDat1$allLabels), labels2colors(simDat2$allLabels), ME1, ME2, cutoffMethod="pvalue", cutoff=0.05) results$PvaluesHypergeo # Check which genes are in common between the black modules from set 1 and # the green module from set 2 results$OverlappingGenes$MM1_green_MM2_black
# Example: first generate simulated data. set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME.E = sample(1:100,50); ME.F = sample(1:100,50) ME.G = sample(1:100,50); ME.H = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D, ME.E) ME2 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.C, ME.D, ME.E, ME.F, ME.G, ME.H) simDat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.04,0.3), signed=TRUE) simDat2 = simulateDatExpr(ME2,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.04,0.03,0.02,0.3), signed=TRUE) # Now run the function using assigned genes results = overlapTableUsingKME(simDat1$datExpr, simDat2$datExpr, labels2colors(simDat1$allLabels), labels2colors(simDat2$allLabels), cutoffMethod="assigned") results$PvaluesHypergeo # Now run the function using a p-value cutoff, and inputting the original MEs colnames(ME1) = standardColors(5); colnames(ME2) = standardColors(7) results = overlapTableUsingKME(simDat1$datExpr, simDat2$datExpr, labels2colors(simDat1$allLabels), labels2colors(simDat2$allLabels), ME1, ME2, cutoffMethod="pvalue", cutoff=0.05) results$PvaluesHypergeo # Check which genes are in common between the black modules from set 1 and # the green module from set 2 results$OverlappingGenes$MM1_green_MM2_black
Analysis of scale free topology for multiple hard thresholds. The aim is to help the user pick an appropriate threshold for network construction.
pickHardThreshold( data, dataIsExpr, RsquaredCut = 0.85, cutVector = seq(0.1, 0.9, by = 0.05), moreNetworkConcepts = FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'") pickHardThreshold.fromSimilarity( similarity, RsquaredCut = 0.85, cutVector = seq(0.1, 0.9, by = 0.05), moreNetworkConcepts=FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10)
pickHardThreshold( data, dataIsExpr, RsquaredCut = 0.85, cutVector = seq(0.1, 0.9, by = 0.05), moreNetworkConcepts = FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'") pickHardThreshold.fromSimilarity( similarity, RsquaredCut = 0.85, cutVector = seq(0.1, 0.9, by = 0.05), moreNetworkConcepts=FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10)
data |
expression data in a matrix or data frame. Rows correspond to samples and columns to genes. |
dataIsExpr |
logical: should the data be interpreted as expression (or other numeric) data, or as a similarity matrix of network nodes? |
similarity |
similarity matrix: a symmetric matrix with entries between -1 and 1 and unit diagonal. |
RsquaredCut |
desired minimum scale free topology fitting index |
cutVector |
a vector of hard threshold cuts for which the scale free topology fit indices are to be calculated. |
moreNetworkConcepts |
logical: should additional network concepts be calculated? If |
removeFirst |
should the first bin be removed from the connectivity histogram? |
nBreaks |
number of bins in connectivity histograms |
corFnc |
a character string giving the correlation function to be used in adjacency calculation. |
corOptions |
further options to the correlation function specified in |
The function calculates unsigned networks by thresholding the correlation matrix using thresholds given
in cutVector
. For each power the scale free topology fit index is calculated
and returned along with other information on connectivity.
A list with the following components:
cutEstimate |
estimate of an appropriate hard-thresholding cut: the lowest cut for which
the scale free topology fit |
fitIndices |
a data frame containing the fit indices for scale free topology. The columns
contain the hard threshold, Student p-value for the correlation threshold,
adjusted |
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
Analysis of scale free topology for multiple soft thresholding powers. The aim is to help the user pick an appropriate soft-thresholding power for network construction.
pickSoftThreshold( data, dataIsExpr = TRUE, weights = NULL, RsquaredCut = 0.85, powerVector = c(seq(1, 10, by = 1), seq(12, 20, by = 2)), removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, blockSize = NULL, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), networkType = "unsigned", moreNetworkConcepts = FALSE, gcInterval = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0) pickSoftThreshold.fromSimilarity( similarity, RsquaredCut = 0.85, powerVector = c(seq(1, 10, by = 1), seq(12, 20, by = 2)), removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, blockSize = 1000, moreNetworkConcepts=FALSE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
pickSoftThreshold( data, dataIsExpr = TRUE, weights = NULL, RsquaredCut = 0.85, powerVector = c(seq(1, 10, by = 1), seq(12, 20, by = 2)), removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, blockSize = NULL, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), networkType = "unsigned", moreNetworkConcepts = FALSE, gcInterval = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0) pickSoftThreshold.fromSimilarity( similarity, RsquaredCut = 0.85, powerVector = c(seq(1, 10, by = 1), seq(12, 20, by = 2)), removeFirst = FALSE, nBreaks = 10, blockSize = 1000, moreNetworkConcepts=FALSE, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
data |
expression data in a matrix or data frame. Rows correspond to samples and columns to genes. |
dataIsExpr |
logical: should the data be interpreted as expression (or other numeric) data, or as a similarity matrix of network nodes? |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
similarity |
similarity matrix: a symmetric matrix with entries between 0 and 1 and unit diagonal. The only
transformation applied to |
RsquaredCut |
desired minimum scale free topology fitting index |
powerVector |
a vector of soft thresholding powers for which the scale free topology fit indices are to be calculated. |
removeFirst |
should the first bin be removed from the connectivity histogram? |
nBreaks |
number of bins in connectivity histograms |
blockSize |
block size into which the calculation of connectivity should be broken up. If not given,
a suitable value will be calculated using function |
corFnc |
the correlation function to be used in adjacency calculation. |
corOptions |
a list giving further options to the correlation function specified in |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
moreNetworkConcepts |
logical: should additional network concepts be calculated? If |
gcInterval |
a number specifying in interval (in terms of individual genes) in which garbage
collection will be performed. The actual interval will never be less than |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The function calculates weighted networks either by
interpreting data
directly as similarity, or first transforming it to similarity of the type
specified by networkType
.
The weighted networks are obtained by raising the similarity to the powers given in powerVector
.
For each power the scale free topology fit index is calculated
and returned along with other information on connectivity.
On systems with multiple cores or processors,
the function pickSoftThreshold takes advantage of parallel processing if the function
enableWGCNAThreads
has been called to allow parallel processing and set up the parallel
calculation back-end.
A list with the following components:
powerEstimate |
estimate of an appropriate soft-thresholding power: the lowest power for which
the scale free topology fit |
fitIndices |
a data frame containing the fit indices for scale free topology. The columns
contain the soft-thresholding power, adjusted |
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
This function plots an annotated clustering dendorgram of microarray samples.
plotClusterTreeSamples( datExpr, y = NULL, traitLabels = NULL, yLabels = NULL, main = if (is.null(y)) "Sample dendrogram" else "Sample dendrogram and trait indicator", setLayout = TRUE, autoColorHeight = TRUE, colorHeight = 0.3, dendroLabels = NULL, addGuide = FALSE, guideAll = TRUE, guideCount = NULL, guideHang = 0.2, cex.traitLabels = 0.8, cex.dendroLabels = 0.9, marAll = c(1, 5, 3, 1), saveMar = TRUE, abHeight = NULL, abCol = "red", ...)
plotClusterTreeSamples( datExpr, y = NULL, traitLabels = NULL, yLabels = NULL, main = if (is.null(y)) "Sample dendrogram" else "Sample dendrogram and trait indicator", setLayout = TRUE, autoColorHeight = TRUE, colorHeight = 0.3, dendroLabels = NULL, addGuide = FALSE, guideAll = TRUE, guideCount = NULL, guideHang = 0.2, cex.traitLabels = 0.8, cex.dendroLabels = 0.9, marAll = c(1, 5, 3, 1), saveMar = TRUE, abHeight = NULL, abCol = "red", ...)
datExpr |
a data frame containing expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. Missing values are allowed and will be ignored. |
y |
microarray sample trait. Either a vector with one entry per sample, or a matrix in which each column corresponds to a (different) trait and each row to a sample. |
traitLabels |
labels to be printed next to the color rows depicting sample traits. Defaults to
column names of |
yLabels |
Optional labels to identify colors in the row identifying the sample classes.
If given, must be of the same dimensions as |
main |
title for the plot. |
setLayout |
logical: should the plotting device be partitioned into a standard layout?
If |
autoColorHeight |
logical: should the height of the color area below the dendrogram be
automatically adjusted for the number of traits? Only effective if |
colorHeight |
Specifies the height of the color area under dendrogram as a fraction of the
height of the dendrogram area. Only effective when |
dendroLabels |
dendrogram labels. Set to |
addGuide |
logical: should vertical "guide lines" be added to the dendrogram plot? The lines make it easier to identify color codes with individual samples. |
guideAll |
logical: add a guide line for every sample? Only effective for |
guideCount |
number of guide lines to be plotted. Only effective when |
guideHang |
fraction of the dendrogram height to leave between the top end of the guide line and
the dendrogram merge height. If the guide lines overlap with dendrogram labels, increase |
cex.traitLabels |
character expansion factor for trait labels. |
cex.dendroLabels |
character expansion factor for dendrogram (sample) labels. |
marAll |
a 4-element vector giving the bottom, left, top and right margins around the combined
plot. Note that this is not the same as setting the margins via a call to |
saveMar |
logical: save margins setting before starting the plot and restore on exit? |
abHeight |
optional specification of the height for a horizontal line in the dendrogram, see
|
abCol |
color for plotting the horizontal line. |
... |
other graphical parameters to |
The function generates an average linkage hierarchical clustering dendrogram (see
hclust
) of samples from the given expression data, using Eclidean distance of
samples. The dendrogram is plotted together with color annotation for the samples.
The trait y
must be numeric. If y
is integer, the colors will correspond to values. If
y
is continouos, it will be dichotomized to two classes, below and above median.
None.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
dist
, hclust
, plotDendroAndColors
Plot color rows encoding information about objects in a given order, for example the order of a clustering dendrogram, usually below the dendrogram or a barplot.
plotOrderedColors( order, colors, main = "", rowLabels = NULL, rowWidths = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, addTextGuide = TRUE, cex.rowLabels = 1, cex.rowText = 0.8, startAt = 0, align = c("center", "edge"), separatorLine.col = "black", ...) plotColorUnderTree( dendro, colors, rowLabels = NULL, rowWidths = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, addTextGuide = TRUE, cex.rowLabels = 1, cex.rowText = 0.8, separatorLine.col = "black", ...)
plotOrderedColors( order, colors, main = "", rowLabels = NULL, rowWidths = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, addTextGuide = TRUE, cex.rowLabels = 1, cex.rowText = 0.8, startAt = 0, align = c("center", "edge"), separatorLine.col = "black", ...) plotColorUnderTree( dendro, colors, rowLabels = NULL, rowWidths = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, addTextGuide = TRUE, cex.rowLabels = 1, cex.rowText = 0.8, separatorLine.col = "black", ...)
order |
A vector giving the order of the objects. Must have the same length as |
dendro |
A hierarchical clustering dendrogram such one returned by |
colors |
Coloring of objects on the dendrogram. Either a vector (one color per object) or a matrix (can also be an array or a data frame) with each column giving one color per object. Each column will be plotted as a horizontal row of colors under the dendrogram. |
main |
Optional main title. |
rowLabels |
Labels for the colorings given in |
rowWidths |
Optional specification of relative row widths for the color and text (if given) rows. Need not sum to 1. |
rowText |
Optional labels to identify colors in the color rows.
If given, must be of the same dimensions as |
rowTextAlignment |
Character string specifying whether the labels should be left-justified to the start of the largest block of each label, centered in the middle, or right-justified to the end of the largest block. |
rowTextIgnore |
Optional specifications of labels that should be ignored when displaying them using
|
textPositions |
optional numeric vector of the same length as the number of columns in |
addTextGuide |
logical: should guide lines be added for the text rows (if given)? |
cex.rowLabels |
Font size scale factor for the row labels. See |
cex.rowText |
character expansion factor for text rows (if given). |
startAt |
A numeric value indicating where in relationship to the left edge of the plot the center of the first rectangle should be. Useful values are 0 if ploting color under a dendrogram, and 0.5 if ploting colors under a barplot. |
align |
Controls the alignment of the color rectangles. |
separatorLine.col |
Color of the line separating rows of color rectangles. If |
... |
Other parameters to be passed on to the plotting method (such as |
It is often useful to plot dendrograms or other plots (e.g., barplots)
of objects together with additional information about the
objects, for example module assignment (by color) that was obtained by cutting a hierarchical
dendrogram or external color-coded measures such as gene significance.
This function provides a way to do so. The calling code should section the screen into two
(or more) parts, plot the dendrogram (via plot(hclust)
) or other information
in the upper section and use this function
to plot color annotation in the order corresponding to the dendrogram in the lower section.
A list with the following components
colorRectangles |
A list with one component per color row. Each component
is a list with 4 elements |
This function replaces plotHclustColors
in package moduleColor
.
Steve Horvath [email protected] and Peter Langfelder [email protected]
cutreeDynamic
for module detection in a dendrogram;
plotDendroAndColors
for automated plotting of dendrograms and colors in one step.
This function produces a red and green color image of a correlation matrix using an RGB color specification. Increasingly positive correlations are represented with reds of increasing intensity, and increasingly negative correlations are represented with greens of increasing intensity.
plotCor(x, new=FALSE, nrgcols=50, labels=FALSE, labcols=1, title="", ...)
plotCor(x, new=FALSE, nrgcols=50, labels=FALSE, labcols=1, title="", ...)
x |
a matrix of numerical values. |
new |
If |
nrgcols |
the number of colors (>= 1) to be used in the red and green palette. |
labels |
vector of character strings to be placed at the
tickpoints, labels for the columns of |
labcols |
colors to be used for the labels of the columns of
|
title |
character string, overall title for the plot. |
... |
graphical parameters may also be supplied as arguments to
the function (see |
Sandrine Dudoit, [email protected]
plotMat
,rgcolors.func
,
cor
, image
,
rgb
.
This function plots a hierarchical clustering dendrogram and color annotation(s) of objects in the dendrogram underneath.
plotDendroAndColors( dendro, colors, groupLabels = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, setLayout = TRUE, autoColorHeight = TRUE, colorHeight = 0.2, colorHeightBase = 0.2, colorHeightMax = 0.6, rowWidths = NULL, dendroLabels = NULL, addGuide = FALSE, guideAll = FALSE, guideCount = 50, guideHang = 0.2, addTextGuide = FALSE, cex.colorLabels = 0.8, cex.dendroLabels = 0.9, cex.rowText = 0.8, marAll = c(1, 5, 3, 1), saveMar = TRUE, abHeight = NULL, abCol = "red", ...)
plotDendroAndColors( dendro, colors, groupLabels = NULL, rowText = NULL, rowTextAlignment = c("left", "center", "right"), rowTextIgnore = NULL, textPositions = NULL, setLayout = TRUE, autoColorHeight = TRUE, colorHeight = 0.2, colorHeightBase = 0.2, colorHeightMax = 0.6, rowWidths = NULL, dendroLabels = NULL, addGuide = FALSE, guideAll = FALSE, guideCount = 50, guideHang = 0.2, addTextGuide = FALSE, cex.colorLabels = 0.8, cex.dendroLabels = 0.9, cex.rowText = 0.8, marAll = c(1, 5, 3, 1), saveMar = TRUE, abHeight = NULL, abCol = "red", ...)
dendro |
a hierarchical clustering dendrogram such as one produced by
|
colors |
Coloring of objects on the dendrogram. Either a vector (one color per object) or a matrix (can also be an array or a data frame) with each column giving one color per object. Each column will be plotted as a horizontal row of colors under the dendrogram. |
groupLabels |
Labels for the colorings given in |
rowText |
Optional labels to identify colors in the color rows.
If given, must be either the same dimensions as |
rowTextAlignment |
Character string specifying whether the labels should be left-justified to the start of the largest block of each label, centered in the middle, or right-justified to the end of the largest block. |
rowTextIgnore |
Optional specifications of labels that should be ignored when displaying them using
|
textPositions |
optional numeric vector of the same length as the number of columns in |
setLayout |
logical: should the plotting device be partitioned into a standard layout?
If |
autoColorHeight |
logical: should the height of the color area below the dendrogram be
automatically adjusted for the number of traits? Only effective if |
colorHeight |
specifies the height of the color area under dendrogram as a fraction of the
height of the dendrogram area. Only effective when |
colorHeightBase |
when |
colorHeightMax |
when |
rowWidths |
optional specification of relative row widths for the color and text (if given) rows. Need not sum to 1. |
dendroLabels |
dendrogram labels. Set to |
addGuide |
logical: should vertical "guide lines" be added to the dendrogram plot? The lines make it easier to identify color codes with individual samples. |
guideAll |
logical: add a guide line for every sample? Only effective for |
guideCount |
number of guide lines to be plotted. Only effective when |
guideHang |
fraction of the dendrogram height to leave between the top end of the guide line and
the dendrogram merge height. If the guide lines overlap with dendrogram labels, increase |
addTextGuide |
logical: should guide lines be added for the text rows (if given)? |
cex.colorLabels |
character expansion factor for trait labels. |
cex.dendroLabels |
character expansion factor for dendrogram (sample) labels. |
cex.rowText |
character expansion factor for text rows (if given). |
marAll |
a vector of length 4 giving the bottom, left, top and right margins of the combined plot. There is no margin between the dendrogram and the color plot underneath. |
saveMar |
logical: save margins setting before starting the plot and restore on exit? |
abHeight |
optional specification of the height for a horizontal line in the dendrogram, see
|
abCol |
color for plotting the horizontal line. |
... |
other graphical parameters to |
The function slits the plotting device into two regions, plots the given dendrogram in the upper region, then plots color rows in the region below the dendrogram.
None.
Peter Langfelder
This function plots dendrogram and eigengene representations of (consensus) eigengenes networks. In the case of conensus eigengene networks the function also plots pairwise preservation measures between consensus networks in different sets.
plotEigengeneNetworks( multiME, setLabels, letterSubPlots = FALSE, Letters = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey", plotDendrograms = TRUE, plotHeatmaps = TRUE, setMargins = TRUE, marDendro = NULL, marHeatmap = NULL, colorLabels = TRUE, signed = TRUE, heatmapColors = NULL, plotAdjacency = TRUE, printAdjacency = FALSE, cex.adjacency = 0.9, coloredBarplot = TRUE, barplotMeans = TRUE, barplotErrors = FALSE, plotPreservation = "standard", zlimPreservation = c(0, 1), printPreservation = FALSE, cex.preservation = 0.9, ...)
plotEigengeneNetworks( multiME, setLabels, letterSubPlots = FALSE, Letters = NULL, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey", plotDendrograms = TRUE, plotHeatmaps = TRUE, setMargins = TRUE, marDendro = NULL, marHeatmap = NULL, colorLabels = TRUE, signed = TRUE, heatmapColors = NULL, plotAdjacency = TRUE, printAdjacency = FALSE, cex.adjacency = 0.9, coloredBarplot = TRUE, barplotMeans = TRUE, barplotErrors = FALSE, plotPreservation = "standard", zlimPreservation = c(0, 1), printPreservation = FALSE, cex.preservation = 0.9, ...)
multiME |
either a single data frame containing the module eigengenes, or
module eigengenes in the multi-set format (see |
setLabels |
A vector of character strings that label sets in |
letterSubPlots |
logical: should subplots be lettered? |
Letters |
optional specification of a sequence of letters for lettering. Defaults to "ABCD"... |
excludeGrey |
logical: should the grey module eigengene be excluded from the plots? |
greyLabel |
label for the grey module. Usually either "grey" or the number 0. |
plotDendrograms |
logical: should eigengene dendrograms be plotted? |
plotHeatmaps |
logical: should eigengene network heatmaps be plotted? |
setMargins |
logical: should margins be set? See |
marDendro |
a vector of length 4 giving the margin setting for dendrogram plots. See
|
marHeatmap |
a vector of length 4 giving the margin setting for heatmap plots. See
|
colorLabels |
logical: should module eigengene names be interpreted as color names and the colors used to label heatmap plots and barplots? |
signed |
logical: should eigengene networks be constructed as signed? |
heatmapColors |
color palette for heatmaps. Defaults to |
plotAdjacency |
logical: should module eigengene heatmaps plot adjacency (ranging from 0 to 1), or correlation (ranging from -1 to 1)? |
printAdjacency |
logical: should the numerical values be printed into the adjacency or correlation heatmap? |
cex.adjacency |
character expansion factor for printing of numerical values into the adjacency or correlation heatmap |
coloredBarplot |
logical: should the barplot of eigengene adjacency preservation distinguish
individual contributions by color? This is possible only if |
barplotMeans |
logical: plot mean preservation in the barplot? This option effectively rescales the preservation by the number of eigengenes in the network. If means are plotted, the barplot is not colored. |
barplotErrors |
logical: should standard errors of the mean preservation be plotted? |
plotPreservation |
a character string specifying which type of preservation measure to plot.
Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
zlimPreservation |
a vector of length 2 giving the value limits for the preservation heatmaps. |
printPreservation |
logical: should preservation values be printed within the heatmap? |
cex.preservation |
character expansion factor for preservation display. |
... |
other graphical arguments to function |
Consensus eigengene networks consist of a fixed set of eigengenes "expressed" in several different sets. Network connection strengths are given by eigengene correlations. This function aims to visualize the networks as well as their similarities and differences across sets.
The function partitions the screen appropriately and plots eigengene dendrograms in the top row, then a square matrix of plots: heatmap plots of eigengene networks in each set on the diagonal, heatmap plots of pairwise preservation networks below the diagonal, and barplots of aggregate network preservation of individual eigengenes above the diagonal. A preservation plot or barplot in the row i and column j of the square matrix represents the preservation between sets i and j.
Individual eigengenes are labeled by their name in the dendrograms; in the heatmaps and barplots they
can optionally be labeled by color squares. For compatibility with other functions, the color labels are
encoded in the eigengene names by prefixing the color with two letters, such as "MEturquoise"
.
Two types of network preservation can be plotted: the "standard"
is simply the difference
between adjacencies in the two compared sets. The "hyperbolic"
difference de-emphasizes the
preservation of low adjacencies. When "both"
is specified, standard preservation is plotted in the
lower triangle and hyperbolic in the upper triangle of each preservation heatmap.
If the eigengenes are labeled by color, the bars in the barplot can be split into segments representing the contribution of each eigengene and labeled by the contribution. For example, a yellow segment in a bar labeled by a turquoise square represents the preservation of the adjacency between the yellow and turquoise eigengenes in the two networks compared by the barplot.
For large numbers of eigengenes and/or sets, it may be difficult to get a meaningful plot fit a
standard computer screen. In such cases we recommend using a device such as postscript
or
pdf
where the user can specify large dimensions; such plots can be conveniently viewed in
standard pdf or postscript viewers.
None.
Peter Langfelder
For theory and applications of consensus eigengene networks, see
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
labeledHeatmap
, labeledBarplot
for annotated heatmaps and barplots;
hclust
for hierarchical clustering and dendrogram plots
This function produces a red and green color image of a data matrix using an RGB color specification. Larger entries are represented with reds of increasing intensity, and smaller entries are represented with greens of increasing intensity.
plotMat(x, nrgcols=50, rlabels=FALSE, clabels=FALSE, rcols=1, ccols=1, title="",...)
plotMat(x, nrgcols=50, rlabels=FALSE, clabels=FALSE, rcols=1, ccols=1, title="",...)
x |
a matrix of numbers. |
nrgcols |
the number of colors (>= 1) to be used in the red and green palette. |
rlabels |
vector of character strings to be placed at the row
tickpoints, labels for the rows of |
clabels |
vector of character strings to be placed at the
column tickpoints, labels for the columns of |
rcols |
colors to be used for the labels of the rows of
|
ccols |
colors to be used for the labels of the columns of
|
title |
character string, overall title for the plot. |
... |
graphical parameters may also be supplied as arguments to
the function (see |
Sandrine Dudoit, [email protected]
plotCor
, rgcolors.func
,
cor
, image
,
rgb
.
The function produces a matrix of plots containing pairwise scatterplots of given eigengenes, the distribution of their values and their pairwise correlations.
plotMEpairs( datME, y = NULL, main = "Relationship between module eigengenes", clusterMEs = TRUE, ...)
plotMEpairs( datME, y = NULL, main = "Relationship between module eigengenes", clusterMEs = TRUE, ...)
datME |
a data frame containing expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. Missing values are allowed and will be ignored. |
y |
optional microarray sample trait vector. Will be treated as an additional eigengene. |
main |
main title for the plot. |
clusterMEs |
logical: should the module eigengenes be ordered by their dendrogram? |
... |
additional graphical parameters to the function |
The function produces an NxN matrix of plots, where N is the number of eigengenes. In the upper
traingle it plots pairwise scatterplots of module eigengenes (plus the trait y
, if given). On the
diagonal it plots histograms of sample values for each eigengene. Below the diagonal, it displays the
pairwise correlations of the eigengenes.
None.
Steve Horvath
Plot a barplot of gene significance.
plotModuleSignificance( geneSignificance, colors, boxplot = FALSE, main = "Gene significance across modules,", ylab = "Gene Significance", ...)
plotModuleSignificance( geneSignificance, colors, boxplot = FALSE, main = "Gene significance across modules,", ylab = "Gene Significance", ...)
geneSignificance |
a numeric vector giving gene significances. |
colors |
a character vector specifying module assignment for the genes whose significance is
given in |
boxplot |
logical: should a boxplot be produced instead of a barplot? |
main |
main title for the plot. |
ylab |
y axis label for the plot. |
... |
other graphical parameters to |
Given individual gene significances and their module assigment, the function calculates the module significance for each module as the average gene significance of the genes within the module. The result is plotted in a barplot or boxplot form. Each bar or box is labeled by the corresponding module color.
None.
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
This function plots density or cumulative distribution function of multiple histograms in a single plot, using lines.
plotMultiHist( data, nBreaks = 100, col = 1:length(data), scaleBy = c("area", "max", "none"), cumulative = FALSE, ...)
plotMultiHist( data, nBreaks = 100, col = 1:length(data), scaleBy = c("area", "max", "none"), cumulative = FALSE, ...)
data |
A list in which each component corresponds to a separate histogram and is a vector of values to be shown in each histogram. |
nBreaks |
Number of breaks in the combined plot. |
col |
Color of the lines. Should be a vector of the same length as |
scaleBy |
Method to make the different histograms comparable. The counts are scaled such that either the total area or the maximum are the same for all histograms, or the histograms are shown without scaling. |
cumulative |
Logical: should the cumulative distribution be shown instead of the density? |
... |
Other graphical arguments. |
Invisibly,
x |
A list with one component per histogram (component of |
y |
A list with one component per histogram (component of |
This function is still experimental and behavior may change in the future.
Peter Langfelder
data = list(rnorm(1000), rnorm(10000) + 2); plotMultiHist(data, xlab = "value", ylab = "scaled density")
data = list(rnorm(1000), rnorm(10000) + 2); plotMultiHist(data, xlab = "value", ylab = "scaled density")
Network heatmap plot.
plotNetworkHeatmap( datExpr, plotGenes, weights = NULL, useTOM = TRUE, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", main = "Heatmap of the network")
plotNetworkHeatmap( datExpr, plotGenes, weights = NULL, useTOM = TRUE, power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", main = "Heatmap of the network")
datExpr |
a data frame containing expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. Missing values are allowed and will be ignored. |
plotGenes |
a character vector giving the names of genes to be included in the plot. The names
will be matched against |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
useTOM |
logical: should TOM be plotted ( |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
networkType |
a character string giving the newtork type. Recognized values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
main |
main title for the plot. |
The function constructs a network from the given expression data (selected by plotGenes
) using
the soft-thresholding procedure, optionally calculates Topological Overlap (TOM) and plots a heatmap of
the network.
Note that all network calculations are done in one block and may fail due to memory allocation issues for large numbers of genes.
None.
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Uses the expression values from an admixed population and estimates of the proportions of sub-populations to estimate the population specific mean values. For example, this function can be used to estimate the cell type specific mean gene expression values based on expression values from a mixture of cells. The method is described in Shen-Orr et al (2010) where it was used to estimate cell type specific gene expression levels based on a mixture sample.
populationMeansInAdmixture( datProportions, datE.Admixture, scaleProportionsTo1 = TRUE, scaleProportionsInCelltype = TRUE, setMissingProportionsToZero = FALSE)
populationMeansInAdmixture( datProportions, datE.Admixture, scaleProportionsTo1 = TRUE, scaleProportionsInCelltype = TRUE, setMissingProportionsToZero = FALSE)
datProportions |
a matrix of non-negative numbers (ideally proportions) where the rows correspond to the samples (rows of |
datE.Admixture |
a matrix of numbers. The rows correspond to samples (mixtures of populations). The columns contain the variables (e.g. genes) for which the means should be estimated. |
scaleProportionsTo1 |
logical. If set to TRUE (default) then the proportions in each row of |
scaleProportionsInCelltype |
logical. If set to TRUE (default) then the proportions in each cell types are recaled and make the mean to 0. |
setMissingProportionsToZero |
logical. Default is FALSE. If set to TRUE then it sets missing values in |
The function outputs a matrix of coefficients resulting from fitting a regression model. If the proportions sum to 1, then i-th row of the output matrix reports the coefficients of the following model
lm(datE.Admixture[,i]~.-1,data=datProportions)
. Aside, the minus 1 in the formula indicates that no intercept term will be fit.
Under certain assumptions, the coefficients can be interpreted as the mean expression values in the sub-populations (Shen-Orr 2010).
a numeric matrix whose rows correspond to the columns of datE.Admixture
(e.g. to genes) and whose columns correspond to the columns of datProportions
(e.g. sub populations or cell types).
This can be considered a wrapper of the lm
function.
Steve Horvath, Chaochao Cai
Shen-Orr SS, Tibshirani R, Khatri P, Bodian DL, Staedtler F, Perry NM, Hastie T, Sarwal MM, Davis MM, Butte AJ (2010) Cell type-specific gene expression differences in complex tissues. Nature Methods, vol 7 no.4
set.seed(1) # this is the number of complex (mixed) tissue samples, e.g. arrays m=10 # true count data (e.g. pure cells in the mixed sample) datTrueCounts=as.matrix(data.frame(TrueCount1=rpois(m,lambda=16), TrueCount2=rpois(m,lambda=8),TrueCount3=rpois(m,lambda=4), TrueCount4=rpois(m,lambda=2))) no.pure=dim(datTrueCounts)[[2]] # now we transform the counts into proportions divideBySum=function(x) t(x)/sum(x) datProportions= t(apply(datTrueCounts,1,divideBySum)) dimnames(datProportions)[[2]]=paste("TrueProp",1:dim(datTrueCounts)[[2]],sep=".") # number of genes that are highly expressed in each pure population no.genesPerPure=rep(5, no.pure) no.genes= sum(no.genesPerPure) GeneIndicator=rep(1:no.pure, no.genesPerPure) # true mean values of the genes in the pure populations # in the end we hope to estimate them from the mixed samples datTrueMeans0=matrix( rnorm(no.genes*no.pure,sd=.3), nrow= no.genes,ncol=no.pure) for (i in 1:no.pure ){ datTrueMeans0[GeneIndicator==i,i]= datTrueMeans0[GeneIndicator==i,i]+1 } dimnames(datTrueMeans0)[[1]]=paste("Gene",1:dim(datTrueMeans0)[[1]],sep="." ) dimnames(datTrueMeans0)[[2]]=paste("MeanPureCellType",1:dim(datTrueMeans0)[[2]], sep=".") # plot.mat(datTrueMeans0) # simulate the (expression) values of the admixed population samples noise=matrix(rnorm(m*no.genes,sd=.1),nrow=m,ncol= no.genes) datE.Admixture= as.matrix(datProportions) %*% t(datTrueMeans0) + noise dimnames(datE.Admixture)[[1]]=paste("MixedTissue",1:m,sep=".") datPredictedMeans=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportions,datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:4 ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeans[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="all populations") abline(0,1) } #assume we only study 2 populations (ie we ignore the others) selectPopulations=c(1,2) datPredictedMeansTooFew=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportions[,selectPopulations], datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:length(selectPopulations) ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeansTooFew[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="too few populations") abline(0,1) } #assume we erroneously add a population datProportionsTooMany=data.frame(datProportions,WrongProp=sample(datProportions[,1])) datPredictedMeansTooMany=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportionsTooMany, datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:4 ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeansTooMany[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="too many populations") abline(0,1) }
set.seed(1) # this is the number of complex (mixed) tissue samples, e.g. arrays m=10 # true count data (e.g. pure cells in the mixed sample) datTrueCounts=as.matrix(data.frame(TrueCount1=rpois(m,lambda=16), TrueCount2=rpois(m,lambda=8),TrueCount3=rpois(m,lambda=4), TrueCount4=rpois(m,lambda=2))) no.pure=dim(datTrueCounts)[[2]] # now we transform the counts into proportions divideBySum=function(x) t(x)/sum(x) datProportions= t(apply(datTrueCounts,1,divideBySum)) dimnames(datProportions)[[2]]=paste("TrueProp",1:dim(datTrueCounts)[[2]],sep=".") # number of genes that are highly expressed in each pure population no.genesPerPure=rep(5, no.pure) no.genes= sum(no.genesPerPure) GeneIndicator=rep(1:no.pure, no.genesPerPure) # true mean values of the genes in the pure populations # in the end we hope to estimate them from the mixed samples datTrueMeans0=matrix( rnorm(no.genes*no.pure,sd=.3), nrow= no.genes,ncol=no.pure) for (i in 1:no.pure ){ datTrueMeans0[GeneIndicator==i,i]= datTrueMeans0[GeneIndicator==i,i]+1 } dimnames(datTrueMeans0)[[1]]=paste("Gene",1:dim(datTrueMeans0)[[1]],sep="." ) dimnames(datTrueMeans0)[[2]]=paste("MeanPureCellType",1:dim(datTrueMeans0)[[2]], sep=".") # plot.mat(datTrueMeans0) # simulate the (expression) values of the admixed population samples noise=matrix(rnorm(m*no.genes,sd=.1),nrow=m,ncol= no.genes) datE.Admixture= as.matrix(datProportions) %*% t(datTrueMeans0) + noise dimnames(datE.Admixture)[[1]]=paste("MixedTissue",1:m,sep=".") datPredictedMeans=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportions,datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:4 ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeans[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="all populations") abline(0,1) } #assume we only study 2 populations (ie we ignore the others) selectPopulations=c(1,2) datPredictedMeansTooFew=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportions[,selectPopulations], datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:length(selectPopulations) ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeansTooFew[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="too few populations") abline(0,1) } #assume we erroneously add a population datProportionsTooMany=data.frame(datProportions,WrongProp=sample(datProportions[,1])) datPredictedMeansTooMany=populationMeansInAdmixture(datProportionsTooMany, datE.Admixture) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:4 ){ verboseScatterplot(datPredictedMeansTooMany[,i],datTrueMeans0[,i], xlab="predicted mean",ylab="true mean",main="too many populations") abline(0,1) }
Calculation of “parallel” quantiles, minima, maxima, medians, and means, across given arguments or across lists
pquantile(prob, ...) pquantile.fromList(dataList, prob) pmedian(...) pmean(..., weights = NULL) pmean.fromList(dataList, weights = NULL) pminWhich.fromList(dataList)
pquantile(prob, ...) pquantile.fromList(dataList, prob) pmedian(...) pmean(..., weights = NULL) pmean.fromList(dataList, weights = NULL) pminWhich.fromList(dataList)
prob |
A single probability at which to calculate the quantile. See |
dataList |
A list of numeric vectors or arrays, all of the same length and dimensions, over which to calculate “parallel” quantiles. |
weights |
Optional vector of the same length as |
... |
Numeric arguments. All arguments must have the same dimensions. See details. |
Given numeric arguments, say x,y,z, of equal dimensions (and length), the pquantile
calculates and returns the quantile of the first components of x,y,z, then the second components, etc.
Similarly, pmedian
and pmean
calculate the median and mean, respectively.
The funtion pquantile.fromList
is identical to pquantile
except that the argument
dataList
replaces the ... in holding the numeric vectors over which to calculate the quantiles.
pquantile , pquantile.fromList
|
A vector or array containing quantiles. |
pmean , pmean.fromList
|
A vector or array containing means. |
pmedian |
A vector or array containing medians. |
pminWhich.fromList |
A list with two components: |
Dimensions are copied from dimensions of the input arguments.
If any of the input variables have dimnames
, the first non-NULL dimnames are copied into the output.
Peter Langfelder and Steve Horvath
quantile
, median
, mean
for the underlying statistics.
# Generate 2 simple matrices a = matrix(c(1:12), 3, 4); b = a+ 1; c = a + 2; # Set the colnames on matrix a colnames(a) = spaste("col_", c(1:4)); # Example use pquantile(prob = 0.5, a, b, c) pmean(a,b,c) pmedian(a,b,c)
# Generate 2 simple matrices a = matrix(c(1:12), 3, 4); b = a+ 1; c = a + 2; # Set the colnames on matrix a colnames(a) = spaste("col_", c(1:4)); # Example use pquantile(prob = 0.5, a, b, c) pmean(a,b,c) pmedian(a,b,c)
Utility function that prepends a comma before the input string if the string is non-empty.
prepComma(s)
prepComma(s)
s |
Character string. |
If s
is non-empty, returns paste(",", s)
, otherwise returns s.
Peter Langfelder
prepComma("abc"); prepComma("");
prepComma("abc"); prepComma("");
These functions pad the specified numbers with zeros to a specified total width.
prependZeros(x, width = max(nchar(x))) prependZeros.int(x, width = max(nchar(as.integer(x))))
prependZeros(x, width = max(nchar(x))) prependZeros.int(x, width = max(nchar(as.integer(x))))
x |
Vector of numbers to be padded. For |
width |
Width to pad the numbers to. |
The prependZeros.int
version works better with numbers such as 100000 which may get converted to character as 1e5 and
hence be incorrectly padded in the prependZeros
function. On the flip side, prependZeros works also for non-integer
inputs.
Character vector with the 0-padded numbers.
Peter Langfelder
prependZeros(1:10) prependZeros(1:10, 4) # more exotic examples prependZeros(c(1, 100000), width = 6) ### Produces incorrect output prependZeros.int(c(1, 100000)) ### Correct output prependZeros(c("a", "b", "aa")) ### pads the shorter strings using zeros.
prependZeros(1:10) prependZeros(1:10, 4) # more exotic examples prependZeros(c(1, 100000), width = 6) ### Produces incorrect output prependZeros.int(c(1, 100000)) ### Correct output prependZeros(c("a", "b", "aa")) ### pads the shorter strings using zeros.
This function calculates several measures of gene network preservation. Given gene expression data in several individual data sets, it calculates the individual adjacency matrices, forms the preservation network and finally forms several summary measures of adjacency preservation for each node (gene) in the network.
preservationNetworkConnectivity( multiExpr, useSets = NULL, useGenes = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use='p'", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, blockSize = 1000, setSeed = 12345, weightPower = 2, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
preservationNetworkConnectivity( multiExpr, useSets = NULL, useGenes = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use='p'", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, sampleLinks = NULL, nLinks = 5000, blockSize = 1000, setSeed = 12345, weightPower = 2, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
useSets |
optional specification of sets to be used for the preservation calculation. Defaults to using all sets. |
useGenes |
optional specification of genes to be used for the preservation calculation. Defaults to all genes. |
corFnc |
character string containing the name of the function to calculate correlation. Suggested
functions include |
corOptions |
further argument to the correlation function. |
networkType |
a character string encoding network type. Recognized values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
power |
soft thresholding power for network construction. Should be a number greater than 1. |
sampleLinks |
logical: should network connections be sampled ( |
nLinks |
number of links to be sampled. Should be set such that |
blockSize |
correlation calculations will be split into square blocks of this size, to prevent running out of memory for large gene sets. |
setSeed |
seed to be used for sampling, for repeatability. If a seed already exists, it is saved before the sampling starts and restored upon exit. |
weightPower |
power with which higher adjacencies will be weighted in weighted means |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The preservation network is formed from adjacencies of compared sets. For 'complete' preservations, all
given sets are compared at once; for 'pairwise' preservations, the sets are compared in pairs. Unweighted
preservations are simple mean preservations for each node; their weighted counterparts are weighted
averages in which a preservation of adjacencies and
of nodes
between sets 1 and 2
is weighted by
.
The hyperbolic preservation is based on
, where
and
are the componentwise maximum and minimum of the compared adjacencies, respectively.
A list with the following components:
pairwise |
a matrix with rows corresponding to genes and columns to unique pairs of given sets, giving the pairwise preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
complete |
a vector with one entry for each input gene containing the complete mean preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
pairwiseWeighted |
a matrix with rows corresponding to genes and columns to unique pairs of given sets, giving the pairwise weighted preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
completeWeighted |
a vector with one entry for each input gene containing the complete weighted mean preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
pairwiseHyperbolic |
a matrix with rows corresponding to genes and columns to unique pairs of given sets, giving the pairwise hyperbolic preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
completeHyperbolic |
a vector with one entry for each input gene containing the complete mean hyperbolic preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
pairwiseWeightedHyperbolic |
a matrix with rows corresponding to genes and columns to unique pairs of given sets, giving the pairwise weighted hyperbolic preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
completeWeightedHyperbolic |
a vector with one entry for each input gene containing the complete weighted hyperbolic mean preservation of the adjacencies connecting the gene to all other genes. |
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
adjacency
for calculation of adjacency;
Implementation of a variant of K-means clustering for expression data.
projectiveKMeans( datExpr, preferredSize = 5000, nCenters = as.integer(min(ncol(datExpr)/20, preferredSize^2/ncol(datExpr))), sizePenaltyPower = 4, networkType = "unsigned", randomSeed = 54321, checkData = TRUE, imputeMissing = TRUE, maxIterations = 1000, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
projectiveKMeans( datExpr, preferredSize = 5000, nCenters = as.integer(min(ncol(datExpr)/20, preferredSize^2/ncol(datExpr))), sizePenaltyPower = 4, networkType = "unsigned", randomSeed = 54321, checkData = TRUE, imputeMissing = TRUE, maxIterations = 1000, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. NAs are allowed, but not too many. |
preferredSize |
preferred maximum size of clusters. |
nCenters |
number of initial clusters. Empirical evidence suggests that more centers will give a better preclustering; the default is an attempt to arrive at a reasonable number. |
sizePenaltyPower |
parameter specifying how severe is the penalty for clusters that exceed
|
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
randomSeed |
integer to be used as seed for the random number generator before the function starts. If a current seed exists, it is saved and restored upon exit. |
checkData |
logical: should data be checked for genes with zero variance and
genes and samples with excessive numbers of missing samples? Bad samples are ignored; returned cluster
assignment for bad genes will be |
imputeMissing |
logical: should missing values in |
maxIterations |
maximum iterations to be attempted. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The principal aim of this function within WGCNA is to pre-cluster a large number of genes into smaller blocks that can be handled using standard WGCNA techniques.
This function implements a variant of K-means clustering that is suitable for co-expression analysis.
Cluster centers are defined by the first principal component, and distances by correlation (more
precisely, 1-correlation). The distance between a gene and a cluster is multiplied by a factor of
, thus penalizing clusters whose size exceeds
preferredSize
. The function starts with randomly generated cluster assignment (hence the need to
set the random seed for repeatability) and executes interations of calculating new centers and
reassigning genes to nearest center until the clustering becomes stable. Before returning, nearby
clusters are iteratively combined if their combined size is below preferredSize
.
The standard principal component calculation via the function svd
fails from time to time
(likely a convergence problem of the underlying lapack functions). Such errors are trapped and the
principal component is approximated by a weighted average of expression profiles in the cluster. If
verbose
is set above 2, an informational message is printed whenever this approximation is used.
A list with the following components:
clusters |
A numerical vector with one component per input gene, giving the cluster number in which the gene is assigned. |
centers |
Cluster centers, that is their first principal components. |
Peter Langfelder
sizeRestrictedClusterMerge
which implements the last step of merging smaller clusters.
Assume that datE.Admixture
provides the expression values from a mixture of cell types (admixed
population) and you want to estimate the proportion of each pure cell type in the mixed samples (rows of
datE.Admixture
). The function allows you to do this as long as you provide a data frame
MarkerMeansPure
that reports the mean expression values of markers in each of the pure cell types.
proportionsInAdmixture( MarkerMeansPure, datE.Admixture, calculateConditionNumber = FALSE, coefToProportion = TRUE)
proportionsInAdmixture( MarkerMeansPure, datE.Admixture, calculateConditionNumber = FALSE, coefToProportion = TRUE)
MarkerMeansPure |
is a data frame whose first column reports the name of the marker and the
remaining columns report the mean values of the markers in each of the pure populations. The function will
estimate the proportion of pure cells which correspond to columns 2 through of
|
datE.Admixture |
is a data frame of expression data, e.g. the columns of |
calculateConditionNumber |
logical. Default is FALSE. If set to TRUE then it uses the |
coefToProportion |
logical. By default, it is set to TRUE. When estimating the proportions the
function fits a multivariate linear model. Ideally, the coefficients of the linear model correspond to the
proportions in the admixed samples. But sometimes the coefficients take on negative values or do not sum to
1. If |
The methods implemented in this function were motivated by
the gene expression deconvolution approach described by Abbas et al (2009), Lu et al (2003), Wang et al (2006). This approach can be used to predict the proportions of (pure) cells in a complex tissue, e.g. the proportion of blood cell types in whole blood. To define the markers, you may need to have expression data from pure populations. Then you can define markers based on a significant t-test or ANOVA across the pure populations. Next use the pure population data to estimate corresponding mean expression values. Hopefully, the array platforms and normalization methods for datE.MarkersAdmixtureTranspose
and MarkerMeansPure
are comparable. When dealing with Affymetrix data: we have successfully used it on untransformed MAS5 data.
For statisticians: To estimate the proportions, we use the coefficients
of a linear model. Specifically:
datCoef= t(lm(datE.MarkersAdmixtureTranspose ~MarkerMeansPure[,-1])$coefficients[-1,])
where datCoef
is a matrix whose rows correspond to the mixed samples (rows of datE.Admixture
) and the columns correspond to pure populations (e.g. cell types), i.e. the columns of MarkerMeansPure[,-1]
.
More details can be found in Abbas et al (2009).
A list with the following components
PredictedProportions |
data frame that contains the predicted proportions. The rows of |
datCoef=datCoef |
data frame of numbers that is analogous to
|
conditionNumber |
This is the condition number resulting from the |
markersUsed |
vector of character strings that contains the subset of marker names (specified in the first column of |
This function can be considered a wrapper of the lm
function.
Steve Horvath, Chaochao Cai
Abbas AR, Wolslegel K, Seshasayee D, Modrusan Z, Clark HF (2009) Deconvolution of Blood Microarray Data Identifies Cellular Activation Patterns in Systemic Lupus Erythematosus. PLoS ONE 4(7): e6098. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0006098
Lu P, Nakorchevskiy A, Marcotte EM (2003) Expression deconvolution: a reinterpretation of DNA microarray data reveals dynamic changes in cell populations. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 100: 10370-10375.
Wang M, Master SR, Chodosh LA (2006) Computational expression deconvolution in a complex mammalian organ. BMC Bioinformatics 7: 328.
This function calculates the proportion of variance of genes in each module explained by the respective module eigengene.
propVarExplained(datExpr, colors, MEs, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
propVarExplained(datExpr, colors, MEs, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. NAs are allowed and will be ignored. |
colors |
a vector giving module assignment for genes given in |
MEs |
a data frame of module eigengenes in which each column is an eigengene and each row corresponds to a sample. |
corFnc |
character string containing the name of the function to calculate correlation. Suggested
functions include |
corOptions |
further argument to the correlation function. |
For compatibility with other functions, entries in color
are matched to a substring of
names(MEs)
starting at position 3. For example, the entry "turquoise"
in colors
will
be matched to the eigengene named "MEturquoise"
. The first two characters of the eigengene name
are ignored and can be arbitrary.
A vector with one entry per eigengene containing the proportion of variance of the module explained by the eigengene.
Peter Langfelder
This function prunes genes with low consensus eigengene-based intramodular connectivity (kME) from modules and merges modules whose consensus similarity is high. The process is repeated until the modules become stable.
pruneAndMergeConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, labels, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", networkOptions, consensusTree, # Pruning options minModuleSize, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minCoreKME = 0.5, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation and merging options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, calibrateMergingSimilarities = FALSE, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, # Behavior iterate = TRUE, collectGarbage = FALSE, getDetails = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent=0)
pruneAndMergeConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, labels, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", networkOptions, consensusTree, # Pruning options minModuleSize, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minCoreKME = 0.5, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation and merging options impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, calibrateMergingSimilarities = FALSE, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, # Behavior iterate = TRUE, collectGarbage = FALSE, getDetails = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent=0)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
multiExpr.imputed |
If |
labels |
A vector (numeric, character or a factor) giving module labels for each variable (gene) in multiExpr. |
unassignedLabel |
The label (value in |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
consensusTree |
A list of class |
minModuleSize |
Minimum number of genes in a module. Modules that have fewer genes (after trimming) will be removed (i.e., their genes will be given the unassigned label). |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose consensus eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
calibrateMergingSimilarities |
Logical: should module eigengene similarities be calibrated before calculating the consensus? Although calibration is in principle desirable, the calibration methods currently available assume large data and do not work very well on eigengene similarities. |
mergeCutHeight |
Dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
iterate |
Logical: should the pruning and merging process be iterated until no changes occur? If |
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage be collected after some of the memory-intensive steps? |
getDetails |
Logical: should certain intermediate results be returned? These include labels and module merging information at each iteration (see return value). |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
If input getDetails
is FALSE
, a vector the resulting module labels. If getDetails
is
TRUE
, a list with these components:
labels |
The resulting module labels |
details |
A list. The first component, named |
Peter Langfelder
The underlying functions pruneConsensusModules
and hierarchicalMergeCloseModules
.
This function prunes (hierarchical) consensus modules by removing genes with low eigengene-based intramodular connectivity (KME) and by removing modules that do not have a certain minimum number of genes with a required minimum KME.
pruneConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, MEs = NULL, labels, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", networkOptions, consensusTree, minModuleSize, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minCoreKME = 0.5, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, collectGarbage = FALSE, checkWeights = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent=0)
pruneConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, multiExpr.imputed = NULL, MEs = NULL, labels, unassignedLabel = if (is.numeric(labels)) 0 else "grey", networkOptions, consensusTree, minModuleSize, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minCoreKME = 0.5, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, # Module eigengene calculation options impute = TRUE, collectGarbage = FALSE, checkWeights = TRUE, verbose = 1, indent=0)
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
multiExpr.imputed |
If |
MEs |
Optional consensus module eigengenes, in multi-set format analogous to that of |
labels |
A vector (numeric, character or a factor) giving module labels for each variable (gene) in multiExpr. |
unassignedLabel |
The label (value in |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
consensusTree |
A list of class |
minModuleSize |
Minimum number of genes in a module. Modules that have fewer genes (after trimming) will be removed (i.e., their genes will be given the unassigned label). |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose consensus eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
collectGarbage |
Logical: should garbage be collected after some of the memory-intensive steps? |
checkWeights |
Logical: should |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The pruned module labels: a vector of the same form as the input labels
.
Peter Langfelder
This matrix gives a predefined set of marker genes for many immune response pathways, as assembled by Mike Palazzolo and Jim Wang from CHDI, and colleagues. It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(PWLists)
data(PWLists)
A 124350 x 2 matrix of characters containing 2724 Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <gene set>__<reference>.
For more information about this list, please see userListEnrichment
data(PWLists) head(PWLists)
data(PWLists) head(PWLists)
Estimate the q-values for a given set of p-values. The q-value of a test measures the proportion of false positives incurred (called the false discovery rate) when that particular test is called significant.
qvalue(p, lambda=seq(0,0.90,0.05), pi0.method="smoother", fdr.level=NULL, robust=FALSE, smooth.df=3, smooth.log.pi0=FALSE)
qvalue(p, lambda=seq(0,0.90,0.05), pi0.method="smoother", fdr.level=NULL, robust=FALSE, smooth.df=3, smooth.log.pi0=FALSE)
p |
A vector of p-values (only necessary input) |
lambda |
The value of the tuning parameter to estimate
|
pi0.method |
Either "smoother" or "bootstrap"; the method for
automatically choosing tuning parameter in the estimation of |
fdr.level |
A level at which to control the FDR. Must be in (0,1]. Optional; if this is selected, a vector of TRUE and FALSE is returned that specifies whether each q-value is less than fdr.level or not. |
robust |
An indicator of whether it is desired to make the estimate more robust for small p-values and a direct finite sample estimate of pFDR. Optional. |
smooth.df |
Number of degrees-of-freedom to use when estimating |
smooth.log.pi0 |
If TRUE and |
If no options are selected, then the method used to estimate is
the smoother method described in Storey and Tibshirani (2003). The
bootstrap method is described in Storey, Taylor & Siegmund (2004).
A list containing:
call |
function call |
pi0 |
an estimate of the proportion of null p-values |
qvalues |
a vector of the estimated q-values (the main quantity of interest) |
pvalues |
a vector of the original p-values |
significant |
if fdr.level is specified, and indicator of whether the q-value fell below fdr.level (taking all such q-values to be significant controls FDR at level fdr.level) |
This function is adapted from package qvalue. The reason we provide our own copy is that package qvalue contains additional functionality that relies on Tcl/Tk which has led to multiple problems. Our copy does not require Tcl/Tk.
John D. Storey [email protected], adapted for WGCNA by Peter Langfelder
Storey JD. (2002) A direct approach to false discovery rates. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B, 64: 479-498.
Storey JD and Tibshirani R. (2003) Statistical significance for genome-wide experiments. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 100: 9440-9445.
Storey JD. (2003) The positive false discovery rate: A Bayesian interpretation and the q-value. Annals of Statistics, 31: 2013-2035.
Storey JD, Taylor JE, and Siegmund D. (2004) Strong control, conservative point estimation, and simultaneous conservative consistency of false discovery rates: A unified approach. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B, 66: 187-205.
This function calls qvalue
on finite input p-values, optionally traps errors from the q-value
calculation, and returns just the q values.
qvalue.restricted(p, trapErrors = TRUE, ...)
qvalue.restricted(p, trapErrors = TRUE, ...)
p |
a vector of p-values. Missing data are allowed and will be removed. |
trapErrors |
logical: should errors generated by function |
... |
other arguments to function |
A vector of q-values. Entries whose corresponding p-values were not finite will be NA
.
Peter Langfelder
Computes the Rand index, a measure of the similarity between two clusterings.
randIndex(tab, adjust = TRUE)
randIndex(tab, adjust = TRUE)
tab |
a matrix giving the cross-tabulation table of two clusterings. |
adjust |
logical: should the "adjusted" version be computed? |
the Rand index of the input table.
Steve Horvath
W. M. Rand (1971). "Objective criteria for the evaluation of clustering methods". Journal of the American Statistical Association 66: 846-850
The function rankPvalue calculates the p-value for observing that an object (corresponding to a row of the input
data frame datS
) has a consistently high ranking (or low ranking) according to multiple ordinal scores
(corresponding to the columns of the input data frame datS
).
rankPvalue(datS, columnweights = NULL, na.last = "keep", ties.method = "average", calculateQvalue = TRUE, pValueMethod = "all")
rankPvalue(datS, columnweights = NULL, na.last = "keep", ties.method = "average", calculateQvalue = TRUE, pValueMethod = "all")
datS |
a data frame whose rows represent objects that will be ranked. Each column of |
columnweights |
allows the user to input a vector of non-negative numbers reflecting weights for the different columns of
|
na.last |
controls the treatment of missing values (NAs) in the rank function. If |
ties.method |
represents the ties method used in the rank function for the percentile rank method. See |
calculateQvalue |
logical: should q-values be calculated? If set to TRUE then the function calculates corresponding q-values (local false discovery rates) using the qvalue package, see Storey JD and Tibshirani R. (2003). This option assumes that qvalue package has been installed. |
pValueMethod |
determines which method is used for calculating p-values. By default it is set to "all", i.e. both methods are used. If it is set to "rank" then only the percentile rank method is used. If it set to "scale" then only the scale method will be used. |
The function calculates asymptotic p-values (and optionally q-values) for testing the null hypothesis that the values in the columns of datS are independent. This allows us to find objects (rows) with consistently high (or low) values across the columns.
Example: Imagine you have 5 vectors of Z statistics corresponding to the columns of datS. Further assume that a gene has ranks 1,1,1,1,20 in the 5 lists. It seems very significant that the gene ranks number 1 in 4 out of the 5 lists. The function rankPvalue can be used to calculate a p-value for this occurrence.
The function uses the central limit theorem to calculate asymptotic p-values for two types of test statistics that measure consistently high or low ordinal values. The first method (referred to as percentile rank method) leads to accurate estimates of p-values if datS has at least 4 columns but it can be overly conservative. The percentile rank method replaces each column datS by the ranked version rank(datS[,i]) (referred to ask low ranking) and by rank(-datS[,i]) (referred to as high ranking). Low ranking and high ranking allow one to find consistently small values or consistently large values of datS, respectively. All ranks are divided by the maximum rank so that the result lies in the unit interval [0,1]. In the following, we refer to rank/max(rank) as percentile rank. For a given object (corresponding to a row of datS) the observed percentile rank follows approximately a uniform distribution under the null hypothesis. The test statistic is defined as the sum of the percentile ranks (across the columns of datS). Under the null hypothesis that there is no relationship between the rankings of the columns of datS, this (row sum) test statistic follows a distribution that is given by the convolution of random uniform distributions. Under the null hypothesis, the individual percentile ranks are independent and one can invoke the central limit theorem to argue that the row sum test statistic follows asymptotically a normal distribution. It is well-known that the speed of convergence to the normal distribution is extremely fast in case of identically distributed uniform distributions. Even when datS has only 4 columns, the difference between the normal approximation and the exact distribution is negligible in practice (Killmann et al 2001). In summary, we use the central limit theorem to argue that the sum of the percentile ranks follows a normal distribution whose mean and variance can be calculated using the fact that the mean value of a uniform random variable (on the unit interval) equals 0.5 and its variance equals 1/12.
The second method for calculating p-values is referred to as scale method. It is often more powerful but its asymptotic p-value can only be trusted if either datS has a lot of columns or if the ordinal scores (columns of datS) follow an approximate normal distribution. The scale method scales (or standardizes) each ordinal variable (column of datS) so that it has mean 0 and variance 1. Under the null hypothesis of independence, the row sum follows approximately a normal distribution if the assumptions of the central limit theorem are met. In practice, we find that the second approach is often more powerful but it makes more distributional assumptions (if datS has few columns).
A list whose actual content depends on which p-value methods is selected, and whether q0values are calculated.
The following inner components are calculated, organized in outer components datoutrank
and
datoutscale
,:
pValueExtremeRank |
This is the minimum between pValueLowRank and pValueHighRank, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowRank |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueHighRank |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the rank method. |
pValueExtremeScale |
This is the minimum between pValueLowScale and pValueHighScale, i.e. min(pValueLow, pValueHigh) |
pValueLowScale |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
pValueHighScale |
Asymptotic p-value for observing a consistently low value across the columns of datS based on the Scale method. |
qValueExtremeRank |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeRank |
qValueLowRank |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowRank |
qValueHighRank |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighRank |
qValueExtremeScale |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueExtremeScale |
qValueLowScale |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueLowScale |
qValueHighScale |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the p-value pValueHighScale |
Steve Horvath
Killmann F, VonCollani E (2001) A Note on the Convolution of the Uniform and Related Distributions and Their Use in Quality Control. Economic Quality Control Vol 16 (2001), No. 1, 17-41.ISSN 0940-5151
Storey JD and Tibshirani R. (2003) Statistical significance for genome-wide experiments. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 100: 9440-9445.
Given consensus networks constructed for example using blockwiseModules
, this
function (re-)detects modules in them by branch cutting of the corresponding dendrograms. If repeated
branch cuts of the same gene network dendrograms are desired, this function can save substantial time by
re-using already calculated networks and dendrograms.
recutBlockwiseTrees( datExpr, goodSamples, goodGenes, blocks, TOMFiles, dendrograms, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(datExpr)/2 ), maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.3, reassignThreshold = 1e-6, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, numericLabels = FALSE, verbose = 0, indent = 0, ...)
recutBlockwiseTrees( datExpr, goodSamples, goodGenes, blocks, TOMFiles, dendrograms, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = min(20, ncol(datExpr)/2 ), maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.3, reassignThreshold = 1e-6, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, numericLabels = FALSE, verbose = 0, indent = 0, ...)
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. NAs are allowed, but not too many. |
goodSamples |
a logical vector specifying
which samples are considered "good" for the analysis. See |
goodGenes |
a logical vector with length equal number of genes in |
blocks |
specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. A numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
TOMFiles |
a vector of character strings specifying file names in which the block-wise topological overlaps are saved. |
dendrograms |
a list of length equal the number of blocks, in which each component is a hierarchical clustering dendrograms of the genes that belong to the block. |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
deepSplit |
integer value between 0 and 4. Provides a simplified control over how sensitive
module detection should be to module splitting, with 0 least and 4 most sensitive. See
|
detectCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module detection. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size for module detection. See
|
maxCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster, given as the fraction
of |
minGap |
minimum cluster gap given as the fraction of the difference between |
maxAbsCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster given as absolute
heights. If given, overrides |
minAbsGap |
minimum cluster gap given as absolute height difference. If given, overrides
|
minSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as the fraction of the difference between
|
minAbsSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as an absolute height.
Branches merging below this height will automatically be merged. If not given (default), will be determined
from |
useBranchEigennodeDissim |
Logical: should branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity be considered when merging branches in Dynamic Tree Cut? |
minBranchEigennodeDissim |
Minimum consensus branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity for
branches to be considerd separate. The branch eigennode dissimilarity in individual sets
is simly 1-correlation of the
eigennodes; the consensus is defined as quantile with probability |
pamStage |
logical. If TRUE, the second (PAM-like) stage of module detection will be performed.
See |
pamRespectsDendro |
Logical, only used when |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
reassignThreshold |
p-value ratio threshold for reassigning genes between modules. See Details. |
mergeCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
numericLabels |
logical: should the returned modules be labeled by colors ( |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
... |
Other arguments. |
For details on blockwise module detection, see blockwiseModules
. This
function implements the module detection subset of the functionality of
blockwiseModules
; network construction and clustering must be performed in
advance. The primary use of this function is to experiment with module detection settings without having
to re-execute long network and clustering calculations whose results are not affected by the cutting
parameters.
This function takes as input the networks and dendrograms that are produced by
blockwiseModules
. Working block by block,
modules are identified in the
dendrogram by the Dynamic Hybrid Tree Cut algorithm. Found modules are trimmed of genes whose
correlation with module eigengene (KME) is less than minKMEtoStay
. Modules in which
fewer than minCoreKMESize
genes have KME higher than minCoreKME
are disbanded, i.e., their constituent genes are pronounced
unassigned.
After all blocks have been processed, the function checks whether there are genes whose KME in the module
they assigned is lower than KME to another module. If p-values of the higher correlations are smaller
than those of the native module by the factor reassignThresholdPS
,
the gene is re-assigned to the closer module.
In the last step, modules whose eigengenes are highly correlated are merged. This is achieved by
clustering module eigengenes using the dissimilarity given by one minus their correlation,
cutting the dendrogram at the height mergeCutHeight
and merging all modules on each branch. The
process is iterated until no modules are merged. See mergeCloseModules
for more details on
module merging.
A list with the following components:
colors |
a vector of color or numeric module labels for all genes. |
unmergedColors |
a vector of color or numeric module labels for all genes before module merging. |
MEs |
a data frame containing module eigengenes of the found modules (given by |
MEsOK |
logical indicating whether the module eigengenes were calculated without errors. |
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
blockwiseModules
for full module calculation;
cutreeDynamic
for adaptive branch cutting in hierarchical clustering
dendrograms;
mergeCloseModules
for merging of close modules.
Given consensus networks constructed for example using blockwiseConsensusModules
, this
function (re-)detects modules in them by branch cutting of the corresponding dendrograms. If repeated
branch cuts of the same gene network dendrograms are desired, this function can save substantial time by
re-using already calculated networks and dendrograms.
recutConsensusTrees( multiExpr, goodSamples, goodGenes, blocks, TOMFiles, dendrograms, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, trimmingConsensusQuantile = 0, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, reassignThresholdPS = 1e-4, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, mergeConsensusQuantile = trimmingConsensusQuantile, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, numericLabels = FALSE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
recutConsensusTrees( multiExpr, goodSamples, goodGenes, blocks, TOMFiles, dendrograms, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", deepSplit = 2, detectCutHeight = 0.995, minModuleSize = 20, checkMinModuleSize = TRUE, maxCoreScatter = NULL, minGap = NULL, maxAbsCoreScatter = NULL, minAbsGap = NULL, minSplitHeight = NULL, minAbsSplitHeight = NULL, useBranchEigennodeDissim = FALSE, minBranchEigennodeDissim = mergeCutHeight, pamStage = TRUE, pamRespectsDendro = TRUE, trimmingConsensusQuantile = 0, minCoreKME = 0.5, minCoreKMESize = minModuleSize/3, minKMEtoStay = 0.2, reassignThresholdPS = 1e-4, mergeCutHeight = 0.15, mergeConsensusQuantile = trimmingConsensusQuantile, impute = TRUE, trapErrors = FALSE, numericLabels = FALSE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
multiExpr |
expression data in the multi-set format (see |
goodSamples |
a list with one component per set. Each component is a logical vector specifying
which samples are considered "good" for the analysis. See |
goodGenes |
a logical vector with length equal number of genes in |
blocks |
specification of blocks in which hierarchical clustering and module detection
should be performed. A numeric vector with one entry per gene
of |
TOMFiles |
a vector of character strings specifying file names in which the block-wise topological overlaps are saved. |
dendrograms |
a list of length equal the number of blocks, in which each component is a hierarchical clustering dendrograms of the genes that belong to the block. |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
deepSplit |
integer value between 0 and 4. Provides a simplified control over how sensitive
module detection should be to module splitting, with 0 least and 4 most sensitive. See
|
detectCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module detection. See
|
minModuleSize |
minimum module size for module detection. See
|
checkMinModuleSize |
logical: should sanity checks be performed on |
maxCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster, given as the fraction
of |
minGap |
minimum cluster gap given as the fraction of the difference between |
maxAbsCoreScatter |
maximum scatter of the core for a branch to be a cluster given as absolute
heights. If given, overrides |
minAbsGap |
minimum cluster gap given as absolute height difference. If given, overrides
|
minSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as the fraction of the difference between
|
minAbsSplitHeight |
Minimum split height given as an absolute height.
Branches merging below this height will automatically be merged. If not given (default), will be determined
from |
useBranchEigennodeDissim |
Logical: should branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity be considered when merging branches in Dynamic Tree Cut? |
minBranchEigennodeDissim |
Minimum consensus branch eigennode (eigengene) dissimilarity for
branches to be considerd separate. The branch eigennode dissimilarity in individual sets
is simly 1-correlation of the
eigennodes; the consensus is defined as quantile with probability |
pamStage |
logical. If TRUE, the second (PAM-like) stage of module detection will be performed.
See |
pamRespectsDendro |
Logical, only used when |
trimmingConsensusQuantile |
a number between 0 and 1 specifying the consensus quantile used for kME calculation that determines module trimming according to the arguments below. |
minCoreKME |
a number between 0 and 1. If a detected module does not have at least
|
minCoreKMESize |
see |
minKMEtoStay |
genes whose eigengene connectivity to their module eigengene is lower than
|
reassignThresholdPS |
per-set p-value ratio threshold for reassigning genes between modules. See Details. |
mergeCutHeight |
dendrogram cut height for module merging. |
mergeConsensusQuantile |
consensus quantile for module merging. See |
impute |
logical: should imputation be used for module eigengene calculation? See
|
trapErrors |
logical: should errors in calculations be trapped? |
numericLabels |
logical: should the returned modules be labeled by colors ( |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
For details on blockwise consensus module detection, see blockwiseConsensusModules
. This
function implements the module detection subset of the functionality of
blockwiseConsensusModules
; network construction and clustering must be performed in
advance. The primary use of this function is to experiment with module detection settings without having
to re-execute long network and clustering calculations whose results are not affected by the cutting
parameters.
This function takes as input the networks and dendrograms that are produced by
blockwiseConsensusModules
. Working block by block,
modules are identified in the
dendrograms by the Dynamic Hybrid tree cut.
Found modules are trimmed of genes whose
consensus module membership kME (that is, correlation with module eigengene)
is less than minKMEtoStay
.
Modules in which
fewer than minCoreKMESize
genes have consensus KME higher than minCoreKME
are disbanded, i.e., their constituent genes are pronounced
unassigned.
After all blocks have been processed, the function checks whether there are genes whose KME in the module
they assigned is lower than KME to another module. If p-values of the higher correlations are smaller
than those of the native module by the factor reassignThresholdPS
(in every set),
the gene is re-assigned to the closer module.
In the last step, modules whose eigengenes are highly correlated are merged. This is achieved by
clustering module eigengenes using the dissimilarity given by one minus their correlation,
cutting the dendrogram at the height mergeCutHeight
and merging all modules on each branch. The
process is iterated until no modules are merged. See mergeCloseModules
for more details on
module merging.
A list with the following components:
colors |
module assignment of all input genes. A vector containing either character strings with
module colors (if input |
unmergedColors |
module colors or numeric labels before the module merging step. |
multiMEs |
module eigengenes corresponding to the modules returned in |
Basic sanity checks are performed on given arguments, but it is left to the user's responsibility to provide valid input.
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
blockwiseConsensusModules
for the full blockwise modules calculation. Parts of its output
are natural input for this function.
cutreeDynamic
for adaptive branch cutting in hierarchical clustering
dendrograms;
mergeCloseModules
for merging of close modules.
Generate a red-white-green color sequence of a given length.
redWhiteGreen(n, gamma = 1)
redWhiteGreen(n, gamma = 1)
n |
number of colors to be returned |
gamma |
color correction power |
The function returns a color vector that starts with pure green, gradually turns into white and then to
red. The power gamma
can be used to control the behaviour of the quarter- and three quarter-values
(between red and white, and white and green, respectively). Higher powers will make the mid-colors more
white, while lower powers will make the colors more saturated, respectively.
A vector of colors of length n
.
Peter Langfelder
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50)); displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50, 3)); displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50, 0.5));
par(mfrow = c(3, 1)) displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50)); displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50, 3)); displayColors(redWhiteGreen(50, 0.5));
Compare prediction success of several gene screening methods.
relativeCorPredictionSuccess( corPredictionNew, corPredictionStandard, corTestSet, topNumber = 100)
relativeCorPredictionSuccess( corPredictionNew, corPredictionStandard, corTestSet, topNumber = 100)
corPredictionNew |
Matrix of predictor statistics |
corPredictionStandard |
Reference presdictor statistics |
corTestSet |
Correlations of predictor variables with trait in test set |
topNumber |
A vector giving the numbers of top genes to consider |
Data frame with components
topNumber |
copy of the input |
kruskalp |
Kruskal-Wallis p-values |
Steve Horvath
Given module eigengenes either in a single data frame or in a multi-set format, removes the grey eigengenes from each set. If the grey eigengenes are not found, a warning is issued.
removeGreyME(MEs, greyMEName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""))
removeGreyME(MEs, greyMEName = paste(moduleColor.getMEprefix(), "grey", sep=""))
MEs |
Module eigengenes, either in a single data frame (typicaly for a single set), or in a
multi-set format. See |
greyMEName |
Name of the module eigengene (in each corresponding data frame) that corresponds to the grey color. This will typically be "PCgrey" or "MEgrey". If the module eigengenes were calculated using standard functions in this library, the default should work. |
Module eigengenes in the same format as input (either a single data frame or a vector of lists) with the grey eigengene removed.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
This function calculates a fixed number of the first principal components of the given data and returns the residuals of a linear regression of each column on the principal components.
removePrincipalComponents(x, n)
removePrincipalComponents(x, n)
x |
Input data, a numeric matrix. All entries must be non-missing and finite. |
n |
Number of principal components to remove. This must be smaller than the smaller of the number of rows and
columns in |
A matrix of residuals of the same dimensions as x
.
Peter Langfelder
svd
for singular value decomposition,
lm
for linear regression
A convenience function for replacing missing values with a (non-missing) constant.
replaceMissing(x, replaceWith)
replaceMissing(x, replaceWith)
x |
An atomic vector or array. |
replaceWith |
Value to replace missing entries in |
x
with missing data replaced.
Peter Langfelder
logVec = c(TRUE, FALSE, NA, TRUE); replaceMissing(logVec) numVec = c(1,2,3,4,NA,2) replaceMissing(numVec)
logVec = c(TRUE, FALSE, NA, TRUE); replaceMissing(logVec) numVec = c(1,2,3,4,NA,2) replaceMissing(numVec)
This function returns gene sets for use with other R functions. These gene sets can include inputted lists of genes and files containing user-defined lists of genes, as well as a pre-made collection of brain, blood, and other biological lists. The function returns gene lists associated with each category for use with other enrichment strategies (i.e., GSVA).
returnGeneSetsAsList( fnIn = NULL, catNmIn = fnIn, useBrainLists = FALSE, useBloodAtlases = FALSE, useStemCellLists = FALSE, useBrainRegionMarkers = FALSE, useImmunePathwayLists = FALSE, geneSubset=NULL)
returnGeneSetsAsList( fnIn = NULL, catNmIn = fnIn, useBrainLists = FALSE, useBloodAtlases = FALSE, useStemCellLists = FALSE, useBrainRegionMarkers = FALSE, useImmunePathwayLists = FALSE, geneSubset=NULL)
fnIn |
A vector of file names containing user-defined lists. These files must be in one of three specific formats (see details section). The default (NULL) may only be used if one of the "use_____" parameters is TRUE. |
catNmIn |
A vector of category names corresponding to each fnIn. This name will be appended to each overlap corresponding to that filename. The default sets the category names as the corresponding file names. |
useBrainLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of brain-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
useBloodAtlases |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of blood-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
useStemCellLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of stem cell (SC)-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
useBrainRegionMarkers |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of enrichment lists for human brain regions will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. These lists are derived from data from the Allen Human Brain Atlas (https://human.brain-map.org/). See references section for more details. |
useImmunePathwayLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of enrichment lists for immune system pathways will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. These lists are derived from the lab of Daniel R Saloman. See references section for more details. |
geneSubset |
A vector of gene (or other) identifiers. If entered, only genes in this list will be returned in the output, otherwise all genes in each category will be returned (default, geneSubset=NULL). |
User-inputted files for fnIn can be in one of three formats:
1) Text files (must end in ".txt") with one list per file, where the first line is the list descriptor and the remaining lines are gene names corresponding to that list, with one gene per line. For example Ribosome RPS4 RPS8 ...
2) Gene / category files (must be csv files), where the first line is the column headers corresponding to Genes and Lists, and the remaining lines correspond to the genes in each list, for any number of genes and lists. For example: Gene, Category RPS4, Ribosome RPS8, Ribosome ... NDUF1, Mitohcondria NDUF3, Mitochondria ... MAPT, AlzheimersDisease PSEN1, AlzheimersDisease PSEN2, AlzheimersDisease ...
3) Module membership (kME) table in csv format. Currently, the module assignment is the only thing that is used, so as long as the Gene column is 2nd and the Module column is 3rd, it doesn't matter what is in the other columns. For example, PSID, Gene, Module, <other columns> <psid>, RPS4, blue, <other columns> <psid>, NDUF1, red, <other columns> <psid>, RPS8, blue, <other columns> <psid>, NDUF3, red, <other columns> <psid>, MAPT, green, <other columns> ...
geneSets |
A list of categories in alphabetical order, where each compnent of the list is a character vector of all genes corresponding to the named category. For example: geneSets = list(category1=c("gene1","gene2"),category2=c("gene3","gene4","gene5")) |
Jeremy Miller
Please see the help file for userListEnrichment in the WGCNA library for references for the pre-defined lists.
# Example: Return a list of genes for various immune pathways geneSets = returnGeneSetsAsList(useImmunePathwayLists=TRUE) geneSets[7:8]
# Example: Return a list of genes for various immune pathways geneSets = returnGeneSetsAsList(useImmunePathwayLists=TRUE) geneSets[7:8]
This function creates a vector of n “contiguous” colors,
corresponding to n intensities (between 0 and 1) of the red, green
and blue primaries, with the blue intensities set to zero. The
values returned by rgcolors.func
can be used with a
col=
specification in graphics functions or in
par
.
rgcolors.func(n=50)
rgcolors.func(n=50)
n |
the number of colors (>= 1) to be used in the red and green palette. |
a character vector of color names. Colors are specified directly in terms of their RGB components with a string of the form "#RRGGBB", where each of the pairs RR, GG, BB consist of two hexadecimal digits giving a value in the range 00 to FF.
Sandrine Dudoit, [email protected]
Jane Fridlyand, [email protected]
plotCor
, plotMat
,
colors
, rgb
, image
.
rgcolors.func(n=5)
rgcolors.func(n=5)
This function repeatedly resamples the samples (rows) in supplied data and identifies modules on the resampled data.
sampledBlockwiseModules( datExpr, nRuns, startRunIndex = 1, endRunIndex = startRunIndex + nRuns - skipUnsampledCalculation, replace = FALSE, fraction = if (replace) 1.0 else 0.63, randomSeed = 12345, checkSoftPower = TRUE, nPowerCheckSamples = 2000, skipUnsampledCalculation = FALSE, corType = "pearson", power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", saveTOMs = FALSE, saveTOMFileBase = "TOM", ..., verbose = 2, indent = 0)
sampledBlockwiseModules( datExpr, nRuns, startRunIndex = 1, endRunIndex = startRunIndex + nRuns - skipUnsampledCalculation, replace = FALSE, fraction = if (replace) 1.0 else 0.63, randomSeed = 12345, checkSoftPower = TRUE, nPowerCheckSamples = 2000, skipUnsampledCalculation = FALSE, corType = "pearson", power = 6, networkType = "unsigned", saveTOMs = FALSE, saveTOMFileBase = "TOM", ..., verbose = 2, indent = 0)
datExpr |
Expression data. A matrix (preferred) or data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. |
nRuns |
Number of sampled network construction and module identification runs. If |
startRunIndex |
Number to be assigned to the start run. The run number or index is used to make saved files unique. It is also used in setting the seed for each run to allow the runs to be replicated in smaller or larger batches. |
endRunIndex |
Number (index) of the last run. If given, |
replace |
Logical: should samples (observations or rows in entries in |
fraction |
Fraction of samples to sample for each run. |
randomSeed |
Integer specifying the random seed. If non-NULL, the random number generator state is saved before the seed is set
and restored at the end of the function. If |
checkSoftPower |
Logical: should the soft-tresholding power be adjusted to approximately match the connectivity distribution of the sampled data set and the full data set? |
nPowerCheckSamples |
Number of genes to be sampled from the full data set to calculate connectivity and match soft-tresholding powers. |
skipUnsampledCalculation |
Logical: should a calculation on original (not resampled) data be skipped? |
corType |
Character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
power |
Soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
saveTOMs |
Logical: should the networks (topological overlaps) be saved for each run? Note that for large data sets (tens of thousands of nodes) the TOM files are rather large. |
saveTOMFileBase |
Character string giving the base of the file names for TOMs. The actual file names will consist of a
concatenation of |
... |
Other arguments to |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
For each run, samples (but not genes) are randomly sampled to obtain a perturbed data set; a full network analysis and module identification is carried out, and the results are returned in a list with one component per run.
For each run, the soft-thresholding power can optionally be adjusted such that the mean adjacency in the re-sampled data set equals the mean adjacency in the original data.
A list with one component per run. Each component is a list with the following components:
mods |
The output of the function |
samples |
Indices of the samples selected for the resampled data step for this run. |
powers |
Actual soft-thresholding powers used in this run. |
Peter Langfelder
An application of this function is described in the motivational example section of
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2012) Fast R Functions for Robust Correlations and Hierarchical Clustering. Journal of Statistical Software 46(11) 1-17; PMID: 23050260 PMCID: PMC3465711
blockwiseModules
for the underlying network analysis and module identification;
sampledHierarchicalConsensusModules
for a similar resampling analysis of consensus networks.
This function repeatedly resamples the samples (rows) in supplied data and identifies hierarchical consensus modules on the resampled data.
sampledHierarchicalConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, networkOptions, consensusTree, nRuns, startRunIndex = 1, endRunIndex = startRunIndex + nRuns -1, replace = FALSE, fraction = if (replace) 1.0 else 0.63, randomSeed = 12345, checkSoftPower = TRUE, nPowerCheckSamples = 2000, individualTOMFilePattern = "individualTOM-Run.%r-Set%s-Block.%b.RData", keepConsensusTOMs = FALSE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-Run.%r-%a-Block.%b.RData", skipUnsampledCalculation = FALSE, ..., verbose = 2, indent = 0, saveRunningResults = TRUE, runningResultsFile = "results.tmp.RData")
sampledHierarchicalConsensusModules( multiExpr, multiWeights = NULL, networkOptions, consensusTree, nRuns, startRunIndex = 1, endRunIndex = startRunIndex + nRuns -1, replace = FALSE, fraction = if (replace) 1.0 else 0.63, randomSeed = 12345, checkSoftPower = TRUE, nPowerCheckSamples = 2000, individualTOMFilePattern = "individualTOM-Run.%r-Set%s-Block.%b.RData", keepConsensusTOMs = FALSE, consensusTOMFilePattern = "consensusTOM-Run.%r-%a-Block.%b.RData", skipUnsampledCalculation = FALSE, ..., verbose = 2, indent = 0, saveRunningResults = TRUE, runningResultsFile = "results.tmp.RData")
multiExpr |
Expression data in the multi-set format (see |
multiWeights |
optional observation weights in the same format (and dimensions) as |
networkOptions |
A single list of class |
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
nRuns |
Number of network construction and module identification runs. |
startRunIndex |
Number to be assigned to the start run. The run number or index is used to make saved files unique; it has no effect on the actual results of the run. |
endRunIndex |
Number (index) of the last run. If given, |
replace |
Logical: should samples (observations or rows in entries in |
fraction |
Fraction of samples to sample for each run. |
randomSeed |
Integer specifying the random seed. If non-NULL, the random number generator state is saved before the seed is set
and restored at the end of the function. If |
checkSoftPower |
Logical: should the soft-tresholding power be adjusted to approximately match the connectivity distribution of the sampled data set and the full data set? |
nPowerCheckSamples |
Number of genes to be sampled from the full data set to calculate connectivity and match soft-tresholding powers. |
individualTOMFilePattern |
Pattern for file names for files holding individual TOMs. The tags
|
keepConsensusTOMs |
Logical: should the (final) consensus TOMs of each sampled calculation be retained after the run ends? Note that for large data sets (tens of thousands of nodes) the TOM files are rather large. |
consensusTOMFilePattern |
Pattern for file names for files holding consensus TOMs. The tags
|
skipUnsampledCalculation |
Logical: should a calculation on original (not resampled) data be skipped? |
... |
Other arguments to |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
saveRunningResults |
Logical: should the cumulative results be saved after each run on resampled data? |
runningResultsFile |
File name of file in which to save running results into. In case of a parallel execution (say on several nodes of a cluster), one should choose a unique name for each process to avoid overwriting the same file. |
For each run, samples (but not genes) are randomly sampled to obtain a perturbed data set; a full network analysis and module identification is carried out, and the results are returned in a list with one component per run.
For each run, the soft-thresholding power can optionally be adjusted such that the mean adjacency in the re-sampled data set equals the mean adjacency in the original data.
A list with one component per run. Each component is a list with the following components:
mods |
The output of the function |
samples |
Indices of the samples selected for the resampled data step for this run. |
powers |
Actual soft-thresholding powers used in this run. |
Peter Langfelder
hierarchicalConsensusModules
for consensus networ analysis and module identification;
sampledBlockwiseModules
for a similar resampling analysis for a single data set.
The function scaleFreeFitIndex calculates several indices (fitting statistics) for evaluating scale free topology fit. The input is a vector (of connectivities) k. Next k is discretized into nBreaks number of equal-width bins. Let's denote the resulting vector dk. The relative frequency for each bin is denoted p.dk.
scaleFreeFitIndex(k, nBreaks = 10, removeFirst = FALSE)
scaleFreeFitIndex(k, nBreaks = 10, removeFirst = FALSE)
k |
numeric vector whose components contain non-negative values |
nBreaks |
positive integer. This determines the number of equal width bins. |
removeFirst |
logical. If TRUE then the first bin will be removed. |
Data frame with columns
Rsquared.SFT |
the model fitting index (R.squared) from the following model lm(log.p.dk ~ log.dk) |
slope.SFT |
the slope estimate from model lm(log(p(k))~log(k)) |
truncatedExponentialAdjRsquared |
the adjusted R.squared measure from the truncated exponential model given by lm2 = lm(log.p.dk ~ log.dk + dk). |
Steve Horvath
A simple visula check of scale-free network ropology.
scaleFreePlot( connectivity, nBreaks = 10, truncated = FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, main = "", ...)
scaleFreePlot( connectivity, nBreaks = 10, truncated = FALSE, removeFirst = FALSE, main = "", ...)
connectivity |
vector containing network connectivities. |
nBreaks |
number of breaks in the connectivity dendrogram. |
truncated |
logical: should a truncated exponential fit be calculated and plotted in addition to the linear one? |
removeFirst |
logical: should the first bin be removed from the fit? |
main |
main title for the plot. |
... |
other graphical parameter to the |
The function plots a log-log plot of a histogram of the given connectivities
, and fits a linear
model plus optionally a truncated exponential model. The of the fit can be considered an index
of the scale freedom of the network topology.
None.
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
softConnectivity
for connectivity calculation in weigheted networks.
This matrix gives a predefined set of genes related to several stem cell (SC) types, as reported in two previously-published studies. It is used with userListEnrichment to search user-defined gene lists for enrichment.
data(SCsLists)
data(SCsLists)
A 14003 x 2 matrix of characters containing Gene / Category pairs. The first column (Gene) lists genes corresponding to a given category (second column). Each Category entry is of the form <Stem cell-related category>__<reference>, where the references can be found at userListEnrichment
. Note that the matrix is sorted first by Category and then by Gene, such that all genes related to the same category are listed sequentially.
For references used in this variable, please see userListEnrichment
data(SCsLists) head(SCsLists)
data(SCsLists) head(SCsLists)
Given a multiData
structure, this function calculates the consensus number of present
(non-missing) data
for each variable (column) across the data sets, forms the consensus and for each group selects variables
whose consensus proportion of present data is at least selectFewestMissing
(see usage below).
selectFewestConsensusMissing( mdx, colID, group, minProportionPresent = 1, consensusQuantile = 0, verbose = 0, ...)
selectFewestConsensusMissing( mdx, colID, group, minProportionPresent = 1, consensusQuantile = 0, verbose = 0, ...)
mdx |
A |
colID |
Character vector of column identifiers. This must include all the column names from
|
group |
Character vector whose components contain the group label (e.g. a character string) for
each entry of |
minProportionPresent |
A numeric value between 0 and 1 (logical values will be coerced to numeric). Denotes the minimum consensus fraction of present data in each column that will result in the column being retained. |
consensusQuantile |
A number between 0 and 1 giving the quantile probability for consensus calculation. 0 means the minimum value (true consensus) will be used. |
verbose |
Level of verbosity; 0 means silent, larger values will cause progress messages to be printed. |
... |
Other arguments that should be considered undocumented and subject to change. |
A 'consensus' of a vector (say 'x') is simply defined as the quantile with probability
consensusQuantile
of the vector x. This function calculates, for each variable in mdx
, its
proportion of present (i.e., non-NA and non-NaN)
values in each of the data sets in mdx
, and forms the consensus. Only
variables whose consensus proportion of present data is at least selectFewestMissing
are retained.
A logical vector with one element per variable in mdx
, giving TRUE
for the retained
variables.
Jeremy Miller and Peter Langfelder
Given consensus eigengenes, the function calculates the average correlation preservation pair-wise for all pairs of sets.
setCorrelationPreservation( multiME, setLabels, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey", method = "absolute")
setCorrelationPreservation( multiME, setLabels, excludeGrey = TRUE, greyLabel = "grey", method = "absolute")
multiME |
consensus module eigengenes in a multi-set format. A vector of lists with one list
corresponding to each set. Each list must contain a component |
setLabels |
names to be used for the sets represented in |
excludeGrey |
logical: exclude the 'grey' eigengene from preservation measure? |
greyLabel |
module label corresponding to the 'grey' module. Usually this will be the
character string |
method |
character string giving the correlation preservation measure to use. Recognized values
are (unique abbreviations of) |
For each pair of sets, the function calculates the average preservation of correlation among the eigengenes. Two preservation measures are available, the abosolute preservation (high if the two correlations are similar and low if they are different), and the hyperbolically scaled preservation, which de-emphasizes preservation of low correlation values.
A data frame with each row and column corresponding to a set given in multiME
, containing the
pairwise average correlation preservation values. Names and rownames are set to entries of setLabels
.
Peter Langfelder
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54
multiSetMEs
for module eigengene calculation;
plotEigengeneNetworks
for eigengene network visualization.
This function shortens given character strings so they are not longer than a given maximum length.
shortenStrings(strings, maxLength = 25, minLength = 10, split = " ", fixed = TRUE, ellipsis = "...", countEllipsisInLength = FALSE)
shortenStrings(strings, maxLength = 25, minLength = 10, split = " ", fixed = TRUE, ellipsis = "...", countEllipsisInLength = FALSE)
strings |
Character strings to be shortened. |
maxLength |
Maximum length (number of characters) in the strings to be retained. See details for when the returned strings can exceed this length. |
minLength |
Minimum length of the returned strings. See details. |
split |
Character string giving the split at which the strings can be truncated. This can be a literal string or a
regular expression (if the latter, |
fixed |
Logical: should |
ellipsis |
Character string that will be appended to every shorten string, to indicate that the string has been shortened. |
countEllipsisInLength |
Logical: should the length of the ellipsis count toward the minimum and maximum length? |
Strings whose length (number of characters) is at most maxLength
are returned unchanged. For those
that are longer, the function uses gregexpr
to search for the occurrences of split
in
each given
character string. If such occurrences are found at positions between minLength
and maxLength
,
the string will be truncated at the last such split
; otherwise, the string will be truncated at
maxLength
. The ellipsis
is appended to each truncated string.
A character vector of strings, shortened as necessary. If the input strings
had non-NULL dimensions
and dimnames, these are copied to the output.
Peter Langfelder
gregexpr
, the workhorse pattern matching function
formatLabels
for splitting strings into multiple lines
Sigmoid-type function that converts a similarity to a weighted network adjacency.
sigmoidAdjacencyFunction(ss, mu = 0.8, alpha = 20)
sigmoidAdjacencyFunction(ss, mu = 0.8, alpha = 20)
ss |
similarity, a number between 0 and 1. Can be given as a scalar, vector or a matrix. |
mu |
shift parameter. |
alpha |
slope parameter. |
The sigmoid adjacency function is defined as .
Adjacencies returned in the same form as the input ss
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
Calculation of (signed) eigengene-based connectivity, also known as module membership.
signedKME( datExpr, datME, exprWeights = NULL, MEWeights = NULL, outputColumnName = "kME", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
signedKME( datExpr, datME, exprWeights = NULL, MEWeights = NULL, outputColumnName = "kME", corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
datExpr |
a data frame containing the gene expression data. Rows correspond to samples and columns to genes. Missing values are allowed and will be ignored. |
datME |
a data frame containing module eigengenes. Rows correspond to samples and columns to module eigengenes. |
exprWeights |
optional weight matrix of observation weights for |
MEWeights |
optional weight matrix of observation weights for |
outputColumnName |
a character string specifying the prefix of column names of the output. |
corFnc |
character string specifying the function to be used to calculate co-expression similarity. Defaults to Pearson correlation. Any function returning values between -1 and 1 can be used. |
corOptions |
character string specifying additional arguments to be passed to the function given
by |
Signed eigengene-based connectivity of a gene in a module is defined as the correlation of the gene
with the corresponding module eigengene. The samples in datExpr
and datME
must be the
same.
A data frame in which rows correspond to input genes and columns to module eigengenes, giving the signed eigengene-based connectivity of each gene with respect to each eigengene.
Steve Horvath
Dong J, Horvath S (2007) Understanding Network Concepts in Modules, BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:24
Horvath S, Dong J (2008) Geometric Interpretation of Gene Coexpression Network Analysis. PLoS Comput Biol 4(8): e1000117
This function applies link{signif}
(or possibly other rounding function) to numeric, non-integer
columns of a given data frame.
signifNumeric(x, digits, fnc = "signif")
signifNumeric(x, digits, fnc = "signif")
x |
Input data frame, matrix or matrix-like object that can be coerced to a data frame. |
digits |
Significant digits to retain. |
fnc |
The function fnc
is applied to each numeric column that contains at least one non-integer (i.e., at
least one element that does not equal its own round
).
The transformed data frame.
Peter Langfelder
The rounding functions signif
and round
.
df = data.frame(text = letters[1:3], ints = c(1:3)+234, nonints = c(0:2) + 0.02345); df; signifNumeric(df, 2); signifNumeric(df, 2, fnc = "round");
df = data.frame(text = letters[1:3], ints = c(1:3)+234, nonints = c(0:2) + 0.02345); df; signifNumeric(df, 2); signifNumeric(df, 2, fnc = "round");
This function transforms correlations or other measures of similarity into an unweighted network adjacency.
signumAdjacencyFunction(corMat, threshold)
signumAdjacencyFunction(corMat, threshold)
corMat |
a matrix of correlations or other measures of similarity. |
threshold |
threshold for connecting nodes: all nodes whose |
An unweighted adjacency matrix of the same dimensions as the input corMat
.
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
adjacency
for soft-thresholding and creating weighted networks.
This function calculates a single consensus from given individual data.
simpleConsensusCalculation( individualData, consensusOptions, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
simpleConsensusCalculation( individualData, consensusOptions, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
individualData |
Individual data from which the consensus is to be calculated. It can be either a list or a
|
consensusOptions |
A list of class |
verbose |
Integer level of verbosity of diagnostic messages. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
Indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Consensus is defined as the element-wise (also known as "parallel") quantile of of the individual data at
probability given by the consensusQuantile
element of consensusOptions
.
A numeric vector or array of the same dimensions as each element of individualData
Peter Langfelder
Consensus network analysis was originally described in Langfelder P, Horvath S. Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54 https://bmcsystbiol.biomedcentral.com/articles/10.1186/1752-0509-1-54
consensusCalculation
for consensus calculation that can work with BlockwiseData
and can calibrate data before calculating consensus.
Hierarchical consensus calculation without calibration.
simpleHierarchicalConsensusCalculation(individualData, consensusTree, level = 1)
simpleHierarchicalConsensusCalculation(individualData, consensusTree, level = 1)
individualData |
Individual data from which the consensus is to be calculated. It can be either a list or a
|
consensusTree |
A list specifying the consensus calculation. See details. |
level |
Integer which the user should leave at 1. This serves to keep default set names unique. |
This function calculates consensus in a hierarchical manner, using a separate (and possibly different) set of
consensus options at each step. The "recipe" for the consensus calculation is supplied in the argument
consensusTree
.
The argument consensusTree
should have the following components: (1) inputs
must be either a
character vector whose components match names(inputData)
, or consensus trees in the own right.
(2) consensusOptions
must be a list of class "ConsensusOptions"
that specifies options for
calculating the consensus. A suitable set of options can be obtained by calling
newConsensusOptions
. (3) Optionally, the component analysisName
can be a single
character string giving the name for the analysis. When intermediate results are returned, they are returned
in a list whose names will be set from analysisName
components, if they exist.
Unlike the similar function hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
, this function ignores the
calibration settings in the consensusOptions
component of consensusTree
; no calibration of
input data is performed.
The actual consensus calculation at each level of the consensus tree
is carried out in function simpleConsensusCalculation
. The consensus options for each individual
consensus calculation are independent from one another, i.e., the consensus options for different steps can
be different.
A list with a single component consensus
, containing the consensus data of the same dimensions as the
individual entries in the input individualData
. This perhaps somewhat cumbersome convention is used to
make the output compatible with that of hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
.
Peter Langfelder
simpleConsensusCalculation
for a "single-level" consensus calculation;
hierarchicalConsensusCalculation
for hierarchical consensus calculation with calibration
Simulation of expression data with a customizable modular structure and several different types of noise.
simulateDatExpr( eigengenes, nGenes, modProportions, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, backgroundNoise = 0.1, leaveOut = NULL, nSubmoduleLayers = 0, nScatteredModuleLayers = 0, averageNGenesInSubmodule = 10, averageExprInSubmodule = 0.2, submoduleSpacing = 2, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
simulateDatExpr( eigengenes, nGenes, modProportions, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, backgroundNoise = 0.1, leaveOut = NULL, nSubmoduleLayers = 0, nScatteredModuleLayers = 0, averageNGenesInSubmodule = 10, averageExprInSubmodule = 0.2, submoduleSpacing = 2, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
eigengenes |
a data frame containing the seed eigengenes for the simulated modules. Rows correspond to samples and columns to modules. |
nGenes |
total number of genes to be simulated. |
modProportions |
a numeric vector with length equal the number of eigengenes in |
minCor |
minimum correlation of module genes with the corresponding eigengene. See details. |
maxCor |
maximum correlation of module genes with the corresponding eigengene. See details. |
corPower |
controls the dropoff of gene-eigengene correlation. See details. |
signed |
logical: should the genes be simulated as belonging to a signed network? If |
propNegativeCor |
proportion of genes to be simulated with negative gene-eigengene correlations.
Only effective if |
geneMeans |
optional vector of length |
backgroundNoise |
amount of background noise to be added to the simulated expression data. |
leaveOut |
optional specification of modules that should be left out of the simulation, that is their genes will be simulated as unrelated ("grey"). This can be useful when simulating several sets, in some which a module is present while in others it is absent. |
nSubmoduleLayers |
number of layers of ordered submodules to be added. See details. |
nScatteredModuleLayers |
number of layers of scattered submodules to be added. See details. |
averageNGenesInSubmodule |
average number of genes in a submodule. See details. |
averageExprInSubmodule |
average strength of submodule expression vectors. |
submoduleSpacing |
a number giving submodule spacing: this multiple of the submodule size will lie between the submodule and the next one. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Given eigengenes
can be unrelated or they can exhibit non-trivial correlations. Each module is
simulated separately from others. The expression profiles are chosen such that their
correlations with the eigengene run from just below maxCor
to minCor
(hence minCor must be
between 0 and 1, not including the bounds). The parameter corPower
can be chosen to control the
behaviour of the simulated correlation with the gene index; values higher than 1 will result in the
correlation approaching minCor
faster and lower than 1 slower.
Numbers of genes in each module are specified (as fractions of the total number of genes nGenes
)
by modProportions
. The last entry in modProportions
corresponds to the genes that will be
simulated as unrelated to anything else ("grey" genes). The proportion must add up to 1 or less. If the
sum is less than one, the remaining genes will be partitioned into groups and simulated to be "close" to
the proper modules, that is with small but non-zero correlations (between minCor
and 0)
with the module eigengene.
If signed
is set FALSE
, the correlation for
some of the module genes is chosen negative (but the absolute values remain the same as they would be for
positively correlated genes). To ensure consistency for simulations of multiple sets, the indices of the
negatively correlated genes are fixed and distributed evenly.
In addition to the primary module structure, a secondary structure can be optionally simulated. Modules
in the secondary structure have sizes chosen from an exponential distribution with mean equal
averageNGenesInSubmodule
. Expression vectors simulated in the secondary structure are simulated
with expected standard deviation chosen from an exponential distribution with mean equal
averageExprInSubmodule
; the higher this coefficient, the
more pronounced will the submodules be in the main modules. The secondary structure can be simulated in
several layers; their number is given by SubmoduleLayers
. Genes in these submodules are ordered in
the same order as in the main modules.
In addition to the ordered submodule structure, a scattered submodule structure can be simulated as well.
This structure can be viewed as noise that tends to correlate random groups of genes. The size and effect
parameters are the same as for the ordered submodules, and the number of layers added is controlled by
nScatteredModuleLayers
.
A list with the following components:
datExpr |
simulated expression data in a data frame whose columns correspond genes and rows to samples. |
setLabels |
simulated module assignment. Module labels are numeric, starting from 1. Genes
simulated to be outside of proper modules have label 0.
Modules that are left out (specified in |
allLabels |
simulated module assignment. Genes that belong to leftout modules (specified in
|
labelOrder |
a vector specifying the order in which labels correspond to the given eigengenes,
that is |
Peter Langfelder
A short description of the simulation method can also be found in the Supplementary Material to the article
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54.
The material is posted at http://horvath.genetics.ucla.edu/html/CoexpressionNetwork/EigengeneNetwork/SupplementSimulations.pdf.
simulateEigengeneNetwork
for a simulation of eigengenes with a given causal structure;
simulateModule
for simulations of individual modules;
simulateDatExpr5Modules
for a simplified interface to expression simulations;
simulateMultiExpr
for a simulation of several related data sets.
This function provides a simplified interface to the expression data simulation, at the cost of considerably less flexibility.
simulateDatExpr5Modules( nGenes = 2000, colorLabels = c("turquoise", "blue", "brown", "yellow", "green"), simulateProportions = c(0.1, 0.08, 0.06, 0.04, 0.02), MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, SDnoise = 1, backgroundCor = 0.3)
simulateDatExpr5Modules( nGenes = 2000, colorLabels = c("turquoise", "blue", "brown", "yellow", "green"), simulateProportions = c(0.1, 0.08, 0.06, 0.04, 0.02), MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, SDnoise = 1, backgroundCor = 0.3)
nGenes |
total number of genes to be simulated. |
colorLabels |
labels for simulated modules. |
simulateProportions |
a vector of length 5 giving proportions of the total number of genes to be placed in each individual module. The entries must be positive and sum to at most 1. If the sum is less than 1, the leftover genes will be simulated outside of modules. |
MEturquoise |
seed module eigengene for the first module. |
MEblue |
seed module eigengene for the second module. |
MEbrown |
seed module eigengene for the third module. |
MEyellow |
seed module eigengene for the fourth module. |
MEgreen |
seed module eigengene for the fifth module. |
SDnoise |
level of noise to be added to the simulated expressions. |
backgroundCor |
backgrond correlation. If non-zero, a component will be added to all genes such
that the average correlation of otherwise unrelated genes will be |
Roughly one-third of the genes are simulated with a negative correlation to their seed eigengene. See
the functions simulateModule
and simulateDatExpr
for more details.
A list with the following components:
datExpr |
the simulated expression data in a data frame, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. |
truemodule |
a vector with one entry per gene containing the simulated module membership. |
datME |
a data frame containing a copy of the input module eigengenes. |
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
simulateModule
for simulation of individual modules;
simulateDatExpr
for a more comprehensive data simulation interface.
Simulates a set of eigengenes (vectors) from a given set of causal anchors and a causal matrix.
simulateEigengeneNetwork( causeMat, anchorIndex, anchorVectors, noise = 1, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
simulateEigengeneNetwork( causeMat, anchorIndex, anchorVectors, noise = 1, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
causeMat |
causal matrix. The entry |
anchorIndex |
specifies the indices of the anchor vectors. |
anchorVectors |
a matrix giving the actual anchor vectors as columns. Their number must
equal the length of |
noise |
standard deviation of the noise added to each simulated vector. |
verbose |
level of verbosity. 0 means silent. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation; each unit adds two spaces. |
The algorithm starts with the anchor vectors and iteratively generates the rest from the path
coefficients given in the matrix causeMat
.
A list with the following components:
eigengenes |
generated eigengenes. |
causeMat |
a copy of the input causal matrix |
levels |
useful for debugging. A vector with one entry for each eigengene giving the number of generations of parents of the eigengene. Anchors have level 0, their direct causal children have level 1 etc. |
anchorIndex |
a copy of the input |
Peter Langfelder
Simulation of a single gene co-expression module.
simulateModule( ME, nGenes, nNearGenes = 0, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
simulateModule( ME, nGenes, nNearGenes = 0, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, verbose = 0, indent = 0)
ME |
seed module eigengene. |
nGenes |
number of genes in the module to be simulated. Must be non-zero. |
nNearGenes |
number of genes to be simulated with low correlation with the seed eigengene. |
minCor |
minimum correlation of module genes with the eigengene. See details. |
maxCor |
maximum correlation of module genes with the eigengene. See details. |
corPower |
controls the dropoff of gene-eigengene correlation. See details. |
signed |
logical: should the genes be simulated as belonging to a signed network? If |
propNegativeCor |
proportion of genes to be simulated with negative gene-eigengene correlations.
Only effective if |
geneMeans |
optional vector of length |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Module genes are simulated around the eigengene by choosing them such that their (expected)
correlations with the seed eigengene decrease progressively from (just below) maxCor
to minCor
.
The genes are otherwise independent from one another. The variable corPower
determines how fast
the correlation drops towards minCor
. Higher powers lead to a faster frop-off; corPower
must be
above zero but need not be integer.
If signed
is FALSE
, the genes are simulated so as to be part of an unsigned network module,
that is some genes will be simulated with a negative correlation with the seed eigengene (but of the same
absolute value that a positively correlated gene would be simulated with). The proportion of genes with
negative correlation is controlled by propNegativeCor
.
Optionally, the function can also simulate genes that are "near" the module, meaning they are
simulated with a low but non-zero correlation with the seed eigengene. The correlations run between
minCor
and zero.
A matrix containing the expression data with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes.
Peter Langfelder
A short description of the simulation method can also be found in the Supplementary Material to the article
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54.
The material is posted at http://horvath.genetics.ucla.edu/html/CoexpressionNetwork/EigengeneNetwork/SupplementSimulations.pdf.
simulateEigengeneNetwork
for a simulation of eigengenes with a given causal structure;
simulateDatExpr
for simulations of whole datasets consisting of multiple modules;
simulateDatExpr5Modules
for a simplified interface to expression simulations;
simulateMultiExpr
for a simulation of several related data sets.
Simulation of expression data in several sets with relate module structure.
simulateMultiExpr(eigengenes, nGenes, modProportions, minCor = 0.5, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, backgroundNoise = 0.1, leaveOut = NULL, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, nSubmoduleLayers = 0, nScatteredModuleLayers = 0, averageNGenesInSubmodule = 10, averageExprInSubmodule = 0.2, submoduleSpacing = 2, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
simulateMultiExpr(eigengenes, nGenes, modProportions, minCor = 0.5, maxCor = 1, corPower = 1, backgroundNoise = 0.1, leaveOut = NULL, signed = FALSE, propNegativeCor = 0.3, geneMeans = NULL, nSubmoduleLayers = 0, nScatteredModuleLayers = 0, averageNGenesInSubmodule = 10, averageExprInSubmodule = 0.2, submoduleSpacing = 2, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
eigengenes |
the seed eigengenes for the simulated modules in a multi-set format. A list with one
component per set. Each component is again a list that must contain a component |
nGenes |
integer specifyin the number of simulated genes. |
modProportions |
a numeric vector with length equal the number of eigengenes in |
minCor |
minimum correlation of module genes with the corresponding eigengene. See details. |
maxCor |
maximum correlation of module genes with the corresponding eigengene. See details. |
corPower |
controls the dropoff of gene-eigengene correlation. See details. |
backgroundNoise |
amount of background noise to be added to the simulated expression data. |
leaveOut |
optional specification of modules that should be left out of the simulation, that is
their genes will be simulated as unrelated ("grey"). A logical matrix in which columns correspond to sets
and rows to modules. Wherever |
signed |
logical: should the genes be simulated as belonging to a signed network? If |
propNegativeCor |
proportion of genes to be simulated with negative gene-eigengene correlations.
Only effective if |
geneMeans |
optional vector of length |
nSubmoduleLayers |
number of layers of ordered submodules to be added. See details. |
nScatteredModuleLayers |
number of layers of scattered submodules to be added. See details. |
averageNGenesInSubmodule |
average number of genes in a submodule. See details. |
averageExprInSubmodule |
average strength of submodule expression vectors. |
submoduleSpacing |
a number giving submodule spacing: this multiple of the submodule size will lie between the submodule and the next one. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
For details of simulation of individual data sets and the meaning of individual set simulation arguments,
see simulateDatExpr
. This function
simulates several data sets at a time and puts the result in a multi-set format. The number of genes is the
same for all data sets. Module memberships are also the same, but modules can optionally be “dissolved”,
that is their genes will be simulated as unassigned. Such “dissolved”, or left out, modules can be
specified in the matrix leaveOut
.
A list with the following components:
multiExpr |
simulated expression data in multi-set format analogous to that of the input
|
setLabels |
a matrix of dimensions (number of genes) times (number of sets) that contains module labels for each genes in each simulated data set. |
allLabels |
a matrix of dimensions (number of genes) times (number of sets) that contains the module
labels that would be simulated if no module were left out using |
labelOrder |
a matrix of dimensions (number of modules) times (number of sets) that contains the order in which module labels were assigned to genes in each set. The first label is assigned to genes 1...(module size of module labeled by first label), the second label to the following batch of genes etc. |
Peter Langfelder
A short description of the simulation method can also be found in the Supplementary Material to the article
Langfelder P, Horvath S (2007) Eigengene networks for studying the relationships between co-expression modules. BMC Systems Biology 2007, 1:54.
The material is posted at http://horvath.genetics.ucla.edu/html/CoexpressionNetwork/EigengeneNetwork/SupplementSimulations.pdf.
simulateEigengeneNetwork
for a simulation of eigengenes with a given causal structure;
simulateDatExpr
for simulation of individual data sets;
simulateDatExpr5Modules
for a simple simulation of a data set consisting of 5 modules;
simulateModule
for simulations of individual modules;
This function simulates a set of small modules. The primary purpose is to add a submodule structure to
the main module structure simulated by simulateDatExpr
.
simulateSmallLayer( order, nSamples, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 0.5, corPower = 1, averageModuleSize, averageExpr, moduleSpacing, verbose = 4, indent = 0)
simulateSmallLayer( order, nSamples, minCor = 0.3, maxCor = 0.5, corPower = 1, averageModuleSize, averageExpr, moduleSpacing, verbose = 4, indent = 0)
order |
a vector giving the simulation order for vectors. See details. |
nSamples |
integer giving the number of samples to be simulated. |
minCor |
a multiple of |
maxCor |
maximum correlation of module genes with the corresponding eigengene. See details. |
corPower |
controls the dropoff of gene-eigengene correlation. See details. |
averageModuleSize |
average number of genes in a module. See details. |
averageExpr |
average strength of module expression vectors. |
moduleSpacing |
a number giving module spacing: this multiple of the module size will lie between the module and the next one. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Module eigenvectors are chosen randomly and independently. Module sizes are chosen randomly from an
exponential distribution with mean equal averageModuleSize
. Two thirds of genes in
each module are simulated
as proper module genes and one third as near-module genes (see simulateModule
for details).
Between each successive pairs of
modules a number of genes given by moduleSpacing
will be left unsimulated (zero expression).
Module expression, that is the
expected standard deviation of the module expression vectors, is chosen randomly from an exponential
distribution with mean equal averageExpr
. The expression profiles are chosen such that their
correlations with the eigengene run from just below maxCor
to minCor * maxCor
(hence minCor must be
between 0 and 1, not including the bounds). The parameter corPower
can be chosen to control the
behaviour of the simulated correlation with the gene index; values higher than 1 will result in the
correlation approaching minCor * maxCor
faster and lower than 1 slower.
The simulated genes will be returned in the order given in order
.
A matrix of simulated gene expressions, with dimension (nSamples, length(order))
.
Peter Langfelder
simulateModule
for simulation of individual modules;
simulateDatExpr
for the main gene expression simulation function.
If a graphic device window is already open, it is closed and re-opened with specified dimensions (in inches); otherwise a new window is opened.
sizeGrWindow(width, height)
sizeGrWindow(width, height)
width |
desired width of the window, in inches. |
height |
desired heigh of the window, in inches. |
None.
Peter Langfelder
This function merges clusters by correlation of the first principal components such that the resulting merged clusters do not exceed a given maximum size.
sizeRestrictedClusterMerge( datExpr, clusters, clusterSizes = NULL, centers = NULL, maxSize, networkType = "unsigned", verbose = 0, indent = 0)
sizeRestrictedClusterMerge( datExpr, clusters, clusterSizes = NULL, centers = NULL, maxSize, networkType = "unsigned", verbose = 0, indent = 0)
datExpr |
Data on which the clustering is based (e.g., expression data). Variables are in columns and observations (samples) in rows. |
clusters |
A vector with element per variable (column) in |
clusterSizes |
Optional pre-calculated cluster sizes. If not given, will be determined from given |
centers |
Optional pre-calculaed cluster centers (first principal components/singular vectors). If not given, will be calculated from given data and cluster assignments. |
maxSize |
Maximum allowed size of merged clusters. If any of the given |
networkType |
One of |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The function iteratively merges two closest clusters subject to the constraint that the merged cluster size cannot exceed maxSize. Merging stops when no two clusters can be merged without exceeding the maximum size.
A list with two components
clusters |
A numeric vector with one component per input gene, giving the cluster number in which the gene is assigned. |
centers |
Cluster centers, that is their first principal components/singular vectors. |
Peter Langfelder
The last step in projectiveKMeans
uses this function.
Given expression data or a similarity, the function constructs the adjacency matrix and for each node calculates its connectivity, that is the sum of the adjacency to the other nodes.
softConnectivity( datExpr, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, type = "unsigned", power = if (type == "signed") 15 else 6, blockSize = 1500, minNSamples = NULL, verbose = 2, indent = 0) softConnectivity.fromSimilarity( similarity, type = "unsigned", power = if (type == "signed") 15 else 6, blockSize = 1500, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
softConnectivity( datExpr, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, type = "unsigned", power = if (type == "signed") 15 else 6, blockSize = 1500, minNSamples = NULL, verbose = 2, indent = 0) softConnectivity.fromSimilarity( similarity, type = "unsigned", power = if (type == "signed") 15 else 6, blockSize = 1500, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
datExpr |
a data frame containing the expression data, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. |
similarity |
a similarity matrix: a square symmetric matrix with entries between -1 and 1. |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to be used for the adjacency
calculation. Recommended choices are |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to be passed to the correlation function. |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
type |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
power |
soft thresholding power. |
blockSize |
block size in which adjacency is to be calculated. Too low (say below 100) may make the calculation inefficient, while too high may cause R to run out of physical memory and slow down the computer. Should be chosen such that an array of doubles of size (number of genes) * (block size) fits into available physical memory. |
minNSamples |
minimum number of samples available for the calculation of adjacency for the
adjacency to be considered valid. If not given, defaults to the greater of |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
A vector with one entry per gene giving the connectivity of each gene in the weighted network.
Steve Horvath
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
A convenient wrapper for the paste
function with sep=""
.
spaste(...)
spaste(...)
... |
standard arguments to function |
The result of the corresponding paste
.
Do not use the sep
argument. Using will lead to an error.
Peter Langfelder
a = 1; paste("a=", a); spaste("a=", a);
a = 1; paste("a=", a); spaste("a=", a);
Returns the vector of color names in the order they are assigned by other functions in this library.
standardColors(n = NULL)
standardColors(n = NULL)
n |
Number of colors requested. If |
A vector of character color names of the requested length.
Peter Langfelder, [email protected]
standardColors(10);
standardColors(10);
The function standardScreeningBinaryTrait computes widely used statistics for relating the columns of the input data frame (argument datE) to a binary sample trait (argument y). The statistics include Student t-test p-value and the corresponding local false discovery rate (known as q-value, Storey et al 2004), the fold change, the area under the ROC curve (also known as C-index), mean values etc. If the input option KruskalTest is set to TRUE, it also computes the Kruskal Wallist test p-value and corresponding q-value. The Kruskal Wallis test is a non-parametric, rank-based group comparison test.
standardScreeningBinaryTrait( datExpr, y, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), kruskalTest = FALSE, qValues = FALSE, var.equal=FALSE, na.action="na.exclude", getAreaUnderROC = TRUE)
standardScreeningBinaryTrait( datExpr, y, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), kruskalTest = FALSE, qValues = FALSE, var.equal=FALSE, na.action="na.exclude", getAreaUnderROC = TRUE)
datExpr |
a data frame or matrix whose columns will be related to the binary trait |
y |
a binary vector whose length (number of components) equals the number of rows of datE |
corFnc |
correlation function. Defaults to Pearson correlation. |
corOptions |
a list specifying options to corFnc. An empty list must be specified as |
kruskalTest |
logical: should the Kruskal test be performed? |
qValues |
logical: should the q-values be calculated? |
var.equal |
logical input parameter for the Student t-test. It indicates whether to treat the two variances (corresponding to the binary grouping) are being equal. If TRUE then the pooled variance is used to estimate the variance otherwise the Welch (or Satterthwaite) approximation to the degrees of freedom is used. Warning: here the default value is TRUE which is different from the default value of t.test. Type help(t.test) for more details. |
na.action |
character string for the Student t-test: indicates what should happen when the data contain missing values NAs. |
getAreaUnderROC |
logical: should area under the ROC curve be calculated? The calculation slows the function down somewhat. |
A data frame whose rows correspond to the columns of datE and whose columns report
ID |
column names of the input |
corPearson |
pearson correlation with a binary numeric version of the input variable. The numeric variable equals 1 for level 1 and 2 for level 2. The levels are given by levels(factor(y)). |
t.Student |
Student's t-test statistic |
pvalueStudent |
two-sided Student t-test p-value. |
qvalueStudent |
(if input |
foldChange |
a (signed) ratio of mean values. If the mean in the first group (corresponding to level 1) is larger than that of the second group, it equals meanFirstGroup/meanSecondGroup. But if the mean of the second group is larger than that of the first group it equals -meanSecondGroup/meanFirstGroup (notice the minus sign). |
meanFirstGroup |
means of columns in input |
meanSecondGroup |
means of columns in input |
SE.FirstGroup |
standard errors of columns in input |
SE.SecondGroup |
standard errors of columns in input |
areaUnderROC |
the area under the ROC, also known as the concordance index or C.index. This is a
measure of discriminatory power. The measure lies between 0 and 1 where 0.5 indicates no discriminatory
power. 0 indicates that the "opposite" predictor has perfect discriminatory power. To compute it we use
the function rcorr.cens with |
nPresentSamples |
number of samples with finite measurements for each gene. |
If input kruskalTest
is TRUE
, the following columns further summarize results of
Kruskal-Wallis test:
stat.Kruskal |
Kruskal-Wallis test statistic. |
stat.Kruskal.signed |
(Warning: experimental) Kruskal-Wallis test statistic including a sign that indicates whether the average rank is higher in second group (positive) or first group (negative). |
pvaluekruskal |
Kruskal-Wallis test p-values. |
qkruskal |
q-values corresponding to the Kruskal-Wallis test p-value (if input |
Steve Horvath
Storey JD, Taylor JE, and Siegmund D. (2004) Strong control, conservative point estimation, and simultaneous conservative consistency of false discovery rates: A unified approach. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B, 66: 187-205.
require(survival) # For is.Surv in rcorr.cens m=50 y=sample(c(1,2),m,replace=TRUE) datExprSignal=simulateModule(scale(y),30) datExprNoise=simulateModule(rnorm(m),150) datExpr=data.frame(datExprSignal,datExprNoise) Result1=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y) Result1[1:5,] # use unequal variances and calculate q-values Result2=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y, var.equal=FALSE,qValue=TRUE) Result2[1:5,] # calculate Kruskal Wallis test and q-values Result3=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y,kruskalTest=TRUE,qValue=TRUE) Result3[1:5,]
require(survival) # For is.Surv in rcorr.cens m=50 y=sample(c(1,2),m,replace=TRUE) datExprSignal=simulateModule(scale(y),30) datExprNoise=simulateModule(rnorm(m),150) datExpr=data.frame(datExprSignal,datExprNoise) Result1=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y) Result1[1:5,] # use unequal variances and calculate q-values Result2=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y, var.equal=FALSE,qValue=TRUE) Result2[1:5,] # calculate Kruskal Wallis test and q-values Result3=standardScreeningBinaryTrait(datExpr,y,kruskalTest=TRUE,qValue=TRUE) Result3[1:5,]
The function standardScreeningCensoredTime computes association measures between the columns of the input data datE and a censored time variable (e.g. survival time). The censored time is specified using two input variables "time" and "event". The event variable is binary where 1 indicates that the event took place (e.g. the person died) and 0 indicates censored (i.e. lost to follow up). The function fits univariate Cox regression models (one for each column of datE) and outputs a Wald test p-value, a logrank p-value, corresponding local false discovery rates (known as q-values, Storey et al 2004), hazard ratios. Further it reports the concordance index (also know as area under the ROC curve) and optionally results from dichotomizing the columns of datE.
standardScreeningCensoredTime( time, event, datExpr, percentiles = seq(from = 0.1, to = 0.9, by = 0.2), dichotomizationResults = FALSE, qValues = TRUE, fastCalculation = TRUE)
standardScreeningCensoredTime( time, event, datExpr, percentiles = seq(from = 0.1, to = 0.9, by = 0.2), dichotomizationResults = FALSE, qValues = TRUE, fastCalculation = TRUE)
time |
numeric variable showing time to event or time to last follow up. |
event |
Input variable |
datExpr |
a data frame or matrix whose columns will be related to the censored time. |
percentiles |
numeric vector which is only used when dichotomizationResults=T. Each value should lie between 0 and 1. For each value specified in the vector percentiles, a binary vector will be defined by dichotomizing the column value according to the corresponding quantile. Next a corresponding p-value will be calculated. |
dichotomizationResults |
logical. If this option is set to TRUE then the values of the columns of datE will be dichotomized and corresponding Cox regression p-values will be calculated. |
qValues |
logical. If this option is set to TRUE (default) then q-values will be calculated for the Cox regression p-values. |
fastCalculation |
logical. If set to TRUE, the function outputs correlation test p-values (and q-values) for correlating the columns of datE with the expected hazard (if no covariate is fit). Specifically, the expected hazard is defined as the deviance residual of an intercept only Cox regression model. The results are very similar to those resulting from a univariate Cox model where the censored time is regressed on the columns of dat. Specifically, this computational speed up is facilitated by the insight that the p-values resulting from a univariate Cox regression coxph(Surv(time,event)~datE[,i]) are very similar to those from corPvalueFisher(cor(devianceResidual,datE[,i]), nSamples). |
If input option fastCalculation=TRUE, then the function outputs correlation test p-values (and q-values) for correlating the columns of datE with the expected hazard (if no covariate is fit). Specifically, the expected hazard is defined as the deviance residual of an intercept only Cox regression model. The results are very similar to those resulting from a univariate Cox model where the censored time is regressed on the columns of dat. Specifically, this computational speed up is facilitated by the insight that the p-values resulting from a univariate Cox regression coxph(Surv(time,event)~datE[,i]) are very similar to those from corPvalueFisher(cor(devianceResidual,datE[,i]), nSamples)
If fastCalculation
is FALSE
,
the function outputs a data frame whose rows correspond to the columns of datE and whose columns report
ID |
column names of the input data datExpr. |
pvalueWald |
Wald test p-value from fitting a univariate Cox regression model where the censored time is regressed on each column of datExpr. |
qValueWald |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the Wald test p-value. |
pvalueLogrank |
Logrank p-value resulting from the Cox regression model. Also known as score test p-value. For large sample sizes this sould be similar to the Wald test p-value. |
qValueLogrank |
local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to the Logrank test p-value. |
HazardRatio |
hazard ratio resulting from the Cox model. If the value is larger than 1, then high values of the column are associated with shorter time, e.g. increased hazard of death. A hazard ratio equal to 1 means no relationship between the column and time. HR<1 means that high values are associated with longer time, i.e. lower hazard. |
CI.LowerLimitHR |
Lower bound of the 95 percent confidence interval of the hazard ratio. |
CI.UpperLimitHR |
Upper bound of the 95 percent confidence interval of the hazard ratio. |
C.index |
concordance index, also known as C-index or area under the ROC curve. Calculated with the rcorr.cens option outx=TRUE (ties are ignored). |
MinimumDichotPvalue |
This is the smallest p-value from the dichotomization results. To see which dichotomized variable (and percentile) corresponds to the minimum, study the following columns. |
pValueDichot0.1 |
This columns report the p-value when the column is dichotomized according to the specified percentile (here 0.1). The percentiles are specified in the input option percentiles. |
pvalueDeviance |
The p-value resulting from using a correlation test to relate the expected hazard (deviance residual) with each (undichotomized) column of datE. Specifically, the Fisher transformation is used to calculate the p-value for the Pearson correlation. The resulting p-value should be very similar to that of a univariate Cox regression model. |
qvalueDeviance |
Local false discovery rate (q-value) corresponding to pvalueDeviance. |
corDeviance |
Pearson correlation between the expected hazard (deviance residual) with each (undichotomized) column of datExpr. |
Steve Horvath
Standard screening for numeric traits based on Pearson correlation.
standardScreeningNumericTrait(datExpr, yNumeric, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), qValues = TRUE, areaUnderROC = TRUE)
standardScreeningNumericTrait(datExpr, yNumeric, corFnc = cor, corOptions = list(use = 'p'), alternative = c("two.sided", "less", "greater"), qValues = TRUE, areaUnderROC = TRUE)
datExpr |
data frame containing expression data (or more generally variables to be screened), with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes (variables) |
yNumeric |
a numeric vector giving the trait measurements for each sample |
corFnc |
correlation function.
Defaults to Pearson correlation but can also be |
corOptions |
list specifying additional arguments to be passed to the correlation function given
by |
alternative |
alternative hypothesis for the correlation test |
qValues |
logical: should q-values be calculated? |
areaUnderROC |
logical: should are under the receiver-operating curve be calculated? |
The function calculates the correlations, associated p-values, area under the ROC, and q-values
Data frame with the following components:
ID |
Gene (or variable) identifiers copied from |
cor |
correlations of all genes with the trait |
Z |
Fisher Z statistics corresponding to the correlations |
pvalueStudent |
Student p-values of the correlations |
qvalueStudent |
(if input |
AreaUnderROC |
(if input |
nPresentSamples |
number of samples present for the calculation of each association. |
Steve Horvath
standardScreeningBinaryTrait
, standardScreeningCensoredTime
Returns the standard error of the mean of a given vector. Missing values are ignored.
stdErr(x)
stdErr(x)
x |
a numeric vector |
Standard error of the mean of x.
Steve Horvath
This function takes an expression matrix which can be split using two separate splitting parameters (ie, control vs AD with multiple brain regions), and plots the results as a barplot. Group average, standard deviations, and relevant Kruskal-Wallis p-values are returned.
stratifiedBarplot( expAll, groups, split, subset, genes = NA, scale = "N", graph = TRUE, las1 = 2, cex1 = 1.5, ...)
stratifiedBarplot( expAll, groups, split, subset, genes = NA, scale = "N", graph = TRUE, las1 = 2, cex1 = 1.5, ...)
expAll |
An expression matrix, with rows as samples and genes/probes as columns. If genes=NA, then column names must be included. |
groups |
A character vector corresponding to the samples in expAll, with each element the group name of the relevant sample or NA for samples not in any group. For, example: NA, NA, NA, Con, Con, Con, Con, AD, AD, AD, AD, NA, NA. This trait will be plotted as adjacent bars for each split. |
split |
A character vector corresponding to the samples in expAll, with each element the group splitting name of the relevant sample or NA for samples not in any group. For, example: NA, NA, NA, Hip, Hip, EC, EC, Hip, Hip, EC, EC, NA, NA. This trait will be plotted as the same color across each split of the barplot. For the function to work properly, the same split values should be inputted for each group. |
subset |
A list of one or more genes to compare the expression with. If the list contains more than one gene, the first element contains the group name. For example, Ribosomes, RPL3, RPL4, RPS3. |
genes |
If entered, this parameter is a list of gene/probe identifiers corresponding to the columns in expAll. |
scale |
For subsets of genes that include more than one gene, this parameter determines how the genes are combined into a single value. Currently, there are five options: 1) ("N")o scaling (default); 2) first divide each gene by the ("A")verage across samples; 3) first scale genes to ("Z")-score across samples; 4) only take the top ("H")ub gene (ignore all but the highest-connected gene); and 5) take the ("M")odule eigengene. Note that these scaling methods have not been sufficiently tested, and should be considered experimental. |
graph |
If TRUE (default), bar plot is made. If FALSE, only the results are returned, and no plot is made. |
cex1 |
Sets the graphing parameters of cex.axis and cex.names (default=1.5) |
las1 |
Sets the graphing parameter las (default=2). |
... |
Other graphing parameters allowed in the barplot function. Note that the parameters for cex.axis, cex.names, and las are superseded by cex1 and las1 and will therefore be ignored. |
splitGroupMeans |
The group/split averaged expression across each group and split combination. This is the height of the bars in the graph. |
splitGroupSDs |
The standard deviation of group/split expression across each group and split combination. This is the height of the error bars in the graph. |
splitPvals |
Kruskal-Wallis p-values for each splitting parameter across groups. |
groupPvals |
Kruskal-Wallis p-values for each group parameter across splits. |
Jeremy Miller
# Example: first simulate some data set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D) simDatA = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) datExpr = simDatA$datExpr+5 datExpr[1:10,] = datExpr[1:10,]+2 datExpr[41:50,] = datExpr[41:50,]-1 # Now split up the data and plot it! subset = c("Random Genes", "Gene.1", "Gene.234", "Gene.56", "Gene.789") groups = rep(c("A","A","A","B","B","B","C","C","C","C"),5) split = c(rep("ZZ",10), rep("YY",10), rep("XX",10), rep("WW",10), rep("VV",10)) par(mfrow = c(1,1)) results = stratifiedBarplot(datExpr, groups, split, subset) results # Now plot it the other way results = stratifiedBarplot(datExpr, split, groups, subset)
# Example: first simulate some data set.seed(100) ME.A = sample(1:100,50); ME.B = sample(1:100,50) ME.C = sample(1:100,50); ME.D = sample(1:100,50) ME1 = data.frame(ME.A, ME.B, ME.C, ME.D) simDatA = simulateDatExpr(ME1,1000,c(0.2,0.1,0.08,0.05,0.3), signed=TRUE) datExpr = simDatA$datExpr+5 datExpr[1:10,] = datExpr[1:10,]+2 datExpr[41:50,] = datExpr[41:50,]-1 # Now split up the data and plot it! subset = c("Random Genes", "Gene.1", "Gene.234", "Gene.56", "Gene.789") groups = rep(c("A","A","A","B","B","B","C","C","C","C"),5) split = c(rep("ZZ",10), rep("YY",10), rep("XX",10), rep("WW",10), rep("VV",10)) par(mfrow = c(1,1)) results = stratifiedBarplot(datExpr, groups, split, subset) results # Now plot it the other way results = stratifiedBarplot(datExpr, split, groups, subset)
This function calculates topological overlap of a subset of vectors with respect to a whole data set.
subsetTOM( datExpr, subset, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
subsetTOM( datExpr, subset, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", weights = NULL, networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
a data frame containing the expression data of the whole set, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. |
subset |
a single logical or numeric vector giving the indices of the nodes for which the TOM is to be calculated. |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to be used for the adjacency
calculation. Recommended choices are |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to be passed to the correlation function. |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
networkType |
character string giving network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of)
|
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
This function is designed to calculated topological overlaps of small subsets of large expression data sets, for example in individual modules.
A matrix of dimensions n*n
, where n
is the number of entries selected by block
.
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
TOMsimilarity
for standard calculation of topological overlap.
swapTwoBranches takes the a gene tree object and two genes as input, and swaps the branches containing these two genes at the nearest branch point of the dendrogram.
reflectBranch takes the a gene tree object and two genes as input, and reflects the branch containing the first gene at the nearest branch point of the dendrogram.
selectBranch takes the a gene tree object and two genes as input, and outputs indices for all genes in the branch containing the first gene, up to the nearest branch point of the dendrogram.
swapTwoBranches(hierTOM, g1, g2) reflectBranch(hierTOM, g1, g2, both = FALSE) selectBranch(hierTOM, g1, g2)
swapTwoBranches(hierTOM, g1, g2) reflectBranch(hierTOM, g1, g2, both = FALSE) selectBranch(hierTOM, g1, g2)
hierTOM |
A hierarchical clustering object (or gene tree) that is used to plot the dendrogram. For example, the output object from the function hclust or fastcluster::hclust. Note that elements of hierTOM$order MUST be named (for example, with the corresponding gene name). |
g1 |
Any gene in the branch of interest. |
g2 |
Any gene in a branch directly adjacent to the branch of interest. |
both |
Logical: should the selection include the branch gene |
swapTwoBranches and reflectBranch return a hierarchical clustering object with the hierTOM$order variable properly adjusted, but all other variables identical as the heirTOM input.
selectBranch returns a numeric vector corresponding to all genes in the requested branch.
Jeremy Miller
## Not run: ## Example: first simulate some data. n = 30; n2 = 2*n; n.3 = 20; n.5 = 10; MEturquoise = sample(1:(2*n),n) MEblue = c(MEturquoise[1:(n/2)], sample(1:(2*n),n/2)) MEbrown = sample(1:n2,n) MEyellow = sample(1:n2,n) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:n.3], sample(1:n2,n.5)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:n.5], sample(1:n2,n.3)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,8*n ,c(0.16,0.12,0.11,0.10,0.10,0.09,0.15), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh,dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Reassign modules using the selectBranch and chooseOneHubInEachModule functions datExpr = dat1$datExpr hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(datExpr, colorh) colorh2 = rep("grey", length(colorh)) colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["turquoise"])] = "blue" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["turquoise"],hubs["blue"])] = "turquoise" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["green"],hubs["yellow"])] = "green" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["yellow"],hubs["green"])] = "yellow" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["brown"])] = "red" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["brown"],hubs["red"])] = "brown" plotDendroAndColors(tree1,cbind(colorh,colorh2),c("Old","New"),dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Now swap and reflect some branches, then optimize the order of the branches # Open a suitably sized graphics window sizeGrWindow(12,9); # partition the screen for 3 dendrogram + module color plots layout(matrix(c(1:6), 6, 1), heights = c(0.8, 0.2, 0.8, 0.2, 0.8, 0.2)); plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Starting Dendrogram", setLayout = FALSE) tree1 = swapTwoBranches(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["turquoise"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Swap blue/turquoise and red/brown", setLayout = FALSE) tree1 = reflectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["green"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Reflect turquoise/blue", setLayout = FALSE) ## End(Not run)
## Not run: ## Example: first simulate some data. n = 30; n2 = 2*n; n.3 = 20; n.5 = 10; MEturquoise = sample(1:(2*n),n) MEblue = c(MEturquoise[1:(n/2)], sample(1:(2*n),n/2)) MEbrown = sample(1:n2,n) MEyellow = sample(1:n2,n) MEgreen = c(MEyellow[1:n.3], sample(1:n2,n.5)) MEred = c(MEbrown [1:n.5], sample(1:n2,n.3)) ME = data.frame(MEturquoise, MEblue, MEbrown, MEyellow, MEgreen, MEred) dat1 = simulateDatExpr(ME,8*n ,c(0.16,0.12,0.11,0.10,0.10,0.09,0.15), signed=TRUE) TOM1 = TOMsimilarityFromExpr(dat1$datExpr, networkType="signed") colnames(TOM1) <- rownames(TOM1) <- colnames(dat1$datExpr) tree1 = fastcluster::hclust(as.dist(1-TOM1),method="average") colorh = labels2colors(dat1$allLabels) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh,dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Reassign modules using the selectBranch and chooseOneHubInEachModule functions datExpr = dat1$datExpr hubs = chooseOneHubInEachModule(datExpr, colorh) colorh2 = rep("grey", length(colorh)) colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["turquoise"])] = "blue" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["turquoise"],hubs["blue"])] = "turquoise" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["green"],hubs["yellow"])] = "green" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["yellow"],hubs["green"])] = "yellow" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["brown"])] = "red" colorh2 [selectBranch(tree1,hubs["brown"],hubs["red"])] = "brown" plotDendroAndColors(tree1,cbind(colorh,colorh2),c("Old","New"),dendroLabels=FALSE) ## Now swap and reflect some branches, then optimize the order of the branches # Open a suitably sized graphics window sizeGrWindow(12,9); # partition the screen for 3 dendrogram + module color plots layout(matrix(c(1:6), 6, 1), heights = c(0.8, 0.2, 0.8, 0.2, 0.8, 0.2)); plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Starting Dendrogram", setLayout = FALSE) tree1 = swapTwoBranches(tree1,hubs["red"],hubs["turquoise"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Swap blue/turquoise and red/brown", setLayout = FALSE) tree1 = reflectBranch(tree1,hubs["blue"],hubs["green"]) plotDendroAndColors(tree1,colorh2,dendroLabels=FALSE,main="Reflect turquoise/blue", setLayout = FALSE) ## End(Not run)
Graphical representation of the Topological Overlap Matrix using a heatmap plot combined with the corresponding hierarchical clustering dendrogram and module colors.
TOMplot( dissim, dendro, Colors = NULL, ColorsLeft = Colors, terrainColors = FALSE, setLayout = TRUE, ...)
TOMplot( dissim, dendro, Colors = NULL, ColorsLeft = Colors, terrainColors = FALSE, setLayout = TRUE, ...)
dissim |
a matrix containing the topological overlap-based dissimilarity |
dendro |
the corresponding hierarchical clustering dendrogram |
Colors |
optional specification of module colors to be plotted on top |
ColorsLeft |
optional specification of module colors on the left side. If |
terrainColors |
logical: should terrain colors be used? |
setLayout |
logical: should layout be set? If |
... |
other graphical parameters to |
The standard heatmap
function uses the layout
function to set the following
layout (when Colors
is given):
0 0 5 0 0 2 4 1 3
To get a meaningful heatmap plot, user-set layout must respect this geometry.
None.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
heatmap
, the workhorse function doing the plotting.
Calculation of the topological overlap matrix, and the corresponding dissimilarity, from a given adjacency matrix.
TOMsimilarity( adjMat, TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0) TOMdist( adjMat, TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
TOMsimilarity( adjMat, TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0) TOMdist( adjMat, TOMType = "unsigned", TOMDenom = "min", suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
adjMat |
adjacency matrix, that is a square, symmetric matrix with entries between 0 and 1
(negative values are allowed if |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies |
Logical: should the results be set to zero for zero adjacencies? |
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? |
useInternalMatrixAlgebra |
Logical: should WGCNA's own, slow, matrix multiplication be used instead of R-wide BLAS? Only useful for debugging. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The functions perform basically the same calculations of topological overlap. TOMdist
turns the
overlap (which is a measure of similarity) into a measure of dissimilarity by subtracting it from 1.
Basic checks on the adjacency matrix are performed and missing entries are replaced by zeros.
See TOMsimilarityFromExpr
for details on the various TOM types.
The underlying C code assumes that the diagonal of the adjacency matrix equals 1. If this is not the case, the diagonal of the input is set to 1 before the calculation begins.
A matrix holding the topological overlap.
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
For the Nowick-type signed TOM (referred to as weighted TO, wTO, by Nowick et al.), see
Nowick K, Gernat T, Almaas E, Stubbs L. Differences in human and chimpanzee gene expression patterns define an evolving network of transcription factors in brain. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2009 Dec 29;106(52):22358-63. doi: 10.1073/pnas.0911376106. Epub 2009 Dec 10.
or Gysi DM, Voigt A, Fragoso TM, Almaas E, Nowick K. wTO: an R package for computing weighted topological overlap and a consensus network with integrated visualization tool. BMC Bioinformatics. 2018 Oct 24;19(1):392. doi: 10.1186/s12859-018-2351-7.
Calculation of the topological overlap matrix from given expression data.
TOMsimilarityFromExpr( datExpr, weights = NULL, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, TOMType = "signed", TOMDenom = "min", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, nThreads = 0, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
TOMsimilarityFromExpr( datExpr, weights = NULL, corType = "pearson", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, TOMType = "signed", TOMDenom = "min", maxPOutliers = 1, quickCor = 0, pearsonFallback = "individual", cosineCorrelation = FALSE, replaceMissingAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies = FALSE, suppressNegativeTOM = FALSE, useInternalMatrixAlgebra = FALSE, nThreads = 0, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. NAs are allowed, but not too many. |
weights |
optional observation weights for |
corType |
character string specifying the correlation to be used. Allowed values are (unique
abbreviations of) |
networkType |
network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of) |
power |
soft-thresholding power for netwoek construction. |
TOMType |
one of |
TOMDenom |
a character string specifying the TOM variant to be used. Recognized values are
|
maxPOutliers |
only used for |
quickCor |
real number between 0 and 1 that controls the handling of missing data in the calculation of correlations. See details. |
pearsonFallback |
Specifies whether the bicor calculation, if used, should revert to Pearson when median
absolute deviation (mad) is zero. Recongnized values are (abbreviations of)
|
cosineCorrelation |
logical: should the cosine version of the correlation calculation be used? The cosine calculation differs from the standard one in that it does not subtract the mean. |
replaceMissingAdjacencies |
logical: should missing values in the calculation of adjacency be replaced by 0? |
suppressTOMForZeroAdjacencies |
Logical: should the result be set to zero for zero adjacencies? |
suppressNegativeTOM |
Logical: should the result be set to zero when negative? |
useInternalMatrixAlgebra |
Logical: should WGCNA's own, slow, matrix multiplication be used instead of R-wide BLAS? Only useful for debugging. |
nThreads |
non-negative integer specifying the number of parallel threads to be used by certain parts of correlation calculations. This option only has an effect on systems on which a POSIX thread library is available (which currently includes Linux and Mac OSX, but excludes Windows). If zero, the number of online processors will be used if it can be determined dynamically, otherwise correlation calculations will use 2 threads. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Several alternate definitions of topological overlap are available. The oldest version is now called "unsigned"; in this
version, all adjacencies are assumed to be non-negative and the topological overlap of nodes is given by
where the sum is over not equal to either
or
, the function
in the denominator can be
either min or mean (goverened by argument
TOMDenom
), and is
the connectivity of node
. The signed versions assume that the adjacency matrix was obtained from an underlying
correlation matrix, and the element
carries the sign of the underlying correlation of the two
vectors. (Within WGCNA, this can really only apply to the unsigned adjacency since signed adjacencies are (essentially)
zero when the underlying correlation is negative.) The signed and signed Nowick versions are similar to the above unsigned
version, differing only in absolute
values placed in the expression: the signed Nowick expression is
This TOM lies between -1 and 1, and typically is negative when the underlying adjacency is negative. The signed TOM is simply the absolute value of the signed Nowick TOM and is hence always non-negative. For non-negative adjacencies, all 3 version give the same result.
A brief note on terminology: the original article by Nowick et al use the name "weighted TO" or wTO; since all of the topological overlap versions calculated in this function are weighted, we use the name signed to indicate that this TOM keeps track of the sign of the underlying correlation.
The "2" versions of all 3 adjacency types have a somewhat different form in which the adjacency and the product are normalized separately. Thus, the "unsigned 2" version is
At present the relative weight of the adjacency and the normalized product term are equal and fixed; in the future a user-specified or automatically determined weight may be implemented. The "signed Nowick 2" and "signed 2" are defined analogously to their original versions. The adjacency is assumed to be signed, and the expression for "signed Nowick 2" TOM is
Analogously to "signed" TOM, "signed 2" differs from "signed Nowick 2" TOM only in taking the absolute value of the result.
At present the "2" versions should all be considered experimental and are subject to change.
A matrix holding the topological overlap.
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
This transpose command partitions a big matrix (or data frame) into blocks and applies the t() function to each block separately.
transposeBigData(x, blocksize = 20000)
transposeBigData(x, blocksize = 20000)
x |
a matrix or data frame |
blocksize |
a positive integer larger than 1, which determines the block size. Default is 20k. |
Assume you have a very large matrix with say 500k columns. In this case, the standard transpose function of
R t()
can take a long time. Solution: Split the original matrix into sub-matrices by dividing the
columns into blocks. Next apply t()
to each sub-matrix. The same holds if the large matrix contains
a large number of rows. The function transposeBigData
automatically checks whether the large matrix
contains more rows or more columns. If the number of columns is larger than or equal to the number of rows
then the block wise splitting will be applied to columns otherwise to the rows.
A matrix or data frame (depending on the input x
) which is the transpose of x
.
This function can be considered a wrapper of t()
Steve Horvath, UCLA
Any linear algebra book will explain the transpose.
The standard function t
.
x=data.frame(matrix(1:10000,nrow=4,ncol=2500)) dimnames(x)[[2]]=paste("Y",1:2500,sep="") xTranspose=transposeBigData(x) x[1:4,1:4] xTranspose[1:4,1:4]
x=data.frame(matrix(1:10000,nrow=4,ncol=2500)) dimnames(x)[[2]]=paste("Y",1:2500,sep="") xTranspose=transposeBigData(x) x[1:4,1:4] xTranspose[1:4,1:4]
Assume an imprecisely measured trait y
that is related to the true, unobserved trait yTRUE as follows yTRUE=y+noise where noise is assumed to have mean zero and a constant variance. Assume you have 1 or more surrogate markers for yTRUE corresponding to the columns of datX
. The function implements several approaches for estimating yTRUE based on the inputs y
and/or datX
.
TrueTrait(datX, y, datXtest=NULL, corFnc = "bicor", corOptions = "use = 'pairwise.complete.obs'", LeaveOneOut.CV=FALSE, skipMissingVariables=TRUE, addLinearModel=FALSE)
TrueTrait(datX, y, datXtest=NULL, corFnc = "bicor", corOptions = "use = 'pairwise.complete.obs'", LeaveOneOut.CV=FALSE, skipMissingVariables=TRUE, addLinearModel=FALSE)
datX |
is a vector or data frame whose columns correspond to the surrogate markers (variables) for the true underlying trait. The number of rows of |
y |
is a numeric vector which specifies the observed trait. |
datXtest |
can be set as a matrix or data frame of a second, independent test data set. Its columns should correspond to those of |
corFnc |
Character string specifying the correlation function to be used in the calculations.
Recomended values are the default Pearson
correlation |
corOptions |
Character string giving additional arguments to the function specified in |
LeaveOneOut.CV |
logical. If TRUE then leave one out cross validation estimates will be calculated for |
skipMissingVariables |
logical. If TRUE then variables whose values are missing for a given observation will be skipped when estimating the true trait of that particular observation. Thus, the estimate of a particular observation are determined by all the variables whose values are non-missing. |
addLinearModel |
logical. If TRUE then the function also estimates the true trait based on the predictions of the linear model |
This R function implements formulas described in Klemera and Doubal (2006). The assumptions underlying these formulas are described in Klemera et al. But briefly,
the function provides several estimates of the true underlying trait under the following assumptions:
1) There is a true underlying trait that affects y
and a list of surrogate markers corresponding to the columns of datX
.
2) There is a linear relationship between the true underlying trait and y
and the surrogate markers.
3) yTRUE =y +Noise where the Noise term has a mean of zero and a fixed variance.
4) Weighted least squares estimation is used to relate the surrogate markers to the underlying trait where the weights are proportional to 1/ssq.j where ssq.j is the noise variance of the j-th marker.
Specifically,
output y.true1
corresponds to formula 31, y.true2
corresponds to formula 25, and y.true3
corresponds to formula 34.
Although the true underlying trait yTRUE is not known, one can estimate the standard deviation between the
estimate y.true2
and yTRUE using formula 33. Similarly, one can estimate the SD for the estimate
y.true3
using formula 42. These estimated SDs correspond to output components 2 and 3, respectively.
These SDs are valuable since they provide a sense of how accurate the measure is.
To estimate the correlations between y
and the surrogate markers, one can specify different
correlation measures. The default method is based on the Person correlation but one can also specify the
biweight midcorrelation by choosing "bicor", see help(bicor) to learn more.
When the datX
is comprised of observations measured in different strata (e.g. different batches or
independent data sets) then one can obtain stratum specific estimates by specifying the strata using the
argument Strata
. In this case, the estimation focuses on one stratum at a time.
A list with the following components.
datEstimates |
is a data frame whose columns corresponds to estimates of the true underlying trait. The number of rows equals the number of observations, i.e. the length of |
datEstimatestest |
is output only if a test data set has been specified in the argument
|
datEstimates.LeaveOneOut.CV |
is output only if the argument |
SD.ytrue2 |
is a scalar. This is an estimate of the standard deviation between the estimate |
SD.ytrue3 |
is a scalar. This is an estimate of the standard deviation between |
datVariableInfo |
is a data frame that reports information for each variable (column of |
datEstimatesByStratum |
a data frame that will only be output if |
SD.ytrue2ByStratum |
a vector of length equal to the different levels of |
datVariableInfoByStratum |
a list whose components are matrices with variable information. Each list component reports the variable information in the stratum specified by unique(Strata). |
Steve Horvath
Klemera P, Doubal S (2006) A new approach to the concept and computation of biological age. Mechanisms of Ageing and Development 127 (2006) 240-248
Choa IH, Parka KS, Limb CJ (2010) An Empirical Comparative Study on Validation of Biological Age Estimation Algorithms with an Application of Work Ability Index. Mechanisms of Ageing and Development Volume 131, Issue 2, February 2010, Pages 69-78
# observed trait y=rnorm(1000,mean=50,sd=20) # unobserved, true trait yTRUE =y +rnorm(100,sd=10) # now we simulate surrogate markers around the true trait datX=simulateModule(yTRUE,nGenes=20, minCor=.4,maxCor=.9,geneMeans=rnorm(20,50,30) ) True1=TrueTrait(datX=datX,y=y) datTrue=True1$datEstimates par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:dim(datTrue)[[2]] ){ meanAbsDev= mean(abs(yTRUE-datTrue[,i])) verboseScatterplot(datTrue[,i],yTRUE,xlab=names(datTrue)[i], main=paste(i, "MeanAbsDev=", signif(meanAbsDev,3))); abline(0,1) } #compare the estimated standard deviation of y.true2 True1[[2]] # with the true SD sqrt(var(yTRUE-datTrue$y.true2)) #compare the estimated standard deviation of y.true3 True1[[3]] # with the true SD sqrt(var(yTRUE-datTrue$y.true3))
# observed trait y=rnorm(1000,mean=50,sd=20) # unobserved, true trait yTRUE =y +rnorm(100,sd=10) # now we simulate surrogate markers around the true trait datX=simulateModule(yTRUE,nGenes=20, minCor=.4,maxCor=.9,geneMeans=rnorm(20,50,30) ) True1=TrueTrait(datX=datX,y=y) datTrue=True1$datEstimates par(mfrow=c(2,2)) for (i in 1:dim(datTrue)[[2]] ){ meanAbsDev= mean(abs(yTRUE-datTrue[,i])) verboseScatterplot(datTrue[,i],yTRUE,xlab=names(datTrue)[i], main=paste(i, "MeanAbsDev=", signif(meanAbsDev,3))); abline(0,1) } #compare the estimated standard deviation of y.true2 True1[[2]] # with the true SD sqrt(var(yTRUE-datTrue$y.true2)) #compare the estimated standard deviation of y.true3 True1[[3]] # with the true SD sqrt(var(yTRUE-datTrue$y.true3))
Calculation of the unsigned network adjacency from expression data. The restricted set of parameters for this function should allow a faster and less memory-hungry calculation.
unsignedAdjacency( datExpr, datExpr2 = NULL, power = 6, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
unsignedAdjacency( datExpr, datExpr2 = NULL, power = 6, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'")
datExpr |
expression data. A data frame in which columns are genes and rows ar samples. Missing values are ignored. |
datExpr2 |
optional specification of a second set of expression data. See details. |
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to be used for the adjacency
calculation. Recommended choices are |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to be passed to the correlation function |
The correlation function will be called with arguments datExpr, datExpr2
plus any extra
arguments given in corOptions
. If datExpr2
is NULL
,
the standard correlation functions will calculate the corelation of columns in datExpr
.
Adjacency matrix of dimensions n*n
, where n
is the number of genes in datExpr
.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
This function measures list enrichment between inputted lists of genes and files containing user-defined lists of genes. Significant enrichment is measured using a hypergeometric test. A pre-made collection of brain-related lists can also be loaded. The function writes the significant enrichments to a file, but also returns all overlapping genes across all comparisons.
userListEnrichment( geneR, labelR, fnIn = NULL, catNmIn = fnIn, nameOut = "enrichment.csv", useBrainLists = FALSE, useBloodAtlases = FALSE, omitCategories = "grey", outputCorrectedPvalues = TRUE, useStemCellLists = FALSE, outputGenes = FALSE, minGenesInCategory = 1, useBrainRegionMarkers = FALSE, useImmunePathwayLists = FALSE, usePalazzoloWang = FALSE)
userListEnrichment( geneR, labelR, fnIn = NULL, catNmIn = fnIn, nameOut = "enrichment.csv", useBrainLists = FALSE, useBloodAtlases = FALSE, omitCategories = "grey", outputCorrectedPvalues = TRUE, useStemCellLists = FALSE, outputGenes = FALSE, minGenesInCategory = 1, useBrainRegionMarkers = FALSE, useImmunePathwayLists = FALSE, usePalazzoloWang = FALSE)
geneR |
A vector of gene (or other) identifiers. This vector should include ALL genes in your analysis (i.e., the genes correspoding to your labeled lists AND the remaining background reference genes). |
labelR |
A vector of labels (for example, module assignments) corresponding to the geneR list. NOTE: For all background reference genes that have no corresponding label, use the label "background" (or any label included in the omitCategories parameter). |
fnIn |
A vector of file names containing user-defined lists. These files must be in one of three specific formats (see details section). The default (NULL) may only be used if one of the "use_____" parameters is TRUE. |
catNmIn |
A vector of category names corresponding to each fnIn. This name will be appended to each overlap corresponding to that filename. The default sets the category names as the corresponding file names. |
nameOut |
Name of the file where the output enrichment information will be written. (Note that this file includes only a subset of
what is returned by the function.) If |
useBrainLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of brain-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
useBloodAtlases |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of blood-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
omitCategories |
Any labelR entries corresponding to these categories will be ignored. The default ("grey") will ignore unassigned genes in a standard WGCNA network. |
outputCorrectedPvalues |
If TRUE (default) only pvalues that are significant after correcting for multiple comparisons (using Bonferroni method) will be outputted to nameOut. Otherwise the uncorrected p-values will be outputted to the file. Note that both sets of p-values for all comparisons are reported in the returned "pValues" parameter. |
useStemCellLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of stem cell (SC)-derived enrichment lists will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for related references. |
outputGenes |
If TRUE, will output a list of all genes in each returned category, as well as a count of the number of genes in each category. The default is FALSE. |
minGenesInCategory |
Will omit all significant categories with fewer than minGenesInCategory genes (default is 1). |
useBrainRegionMarkers |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of enrichment lists for human brain regions will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. These lists are derived from data from the Allen Human Brain Atlas (https://human.brain-map.org/). See references section for more details. |
useImmunePathwayLists |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of enrichment lists for immune system pathways will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. These lists are derived from the lab of Daniel R Saloman. See references section for more details. |
usePalazzoloWang |
If TRUE, a pre-made set of enrichment lists compiled by Mike Palazzolo and Jim Wang from CHDI will be added to any user-defined lists for enrichment comparison. The default is FALSE. See references section for more details. |
User-inputted files for fnIn can be in one of three formats:
1) Text files (must end in ".txt") with one list per file, where the first line is the list descriptor and the remaining lines are gene names corresponding to that list, with one gene per line. For example Ribosome RPS4 RPS8 ...
2) Gene / category files (must be csv files), where the first line is the column headers corresponding to Genes and Lists, and the remaining lines correspond to the genes in each list, for any number of genes and lists. For example: Gene, Category RPS4, Ribosome RPS8, Ribosome ... NDUF1, Mitohcondria NDUF3, Mitochondria ... MAPT, AlzheimersDisease PSEN1, AlzheimersDisease PSEN2, AlzheimersDisease ...
3) Module membership (kME) table in csv format. Currently, the module assignment is the only thing that is used, so as long as the Gene column is 2nd and the Module column is 3rd, it doesn't matter what is in the other columns. For example, PSID, Gene, Module, <other columns> <psid>, RPS4, blue, <other columns> <psid>, NDUF1, red, <other columns> <psid>, RPS8, blue, <other columns> <psid>, NDUF3, red, <other columns> <psid>, MAPT, green, <other columns> ...
pValues |
A data frame showing, for each comparison, the input category, user defined category, type, the number of overlapping genes and both the uncorrected and Bonferroni corrected p-values for every pair of list overlaps tested. |
ovGenes |
A list of character vectors corresponding to the overlapping genes for every pair of list overlaps tested. Specific overlaps can be found by typing <variableName>$ovGenes$'<labelR> – <comparisonCategory>'. See example below. |
sigOverlaps |
Identical information that is written to nameOut. A data frame ith columns giving the input category, user defined category, type, and P-values (corrected or uncorrected, depending on outputCorrectedPvalues) corresponding to all significant enrichments. |
Jeremy Miller
The primary reference for this function is: Miller JA, Cai C, Langfelder P, Geschwind DH, Kurian SM, Salomon DR, Horvath S. (2011) Strategies for aggregating gene expression data: the collapseRows R function. BMC Bioinformatics 12:322.
If you have any suggestions for lists to add to this function, please e-mail Jeremy Miller at [email protected]
————————————- References for the pre-defined brain lists (useBrainLists=TRUE, in alphabetical order by category descriptor) are as follows:
ABA ==> Cell type markers from: Lein ES, et al. (2007) Genome-wide atlas of gene expression in the adult mouse brain. Nature 445:168-176.
ADvsCT_inCA1 ==> Lists of genes found to be increasing or decreasing with Alzheimer's disease in 3 studies: 1. Blalock => Blalock E, Geddes J, Chen K, Porter N, Markesbery W, Landfield P (2004) Incipient Alzheimer's disease: microarray correlation analyses reveal major transcriptional and tumor suppressor responses. PNAS 101:2173-2178. 2. Colangelo => Colangelo V, Schurr J, Ball M, Pelaez R, Bazan N, Lukiw W (2002) Gene expression profiling of 12633 genes in Alzheimer hippocampal CA1: transcription and neurotrophic factor down-regulation and up-regulation of apoptotic and pro-inflammatory signaling. J Neurosci Res 70:462-473. 3. Liang => Liang WS, et al (2008) Altered neuronal gene expression in brain regions differentially affected by Alzheimer's disease: a reference data set. Physiological genomics 33:240-56.
Bayes ==> Postsynaptic Density Proteins from: Bayes A, et al. (2011) Characterization of the proteome, diseases and evolution of the human postsynaptic density. Nat Neurosci. 14(1):19-21.
Blalock_AD ==> Modules from a network using the data from: Blalock E, Geddes J, Chen K, Porter N, Markesbery W, Landfield P (2004) Incipient Alzheimer's disease: microarray correlation analyses reveal major transcriptional and tumor suppressor responses. PNAS 101:2173-2178.
CA1vsCA3 ==> Lists of genes enriched in CA1 and CA3 relative to other each and to other areas of the brain, from several studies: 1. Ginsberg => Ginsberg SD, Che S (2005) Expression profile analysis within the human hippocampus: comparison of CA1 and CA3 pyramidal neurons. J Comp Neurol 487:107-118. 2. Lein => Lein E, Zhao X, Gage F (2004) Defining a molecular atlas of the hippocampus using DNA microarrays and high-throughput in situ hybridization. J Neurosci 24:3879-3889. 3. Newrzella => Newrzella D, et al (2007) The functional genome of CA1 and CA3 neurons under native conditions and in response to ischemia. BMC Genomics 8:370. 4. Torres => Torres-Munoz JE, Van Waveren C, Keegan MG, Bookman RJ, Petito CK (2004) Gene expression profiles in microdissected neurons from human hippocampal subregions. Brain Res Mol Brain Res 127:105-114. 5. GorLorT => In either Ginsberg or Lein or Torres list.
Cahoy ==> Definite (10+ fold) and probable (1.5+ fold) enrichment from: Cahoy JD, et al. (2008) A transcriptome database for astrocytes, neurons, and oligodendrocytes: A new resource for understanding brain development and function. J Neurosci 28:264-278.
CTX ==> Modules from the CTX (cortex) network from: Oldham MC, et al. (2008) Functional organization of the transcriptome in human brain. Nat Neurosci 11:1271-1282.
DiseaseGenes ==> Probable (C or better rating as of 16 Mar 2011) and possible (all genes in database as of ~2008) genetics-based disease genes from: http://www.alzforum.org/
EarlyAD ==> Genes whose expression is related to cognitive markers of early Alzheimer's disease vs. non-demented controls with AD pathology, from: Parachikova, A., et al (2007) Inflammatory changes parallel the early stages of Alzheimer disease. Neurobiology of Aging 28:1821-1833.
HumanChimp ==> Modules showing region-specificity in both human and chimp from: Oldham MC, Horvath S, Geschwind DH (2006) Conservation and evolution of gene coexpression networks in human and chimpanzee brains. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 103: 17973-17978.
HumanMeta ==> Modules from the human network from: Miller J, Horvath S, Geschwind D (2010) Divergence of human and mouse brain transcriptome highlights Alzheimer disease pathways. Proc Natl Acad Sci 107:12698-12703.
JAXdiseaseGene ==> Genes where mutations in mouse and/or human are known to cause any disease. WARNING: this list represents an oversimplification of data! This list was created from the Jackson Laboratory: Bult CJ, Eppig JT, Kadin JA, Richardson JE, Blake JA; Mouse Genome Database Group (2008) The Mouse Genome Database (MGD): Mouse biology and model systems. Nucleic Acids Res 36 (database issue):D724-D728.
Lu_Aging ==> Modules from a network using the data from: Lu T, Pan Y, Kao S-Y, Li C, Kohane I, Chan J, Yankner B (2004) Gene regulation and DNA damage in the ageing human brain. Nature 429:883-891.
MicroglialMarkers ==> Markers for microglia and macrophages from several studies: 1. GSE772 => Gan L, et al. (2004) Identification of cathepsin B as a mediator of neuronal death induced by Abeta-activated microglial cells using a functional genomics approach. J Biol Chem 279:5565-5572. 2. GSE1910 => Albright AV, Gonzalez-Scarano F (2004) Microarray analysis of activated mixed glial (microglia) and monocyte-derived macrophage gene expression. J Neuroimmunol 157:27-38. 3. AitGhezala => Ait-Ghezala G, Mathura VS, Laporte V, Quadros A, Paris D, Patel N, et al. Genomic regulation after CD40 stimulation in microglia: relevance to Alzheimer's disease. Brain Res Mol Brain Res 2005;140(1-2):73-85. 4. 3treatments_Thomas => Thomas, DM, Francescutti-Verbeem, DM, Kuhn, DM (2006) Gene expression profile of activated microglia under conditions associated with dopamine neuronal damage. The FASEB Journal 20:515-517.
MitochondrialType ==> Mitochondrial genes from the somatic vs. synaptic fraction of mouse cells from: Winden KD, et al. (2009) The organization of the transcriptional network in specific neuronal classes. Mol Syst Biol 5:291.
MO ==> Markers for many different things provided to my by Mike Oldham. These were originally from several sources: 1. 2+_26Mar08 => Genetics-based disease genes in two or more studies from http://www.alzforum.org/ (compiled by Mike Oldham). 2. Bachoo => Bachoo, R.M. et al. (2004) Molecular diversity of astrocytes with implications for neurological disorders. PNAS 101, 8384-8389. 3. Foster => Foster, LJ, de Hoog, CL, Zhang, Y, Zhang, Y, Xie, X, Mootha, VK, Mann, M. (2006) A Mammalian Organelle Map by Protein Correlation Profiling. Cell 125(1): 187-199. 4. Morciano => Morciano, M. et al. Immunoisolation of two synaptic vesicle pools from synaptosomes: a proteomics analysis. J. Neurochem. 95, 1732-1745 (2005). 5. Sugino => Sugino, K. et al. Molecular taxonomy of major neuronal classes in the adult mouse forebrain. Nat. Neurosci. 9, 99-107 (2006).
MouseMeta ==> Modules from the mouse network from: Miller J, Horvath S, Geschwind D (2010) Divergence of human and mouse brain transcriptome highlights Alzheimer disease pathways. Proc Natl Acad Sci 107:12698-12703.
Sugino/Winden ==> Conservative list of genes in modules from the network from: Winden K, Oldham M, Mirnics K, Ebert P, Swan C, Levitt P, Rubenstein J, Horvath S, Geschwind D (2009). The organization of the transcriptional network in specific neuronal classes. Molecular systems biology 5. NOTE: Original data came from this neuronal-cell-type-selection experiment in mouse: Sugino K, Hempel C, Miller M, Hattox A, Shapiro P, Wu C, Huang J, Nelson S (2006). Molecular taxonomy of major neuronal classes in the adult mouse forebrain. Nat Neurosci 9:99-107
Voineagu ==> Several Autism-related gene categories from: Voineagu I, Wang X, Johnston P, Lowe JK, Tian Y, Horvath S, Mill J, Cantor RM, Blencowe BJ, Geschwind DH. (2011). Transcriptomic analysis of autistic brain reveals convergent molecular pathology. Nature 474(7351):380-4
————————————- References for the pre-defined blood atlases (useBloodAtlases=TRUE, in alphabetical order by category descriptor) are as follows:
Blood(composite) ==> Lists for blood cell types with this label are made from combining marker genes from the following three publications: 1. Abbas AB, Baldwin D, Ma Y, Ouyang W, Gurney A, et al. (2005). Immune response in silico (IRIS): immune-specific genes identified from a compendium of microarray expression data. Genes Immun. 6(4):319-31. 2. Grigoryev YA, Kurian SM, Avnur Z, Borie D, Deng J, et al. (2010). Deconvoluting post-transplant immunity: cell subset-specific mapping reveals pathways for activation and expansion of memory T, monocytes and B cells. PLoS One. 5(10):e13358. 3. Watkins NA, Gusnanto A, de Bono B, De S, Miranda-Saavedra D, et al. (2009). A HaemAtlas: characterizing gene expression in differentiated human blood cells. Blood. 113(19):e1-9.
Gnatenko ==> Top 50 marker genes for platelets from: Gnatenko DV, et al. (2009) Transcript profiling of human platelets using microarray and serial analysis of gene expression (SAGE). Methods Mol Biol. 496:245-72.
Gnatenko2 ==> Platelet-specific genes on a custom microarray from: Gnatenko DV, et al. (2010) Class prediction models of thrombocytosis using genetic biomarkers. Blood. 115(1):7-14.
Kabanova ==> Red blood cell markers from: Kabanova S, et al. (2009) Gene expression analysis of human red blood cells. Int J Med Sci. 6(4):156-9.
Whitney ==> Genes corresponding to individual variation in blood from: Whitney AR, et al. (2003) Individuality and variation in gene expression patterns in human blood. PNAS. 100(4):1896-1901.
————————————- References for the pre-defined stem cell (SC) lists (useStemCellLists=TRUE, in alphabetical order by category descriptor) are as follows:
Cui ==> genes differentiating erythrocyte precursors (CD36+ cells) from multipotent human primary hematopoietic stem cells/progenitor cells (CD133+ cells), from: Cui K, Zang C, Roh TY, Schones DE, Childs RW, Peng W, Zhao K. (2009). Chromatin signatures in multipotent human hematopoietic stem cells indicate the fate of bivalent genes during differentiation. Cell Stem Cell 4:80-93
Lee ==> gene lists related to Polycomb proteins in human embryonic SCs, from (a highly-cited paper!): Lee TI, Jenner RG, Boyer LA, Guenther MG, Levine SS, Kumar RM, Chevalier B, Johnstone SE, Cole MF, Isono K, et al. (2006) Control of developmental regulators by polycomb in human embryonic stem cells. Cell 125:301-313
————————————- References and more information for the pre-defined human brain region lists (useBrainRegionMarkers=TRUE):
HBA ==> Hawrylycz MJ, Lein ES, Guillozet-Bongaarts AL, Shen EH, Ng L, Miller JA, et al. (2012) An Anatomically Comprehensive Atlas of the Adult Human Brain Transcriptome. Nature (in press) Three categories of marker genes are presented: 1. globalMarker(top200) = top 200 global marker genes for 22 large brain structures. Genes are ranked based on fold change enrichment (expression in region vs. expression in rest of brain) and the ranks are averaged between brains 2001 and 2002 (human.brain-map.org). 2. localMarker(top200) = top 200 local marker genes for 90 large brain structures. Same as 1, except fold change is defined as expression in region vs. expression in larger region (format: <region>_IN_<largerRegion>). For example, enrichment in CA1 is relative to other subcompartments of the hippocampus. 3. localMarker(FC>2) = same as #2, but only local marker genes with fold change > 2 in both brains are included. Regions with <10 marker genes are omitted.
————————————- More information for the pre-defined immune pathways lists (useImmunePathwayLists=TRUE):
ImmunePathway ==> These lists were created by Brian Modena (a member of Daniel R Salomon's lab at Scripps Research Institute), with input from Sunil M Kurian and Dr. Salomon, using Ingenuity, WikiPathways and literature search to assemble them. They reflect knowledge-based immune pathways and were in part informed by Dr. Salomon and colleague's work in expression profiling of biopsies and peripheral blood but not in some highly organized process. These lists are not from any particular publication, but are culled to include only genes of reasonably high confidence.
————————————- References for the pre-defined lists from CHDI (usePalazzoloWang=TRUE, in alphabetical order by category descriptor) are as follows:
Biocyc NCBI Biosystems ==> Several gene sets from the "Biocyc" component of NCBI Biosystems: Geer LY, Marchler-Bauer A, Geer RC, Han L, He J, He S, Liu C, Shi W, Bryant SH (2010) The NCBI BioSystems database. Nucleic Acids Res. 38(Database issue):D492-6.
Kegg NCBI Biosystems ==> Several gene sets from the "Kegg" component of NCBI Biosystems: Geer LY et al 2010 (full citation above).
Palazzolo and Wang ==> These gene sets were compiled from a variety of sources by Mike Palazzolo and Jim Wang at CHDI.
Pathway Interaction Database NCBI Biosystems ==> Several gene sets from the "Pathway Interaction Database" component of NCBI Biosystems: Geer LY et al 2010 (full citation above).
PMID 17500595 Kaltenbach 2007 ==> Several gene sets from: Kaltenbach LS, Romero E, Becklin RR, Chettier R, Bell R, Phansalkar A, et al. (2007) Huntingtin interacting proteins are genetic modifiers of neurodegeneration. PLoS Genet. 3(5):e82
PMID 22348130 Schaefer 2012 ==> Several gene sets from: Schaefer MH, Fontaine JF, Vinayagam A, Porras P, Wanker EE, Andrade-Navarro MA (2012) HIPPIE: Integrating protein interaction networks with experiment based quality scores. PLoS One. 7(2):e31826
PMID 22556411 Culver 2012 ==> Several gene sets from: Culver BP, Savas JN, Park SK, Choi JH, Zheng S, Zeitlin SO, Yates JR 3rd, Tanese N. (2012) Proteomic analysis of wild-type and mutant huntingtin-associated proteins in mouse brains identifies unique interactions and involvement in protein synthesis. J Biol Chem. 287(26):21599-614
PMID 22578497 Cajigas 2012 ==> Several gene sets from: Cajigas IJ, Tushev G, Will TJ, tom Dieck S, Fuerst N, Schuman EM. (2012) The local transcriptome in the synaptic neuropil revealed by deep sequencing and high-resolution imaging. Neuron. 74(3):453-66
Reactome NCBI Biosystems ==> Several gene sets from the "Reactome" component of NCBI Biosystems: Geer LY et al 2010 (full citation above).
Wiki Pathways NCBI Biosystems ==> Several gene sets from the "Wiki Pathways" component of NCBI Biosystems: Geer LY et al 2010 (full citation above).
Yang ==> These gene sets were compiled from a variety of sources by Mike Palazzolo and Jim Wang at CHDI.
# Example: first, read in some gene names and split them into categories data(BrainLists); listGenes = unique(as.character(BrainLists[,1])) set.seed(100) geneR = sort(sample(listGenes,2000)) categories = sort(rep(standardColors(10),200)) categories[sample(1:2000,200)] = "grey" file1 = tempfile(); file2 = tempfile(); write(c("TESTLIST1",geneR[300:400], sep="\n"), file1) write(c("TESTLIST2",geneR[800:1000],sep="\n"), file2) # Now run the function! testResults = userListEnrichment( geneR, labelR=categories, fnIn=c(file1, file2), catNmIn=c("TEST1","TEST2"), nameOut = NULL, useBrainLists=TRUE, omitCategories ="grey") # To see a list of all significant enrichments type: testResults$sigOverlaps # To see all of the overlapping genes between two categories #(whether or not the p-value is significant), type #restResults$ovGenes$'<labelR> -- <comparisonCategory>'. For example: testResults$ovGenes$"black -- TESTLIST1__TEST1" testResults$ovGenes$"red -- salmon_M12_Ribosome__HumanMeta" # More detailed overlap information is in the pValue output. For example: head(testResults$pValue) # Clean up the temporary files unlink(file1); unlink(file2)
# Example: first, read in some gene names and split them into categories data(BrainLists); listGenes = unique(as.character(BrainLists[,1])) set.seed(100) geneR = sort(sample(listGenes,2000)) categories = sort(rep(standardColors(10),200)) categories[sample(1:2000,200)] = "grey" file1 = tempfile(); file2 = tempfile(); write(c("TESTLIST1",geneR[300:400], sep="\n"), file1) write(c("TESTLIST2",geneR[800:1000],sep="\n"), file2) # Now run the function! testResults = userListEnrichment( geneR, labelR=categories, fnIn=c(file1, file2), catNmIn=c("TEST1","TEST2"), nameOut = NULL, useBrainLists=TRUE, omitCategories ="grey") # To see a list of all significant enrichments type: testResults$sigOverlaps # To see all of the overlapping genes between two categories #(whether or not the p-value is significant), type #restResults$ovGenes$'<labelR> -- <comparisonCategory>'. For example: testResults$ovGenes$"black -- TESTLIST1__TEST1" testResults$ovGenes$"red -- salmon_M12_Ribosome__HumanMeta" # More detailed overlap information is in the pValue output. For example: head(testResults$pValue) # Clean up the temporary files unlink(file1); unlink(file2)
A convenient function to turn a matrix into a vector of non-redundant components. If the matrix is non-symmetric, returns a vector containing all entries of the matrix. If the matrix is symmetric, only returns the upper triangle and optionally the diagonal.
vectorizeMatrix(M, diag = FALSE)
vectorizeMatrix(M, diag = FALSE)
M |
the matrix or data frame to be vectorized. |
diag |
logical: should the diagonal be included in the output? |
A vector containing the non-redundant entries of the input matrix.
Steve Horvath
This function calculates topological overlap of a small set of vectors with respect to a whole data set.
vectorTOM( datExpr, vect, subtract1 = FALSE, blockSize = 2000, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
vectorTOM( datExpr, vect, subtract1 = FALSE, blockSize = 2000, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", networkType = "unsigned", power = 6, verbose = 1, indent = 0)
datExpr |
a data frame containing the expression data of the whole set, with rows corresponding to samples and columns to genes. |
vect |
a single vector or a matrix-like object containing vectors whose topological overlap is to be calculated. |
subtract1 |
logical: should calculation be corrected for self-correlation? Set this to
|
blockSize |
maximum block size for correlation calculations. Only important if |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to be used for the adjacency
calculation. Recommended choices are |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to be passed to the correlation function. |
networkType |
character string giving network type. Allowed values are (unique abbreviations of)
|
power |
soft-thresholding power for network construction. |
verbose |
integer level of verbosity. Zero means silent, higher values make the output progressively more and more verbose. |
indent |
indentation for diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
Topological overlap can be viewed as the normalized count of shared neighbors encoded in an adjacency
matrix. In this case, the adjacency matrix is calculated between the columns of vect
and
datExpr
and the topological overlap of vectors in vect
measures the number of shared
neighbors in datExpr
that vectors of vect
share.
A matrix of dimensions n*n
, where n
is the number of columns in vect
.
Peter Langfelder
Bin Zhang and Steve Horvath (2005) "A General Framework for Weighted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis", Statistical Applications in Genetics and Molecular Biology: Vol. 4: No. 1, Article 17
TOMsimilarity
for standard calculation of topological overlap.
Produce a barplot with error bars, annotated by Kruskal-Wallis or ANOVA p-value.
verboseBarplot(x, g, main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, color = "grey", numberStandardErrors = 1, KruskalTest = TRUE, AnovaTest = FALSE, two.sided = TRUE, addCellCounts=FALSE, horiz = FALSE, ylim = NULL, ..., addScatterplot = FALSE, pt.cex = 0.8, pch = 21, pt.col = "blue", pt.bg = "skyblue", randomSeed = 31425, jitter = 0.6, pointLabels = NULL, label.cex = 0.8, label.offs = 0.06, adjustYLim = TRUE)
verboseBarplot(x, g, main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, color = "grey", numberStandardErrors = 1, KruskalTest = TRUE, AnovaTest = FALSE, two.sided = TRUE, addCellCounts=FALSE, horiz = FALSE, ylim = NULL, ..., addScatterplot = FALSE, pt.cex = 0.8, pch = 21, pt.col = "blue", pt.bg = "skyblue", randomSeed = 31425, jitter = 0.6, pointLabels = NULL, label.cex = 0.8, label.offs = 0.06, adjustYLim = TRUE)
x |
numerical or binary vector of data whose group means are to be plotted |
g |
a factor or a an object coercible to a factor giving the groups whose means are to be calculated. |
main |
main title for the plot. |
xlab |
label for the x-axis. |
ylab |
label for the y-axis. |
cex |
character expansion factor for plot annotations. |
cex.axis |
character expansion factor for axis annotations. |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for axis labels. |
cex.main |
character expansion factor for the main title. |
color |
a vector giving the colors of the bars in the barplot. |
numberStandardErrors |
size of the error bars in terms of standard errors. See details. |
KruskalTest |
logical: should Kruskal-Wallis test be performed? See details. |
AnovaTest |
logical: should ANOVA be performed? See details. |
two.sided |
logical: should the printed p-value be two-sided? See details. |
addCellCounts |
logical: should counts be printed above each bar? |
horiz |
logical: should the bars be drawn horizontally? |
ylim |
optional specification of the limits for the y axis. If not given, they will be determined automatically. |
... |
other parameters to function |
addScatterplot |
logical: should a scatterplot of the data be overlaid? |
pt.cex |
character expansion factor for the points. |
pch |
shape code for the points. |
pt.col |
color for the points. |
pt.bg |
background color for the points. |
randomSeed |
integer random seed to make plots reproducible. |
jitter |
amount of random jitter to add to the position of the points along the x axis. |
pointLabels |
Optional text labels for the points displayed using the scatterplot. If given, should be a character
vector of the same length as x. See |
label.cex |
Character expansion (size) factor for |
label.offs |
Offset for |
adjustYLim |
logical: should the limits of the y axis be set so as to accomodate the individual points?
The adjustment is only carried out if input |
This function creates a barplot of a numeric variable (input x
) across the levels of a grouping
variable (input g
). The height of the bars equals the mean value of x
across the
observations with a given level of g
. By default, the barplot also shows plus/minus one standard
error. If you want only plus one standard error (not minus) choose two.sided=TRUE
. But the number
of standard errors can be determined with the input numberStandardErrors
. For example, if you want
a 95% confidence interval around the mean, choose numberStandardErrors=2
. If you don't want any
standard errors set numberStandardErrors=-1
. The function also outputs the p-value of a Kruskal
Wallis test (Fisher test for binary input data),
which is a non-parametric multi group comparison test. Alternatively, one can use Analysis
of Variance (Anova) to compute a p-value by setting AnovaTest=TRUE
. Anova is a generalization of
the Student t-test to multiple groups. In case of two groups, the Anova p-value equals the Student t-test
p-value. Anova should only be used if x
follows a normal distribution. Anova also assumes
homoscedasticity (equal variances). The Kruskal Wallis test is often advantageous since it makes no
distributional assumptions. Since the Kruskal Wallis test is based on the ranks of x
, it is more
robust with regard to outliers. All p-values are two-sided.
None.
Steve Horvath, with contributions from Zhijin (Jean) Wu and Peter Langfelder
group=sample(c(1,2),100,replace=TRUE) height=rnorm(100,mean=group) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) verboseBarplot(height,group, main="1 SE, Kruskal Test") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2, main="2 SE, Kruskal Test") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2,AnovaTest=TRUE, main="2 SE, Anova") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2,AnovaTest=TRUE, main="2 SE, Anova, only plus SE", two.sided=FALSE)
group=sample(c(1,2),100,replace=TRUE) height=rnorm(100,mean=group) par(mfrow=c(2,2)) verboseBarplot(height,group, main="1 SE, Kruskal Test") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2, main="2 SE, Kruskal Test") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2,AnovaTest=TRUE, main="2 SE, Anova") verboseBarplot(height,group,numberStandardErrors=2,AnovaTest=TRUE, main="2 SE, Anova, only plus SE", two.sided=FALSE)
Plot a boxplot annotated by the Kruskal-Wallis p-value. Uses the function boxplot
for the actual drawing.
verboseBoxplot(x, g, main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, notch = TRUE, varwidth = TRUE, ..., addScatterplot = FALSE, pt.cex = 0.8, pch = 21, pt.col = "blue", pt.bg = "skyblue", randomSeed = 31425, jitter = 0.6)
verboseBoxplot(x, g, main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, notch = TRUE, varwidth = TRUE, ..., addScatterplot = FALSE, pt.cex = 0.8, pch = 21, pt.col = "blue", pt.bg = "skyblue", randomSeed = 31425, jitter = 0.6)
x |
numerical vector of data whose group means are to be plotted |
g |
a factor or a an object coercible to a factor giving the groups that will go into each box. |
main |
main title for the plot. |
xlab |
label for the x-axis. |
ylab |
label for the y-axis. |
cex |
character expansion factor for plot annotations. |
cex.axis |
character expansion factor for axis annotations. |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for axis labels. |
cex.main |
character expansion factor for the main title. |
notch |
logical: should the notches be drawn? See |
varwidth |
logical: if |
... |
other arguments to the function |
addScatterplot |
logical: should a scatterplot of the data be overlaid? |
pt.cex |
character expansion factor for the points. |
pch |
shape code for the points. |
pt.col |
color for the points. |
pt.bg |
background color for the points. |
randomSeed |
integer random seed to make plots reproducible. |
jitter |
amount of random jitter to add to the position of the points along the x axis. |
Returns the value returned by the function boxplot
.
Steve Horvath, with contributions from Zhijin (Jean) Wu and Peter Langfelder
Produce a scatterplot that shows density with color and is annotated by the correlation, MSE, and regression line.
verboseIplot( x, y, xlim = NA, ylim = NA, nBinsX = 150, nBinsY = 150, ztransf = function(x) {x}, gamma = 1, sample = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, abline = FALSE, abline.color = 1, abline.lty = 1, corLabel = corFnc, showMSE = TRUE, ...)
verboseIplot( x, y, xlim = NA, ylim = NA, nBinsX = 150, nBinsY = 150, ztransf = function(x) {x}, gamma = 1, sample = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, abline = FALSE, abline.color = 1, abline.lty = 1, corLabel = corFnc, showMSE = TRUE, ...)
x |
numerical vector to be plotted along the x axis. |
y |
numerical vector to be plotted along the y axis. |
xlim |
define the range in x axis |
ylim |
define the range in y axis |
nBinsX |
number of bins along the x axis |
nBinsY |
number of bins along the y axis |
ztransf |
Function to transform the number of counts per pixel, which will be mapped by the function in colramp to well defined colors. The user has to make sure that the transformed density lies in the range [0,zmax], where zmax is any positive number (>=2). |
gamma |
color correction power |
sample |
either a number of points to be sampled or a vector of indices input |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to annotate the plot. |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to the correlation function. |
main |
main title for the plot. |
xlab |
label for the x-axis. |
ylab |
label for the y-axis. |
cex |
character expansion factor for plot annotations. |
cex.axis |
character expansion factor for axis annotations. |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for axis labels. |
cex.main |
character expansion factor for the main title. |
abline |
logical: should the linear regression fit line be plotted? |
abline.color |
color specification for the fit line. |
abline.lty |
line type for the fit line. |
corLabel |
character string to be used as the label for the correlation value printed in the main title. |
showMSE |
logical: should the MSE be added to the main title? |
... |
other arguments to the function plot. |
Irrespective of the specified correlation function, the MSE is always calculated based on the residuals of a linear model.
If sample above is given, the indices of the plotted points are returned invisibly.
This funtion is based on verboseScatterplot (Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder), iplot (Andreas Ruckstuhl, Rene Locher) and greenWhiteRed(Peter Langfelder )
Chaochao Cai, Steve Horvath
image for more parameters
Produce a scatterplot annotated by the correlation, p-value, and regression line.
verboseScatterplot(x, y, sample = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, abline = FALSE, abline.color = 1, abline.lty = 1, corLabel = corFnc, displayAsZero = 1e-5, col = 1, bg = 0, pch = 1, lmFnc = lm, plotPriority = NULL, showPValue = TRUE, ...)
verboseScatterplot(x, y, sample = NULL, corFnc = "cor", corOptions = "use = 'p'", main = "", xlab = NA, ylab = NA, cex = 1, cex.axis = 1.5, cex.lab = 1.5, cex.main = 1.5, abline = FALSE, abline.color = 1, abline.lty = 1, corLabel = corFnc, displayAsZero = 1e-5, col = 1, bg = 0, pch = 1, lmFnc = lm, plotPriority = NULL, showPValue = TRUE, ...)
x |
numerical vector to be plotted along the x axis. |
y |
numerical vector to be plotted along the y axis. |
sample |
determines whether |
corFnc |
character string giving the correlation function to annotate the plot. |
corOptions |
character string giving further options to the correlation function. |
main |
main title for the plot. |
xlab |
label for the x-axis. |
ylab |
label for the y-axis. |
cex |
character expansion factor for plot annotations, recycled as necessary. |
cex.axis |
character expansion factor for axis annotations. |
cex.lab |
character expansion factor for axis labels. |
cex.main |
character expansion factor for the main title. |
abline |
logical: should the linear regression fit line be plotted? |
abline.color |
color specification for the fit line. |
abline.lty |
line type for the fit line. |
corLabel |
character string to be used as the label for the correlation value printed in the main title. |
displayAsZero |
Correlations whose absolute value is smaller than this number will be displayed as zero. This can result in a more intuitive display (for example, cor=0 instead of cor=2.6e-17). |
col |
color of the plotted symbols. Recycled as necessary. |
bg |
fill color of the plotted symbols (used for certain symbols). Recycled as necessary. |
pch |
Integer code for plotted symbols (see |
lmFnc |
linear model fit function. Used to calculate the linear model fit line if |
plotPriority |
Optional numeric vector of same length as |
showPValue |
Logical: should the p-value corresponding to the correlation be added to the title? |
... |
other arguments to the function |
Irrespective of the specified correlation function, the p-value is always calculated for pearson correlation.
If sample
above is given, the indices of the plotted points are returned invisibly.
Steve Horvath and Peter Langfelder
plot.default
for standard scatterplots
Predictor based on univariate regression on all or selected given features that pools all predictions using weights derived from the univariate linear models.
votingLinearPredictor( x, y, xtest = NULL, classify = FALSE, CVfold = 0, randomSeed = 12345, assocFnc = "cor", assocOptions = "use = 'p'", featureWeightPowers = NULL, priorWeights = NULL, weighByPrediction = 0, nFeatures.hi = NULL, nFeatures.lo = NULL, dropUnusedDimensions = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
votingLinearPredictor( x, y, xtest = NULL, classify = FALSE, CVfold = 0, randomSeed = 12345, assocFnc = "cor", assocOptions = "use = 'p'", featureWeightPowers = NULL, priorWeights = NULL, weighByPrediction = 0, nFeatures.hi = NULL, nFeatures.lo = NULL, dropUnusedDimensions = TRUE, verbose = 2, indent = 0)
x |
Training features (predictive variables). Each column corresponds to a feature and each row to an observation. |
y |
The response variable. Can be a single vector or a matrix with arbitrary many columns. Number of rows (observations) must equal to the number of rows (observations) in x. |
xtest |
Optional test set data. A matrix of the same number of columns (i.e., features) as |
classify |
Should the response be treated as a categorical variable? Classification really only works with two classes. (The function will run for multiclass problems as well, but the results will be sub-optimal.) |
CVfold |
Optional specification of cross-validation fold. If 0 (the default), no cross-validation is performed. |
randomSeed |
Random seed, used for observation selection for cross-validation. If |
assocFnc |
Function to measure association. Usually a measure of correlation, for example Pearson correlation or
|
assocOptions |
Character string specifying the options to be passed to the association function. |
featureWeightPowers |
Powers to which to raise the result of |
priorWeights |
Prior weights for the features. If given, must be either (1) a vector of the same length as the number of
features (columns in |
weighByPrediction |
(Optional) power to downweigh features that are not well predicted between training and test sets. See details. |
nFeatures.hi |
Optional restriction of the number of features to use. If given, this many features with the highest association
and lowest association (if |
nFeatures.lo |
Optional restriction of the number of lowest (i.e., most negatively) associated features to use.
Only used if |
dropUnusedDimensions |
Logical: should unused dimensions be dropped from the result? |
verbose |
Integer controling how verbose the diagnostic messages should be. Zero means silent. |
indent |
Indentation for the diagnostic messages. Zero means no indentation, each unit adds two spaces. |
The predictor calculates the association of each (selected) feature with the response and uses the
association to calculate the weight of the feature as sign(association) *
(association)^featureWeightPower
. Optionally, this weight is multiplied by priorWeights
. Further, a
feature prediction weight can be used to downweigh features that are not well predicted by other features
(see below).
For classification, the (continuous) result of the above calculation is turned into ordinal values essentially by rounding.
If features exhibit non-trivial correlations among themselves (such as, for example, in gene expression
data), one can attempt to down-weigh features that do not exhibit the same correlation in the test set.
This is done by using essentially the same predictor to predict _features_ from all other features in the
test data (using the training data to train the feature predictor). Because test features are known, the
prediction accuracy can be evaluated. If a feature is predicted badly (meaning the error in the test set is
much larger than the error in the cross-validation prediction in training data),
it may mean that its quality in the
training or test data is low (for example, due to excessive noise or outliers).
Such features can be downweighed using the argument weighByPrediction
. The extra factor is
min(1, (root mean square prediction error in test set)/(root mean square cross-validation prediction error in
the trainig data)^weighByPrediction), that is it is never bigger than 1.
A list with the following components:
predicted |
The back-substitution prediction on the training data. Normally an array of dimensions
(number of observations) x (number of response variables) x length(featureWeightPowers), but unused
are dropped unless |
weightBase |
Absolute value of the associations of each feature with each response. |
variableImportance |
The weight of each feature in the prediction (including the sign). |
predictedTest |
If input |
CVpredicted |
If input |
It makes little practical sense to supply neither xtest
nor CVfold
since the prediction
accuracy on training data will be highly biased.
Peter Langfelder
bicor
for robust correlation that can be used as an association measure